JP2023116834A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To improve performance of a game machine.SOLUTION: When a complete function is operated, a complete signal can be outputted to a lending unit, and the complete signal can be outputted for 10 seconds after operation of the complete function.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 19

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a slot machine (rotary drum type game machine) is known as one of the game machines. As a slot machine of this kind, there is known a point-type slot machine in which a game can be played using points stored in a card without using medals (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2013-56055 A

The problem to be solved by the present invention is to improve the performance as a gaming machine.

The present invention
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to start a predetermined state that stops the progress of the game,
When the predetermined state is started, a predetermined signal can be output to the lending unit side,
A game machine capable of outputting a predetermined signal for a predetermined period after starting a predetermined state.

According to the present invention, performance as a gaming machine can be improved.

FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the front door of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 3 is a front view of the cabinet of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the reel arrangement of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing symbol combinations of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing symbol combinations of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing symbol combinations of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing symbol combinations of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing symbol combinations of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the condition device of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing targets of the internal lottery of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the results of the internal lottery of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the results of the internal lottery of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing contents of messages used for communication between the gaming machine and the rental unit of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing the contents of the gaming machine information notification among the telegrams output from the gaming machine to the lending unit of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing the type of gaming machine among the information included in the gaming machine information notification output by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing gaming machine information included in a telegram when gaming machine performance information is set in the gaming machine information notification output by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing gaming machine information included in a telegram when gaming machine installation information is set in the gaming machine information notification output by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing gaming machine information included in a telegram when hall controller/fraud monitoring information is set among the gaming machine information notifications output by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a basic communication sequence between a gaming machine and a lending unit according to this embodiment. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the activation sequence of the gaming machine and the lending unit according to this embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the activation sequence of the gaming machine and the lending unit according to this embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a counting notification sequence between the gaming machine and the lending unit according to this embodiment. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a lending notification sequence between a gaming machine and a lending unit according to this embodiment. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a recovery sequence from an abnormality in communication between the gaming machine and the lending unit according to this embodiment. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a sequence when a communication error occurs during counting between the gaming machine and the rented unit according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a sequence when a communication error occurs during lending between the gaming machine and the lending unit according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is a flowchart relating to counting control of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart relating to the scoring process of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 30 is a flowchart relating to game machine information management of the game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a transmission pattern of gaming machine information notifications after the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is started for the first time. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a second transmission pattern of hall controller/fraud monitoring information in the gaming machine information notification of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a pattern in which the transmission timings of the hall control/fraud monitoring information and the gaming machine installation information match in the gaming machine information notification of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a pattern in which the transmission timings of the hall controller/fraud monitoring information, the gaming machine installation information, and the gaming machine performance information in the gaming machine information notification of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment coincide. FIG. 35 is a comparative example for explaining the action and effect of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example without. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a preferable example in which the number-of-insertions signal ON and the BB state signal ON are transmitted with hall controller/fraud monitoring information at different timings in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is a comparative example for explaining the action and effect of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example without. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a preferable example in which the number-of-payouts signal ON and the BB status signal ON are transmitted at the same timing with hall controller/fraud monitoring information in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing counting execution flag setting processing of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a time chart relating to the counting process of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a time chart relating to the counting process of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a time chart relating to the counting process of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a time chart relating to the counting process of the gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing the game progress main processing of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing advantageous section end processing of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing <Pattern 1> of advantageous zone clear counter management of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing <Pattern 2> of advantageous zone clear counter management of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing <Pattern 3> of advantageous zone clear counter management of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart relating to reception of a gaming machine lending notification according to the present embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart relating to interrupt processing of the game medium number control means of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart relating to game medal count check processing in interrupt processing of the game medium count control means of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart relating to counting button check processing in the counting control processing of the game medium number control means of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flowchart relating to communication abnormality 2 to 6 check processing in the lending notification reception processing of the game medium number control means of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of the effects of the activation notice notification state and the stop notification state of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart relating to advantageous zone clear counter management (advantageous zone difference number counter) of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart relating to advantageous zone clear counter management (advantageous zone difference number counter) of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

<Explanation of Terms>
"Medals (number of medals)", "game media (number of game media)", "game value", and "points (scores or points)" are synonymous, and are referred to as medals as a concept even if there are no actual medals. There is "Bet", "BET", and "insert" regarding game media are synonymous, and all are acts of betting game media. The "effect selection switch P8W" and the "effect determination switch P8E" may be collectively referred to as "sub-switches". When representing a hexadecimal value, it is described as "0x00" or "00h", and if there is no particular description before or after the number, it is represented in decimal. A "reel" may be referred to as a "rotating drum", and both have the same meaning. The "storage means" may be referred to as "RWM", "RAM", or "storage area", all of which are synonymous. "Giving" used in "giving game media" or "giving points" may be referred to as "payout" and both have the same meaning. The "setting/reset switch" may be referred to as a "setting change switch" or a "reset switch" for each function, but in either case, the same switch is indicated. Note that the "setting change switch" and the "reset switch" may be provided as different switches. The terms "symbol", "piece" and "piece" have the same meaning, and each indicate a symbol area drawn on a reel.

Features (outline) of the gaming machine P according to the present embodiment will be described. Each element will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings.

<Description of Appearance of Gaming Machine P>
First, the basic structure of the gaming machine P according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the gaming machine P, a front door P2 (also called front mask, front door, front panel, door or door) and a cabinet P1 (also called back box or housing) are locked by a hinge structure. The hinge structure is provided on the left side when the game machine P is viewed from the front, and is configured so that the front door P2 can be opened with the left side as an axis. In order to open the front door P2, the door open key is inserted into the cylinder provided on the right side of the game machine P (provided on the right side of the front door P2) when viewed from the front, and the door open key is pushed. By rotating it to the right, it becomes possible to change from the locked state to the unlocked state (unlocked state). Note that the door open error may be canceled by turning the door open key to the left while it is inserted into the cylinder of the front door P2. In addition, the error that can be canceled is not limited to the door open error. Request communication error, game media number control reception abnormality, main control reception abnormality, total score upper limit abnormality, total score threshold reached state, rental device connection abnormality, rental serial number abnormality, rental device communication abnormality 1 (also referred to as "communication abnormality 1") , rental device communication error 2 (also referred to as “communication error 2”), rental device communication error 3 (also referred to as “communication error 3”), rental device communication error 4 (also referred to as “communication error 4”), rental device communication error 5 (also referred to as “communication error 5”), rental device communication error 6 (also referred to as “communication error 6”), etc.) may be included, or all or part thereof.

A door switch is provided in the vicinity of the cylinder on the back surface of the front door P2, and it is possible to determine whether the front door P2 is open by detecting ON or OFF of the door switch.

The door switch can be advanced and retracted by an elastic member such as a spring, and when the front door P2 is closed, the tip of the door switch contacts a door switch receiving portion provided on the cabinet P1, whereby the door switch is pushed in. When the door switch is pushed in, the light is blocked by the optical sensor provided in the door switch, so that the ON state of the door switch is detected and it is determined that the door is closed. .

When the front door P2 is open, the tip of the door switch is not in contact with the door switch receiving portion provided on the cabinet P1, and the door switch protrudes due to the biasing force of an elastic member such as a spring. When the door switch is protruding, the optical sensor provided in the door switch is not shielded from light, so that the door switch is detected to be OFF and the door is determined to be open.

The process of determining whether or not the door is open is performed for each interrupt process by the main control board P15. In the input port reading process in the interrupt process by the main control board P15, the input port corresponding to the door switch is checked to determine whether the door is open or not depending on whether the door switch is ON or OFF. are doing.

The above-described process for determining whether the door is open is not limited to this. good. For example, it may be determined that the door is open by detecting that the door switch is ON, and that the door is closed by detecting that the door switch is OFF. As for the door switch, various sensors such as a proximity sensor may be used to detect the opening and closing of the door. It may be an aspect.

On the front side of the front door P2, there are a start switch P3, a left stop switch P4L, a middle stop switch P4C, a right stop switch P4R (hereinafter collectively referred to as "stop switch P4"), and a MAX bed switch. P5M, 1 bet switch P5O (hereinafter these may be collectively referred to as "bet switch P5"), settlement switch P6, count switch P7 (may be referred to as "count button"), effect selection switch P8W , effect decision switch P8E, etc. are provided. Also, a game medium number display section P9 and a given number display section (not shown) are provided as display sections for informing information about the game. In addition, a display window P10 for making the reels visible and an image display device (image display device P11M, image display device P11S) for increasing interest in the game are provided.

(Start switch P3)
It is a lever-shaped switch, and an arbitrary specified number of game media can be bet (for example, a player can bet (bet) a number of game media arbitrarily selected from 1 to 3 insertion points). is enabled, and the reel starts rotating when operated. Further, when the operation of the start switch P3 can be accepted, the operation part of the start switch P3 or the color of the lamp around it (the lighting color of the LED, or the lighting or extinguishing mode of the LED) is changed or turned on. It suggests that the operation of P3 is acceptable. For example, when the operation of the start switch P3 can be accepted, the red light is turned on, and when the operation of the start switch P3 cannot be accepted, the light is extinguished. The LED may be controlled to be turned on or off by the main control board P15, or may be controlled to be turned on or turned off by the sub-control board P12.

(Stop switch P4)
In this embodiment, the left reel P18L corresponds to the left stop switch P4L, the middle reel P18C corresponds to the middle stop switch P4C, and the right reel P18R corresponds to the right stop switch P4R. In addition, when the operation of the stop switch P4 is acceptable, the operation part of the stop switch P4 or the color of the lamp around it (the lighting color of the LED, or the lighting or extinguishing mode of the LED) is changed or turned on. indicates that the operation is acceptable. For example, when the operation of the stop switch P4 can be accepted, it lights up in blue, and when the operation of the stop switch P4 cannot be accepted, it lights up in red. The LED may be controlled to be turned on or off by the main control board P15, or may be controlled to be turned on or turned off by the sub-control board P12.

(Bet switch P5 (MAX bed switch P5M, 1 bed switch P5O))
A game medium number storage means (also referred to as a total score storage area) provided in the game machine P (more specifically, the game medium number control board P16) for storing the number of game media (also referred to as a total score) owned by the player. ) is not 0 (when the information displayed in the game medium number display portion P9 is not 0), and when the operation of the bet switch P5 is accepted, bet number setting processing is performed. When the information stored in the game medium number storage means is 0, the operation of the bet switch P5 is not accepted, or the bet processing is not executed even if the operation of the bet switch P5 is accepted. In addition, it is composed of a MAX bet switch P5M that can bet the maximum number set for each game machine P and a 1 bet switch P5O that can bet "1", and the 1 bet switch P5O is operated multiple times. As a result, it is possible to bet the same number of bets as the number of operations within the range of the maximum bet number. In addition, when the operation of the MAX bed switch P5M can be accepted, the operation part of the MAX bed switch P5M or the surrounding lamp color (LED lighting color, or LED lighting, turning off mode) By changing or lighting It suggests that the operation of the MAX bet switch P5M is acceptable. For example, when the operation of the MAX bet switch P5M can be accepted, it is lit in red, and when the operation of the MAX bet switch P5M is not acceptable, it is extinguished. The 1 bed switch P5O does not have an LED, but by placing an LED on or around the operation part of the 1 bed switch P5O and changing the lamp color or lighting it, the operation of the 1 bed switch P5O can be accepted. It may be a configuration that suggests that. The LED may be controlled to be turned on or off by the main control board P15, or may be controlled to be turned on or turned off by the sub-control board P12.

(Payment switch P6)
When the settlement switch P6 is operated in a situation where a bet number storage means provided in the gaming machine P stores a value of "1" or more (under a situation where the bet number is a value of "1" or more), , the bet number stored in the bet number storage means is added to the game medium number storage means. For example, when the settlement switch P6 is operated in a situation where "2" is stored in the bet number storage means and "100" is stored in the game media number storage means, "0" is stored in the bet number storage means. "102" is stored in the game medium number storage means. The period during which the settlement process can be executed when the operation of the settlement switch P6 is accepted is the period from when the game medium is inserted until when the start switch P3 is operated. In other words, even if the operation of the settlement switch P6 is accepted, the settlement processing is not executed until the game ends after the start switch P3 is operated. Alternatively, the operation of the settlement switch P6 is accepted from the time the game medium is inserted until the start switch P3 is operated. The operation of the settlement switch P6 may not be accepted. Also, although the settlement switch P6 is not provided with an LED, it is possible to accept the operation of the settlement switch P6 by arranging an LED on the operation part of the settlement switch P6 or in the vicinity thereof and changing the lamp color or lighting it. It may be a configuration that suggests that there is. The LED may be controlled to be turned on or off by the main control board P15, or may be controlled to be turned on or turned off by the sub-control board P12.

Also, the 1-bet switch P5O and the settlement switch P6 may be configured as one switch (1-bet switch/settlement switch). For example, the function may be switched according to the long press time of the 1 bet switch / settlement switch, and if the pressing time is less than 1000ms If the operation of the adjustment switch is no longer accepted), the function of the 1 bed switch P5O is executed, and if the pressing time is 1000 ms or more (1000 ms after the operation of the 1 bed switch/acquisition switch is accepted), the adjustment It may be configured to perform the function of switch P6. In addition, in order to execute the function of the settlement switch P6 when 1000 ms have passed since the operation of the 1 bed switch/settlement switch is accepted, there is no need to stop accepting the operation of the 1 bed switch/settlement switch. The function of the settlement switch P6 is executed even if the operation of the 1-bet switch/settlement switch is accepted at the time when 1000 ms has passed since the switch operation was accepted.

(count switch P7)
By operating the counting switch P7, the information stored in the game medium number storage means is sent to the outside of the game machine P via a game ball lending device connection terminal board (described later) provided in the game machine P. It is configured so that it can be transmitted to a lending unit (also referred to as a “dedicated unit”). For example, in a situation where "50" is stored in the game medium number storage means, by operating the counting switch P7, the count value (also referred to as "counting point" or "counting medal number") is set to "50". is transmitted to the game ball rental device connection terminal board, and then the information "50" is transmitted to the rental unit as the count value. It should be noted that "0" is stored in the game medium number storage means after the count switch P7 is operated and the count value is transmitted. In addition, although the counting switch P7 is not provided with an LED, an operation of the counting switch P7 can be accepted by arranging an LED on the operation part of the counting switch P7 or its surroundings and changing the lamp color or lighting it. It may be a configuration that suggests that there is. The LED may be controlled to be turned on or off by the main control board P15, or may be controlled to be turned on or turned off by the sub-control board P12.

(Production selection switch P8W)
The effect selection switch P8W is a so-called "cross key" and is composed of an upward switch, a rightward switch, a downward switch, and a leftward switch. For example, by operating the upward direction switch of the effect selection switch P8W, it becomes possible to move the cursor or the like displayed on the image display device P11M or the image display device P11S upward. Also, during game standby (also called game standby state), operating the up switch increases the volume, operating the down switch decreases the volume, and operating the right switch increases the light intensity of the lamp. Alternatively, the light amount of the lamp may be reduced when the left direction switch is operated.

(Production determination switch P8E)
The effect decision switch P8E serves as a decision button when deciding the effect, etc., and as a chance button when executing an effect suggesting to the player that a situation advantageous to the player will occur. For example, when the cursor is indicated on an item displayed on the image display device P11M or the image display device P11S, the item indicated by the cursor can be determined by operating the effect determination switch P8E. Further, during a game, when an effect such as "Press the chance button!" is configured to In addition, a drive source (solenoid, motor, etc.) may be arranged in the effect determination switch P8E, and the operation part of the effect determination switch P8E may be configured so as to vibrate up and down.

(Total score clear switch)
The total score clear switch (also referred to as "game medal number clear switch") is a switch for initializing the total score stored in the total score storage means, and the total score clear switch is turned on when the power is turned on. is configured so that the total score can be initialized. The operation of the total score clear switch for initializing the total score is not limited to this. Alternatively, the total score may be cleared by operating the total score clear switch twice in succession while the gaming machine P is powered on. When the total score is cleared by operating the total score clear switch once when the power of the game machine P is turned on, the total score clear switch is operated to prevent erroneous operation of the total score clear switch during the game. may be covered with a cover or placed in a recessed position to prevent easy operation.

(Game media count display P9)
A display device for displaying information on the number of game media (also referred to as "total score" or "total number of game medals") stored in a game medium number storage means, wherein numerical information of up to five digits is displayed. can be displayed. Five segment display portions are arranged in a horizontal row in each digit display portion that constitutes the game medium number display portion P9. Information on the number of media can be notified. The five segments may have decimal points (sometimes referred to as DP points), and there is no problem with a display mode using decimal points. Moreover, each segment is configured so that the display mode changes depending on whether the LED is turned on or off.

In this embodiment, the maximum number of game media that can be displayed in the game media number display portion P9 is "16383", and when displaying "1", "□□□□1" (four squares are blank (5 (four non-lighting out of four segment display portions)) are displayed right-justified. If the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means is "0", it is displayed as "□□□□0". If the number of game media stored in the number-of-game-medium storage means is "0" and the number-of-game-media display section P9 displays "□□□□□", the number-of-game-media display section P9 will display Even if there is no malfunction, there is a possibility that the game medium number display section P9 may be misidentified as malfunctioning. Therefore, by displaying "□□□□0" in the game medium number display section P9, it is possible to know that the game medium number display section P9 is not malfunctioning.

Note that, when an error occurs, the game media number display section P9 may display error information corresponding to the error instead of reporting the information on the number of game media. In this case, information on the number of game media and error information may be alternately displayed in the game media count display section P9. For example, it is conceivable to display the information on the number of game media for 3 seconds→display the error information for 3 seconds→display the information on the number of game media for 3 seconds→ . . . If an error is to be displayed on the game media number display area P9, "Pxx□□" (two □ indicate a blank; two x indicate a numerical value, a symbol, or an alphabet (error identification corresponding to various errors). The type of the error can be grasped by displaying "xx" which is the information)) and is displayed left justified. In other words, the information on the number of game media is displayed right justified, such as the above-mentioned "1", and the minimum digit (the rightmost segment display portion) is any numerical value from "0" to "9". Information is displayed. On the other hand, the error information is displayed left-aligned like the above-mentioned "Pxx□□", and the minimum digit is not displayed, and the numerical information is not displayed (the rightmost segment display section is not lit). With this configuration, whether or not the lowest digit of the game medium number display portion P9 is displayed (whether or not at least a portion of the rightmost segment display portion is illuminated) determines whether the currently displayed It becomes possible to easily determine whether the information received is numerical information or error information.

Also, in the second segment display portion from the right in the game medium number display portion P9, it is similarly confirmed whether the currently displayed information is numeric information or error information. can be easily distinguished.

Also, as in this embodiment, when a game machine is controlled using the main control chip and the game medium number chip, an error detected by the main control chip is expressed as "Pxx□□" and detected by the game medium number chip. By expressing the error that occurs as "Hxx□□", it is possible to make it easier to determine where the error has occurred. For example, since an input request communication error is detected by the main control chip, it is conceivable to display "P01 □□", "PE1 □□", etc. H01□□", "HE1□□", etc. may be displayed. In this way, the identification information such as "P" and "H" respectively corresponding to the chip (abnormal occurrence location) that detected the error, and the error identification information such as "E1" and "01" corresponding to the above "xx". are displayed at the same time, it is possible to display the location and type of error (type of error) without changing the number of digits even if there are more than 100 types of error.

Also, an example has been described in which the identification information is changed according to which chip detected the error, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the identification information may be changed according to the type of error. For example, a recoverable error can be expressed as "Pxx□□", and an unrecoverable error can be expressed as "Hxx□□". According to such a configuration, it is possible to facilitate determination of the degree of importance of the error.

Further, when an error is displayed on the game medium number display section P9, if an error that can be counted occurs and the counting switch P7 is operated during the error display and the counting process is performed, the counting is performed. Even during the processing, the game medium number information and the error information may be alternately displayed in the game medium number display section P9. By configuring in this way, it is possible to check the error information even during the counting process.

Further, when an error is displayed in the game medium number display section P9, if an error that allows lending processing occurs and the lending switch is operated during the error display and lending processing is performed, the lending processing is performed. Among them, information on the number of game media and error information in the game media count display portion P9 may be alternately displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to check the error information even during the lending process.

In addition, when an error is displayed in the game medium number display portion P9, the power is turned off while the error is being displayed in the game medium number display portion P9, and the power is turned on while the total score clear switch is being operated. In this case, the total score is initialized but the error is not cleared. Therefore, the information indicating "0" and the error information displayed in the game medium number display portion P9 may be alternately displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to check the error information even if the total score clear switch is operated and the total score is initialized.

(Status display lamps 1 to 5)
The status display lamps 1 to 5 are composed of five LEDs, and one LED is arranged at a position corresponding to each segment of the game medium number display portion P9 (not shown). The state display lamp is controlled to light up by the game medium number control board P16, and lights up when there is a change in the state managed by the game medium number control board P16. It should be noted that the status display lamp may be arranged at any position as long as it can be visually recognized by the player.

The status display lamp 1 is configured to be lit in the case of rental device connection failure (VL failure flag=FFh), and to be turned off in other cases (VL failure flag=00h).

The status display lamp 2 is designed to be lit when the lending serial number is abnormal, and to be extinguished in other cases.

The status display lamp 3 is configured to be lit in the case of rental device communication errors 1 to 6 and to be extinguished in the other cases.

The status display lamp 4 is turned on when the total score is 15000 or more, and is turned off in other cases.

The status display lamp 5 is configured to turn on when the count point is other than 0 (value equal to or greater than 1) when sending the count notification, and turn off when the count point is 0 when sending the count notification. When the status display lamp 5 is turned on, it is judged whether or not a counting flag (described later) is set. When the counting flag is set (counting flag=FFh), the status The indicator lamp 5 is lit, and the status indicator lamp 5 is extinguished when the counting flag is not set (counting flag=0).

In addition, the counting flag is cleared (counting flag = 0) at each counting notification timing, and when the counting execution flag (described later) = 1 or more (when the counting switch P7 is short-pressed or long-pressed), the count is notified. If the VL abnormality flag is not equal to 0, the total score is 0, or the counting execution flag is 0 at the subsequent counting notification timing, the counting flag is no longer set. That is, when the count value is "1" or more, the counting flag is set to FFh for at least 300 ms, which is the output interval of the count notification. In other words, the status display lamp 5 is lit for at least 300 ms. The counting flag set when the counting execution flag is equal to or greater than 1 is cleared when the count notification timing comes, but is reset in the same interrupt process, so the status display lamp 5 is turned off. It will remain lit without

By configuring in this way, even if the short press of the count switch P7 is established immediately before the count notification timing, the status display lamp 5 can be lit for 300 ms, and the status display lamp 5 can be visually recognized. It becomes possible to guarantee. Further, when the long press of the count switch P7 spans n times (multiple times) of count notification timings, the lighting state can be maintained for a period of n×300 ms.

Further, even if the count switch P7 is pressed for a short time and only "1" is counted as the count value, even if the count switch P7 is pressed for a long time and only "50" is counted as the count value, The status display lamp 5 is lit for 300 ms. Therefore, it is possible to turn on the status display lamp 5 by common processing without separate processing for short-pressing and long-pressing, so that the complexity of the program can be eliminated and the program capacity can be reduced.

(Granted number display part)
When game media (scores) are given as a result of a game, the display device is for displaying the number of given game media, and can display numerical information up to two digits at maximum. The display part of each digit constituting the given number display part is composed of a plurality of segments, and by lighting the segments, it is possible to inform the information of the number of game media. If the error information corresponding to the error that has occurred is not displayed on the game medium number display portion P9, the error information corresponding to the error that has occurred may be displayed on the given number display portion. In this case, the error information may be displayed after the information on the number of game media provided in the provided number display section. For example, if the number of game media to be awarded as a result of a game is "7", "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", and "7" are displayed in the awarded number display section. is displayed, and then "E1" (error code) is displayed. Although the awarded number display unit is not shown, it is conceivable that it is arranged on the left side of the settlement switch P6 and the 1-bet switch P5O when viewed from the front.

(Display window P10)
When the front door P2 is closed, the pattern of the reel tape attached to each reel of the left reel P18L, the middle reel P18C, and the right reel P18R (see FIG. 3) which are rotatably provided in the vertical direction is displayed in the display window P10. becomes visible through the Specifically, from the display window P10, when the reels are stopped, out of the 21 (20, 16, etc.) symbols, in the rotation direction of the left reel P18L, the middle reel P18C, and the right reel P18R. Three patterns that are continuous along the line are visible. That is, 3 [symbols]×3 [reels]=9 patterns in total can be visually recognized in the display window P10. Here, among the stop display positions where the left reel P18L, the middle reel P18C, and the right reel P18R each stop and display three symbols, the uppermost stop display position is the upper row, the center stop display position is the middle row, and the lowermost stop display position is The stop display position is set to the bottom row.

(Image display device)
The image display device displays, in addition to various effect images, a game instruction image for instructing the pressing order of the stop switch P4 during the game, an error image when an error occurs, and the like. In this embodiment, two image display devices, that is, an image display device P11M and an image display device P11S are provided as image display devices. Depending on the model, only one image display device may be installed, three or more image display devices may be installed, or none may be installed. As the image display device, various types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, a dot display, and a projector can be adopted as long as they are display devices for allowing the player to view images.

In addition, an operation mode display device (also called an instruction monitor) that notifies the operation mode of the stop switch P4 may be provided. It should be noted that the operation mode of the stop switch P4 may be notified to the given number display section (may also be used). When the operation mode of the stop switch P4 is notified to the given number display section, the given number display section may be referred to as an instruction monitor. In addition, a 1-bet lamp, a 2-bet lamp, and a 3-bet lamp for notifying the number of bets, a replay display lamp indicating that a replay (also referred to as replay) can be executed, and a game by operating the start switch P3. A game executable lamp indicating that the game is executable, a game medium insertable lamp indicating that the game medium can be inserted by operating the bet switch P5, and the like may be provided.

The 1-bed lamp can be lit when the number of bets is set to 1, the 2-bed lamp can be lit when the number of bets is set to 2, and the 3-bed lamp can be lit when the number of bets is set to 3. It can be lit when In other words, when the number of bets is set to 1, the 1-bed lamp can be lit, and when the number of bets is set to 2, the 1-bed lamp and the 2-bed lamp can be lit. When 3 is set, the 1-bed lamp, the 2-bed lamp, and the 3-bed lamp can be turned on.

The above-described 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, 3-bet lamp, replay display lamp, game execution possible lamp, and game medium insertion possible lamp are controlled to be turned on or off by the main control board P15. A mode in which the control substrate P12 controls lighting or extinguishing may be employed.

<Description of main parts arranged on the back surface of the front door P2 of the gaming machine P>

Next, the rear structure of the front door P2 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

(Sub control board P12)
The sub-control board P12 (also called sub-control means, sub-control board (means), effect control board (means)) is accommodated in the case of the sub-control board P12. A sub-control CPU, a sub-control ROM, and a sub-control RAM are mounted on the sub-control board P12 (the sub-control CPU, sub-control ROM, and sub-control RAM may be built in one chip). The sub-control CPU, sub-control ROM, and sub-control RAM can communicate data with each other via a bus. The sub control board P12 determines data to be output to the effect lamps, speakers, and image display devices (image display device P11M, image display device P11S) based on information (also referred to as commands) from the main control board P15, which will be described later. do. In other words, the sub-control board P12 is mainly performing control related to effects. Information cannot be transmitted from the sub control board P12 to the main control board P15 (one-way communication). In addition, it acquires the data input by operating the effect selection switch P8W or the effect determination switch P8E, and based on the data input by operating the effect selection switch P8W or the effect determination switch P8E. , speakers, and image display devices (image display device P11M, image display device P11S).

(Game media count display board P13)
The game medium number display board P13 is a board for displaying the game medium number display portion P9. Specifically, it is the substrate on which the game medium number display portion P9 is installed.
(speaker)
There are four speakers, an upper right speaker P14UR at the upper part of the front door, an upper left speaker (not shown), a lower right speaker P14DR at the lower part of the front door, and a lower left speaker P14DL. In addition to sound, output an error sound or warning sound that informs that an error has occurred.

<Description of Main Parts Arranged in Cabinet P1 of Gaming Machine P>

Next, the internal structure of the cabinet P1 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

(Main control board P15)
The main control board P15 (also called main control means, first main control board (means), main control board (means), or game control board (means)) is housed in the main control board case. The main control board P15 is protected by a main control board case, and is configured to be difficult to open by sealing the main control board case with caulking (also called a sealing member).

The main control board P15 is equipped with a first main control CPU, a first main control ROM, and a first main control RAM (the first main control CPU, the first main control ROM, and the first main control RAM are built in the chip and called the main control chip). The first main control CPU, first main control ROM, and first main control RAM are capable of data communication with each other via a bus. The main control board P15 controls the internal lottery, reel control such as drive and stop of the reels, all reels stop, winning judgment control based on the stopped symbol combination, bonus game state (simply referred to as bonus) and RT state. It performs game state transition control of various game states such as.

A RAM clear switch is connected to the main control board P15, and the advantageous section information stored in the main control board P15 can be cleared by operating the RAM clear switch. When the RAM clear switch is operated during the advantageous interval, the advantageous interval ends and the normal interval is set. The information cleared by operating the RAM clear switch is the information about the advantageous section, and the information about the setting value, total score, bet number, RT status, and role ratio monitor is not cleared. Further, the method of operating the RAM clear switch for clearing the advantageous section may be by pressing it once, by detecting that it has been pressed continuously for a predetermined time (so-called long press), or by pressing it. It may be that the power was turned on under certain circumstances. The RAM clear switch is placed at a position where the player (user) cannot operate it (for example, the main control board P15 that is not exposed unless the front door P2 is opened, the inside of the cabinet, the front door rear surface, etc.). Note that the RAM clear switch may also be used as a reset switch. Although the details will be described later, the advantageous section is a game section in which an instruction monitor may notify an advantageous stop switch operation mode (including operation sequence and operation position), and the normal section is an advantageous period due to the instruction monitor. This is a game section in which the operation mode of the stop switch is not notified.

A setting key switch (also referred to as a setting switch) is connected to the main control board P15. When a setting key (key) is inserted into the setting key switch and rotated approximately 45 degrees to the right, the power of the gaming machine P is turned on. Setting change mode can be started. The setting key switch is not limited to one operated by the setting key, and a push type switch or a pull type switch may be employed. In any case, there is no problem if ON or OFF can be detected when the power is turned on.

In addition, while waiting for a game after the end of one game, if no bet is set (the number of bets is 0), insert the setting key (key) into the setting key switch and rotate it approximately 45 degrees to the right to confirm the setting. mode can be started. It should be noted that the condition for transitioning to the setting confirmation mode does not have to include that no bet is set, and the condition for transitioning to the setting confirmation mode is referred to as the condition for transition to the setting confirmation mode.

The storage capacity of the built-in ROM of the main control chip mounted on the main control board P15 is "16 KB or less", and the use area (also referred to as the first program) of "7.5 KB or less" and other use areas outside (also referred to as a second program). In the used area, only a control area of "4.5 KB or less" storing a program executed by the main control board P15 (also referred to as a first control area) and information other than the program are stored or stored. It has a data area (also referred to as a first data area) of "3.0 KB or less". Outside the use area, there are a control area (also referred to as a second control area) and a data area (also referred to as a second data area) like the use area. A program relating to the progress of the game is stored in the usage area, and a program relating to anti-fraud measures and a program used for gaming machine testing are stored outside the usage area.

(Game media number control board P16)
Game media count control board P16 (game media count control means, second main control board (means), payout control board (means), game medal count control board (means), game medal count display control board (means), or game The number-of-media display control board (means)) is accommodated in the number-of-game-media control board case. The game media count control board P16 is protected by a game media count control board case, and by sealing the game media count control board case with caulking (also called a sealing member), it is difficult to open the game media count control board case. is configured to be

The game media number control board P16 is equipped with a second main control CPU, a second main control ROM, and a second main control RAM (the second main control CPU, the second main control ROM, and the second main control RAM are It is built in one chip and is called a game media number chip). The second main control CPU, second main control ROM, and second main control RAM are capable of data communication with each other via a bus. The game medium number control board P16 controls the display of the game medium number display section P9, transmits information (commands) to the rental unit via a terminal board for connecting a game ball rental device, which will be described later, and controls the game ball display. Receiving information (commands) from the rental unit via the rental device connection terminal board, transmitting information (commands) to the main control board P15, and receiving information (commands) from the main control board P15 be able to.

In addition, the game medium number control board P16 is provided with game medium number storage means for storing the number of acquired game media. By subtracting the inserted number, which is the number of game media to be used, the number of game media currently possessed by the user is stored.

The upper limit value that can be stored in the game medium number storage means is up to "16383", and the number after "16384" cannot be stored.

When the value stored in the game media number storage means is "15000" or more and "16368" or less, the game media number control board P16 detects that the total score threshold has been reached. Also, when the value stored in the game medium number storage means is between "16369" and "16383", the game medium number control board P16 detects the total score upper limit abnormality. Any value in the case where the value stored in the game medium number storage means is between "16369" and "16383" is referred to as an upper caution value. In other words, the upper caution value is a concept that also includes the upper limit. In addition, as the value stored in the game medium number storage means, "15000" (a value that reaches the total score threshold value) may be referred to as a first threshold value. "16369" (a value that makes the total score upper limit abnormal) may be referred to as a second threshold.

A total score clear switch is connected to the game media number control board P16. The total score stored in the game medium number control board P16 can be cleared by detecting the operation of the switch. The information cleared by operating the total score clear switch is only the total score, and other information (for example, information on the number of bets, etc.) is not cleared. Further, the total score clear switch for clearing the total score may be operated by pressing it once or by detecting that it has been pressed continuously for a predetermined time (so-called long pressing). Note that the total score clear switch is arranged at a position where the user cannot operate it (for example, on the game media count control board P16, inside the cabinet, on the rear surface of the front door, etc.).

When the total score is cleared by turning on the power while the total score clear switch is being operated, the total score clear status is turned ON ("1" is stored in the total score clear status storage area of the RWM). , the total score clear status is kept ON until one game started thereafter is completed, and after one game is completed, the total score clear status is turned OFF (total score clear status storage area of RWM store "0" in the memory). The total score clear status information may be transmitted to the lending unit, and when the lending unit receives the information that the total score clear status is ON, the total score information stored in the lending unit is cleared. In addition, when the total score clear status is ON in the game machine P, and the lending unit gives the lending points (also referred to as “the number of loaned medals”), the total score clear status remains ON and a new total score is obtained. After that, even if one game ends and the total score clear status becomes OFF, the total score to which the newly added lending points are added is not cleared.

In addition, even if the power is turned off during the game (during reel rotation, payout processing (also called score giving processing), etc.) and the power is turned on in a situation where the total score clear switch is operated, the total score will not be cleared. The total score clear status remains OFF, the power is turned off after the end of the game, and when the power is turned on while the total score clear switch is being operated, the total score is cleared, and the total score clear status is changed. ON. In this case, the game medium number control board P16 determines whether or not the game is in progress based on the game start information and the game end information transmitted from the main control board P15, and activates the total score clear switch during the game. The operation does not clear the total score.

Further, the total score clear switch is operated during the game, the game is terminated while the total score clear switch is operated, and the power is turned off when the total score clear switch is operated and the game is completed. is performed, and when the power is turned on while the total score clear switch is being operated, the total score is cleared and the total score clear status is turned ON.

Also, if the power is turned off while the total score clear status is ON and the power is turned on while the total score clear switch is not pressed, the total score clear status will remain ON. It's becoming In other words, the total score clear status is not initialized by power ON/OFF.

If the power is turned off while the total score clear status is ON, the total score clear switch is not pressed, and the power is turned on while the setting key switch is ON. , the setting change mode is started, but the total score clear status is maintained ON. In other words, the total score clear status is not initialized when the power is turned on or off, or when the setting change mode is activated.

If the power is turned off while the total score clear status is ON and the power is turned on while the total score clear switch is pressed, the total score clear status will be cleared after the total score is cleared. It is designed to be turned ON again. However, even in this case, the total score is initialized, but the total score clear status is not initialized, so the total score clear status remains ON. In other words, the total score clear status is not initialized by the initialization processing by turning on/off the power and turning on the total score clear switch.

Also, if the power to the total score clear switch is turned off during a game and the power is turned on while the total score clear switch is being operated, the total score will be cleared and the total score clear status will be turned ON. In this case, the total score clear status is changed from ON to OFF at the end of the game next to the game in which the total score clear switch was operated. In other words, the total score clear status is kept ON at the end of the game in which the total score clear switch is operated, and the total score clear status is turned OFF at the end of the next game. As a result, even when the total score clear status is ON for a short period of time (timing when the total score clear switch is operated just before the end of the game), the total score clear status can be maintained ON in the next game. Fraud such as clearing the total score can be suppressed. Note that the total score clear status may be turned OFF after the end of the game in which the total score clear switch is operated. In this case, the effect of capacity reduction is expected by sharing the program for updating the total score clear status.

Further, the total score is not cleared only by pressing the total score clear switch, but since the total score clear switch is detected, it is possible to check whether or not there is an abnormality in the switch managed by the game medium number control board P16. A monitor lamp for visual recognition by the administrator lights up. On the other hand, the monitor lamp does not turn on when the total score clear switch is being detected, but the monitor lamp is turned off when the total score clear switch is being detected, and the total score clear switch is not being detected. It may be configured so that the monitor lamp is sometimes turned on. The monitor lamp is a lamp mounted on the main control board P15 and/or the game medium number control board P16, but may be mounted on another board.

Also, if the power is turned off during or after the game is over, and the power is turned on while the setting key switch is ON and the total score clear switch is ON, the main control board P15 will turn off the setting key switch. It is determined whether or not it is ON, and whether or not the total score clear switch is ON is determined on the game medium number control board P16.

When the power is turned on while the setting key switch is ON and the total score clearing switch is ON, the setting change mode is activated, and after initializing a predetermined range of storage areas in the first main control RAM, settings are made. A value can be selected. On the other hand, in the game media number control board P16, after initializing the storage area of the specific range of the second main control RAM based on the power being turned on, the second main control board P16 based on the total score clear switch being ON. The total score is cleared by initializing the memory area storing the total score in the control RAM. By configuring in this manner, setting change and total score clearing can be performed at the same time by turning on the power once, so that it is possible to prevent the operation of the game parlor manager from becoming complicated.

Here, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch ON and the total score clear switch ON, the main control board P15 activates the setting change mode, and the predetermined range of the first main control RAM will be initialized. When the conditions for ending the setting change mode are met (the setting key switch is turned off after the start switch P3 is operated to fix the set value), the setting change mode is ended. After that, when the bet button is operated, the situation becomes such that the betting process using the total score can be executed (game standby). In other words, if the initialization of the storage area storing the total score is not completed before the setting change mode ends, there is a possibility that bet processing will be performed based on the total score that has not been cleared. In order to solve such a problem, when the power is turned on while the setting key switch is ON and the total score clear switch is ON, a predetermined range of storage area of the first main control RAM is initialized. It is preferable that the timing of starting initialization of the storage area storing the total score in the second main control RAM is earlier than the timing of starting. As another method, when the power is turned on while the setting key switch is ON and the total score clear switch is ON, the timing at which the initialization of the predetermined range of the storage area of the first main control RAM is completed. It is preferable that the timing at which the initialization of the storage area storing the total score in the second main control RAM is completed is earlier than the timing.

Also, if the power is turned on while the setting key switch is ON and the total score clear switch is ON, the setting change mode may be entered but the total score may not be cleared. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the total score from being cleared even if the total score clear switch is erroneously operated during the work of shifting to the setting change mode. The total score is important information, and such a control system may be used when it is important to prevent the total score from being cleared easily.

Also, if the power is turned on while the setting key switch is ON and the total score clear switch is ON, the total score may be cleared without shifting to the setting change mode. According to such a configuration, even if the setting key switch is erroneously operated during the work of clearing the total score, it is possible not to shift to the setting change mode. The set value is important information in the profit control of the game arcade, and such a control system may be used when it is important to prevent illegal changes.

In addition, when shifting to setting change mode, the LCD will display "setting change mode", the frame lamp will light red, and the setting change mode BGM and "setting change" voice will be heard from the speaker. It is output until the mode ends, and when the total score is cleared, the frame lamp lights up in orange, and the voice "Total score cleared" is output from the speaker for a short period of time or once. is configured to For this reason, even if the transition to the setting change mode and the clearing of the total score are performed at the same time, in order to make it easier to recognize all the situations, the notification regarding the clearing of the total score is output for a short period of time or once. are prioritized. In order to give priority, for example, if the audio channel for the setting change mode audio and the audio for clearing the total score is the same, by outputting the audio for clearing the total score later, the audio for clearing the total score , or even if the audio channel for the setting change mode and the sound for clearing the total score are set to different channels, while the sound for clearing the total score is being output, It is conceivable to lower the volume of the voice or mute it. By configuring in this way, even if the transition to the setting change mode and the clearing of the total score are performed at the same time, the situation can be easily recognized.

The storage capacity of the built-in ROM of the game media count control chip mounted on the game media count control board P16 is "16 KB or less", and the use area (also referred to as the first program) of "7.5 KB or less" It has a non-used area (also called a second program). In the use area, only a control area of "4.5 KB or less" (also referred to as a first control area) in which the program executed by the game media number control board P16 is stored and information other than the program are stored or stored. and a data area (also referred to as a first data area) of "3.0 KB or less" to be stored. Outside the use area, there are a control area (also referred to as a second control area) and a data area (also referred to as a second data area) like the use area. A program relating to the progress of the game is stored in the use area, and a program relating to anti-fraud measures and a program used for role ratio monitoring are stored outside the use area.

Also, the game media number control board P16 is equipped with a role ratio monitor (also referred to as a performance display monitor), and is configured to be able to execute arithmetic processing and display processing for displaying stay ratios in various states.

The role ratio monitor is the cumulative advantageous section ratio or the cumulative instructed role ratio (selectable according to the specifications of the game machine), the continuous role ratio among the latest 6000 games, and the role ratio among the latest 6000 games. It is a display device that switches and displays the ratio, the cumulative continuous role ratio, the cumulative role ratio, and the cumulative role object state ratio every 4800 ms. number can be displayed. The upper two digits of the four digit number displayed by the four 7-segment LEDs are called an identification segment, and the lower two digits are called a ratio segment.

"Role" in the role ratio refers to the first type special role (so-called RB), the second type special role (so-called CB), and the ordinary role (so-called SB). ” is a ratio calculated by payout during operation of accessory/total payout×100. In addition, payouts in the operation of the first class special role product continuous operation device (so-called BB) and the second type special role product continuous operation device (so-called MB) are also included in "payout during operation of the role product", but during BB Payouts in general games and general games during MB are not included in the “payout during operation of the accessory”.

The "continuous role" in the continuous role ratio refers to the first type special role (so-called RB), and the "continuous role ratio" is the payout during operation of the first type special role / total payout It is a ratio calculated by ×100. Note that the payout in the operation of the type 1 special accessory continuous operation device (so-called BB) is also included in the "payout during the operation of the accessory", but the payout in the general game during the BB is the "payout during the operation of the accessory". not included in

The "instruction-inclusive role" in the instruction-inclusive role ratio includes the payout in the game (so-called AT) in which the instruction function is activated in the above-mentioned "accessory". , (payout during instruction function operation or payout during operation of accessory)/total payout×100. Here, (payout while the instruction function is activated or payout while the accessory is in operation) does not refer to the payout in the game in which the instruction function is in operation and the accessory is activated, but the payout in the game in which the instruction function is activated. It refers to the sum of the payouts of the game in which the number and the accessory are activated. If the game in which the instruction function was activated was the game in which the accessory was activated, instead of adding the two payout numbers, the payout during product operation). If the player makes a mistake in operating the stop switch in a game in which the AT is activated, the maximum payout may not be obtained. In this case, the payout is calculated based on the actual payout.

Among the information displayed on the role ratio monitor, the information displayed in the identification segment is the cumulative advantageous section ratio, the cumulative instructed role ratio, the continuous role ratio in the latest 6000 games, and the role ratio in the latest 6000 games. It is information for identifying which ratio is being displayed among the ratio, the cumulative continuous accessory ratio, the cumulative accessory ratio, and the cumulative accessory state ratio, and is indicated by "7U." and "7P. ”, “6Y.”, “7Y.”, “6A.”, “7A.”, “5H.”. For example, when "7U." It shows that it is a character ratio.

Of the information displayed on the role ratio monitor, the information displayed in the ratio segment is information for visually recognizing the calculation results of various ratios, and is displayed in two-digit numbers using two 7-segment LEDs. For example, when the calculation result is 70, "70" is displayed in the ratio segment. Note that the calculated results are rounded down to the nearest decimal point and displayed. Also, when the calculation result is 100, "99" is displayed. Also, when the total number of games is less than 400, the ratio segment is displayed as "00".

The identification seg is displayed in a flashing manner when the cumulative number of games is less than the reference number of games. The reference number of games is determined according to various ratios, 175,000 games in the case of the cumulative advantageous section ratio, 175,000 games in the case of the cumulative instructed accessory ratio, and the latest 6000 games. 6,000 games in the case of the continuous role ratio, 6,000 games in the case of the latest 6,000 games, and 17,500 games in the case of the cumulative continuous role ratio, In the case of the cumulative role item ratio, the number is 17,500 games, and in the case of the cumulative role item etc. state ratio, the number is 175,000 games.

The ratio seg is displayed in a blinking manner when the displayed numerical value is equal to or greater than the threshold. The threshold is determined according to various ratios, and is 70 in the case of the cumulative advantageous section ratio, 70 in the case of the cumulative instructed role ratio, and 70 in the case of the continuous role ratio among the latest 6000 games. 60 in the case of the latest 6000 game character ratios, 70 in the case of cumulative continuous character ratios, 70 in the case of cumulative total character ratios, etc. 50 for state ratios. If the total number of games is less than 400 and the calculation result is equal to or greater than the threshold value but "00" is displayed in the ratio segment, the ratio segment is displayed in a lighting mode.

Of the information displayed in the identification segment of the role ratio monitor, only one of "7U." and "7P." is displayed according to the specifications of the gaming machine. "7U." is an identification display indicating the advantageous section ratio, and the value of (the number of games played in the advantageous section÷total number of games×100) is displayed in the ratio segment. "7P." is an identification display that indicates the ratio of instructed role items, and the value of (the number of payouts of the indicated role item (number of role item payouts + number of payouts when the instruction function is activated) ÷ total number of payouts × 100) is used as a ratio segment. indicate. A game machine that does not have an instruction function (a game machine that does not notify the operation mode stop switch that is advantageous to the player on the instruction monitor) displays "7U." and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment (hereinbelow, a specification in which "7U.--" is displayed on the indication monitor is referred to as a 7U type (without indication function)).

Further, since there is a possibility that which of the "7U." is desirable. In order to configure in this way, the role ratio monitor type information ("0" for 7U type (without instruction function), 7U type (with instruction function), "2" for 7P type) is transmitted to the game medium number control board P16, and the game medium number control board P16 monitors the role ratio transmitted from the main control board P15. The type information is stored in a certain storage area. The game media number control board P16, regardless of whether the specification is 7U type or 7P type, includes information that is used only for any of the "number of games played in advantageous section" and "number of instructed bonus payouts". Role ratio monitor type information stored in a predetermined storage area and transmitted from the main control board P15 when displaying the advantageous section ratio or the instructed role ratio in the identification seg and the ratio seg of the role ratio monitor It is configured to display the required information based on

The game medium number control board P16 is required based on the role ratio monitor type information transmitted from the main control board P15 not only when displaying on the role ratio monitor but also when transmitting the gaming machine performance information to the lending unit. information is sent. For example, when transmitting the gaming machine performance information when the gaming machine P is of the 7U type (no instruction function), FFh is transmitted as the information regarding the instructed accessory ratio, and FFh is transmitted as the information regarding the advantageous section ratio. Also, for example, when the gaming machine P is of the 7U type (with instruction function) and the gaming machine performance information is transmitted, FFh is transmitted as the information regarding the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio, and as the information regarding the advantageous section ratio (advantageous section A value corresponding to the result of number of games/total number of games x 100) is transmitted. Also, for example, when the gaming machine P is of the 7P type, when the gaming machine performance information is transmitted, the value corresponding to the result of (indicated role payout number/total payout number x 100) is used as information on the instructed role payout ratio. and FFh as information on the advantageous section ratio.

In addition, since the initial value of the role ratio monitor type information storage area of the game medium number control board P16 is 0, communication failure between the main control board P15 and the game medium number control board P16 when the power is turned on causes the main control When the role ratio monitor type information is not transmitted from the board P15, the role ratio monitor type information becomes 0 even if the specification of the game machine P is the 7P type. Also, if the first class special accessory is not installed at this time, all the ratio segments related to ``6Y.'', ``7Y.'', ``6A.'', ``7A.'', and ``5H.'' -" is displayed.

In this way, even if a communication failure occurs between the main control board P15 and the game media number control board P16 when the power is turned on, the role ratio monitor display will change the number displayed in the ratio segment to "-". -" is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that it is not normal.

In order to confirm whether the role ratio monitor can operate normally, a test pattern is displayed in the identification segment and the ratio segment for 4800 ms after the power is turned on and the interrupt process is activated. As a test pattern, all segments (including DP) of four 7-segment LEDs constituting the role ratio monitor are displayed in a blinking manner. For example, "8.8.8.8." may be displayed in a blinking manner. The test pattern may be displayed at any timing during setting change, setting confirmation, or RWM abnormal error, in addition to the timing after power-on.

When the cumulative number of games in the identified segment is less than the reference number of games, when the displayed numerical value is greater than or equal to the threshold value in the ratio segment, and when the test pattern is displayed in the identification segment and the ratio segment, the segment is displayed in a blinking manner. However, more specifically, the blinking mode is displayed by switching between lighting and extinguishing at every 300 ms such as lighting 300 ms→extinguishing 300 ms→lit 300 ms→extinguishing 300 ms→ . . . Also, when the various ratio information is switched, lighting is started, thereby preventing the display time of the various ratio information from becoming longer or shorter depending on the timing of lighting and blinking.

As described above, the cumulative advantageous section ratio or the cumulative instructed role ratio, the continuous role ratio among the latest 6000 games, the role ratio among the latest 6000 games, and the cumulative continuous The character object ratio, the cumulative character object ratio, and the cumulative condition ratio of the character object, etc. are configured to switch the display contents every 4,800 ms, and this 4,800 ms is set to a multiple of 600 ms, which is one set of lighting and blinking. By doing so, it is possible to configure so that one of the 7-segment LEDs is always lit at the switching timing of the various ratios displayed on the role ratio monitor even when displaying in a blinking mode. becomes.

By configuring in this way, even at the timing when various ratio information is switched, lighting is started, so that it is possible to continuously display a display that does not give a sense of discomfort due to the fact that the blinking period does not deviate.

In addition, since the test pattern display period after the power is turned on is also set to 4800 ms, the 7-segment LED is extinguished when the test pattern is displayed for 4800 ms. It is possible to display information about the included role ratio from lighting.

Next, a control method for blinking display on the role ratio monitor will be described.

In order to blink the display mode of the role ratio monitor, it has a storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching between lighting and lighting. A storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching between lighting and extinguishing is a 2-byte storage area, and a process of adding 1 is executed for each interrupt process. A storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch between lighting and extinguishing is initialized (0 is stored) when the power is turned on, and then circulates between 0 and 299 each time an interrupt process is executed. In other words, the next value after 299 is 0.

Example 1) When the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch between lighting and extinguishing is set to "0" and the update process is performed, the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching between lighting and extinguishing is set to " 1”. At this time, the carry flag is set to 1 (the carry flag is set to 1 because a carry occurs as a result of the calculation of "0-299").
Example 2) If the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch on and off is "298" and the update process is performed, the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch on and off will be set to " 299”. At this time, the carry flag is set to 1 (the carry flag is set to 1 because a carry occurs as a result of the calculation of "298-299").
Example 3) If the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch on and off is "299" and the update process is performed, the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch on and off will be set to " 0”. At this time, the carry flag is set to 0 (the carry flag is set to 0 because no carry occurs as a result of the calculation of "299-299").

As described above, if the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching between lighting and extinguishing is any value from 0 to 298, the carry flag is set to 1, and the time for switching between lighting and extinguishing is set to 1. If the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for management is 299, carry flag=0. In other words, the carry flag becomes 0 every 300 ms.

When the carry flag becomes 0, the flashing switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is updated. The flashing switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is initialized (stored to 0) when the power is turned on. When 0 is stored in the flashing switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS), the role ratio monitor is turned on, _FL_CHG_FLS), the role ratio monitor is turned off. In other words, since the carry flag becomes 0 every 300 ms, by repeatedly storing 0 and 1 in the flashing switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) every 300 ms, the display mode of the role ratio monitor changes between the lighting mode and the extinguishing mode every 300 ms. can be repeatedly displayed (blinking display).

When the display of the role ratio monitor is displayed in a blinking mode, if the total number of games in the identification segment is less than the reference number of games, if the display numerical value is greater than or equal to the threshold value in the ratio segment, the test pattern is displayed in the identification segment and the ratio segment. Since it is one of the cases of displaying, in cases other than these cases, it is displayed in the lighting mode without referring to the flashing switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS). However, regardless of whether or not the blinking switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is referred to, the storage area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch between lighting and extinguishing is updated for each interrupt process, so the blinking switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is updated as needed, and even when the blinking switching flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is switched from not referring to to referring to it, the timing of turning on and off and the switching timing of various ratio displays can be displayed without deviation. It becomes possible.

(Terminal board for connecting equipment for renting game balls, etc.)
A game ball rental device connection terminal board (also referred to as a connection terminal board) has a role as a relay board for performing two-way communication between the game machine P and the rental unit. The game ball rental device connection terminal plate is housed in a game ball rental device connection terminal plate case. The game ball rental device connection terminal plate is protected by a game ball rental device connection terminal plate case. It is configured to make it difficult to open the rental device connection terminal board case.

The game ball lending device connection terminal board has a connector (D-sub 9-pin) for two-way communication with the lending unit, and a harness connected to the connector from an opening provided on the back side of the housing of the gaming machine P. Two-way communication is possible via a cable (about 1.5m to 2.0m long). In addition, the connection terminal board for the game ball lending device is equipped with a capacitor to stabilize the communication with the lending unit. The lending unit is provided with a lending switch, and when the lending switch is operated, a lending notification is sent from the lending unit, and the lending notification is sent to the game medium number control board P16 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board. is entered. The connector for connecting the game ball rental device connection terminal plate and the rental unit is provided with a spring lock so that the harness cannot be easily pulled out.

The main control board P15, the game medium number control board P16, and the game ball lending device connection terminal board are housed in board cases, respectively. may be housed together in one board case, or the main control board P15, the game medium number control board P16, and the game ball rental device connection terminal board may be housed together in one board case. Further, even when the board case is installed in the game machine P, the back side can be easily confirmed.

In a conventional game machine using medals, the main control board P15 and the spinning drum device board are connected by a harness. When the power supply from the capacitor mounted on the device board is cut off, the data stored in the RAM of the main control chip can be initialized. As a result, even if incorrect data is stored in the RAM, it can be reliably initialized by unplugging the harness. In addition, since the board case of the main control board P15 is sealed, if a capacitor is mounted on the main control board, the board case of the main control board must be destroyed in order to cut off the power supply from the capacitor as described above. After that, it is necessary to remove the main control chip from the main control board P15. Thus, in order not to damage the board case when the power supply from the capacitor is cut off, it is desirable to mount the capacitor on a board other than the main control board.

On the other hand, the game ball rental device connection terminal board described in the present embodiment uses a photocoupler to perform high-speed communication with the rental unit, so power tends to run short. should be provided. Therefore, a capacitor is mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal plate, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate and the game medium number control board P16 are connected with a harness, and the game medium number control board P16 and the main control board are connected. By connecting P15 with a harness, the capacitor mounted on the game ball rental device connection terminal board becomes a backup power supply for the main control chip mounted on the main control board P15.

The main control board P15, the game medium number control board P16, and the game ball lending device connection terminal board are each sealed with a board case, and the game medium number control board P16, the game ball lending device connection terminal board, Since the main control board P15 and the game medium number control board P16 are connected by harnesses, the harnesses can be removed to initialize the data stored in the RAM of the main control chip. In addition, since the game media count control chip of the game media count control board is sealed with a board case, it is difficult to insert and remove it. It is configured.

The main control board P15 and the number-of-game-media control board P16 are connected via a 32-pin connector. Pin 1 is DC 12V, Pin 2 is DC 12V, Pin 3 is DC 5V, Pin 4 is DC 5V, Pin 5 is the main control data signal, Pin 6 is the control state signal 1, pin 7 is control state signal 2, pin 8 is control state signal 3, pin 9 is control state signal 4, pin 10 is control state signal 5, pin 11 is Pin 1 is game medium number control data signal 1, 12th pin is game medium number control data signal 2, 13th pin is game medium number control data signal 3, and 14th pin is game medium number control data signal. 4, the 15th pin is for the game medium number control data signal 5, the 16th pin is for the game medium number control data signal 6, the 17th pin is for the game medium number control data signal 7, and the 18th pin is for the game medium number control data signal 7. The 19th pin is the game medium number control data signal 9, the 20th pin is the game medium number control data signal 10, and the 21st pin is the game medium number control data signal 11. The 22nd pin is for the game medium number control data signal 12, the 23rd pin is for the game medium number control data signal 13, the 24th pin is for the game medium number control data signal 14, and the 25th pin is for the game medium. 26th pin is game media count control data signal 16; 27th pin is game media count control data strobe signal; 28th pin is power interruption detection signal 1; The pin is a backup power supply, the 30th pin is a GND signal, the 31st pin is a GND signal, and the 32nd pin is a GND signal. The main control board P15 and the game media number control board P16 may be directly connected by a harness, or may be indirectly connected via a relay terminal board.

The game medium count control board P16 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board are connected via a 5-pin connector. Pin 1 is DC 5V, pin 2 is the VL signal, pin 3 is the transmit signal, pin 4 is the receive signal, and pin 5 is the GND signal. The game medium number control board P16 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board may be directly connected by a harness, or may be indirectly connected via a relay terminal board.

The game media count control board P16 and the game media count display board P13 are connected via a 14-pin connector. Pin 1 is the LED digit A signal, pin 2 is the LED digit B signal, pin 3 is the LED digit C signal, pin 4 is the LED digit D signal, and pin 5 is the LED digit D signal. The 6th pin is the game medium number display segment A signal, the 7th pin is the game medium number display segment B signal, the 8th pin is the game medium number display segment C signal, and the 9th pin. is the game medium number display segment D signal, the 10th pin is the game medium number display segment E signal, the 11th pin is the game medium number display segment F signal, and the 12th pin is the game medium number display segment G signal. , the 13th pin is the game medium number display segment P signal, and the 14th pin is the game medium number display segment P signal. Signals relating to the 1st to 14th pins are signals transmitted from the game medium number control board P16 to the game medium number display board P13. The game media count control board P16 and the game media count display board P13 may be directly connected by a harness, or may be indirectly connected via a relay terminal plate.

The game medium number control board P16 and the counting switch P7 are connected via a 2-pin connector. The number 1 pin is a count switch P7 signal, and is used to transmit a signal regarding the operation input of the count switch P7 to the game medium number control board P16 when the count switch P7 is operated. When the count switch P7 signal is input, part or all of the total score information managed by the game medium number control board P16 is sent to the lending unit. The 2nd pin is a GND signal and is used as GND. The game media count control board P16 and the counting switch P7 may be directly connected by a harness, or may be indirectly connected via a relay terminal plate.

The game ball rental device connection terminal board and the rental unit are connected via a 9-pin connector. Pin 1 is the LG signal, Pin 2 is the TXD- signal, Pin 3 is the RXD- signal, Pin 4 is the PSI signal, Pin 5 is the LG signal, Pin 6. is the TXD+ signal, pin 7 is the RXD+ signal, pin 8 is the VL signal, and pin 9 is the VL signal. The TXD+ signal and TXD- signal are used to transmit information from the gaming machine P (connecting terminal board for equipment for renting out game balls, etc.) to the renting unit. The RXD+ signal and the RXD- signal are used by the gaming machine P (terminal board for connection of equipment for renting out game balls, etc.) to receive information from the renting unit. The PSI signal is used as a signal connection confirmation signal for confirming the connection between the gaming machine P and the lending unit. The VL signal is used as an insulated DC5V power supply. Also, the harness connecting the 2nd pin and the 6th pin is twisted. The harness connecting the 3rd pin and the 7th pin is twisted. The game ball rental device connection terminal board and the rental unit may be directly connected by a harness, or may be indirectly connected via a relay terminal board.

The main control board P15 and the door relay board are connected via a 40-pin connector. Pin 1 is 5V DC, Pin 2 is 5V DC, Pin 3 is 5V DC, Pin 4 is 5V DC, Pin 5 is the GND signal, and Pin 6 is the LED digit 1 signal. pin 7 is the LED Digit 2 signal, pin 8 is the LED Digit 3 signal, pin 9 is the LED Digit 4 signal, pin 10 is the LED Digit 5 signal, pin 11 is the Pin 12 is the LED Segment 1B signal, Pin 13 is the LED Segment 1C signal, Pin 14 is the LED Segment 1D signal, and Pin 15 is the LED Segment 1E signal. , pin 16 is the LED segment 1F signal, pin 17 is the LED segment 1G signal, pin 18 is the LED segment 1P signal, pin 19 is the GND signal, and pin 20 is the GND signal. , pin 21 is the GND signal, pin 22 is the GND signal, pin 23 is the GND signal, pin 24 is the GND signal, pin 25 is the start switch sensor signal, pin 26 is the The pin is a GND signal, the 27th pin is a settlement switch signal, the 28th pin is a 1-piece insert switch signal, the 29th pin is a 3-piece insert sensor signal, and the 30th pin is a GND signal. Pin 31 is the left stop switch P4L sensor signal, pin 32 is the GND signal, pin 33 is the middle stop switch P4C sensor signal, pin 34 is the GND signal, pin 35 is the GND signal. , the 36th pin is the right stop switch P4R sensor signal, the 37th pin is the GND signal, the 38th pin is the GND signal, the 39th pin is the GND signal, and the 40th pin is the connector connection monitor. is a signal. The main control board P15 and the drum device board P17 may be directly connected by a harness, or may be indirectly connected via a relay terminal plate.

The main control board P15 and the drum device board P17 are connected via a 26-pin connector. No.1 pin is DC12V, No.2 pin is DC12V, No.3 pin is DC5V, No.4 pin is DC5V, No.5 pin is backup power supply, No.6 pin is left reel P18L motor Φ0 pin 7 is the left reel P18L motor Φ1 signal, pin 8 is the left reel P18L motor Φ2 signal, pin 9 is the left reel P18L motor Φ3 signal, pin 10 is the middle reel P18C The 11th pin is the middle reel P18C motor Φ1 signal, the 12th pin is the middle reel P18C motor Φ2 signal, the 13th pin is the middle reel P18C motor Φ3 signal, and the 14th pin is the right The 15th pin is the right reel P18R motor Φ1 signal, the 16th pin is the right reel P18R motor Φ2 signal, the 17th pin is the right reel P18R motor Φ3 signal, and the 18th pin is the left reel P18L sensor signal, the 19th pin is the middle reel P18C sensor signal, the 20th pin is the right reel P18R sensor signal, the 21st pin is the door switch signal, and the 22nd pin is the GND signal. The 23rd pin is a GND signal, the 24th pin is a GND signal, the 25th pin is a GND signal, and the 26th pin is a GND signal. The main control board P15 and the drum device board P17 may be directly connected by a harness, or may be indirectly connected via a relay terminal plate.

The main control board P15 and the setting/reset switch are connected via a 5-pin connector. In this embodiment, the setting change switch for changing the setting value in the setting change mode and the reset switch for canceling the error are the same switch, but they may be provided as different switches.

The main control board P15 and the sub-control board are connected via a 30-pin connector.

The rotary drum device board P17 and the power supply board are connected via an 8-pin connector.

The spinning drum board P17 and the left reel P18L motor are connected via a 4-pin connector. Pin 1 is the motor Φ0 signal, pin 2 is the motor Φ1 signal, pin 3 is the motor Φ2 signal, and pin 4 is the motor Φ3 signal. The spinning drum board P17 and the left reel P18L motor may be directly connected by a harness, or may be indirectly connected via a relay terminal plate.

The reel device board P17 and the left reel P18L sensor are connected via a 3-pin connector. The 1st pin is DC5V, the 2nd pin is the left reel P18L sensor signal, and the 3rd pin is the GND signal. The reel device board P17 and the left reel P18L sensor may be directly connected by a harness, or may be indirectly connected via a relay terminal plate.

The spinning drum device board P17 and the middle reel P18C motor are connected via a 4-pin connector. Pin 1 is the motor Φ0 signal, pin 2 is the motor Φ1 signal, pin 3 is the motor Φ2 signal, and pin 4 is the motor Φ3 signal. The spinning drum board P17 and the middle reel P18C motor may be directly connected by a harness, or may be indirectly connected via a relay terminal plate.

The reel device board P17 and the center reel P18C sensor are connected via a 3-pin connector. The 1st pin is DC5V, the 2nd pin is the middle reel P18C sensor signal, and the 3rd pin is the GND signal. The reel device board P17 and the center reel P18C sensor may be directly connected by a harness, or may be indirectly connected via a relay terminal plate.

The spinning drum board P17 and the right reel P18R motor are connected via a 4-pin connector. Pin 1 is the motor Φ0 signal, pin 2 is the motor Φ1 signal, pin 3 is the motor Φ2 signal, and pin 4 is the motor Φ3 signal. The spinning drum board P17 and the right reel P18R motor may be directly connected by a harness, or may be indirectly connected via a relay terminal plate.

The reel device board P17 and the right reel P18R sensor are connected via a 3-pin connector. The 1st pin is DC5V, the 2nd pin is the right reel P18R sensor signal, and the 3rd pin is the GND signal. The reel device board P17 and the right reel P18R sensor may be directly connected by a harness, or may be indirectly connected via a relay terminal plate.

The reel device board P17 and the door switch are connected via a 3-pin connector. The 1st pin is a door switch signal, the 2nd pin is a GND signal, and the 3rd pin is a GND signal. The reel device board P17 and the door switch may be directly connected by a harness, or may be indirectly connected via a relay terminal plate.

The door relay board and the display board are connected via a 14-pin connector.

The door relay board and the max bed are connected via a 6-pin connector.

The door relay board and the start switch P3 are connected via a 3-pin connector.

The door relay board and the stop switch P4 are connected via a 9-pin connector.

<Setting change mode>
The setting change mode is a mode in which a setting value can be selected (in other words, a setting value setting mode in which a setting value can be set). This information can be selected and stored in the set value information storage means. Here, a setting value display (not shown) for displaying the setting value is provided, and in the setting change mode, the hall clerk determines the setting value information based on the information displayed on the setting value display. be able to. The set value displayed on the set value display is any information from "1" to "6". ) is changing.

After the power switch is off (OFF) and the setting key switch is turned on (ON), the setting change mode is started (setting change is started) by turning on the power switch.

The conditions for starting the setting change mode are that the setting key switch is ON when the power is turned on, and that the game state when the power is turned on is not in a game (all reels are stopped and the game end processing is performed). after the start switch for the next game is operated) may be set as a condition. In any case, the condition under which the setting change mode can be started may be referred to as a condition for starting the setting change mode or a predetermined start condition.

After starting the setting change mode (starting setting change), it is possible to select which setting value information to use by operating the setting change switch. For example, if the setting change switch is operated while "2" is displayed on the set value display, "3" is displayed on the set value display. Further, when the setting change switch is operated while "6" is displayed on the set value display, "1" is displayed on the set value display. When the setting change mode is activated, a predetermined range of storage area of the first main control RAM is initialized. By this initialization processing, game states such as recoverable errors and advantageous sections are initialized, but the total score is not initialized. When initializing the total score, it is necessary to operate the total score clear switch separately.

After starting the setting change mode (starting setting change), the setting change switch is operated to select the setting value, the start switch P3 is operated to confirm the setting value, and then the setting key switch is turned off. , the setting change mode can be terminated (the setting change can be terminated). After finishing the setting change mode (finishing the setting change), it becomes possible to bet the entry point, and when the operation of the start switch P3 is accepted after the entry point is betted, the game can be executed.

If the setting change mode is terminated while "1" is displayed on the setting value display, "0" is stored as the setting value information and "2" is displayed on the setting value display. When the setting change mode is ended, "1" is stored as the setting value information, and when the setting change mode is ended while "3" is displayed on the setting value display, When "2" is stored and "4" is displayed on the set value display and the setting change mode is terminated, "3" is stored as the set value information and "5" is displayed on the set value display. If the setting change mode is ended when is displayed, "4" is stored as the setting value information, and if the setting change mode is ended while "6" is displayed on the setting value display, stores "5" as set value information.

Here, even in the setting change mode, communication between the lending unit and the game machine P is performed. In other words, even during the setting change mode, it is possible to receive a rental notification, which will be described later, and add points to the gaming machine P. Also, even during the setting change mode, it is possible to transmit a count notification, which will be described later, and count the points of the gaming machine P. FIG.

Further, it is possible to construct such that communication between the lending unit and the gaming machine P is not performed even in the setting change mode. In other words, even during the setting change mode, the game machine P does not receive the rental notification even if the rental switch of the rental unit is operated, so the points cannot be added to the game machine P. In this case, even if the count switch P7 is operated, the number of points of the game machine P cannot be counted because the count notification is not transmitted during the setting change mode.

In addition, during the setting change mode, the reel rotation processing by operating the start switch, the bet number setting processing by operating the bet switch, the settlement processing by operating the settlement switch, and the reel stop processing by operating the stop switch are disabled. The game cannot be progressed.

<Setting confirmation mode>
The setting confirmation mode is a mode in which the setting value can be confirmed, and the current setting value can be displayed on the setting value display.

When the setting key switch is turned on under the condition that the power switch is on, the setting confirmation mode can be started (setting confirmation is started). Note that, unlike the setting change mode, the setting values cannot be selected and changed in the setting confirmation mode. Further, when the setting key switch is turned on under the condition that one or more points are betted and the power switch is turned on, the setting confirmation mode can be prevented from starting. In other words, the setting confirmation mode is started when the setting key switch is turned on in a situation where no bet is placed (including automatic betting due to replaying).

After starting the setting confirmation mode (starting setting confirmation), by turning off the setting key switch, the setting confirmation mode can be ended (setting confirmation is ended).

Here, even in the setting confirmation mode, communication between the lending unit and the gaming machine P is performed. In other words, even during the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to receive a rental notification, which will be described later, and add points to the gaming machine P. Also, even during the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to transmit a count notification, which will be described later, and count the points of the gaming machine P. FIG.

Further, it is possible to construct such that communication between the lending unit and the gaming machine P is not performed even in the setting confirmation mode. In other words, during the setting confirmation mode, the game machine P does not receive the rental notification even if the rental switch of the rental unit is operated, so the game machine P cannot be given points. In this case, even if the count switch P7 is operated, the number of points of the game machine P cannot be counted because the count notification is not transmitted during the setting confirmation mode.

In addition, during the setting confirmation mode, the reel rotation processing by operating the start switch, the bet number setting processing by operating the bet switch, the settlement processing by operating the settlement switch, and the reel stop processing by operating the stop switch are disabled. The game cannot be progressed.

<Rental unit>
The gaming machine P in this embodiment is capable of communicating with the lending unit. The lending unit is provided with a lending switch, a replay (storage medal play) switch, a card return switch, a card slot, a banknote slot, and the like. Note that the lending switch and the replay switch may be a common switch. In addition, the card in the card return switch or the card insertion slot indicates a membership card owned by the user (issued for each store) or a visitor card used by a user who is not a member, and is simply referred to as a card. or called an information recording medium.

When the user inserts bills from the bill slot and operates the lending switch, a lending notification is sent to the game machine P. - 特許庁The lending unit is equipped with an SC board for receiving information from the game machine P, and the information transmitted by the game medium number control board P16 in the game machine P is configured to be received by the SC board.

When the stored medal information is stored in the card, a predetermined number of game medals are transmitted to the game machine P as a lending notification from the stored medal information stored in the card by operating the replay switch.

When the card return switch is operated, the card inserted through the card insertion slot is returned to the user.

<Hall computer>
When the SC board provided in the rental unit receives information from the game machine P, part of the information is transmitted from the rental unit to the hall computer. The information transmitted from the lending unit to the hall computer includes the number of put-in items, the number of pay-out items, the main control state, fraud information, and the like. When the hall computer receives information from the lending unit, it executes processing for displaying the information on a data display or the like outside the game machine. In addition, since the hall computer may simultaneously manage information from gaming machines using game medals as conventional objects, the number of insertions and the number of payouts can be calculated by receiving the number of pulses corresponding to the number of insertions and payouts. and the number of payouts. In other words, although the game machine P transmits the values of the number of inputs and the number of payouts as they are, the hall computer, which is the final receiving medium, receives them in pulses. A time lag occurs.

<Description of power-on processing controlled by the main control board P15 applicable to the present embodiment>
When the game machine is powered on, it is determined whether or not the power failure detection signal is ON, and if the power failure detection signal is not ON (if it is OFF), the function setting of the main control chip is performed, and the power is switched off. When the detection signal is ON, the determination of whether the power interruption detection signal is ON is looped (the following power-on processing is not executed).

The function setting of the main control chip executes the initial setting of the built-in registers.

Subsequently, the checksum of the RWM area is calculated and the power-off processing completion flag is checked to generate power-off restoration data.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the door switch signal and the setting key switch signal are ON. If the door switch signal is ON (the front door is open) and the setting key switch signal is ON. executes the setting change device processing, and if any switch is OFF, determines whether or not the power failure recovery data is normal.

Subsequently, if the power failure recovery data is not normal, an error is displayed, and the error state is looped until initialization processing is performed. If the power failure recovery data is normal, the stack pointer is restored based on the data saved at the time of power failure.

Then read the input port.

Subsequently, interrupt activation processing is executed. In the interrupt activation process, settings related to four channels 0 to 3 of the serial communication port are executed. Of these, channel 0 can be set for transmission and reception, channel 1 can be set for transmission only, channel 2 can be set for transmission only, and channel 3 is for transmission. It is possible to set only

To set channel 0 to allow reception, bit 7 of the setting area (a part of the internal register) corresponding to channel 0 is set to "1". Also, by setting bit 6 of the setting area (a part of the internal register) corresponding to channel 0 to "1", it is possible to set channel 0 to permit transmission. In this embodiment, since channel 0 is set only for reception, bit 7 is set to "1" and bit 6 is left as "0". By only permitting reception of this channel 0, the main control board can receive commands from the game medium number control board. In this embodiment, when a command is sent from the main control board to the game medium number control board, the serial communication port is not used because the command is sent by parallel communication. Commands may be transmitted using any one of channels 1 to 3 of the serial communication port. Even in this case, mutual communication can be performed without performing complicated processing such as adjusting the timing of a command for transmission and a command for reception by setting channel 0 to permit reception only.

In the interrupt activation process, the reception setting for channel 0 is set in the used area, and the transmission setting for channel 2 is set outside the used area. Channel 2 executes transmission settings to execute processing for outputting test signals from the main control board to the test IF board.

In the interrupt activation process, after setting channel 0 reception permission and transmission non-permission setting, the serial communication setting program outside the use area is called and transmission permission setting for channel 2 is executed. By setting the reception setting for channel 0 earlier than the transmission setting for channel 2 in this manner, it is possible to quickly prepare for the transmission of commands from the game medium number control board.

After the interrupt start processing is executed, the interrupt processing at the time of power failure is restored.

<Description on the game progress main process controlled by the main control board P15 applicable to the present embodiment>
The game-related processing in the gaming machine P includes interval interrupt processing (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “interrupt processing” or “timer interrupt processing”) that is executed periodically (every 2.235 ms in this embodiment); It is roughly divided into game progress main processing that is executed after the end of interval interrupt processing until the start timing of the next interval interrupt processing.

The outline of the game progress main processing of the main control board P15 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

<Processing when power is turned on>
When power is turned on, perform power-on processing. In the power-on processing, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the first main control RAM (checksum is calculated). When the first main control RAM is abnormal and the setting key switch is not on (when it is off), it becomes "when the power failure recovery cannot be performed normally", and an unrecoverable error occurs. When an unrecoverable error occurs, the subsequent game progress main processing is not executed. If an unrecoverable error occurs, turn off the power once, and then turn on the power while the setting key switch is on (initialize the predetermined area of the first main control RAM by changing the setting). It is possible to return by

In the power-on processing, when the first main control RAM is not abnormal and the setting key switch is not on (when it is off), the game start setting is performed.

In the power-on process, when the first main control RAM is normal and the setting key switch is on, a specific area of the first main control RAM is initialized, and then setting values can be changed in a setting change mode. transition to When the end condition of the setting change mode is satisfied, a game start set is performed.

In power-on processing, when the first main control RAM is abnormal (unrecoverable error) and the setting key switch is on, a predetermined area including at least a specific area of the first main control RAM is initialized. After that, it shifts to the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed. When the end condition of the setting change mode is satisfied, a game start set is performed.

Also, as a transition condition of the setting change mode, the case where the setting key switch is on has been explained, but when the setting key switch is on and the setting changeable state is set in the first main control RAM, It is also possible to shift to the setting change mode. The setting changeable state will be described later.

<Game start set>
First, a setting changeable state in which settings can be changed is set in the first main control RAM. When the setting changeable state is set, if the setting key switch is turned on when the power is turned on, the setting change mode is entered. When the setting change enabled state is not set (when the setting change disabled state is set), the setting change mode is not entered even if the setting key switch is turned on when the power is turned on.

Next, the 1-bet lamp, the 2-bet lamp, the 3-bet lamp, the game medium insertable lamp, the game executable lamp, and the re-game display lamp are turned off. Specifically, in the first main control RAM, a memory that manages turning on/off the 1-bed lamp, the 2-bed lamp, the 3-bed lamp, the game medium input possible lamp, the game execution possible lamp, and the replay display lamp. Set the lights-out data in the area.

Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the previous game is a replay.

When it is determined that the previous game is a replay, the replay display lamp is lit. Specifically, lighting data is set in a storage area in the first main control RAM that manages turning on/off of the replay indicator lamp. After that, the number of bets made in the previous game is automatically betted. For example, when the number of bets in the previous game is "3", the number of bets becomes "3" by automatic betting. After that, game media are accepted.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the previous game is not a replay, the game medium is accepted without turning on the replay display lamp or performing an automatic bet.

<Game media acceptance>
Acceptance of game media is control processing in a state (during game standby) in which betting processing using the total score and settlement processing of the number of bets can be executed.

In accepting the game media, first, it is determined whether or not the conditions for shifting to the setting confirmation mode are satisfied. Specifically, first, it is confirmed whether or not the number of bets is zero. If the number of bets is 0, the setting confirmation process is executed when the door is open and the setting key switch is ON (it may be determined that the setting key switch signal has risen). mode). When the number of bets is not 0 (for example, when the number of bets is 1), even if the door is open and the setting key switch is on, the setting confirmation process is not executed (the setting confirmation mode is not entered). .

If the conditions for shifting to the setting confirmation mode are not satisfied (if the setting confirmation mode is not entered), then it is determined whether there is a VL abnormality or a total score upper limit abnormality, which will be described later.

If there is a VL abnormality or a total score upper limit abnormality, regardless of the lighting status of the game medium insertable lamp and the game executable lamp, the game medium insertable lamp and the game executable lamp are turned off, and the subsequent processing ( Bet processing, settlement processing, etc.) are not executed. Here, turning off the game medium insertable lamp and the game executable lamp means turning off data stored in the storage area of the first main control RAM that manages turning on/off of the game medium insertable lamp and the game executable lamp. is to remember At this time, the lighting states of the first bed lamp, the second bed lamp, and the third bed lamp are maintained. For example, when a VL abnormality occurs in a situation where the 1st bed lamp is on, the 2nd bed lamp is on, and the 3rd bed lamp is off, the 1st bed lamp is on, the 2nd bed lamp is on, The 3rd bed lamp remains off. By adopting such a ramp mode, it is possible to inform the player of the current number of bets even if the VL abnormality or the total score upper limit abnormality occurs. On the other hand, the game medium insertable lamp and the game executable lamp are extinguished. By turning off the game executable lamp, the start switch can be operated even in a situation where, for example, a specified number of bets has been placed (in a situation where the 1-bet lamp, 2-bet lamp, and 3-bet lamp are lit). It is possible to notify that the game does not progress even if the In addition, by turning off the game medium insertable lamp, for example, even in a situation where the number of bets is 0 and the total score > the specified number, the bet switch can be operated under the betting situation. It is possible to notify the player that no bet will be made.

Even in a situation where a VL abnormality or a total score upper limit abnormality occurs during reception of game media, it is determined whether or not the conditions for shifting to the setting confirmation mode are satisfied. By configuring in this manner, even in a situation where VL abnormality or total score upper limit abnormality occurs, the setting value can be confirmed when the conditions for shifting to the setting confirmation mode are satisfied. It is possible to provide a game machine that can

If there is no VL anomaly or total score upper limit anomaly, settlement processing and input processing are executed.

In the settlement process, when it is determined that the settlement switch P6 has been operated, the bet points are settled.

In the input process, when it is determined that the MAX bet switch has been operated, the process of inputting 3 points is executed, and when it is determined that the 1 bet switch has been operated, the process of inputting 1 point is executed.

Here, the input processing (hereinafter also referred to as betting processing) executed by the main control board P15 will be described.

When the main control board P15 receives the operation of the MAX bet switch or the 1 bet switch (when it determines that there is rising data for the MAX bet switch or 1 bet switch), the maximum number of inputs (also referred to as the specified number ) and the current number of bets (also referred to as the current number of bets, the number of bets being bets, and the number of bets being bets) is subtracted and the result is "0" (zero flag = 1 case), the input processing is terminated, and if the result obtained by subtracting the maximum input number of "3" and the current input number is not "0" (when the zero flag is not 1), the input request number (also referred to as the bet request number) ).

In the setting processing of the number of input requests, if the operation of the 1 bet switch is accepted, the number of requests to be inserted is set to "1", and if the operation of the MAX bet switch is accepted, the number of possible inputs (current input When the number is ``0'', it is ``3'', when the current number of inputs is ``1'', it is ``2'', and when the current number of inputs is ``2'', it is ``1''. Set as the number of requests.

The set number of required insertions is transmitted to the game media number control board P16 as an insertion request command (also referred to as a bet request command). The command transmitted from the main control board P15 to the game medium number control board P16 consists of a first control command (1 byte) and a second control command (1 byte). and the second control command indicates data. For example, in the case of an input request command, the first control command is "20h" and the second control command is any value from "01h" to "03h". In other words, when the game media number control board P16 receives a command from the main control board P15, it can confirm from the first control command that it is an insertion request command, and from the second control command it can confirm the number of insertion requests. can be done.

After the main control board P15 has transmitted the insertion request command, if a command for the number of insertions is transmitted from the game media number control board P16, the main control board P15 adds one point to the bet number according to the number of insertion requests. . In addition, the 1st to 3rd bet lamps are sequentially turned on each time the number of bets is added by one point.

Further, when the main control board P15 transmits the input request command and then the game medium number control board P16 transmits the acceptance prohibition command, the input processing is terminated. Here, when the game media count control board P16 transmits a non-acceptable command to the main control board P15, the value (total score) stored in the total score storage area which is the RAM area of the game media count control board P16 ) is less than the number of input requests. For example, when the number of input requests is "3" and the value stored in the total score storage area is less than "3", the game media number control board P16 transmits the acceptance prohibition command to the main control board P15. When the number of insertion requests is "2" and the value stored in the total score storage area is less than "2", the game media number control board P16 transmits an acceptance prohibition command to the main control board P15. Also, when the number of insertion requests is "1" and the value stored in the total score storage area is less than "1", the game media number control board P16 transmits an acceptance prohibition command to the main control board P15.

Here, the settlement processing executed by the main control board P15 will be described.

When the main control board P15 receives the operation of the settlement switch P6 (when it judges that there is rising data of the settlement switch P6), it reads the number of bets inserted, and the number of bets inserted is "0". If the number of bets placed is "0", the settlement process is terminated. The 3-bet lamp, the replay display lamp, the game executable lamp, and the game medium insertable lamp are extinguished. It should be noted that since the settlement process cannot be executed during the replay, the settlement process is not executed even if the settlement switch P6 is operated during the replay. In other words, even if the settlement switch P6 is operated during a replay, the 1-bed lamp, 2-bed lamp, 3-bed lamp, game execution possible lamp, and game medium insertion possible lamp, including the regame display lamp, are not turned off.

After turning off the various lamps, set the settlement request command. As the value of the second control command of the settlement request command, the value of the register stored when reading the number of bets (also referred to as the settlement request number) at the time of execution of settlement processing is used. In other words, the number of settlement requests is any value from "01h" to "03h".

Next, the set settlement request command is transmitted to the game medium number control board P16.

After the main control board P15 has transmitted the settlement request command, when the game media number control board P16 transmits the settlement request command, the main control board P15 sends a command to start settlement processing to the sub control board P12. Clear the number of bets that have been placed, turn off the lit 1st to 3rd bet lamps, and send a command to finish the settlement process to the sub-control board P12. The sub control board P12 outputs a settlement sound to the speaker when a command to start settlement processing is transmitted from the main control board P15, and when a command to end settlement processing is transmitted from the main control board P15 End the output of the settlement tone output from the speaker.

Further, when the total score stored in the game medium number storage means is equal to or higher than the upper caution value "16369", the game medium number control board P16 detects the total score upper limit abnormality and The number control board P16 notifies the main control board P15 of the total score upper limit abnormality by command communication, and the main control board P15 transmits the total score upper limit abnormality command notified from the game medium number control board P16. If received, the main control board P15 sets the total score upper limit error.

In the case of the total score upper limit abnormality, the main control board P15 puts the game in a disabled state (a state in which the start switch P3, the bet switch P5, and the settlement switch P6 are disabled), so that the game medium number storage means stores. It is possible to prevent the current total score from exceeding the upper limit of “16383”. For example, in a situation where the game medium number storage means stores "16368", which is the value immediately before the upper limit caution value, and "3", which is the maximum bet number, has been bet, the settlement switch P6 is operated. Since the value stored in the game medium number storage means is "16371" even after the game medium number storage means is equal to or lower than the upper limit value of "16383", the game media stored in the game medium number storage means are stored in the game medium number storage means in the settlement process by operating the settlement switch P6. By not exceeding the upper limit even if the number is added, it is possible to prevent the game media exceeding the upper limit from disappearing. In this case, after the value stored in the number-of-games storage means has reached "16371", an abnormality in the total score upper limit is detected, and subsequent operation of the settlement switch P6 cannot be accepted, so that settlement processing cannot be performed. It's becoming After that, when the counter switch P7 is operated and the value stored in the game medium number storage means becomes "16368" or less, the total score upper limit abnormality is automatically canceled and the game is ready (start switch P3, The bet switch P5 and the settlement switch P6 are ready to accept).

In addition, in the case of the total score upper limit abnormality, the game is in a non-playable state, and the start switch P3, the bet switch P5, and the settlement switch P6 cannot be accepted. It is not necessary to disable the start switch P3 and the settlement switch P6 when the game is disabled. there is In addition, the payout process may be disabled in consideration of the possibility that an illegal total score upper limit error may occur during the game.

<Start lever acceptance? ＞
Subsequently, when a playable input point has been input, it is determined whether the start lever is accepted. In the start lever reception, it is confirmed whether or not the start switch P3 has been operated (confirmed whether or not the rise signal of the start switch P3 has been detected). If a playable insertion point has not been inserted, the process returns to the process of determining whether or not the conditions for shifting to the setting confirmation mode for accepting game media are satisfied, and loops during game standby.

Subsequently, when the start switch P3 is determined to have been operated as a result of confirming whether or not the start switch P3 has been operated by accepting the start lever when the entry point at which the game is possible has been turned on (YES at start lever acceptance? ), the setting change disabled state is set, and if it is determined that the start switch P3 has not been operated (if NO at start lever acceptance?), whether or not the conditions for shifting to the setting confirmation mode are satisfied. Returning to the process of judging, the game standby loop is executed.

<Internal lottery>
Subsequently, after setting the setting change disabled state, the internal lottery process is executed. In the internal lottery process, small wins, replays (also referred to as replays), BB, RB, loss, etc. are determined by lottery.

<Platform rotation processing>
Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the minimum game time (the time required to guarantee 4.1 seconds or more from the start of the reel rotation of a certain game to the start of the reel rotation of the next game) has elapsed, and the minimum game time is determined. If it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed, the reel rotation start processing is executed, and if it is determined that the minimum game time has not elapsed, the minimum game time determination processing is looped until the minimum game time has elapsed.

Subsequently, in the drum rotation start process, the process for rotating all the drums is executed, and the production of the number of frames to be shifted data is started until the operation of the stop switch can be accepted.

<Platform stop processing>
Subsequently, the reel stopping process is executed. In the reel stopping process, it is determined whether or not the stop switch operation can be accepted, and if the stop switch operation can be accepted, it is confirmed whether the stop switch has been operated (the start signal of the stop switch is detected). check whether the If it is not possible to accept the operation of the stop switch, the process returns to the creation of the number of frames to be shifted data.

Subsequently, as a result of confirming whether or not the stop switch has been operated, if it is determined that the stop switch has been operated, the stop position is determined from the stop acceptance position and the number of slewing frames. If it is determined that the stop switch has not been operated, the process returns to the step of creating the shift frame number data.

Subsequently, when the stop position is determined, it is determined whether or not all reels (three reels in this embodiment) have stopped, and when it is determined that all reels have stopped, processing by game state to run. If it is determined that all the reels have not stopped, the process returns to the creation of the data for the number of frames to be shifted.

<Process by game state>
The game state-specific processing is executed according to the main game state, which will be described later. For example, if the current game is AT (advantageous section game), and if the current game satisfies an arbitrary end condition of the advantageous section (for example, AT300 game execution), and the next game is a normal section game , the advantageous section end processing is executed. A control process for ending the advantageous section with an arbitrary end condition will be described later.

<Payment processing>
Subsequently, after executing the processing by game state, the payout processing is executed.

In the payout process, it is determined whether or not the re-game operation pattern has stopped, and when it is determined that the re-game operation pattern has stopped, the number of insertions at the start of the game is stored as automatic insertion number data, and the re-game operation pattern is stopped. If it is determined that the payout time has not passed, it is determined whether the value of the score giving timer is not "0", and if the value of the score giving timer is not "0", the score is scored. It waits until the value of the award timer becomes "0", and if the value of the score award timer is "0", the value of the score award timer is "27" ( 60.35 ms) is stored, a payout request command is set.

If a payout request command is sent from the game media count control board P16 after the main control board P15 has sent the payout request command, the main control board P15 sends the acquired number data indicating the acquired number (at the start of payout, " 0” is stored) is incremented, and the score giving data indicating the number of payouts (at the start of payout, the number of payouts corresponding to winning symbols is stored) is decremented. Then, if the value of the score giving data is not 0, the process of judging whether the value of the score giving timer is not "0" is repeated until the value of the score giving data becomes 0 again. The obtained number data is data for displaying the obtained number on the given number display section.

In addition, even if the game media number storage means stores "16368", which is the value immediately before the upper caution value is reached, and the maximum number of grants "15" is awarded, Since the value stored in the game medium number storage means is "16383", which is the upper limit value, even if the number of game media is added to the game medium number storage means in the payout process, the upper limit value is not exceeded. It is possible to prevent the game media exceeding the number from disappearing. In this case, after the value stored in the number-of-games storage means becomes "16383", the total score upper limit abnormality is detected, and subsequent operation of the bet switch P5 and operation of the start switch P3 cannot be accepted. As such, bet processing and processing related to the start of the game (rotation start processing of the spinning drum, etc.) cannot be performed. After that, when the counter switch P7 is operated and the value stored in the game medium number storage means becomes "16368" or less, the total score upper limit abnormality is automatically canceled and the game is ready (start switch P3, The bet switch P5 and the settlement switch P6 are ready to accept).

<Advantageous Section Clear Counter Management Processing>
Subsequently, when the current game is a game in an advantageous interval, a counter related to the end condition of the advantageous interval (for example, a storage area for managing the number of games played in the advantageous interval, a storage area for managing MY in the advantageous interval, etc.) ) is updated. When it is determined by the updating process that the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied, the next game is controlled to be in the normal section. When the advantageous section ends in the current game, the various storage areas of the first main control RAM used in the game in the advantageous section are initialized. On the other hand, if the current game is a game in the normal section, the counter updating process related to the conditions for ending the advantageous section is not performed. In other words, the advantageous section clear counter management process determines whether or not the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied when the advantageous section is reached. control.

<Operating state management process>
Subsequently, the operation state management processing of the replay, the accessory and the accessory continuous operating device is executed. One game ends by the execution of the operation state management process, and the process returns to the game start set of the game progress main process.

In addition, when it is determined that the start switch has been operated, the setting change disabled state is set so that the setting cannot be changed in the setting change disabled state. However, the configuration may be such that the setting can be changed (even after the start switch is operated).

<Description of interval interrupt processing controlled by the main control board P15 applicable to the present embodiment>
In interval interrupt processing, register save processing is first executed. In the register saving process, the register value is stored in the stack area so as to be able to return to the game progress main process that has been executed immediately after the interrupt process is finished.

Subsequently, interrupt flag clear processing is executed. In the interrupt flag clear processing, the interrupt flag is cleared (turned off) to permit interrupt processing.

Then, power-off processing is executed. In the power-off process, if the power-off detection signal is ON, a power-off process, which will be described later, is executed, and if the power-off detection signal is OFF, the power-off process is terminated.

Subsequently, an interrupt counter update process is executed. In the interrupt counter update process, the counter is updated for each interrupt process.

Subsequently, main control command acquisition processing is executed. In the main control command acquisition process, a command is received from the game media number control board P16 and stored in the main control command buffer.

Subsequently, input port read processing is executed. Input port read processing reads an input port.

Subsequently, the reel drive management process is executed. In the spinning drum drive management process, the drive process corresponding to the state is executed for all the reels.

Subsequently, a game media count control command output process is executed. In the game medium number control command output process, a command is stored in the game medium number command buffer in order to transmit the command to the game medium number control board P16.

Subsequently, port output processing is executed. In port output processing, data is set in the output port and output.

Subsequently, timer measurement processing is executed. In the timer measurement process, condition device output timer, payout count signal output timer, overflow test signal timer, reel stop reception wait timer, minimum game time management timer, score giving timer, setting change device start wait timer, bonus start start Updates various timers such as the time waiting timer and bonus operation end waiting timer.

Subsequently, error management processing is executed. The error management process checks for setting value errors and built-in random number errors. The error management process is a process of calling a program outside the usage area, and the error check is executed by the program outside the usage area.

Subsequently, gaming machine information management processing (main control) is executed. In the gaming machine information management process (main control), the information on the gaming machine fraud 1 and gaming machine fraud 2 is updated.

Subsequently, sub control command transmission processing is executed. In the sub-control command transmission process, a command to be transmitted to the sub-control board P12 is set.

When there is no command to be transmitted from the main control board P15 to the sub-control board P12 (when no command is stored in the transmission command buffer), the main control board P15 transmits a no-operation command to the sub-control board P12. It may be a mode to do. The no-operation command includes game state information and error state information, and the state of the main control board P15 can be known when the sub-control board P12 receives the no-operation command. For example, when the total score of the game media count control board P16 becomes a value that causes the total score upper limit abnormality and the main control board P15 receives the total score upper limit abnormality signal, a no operation command is transmitted to the sub control board P12. The sub-control board P12 may be configured to issue a notification prompting the operation of the counter switch as a process for the total score upper limit abnormality. As an example of the information contained in the no-operation command, it is desirable that the total score upper limit abnormality, the total score threshold reaching state, rental device communication abnormality 1 to 6, counting, VL abnormality, etc., be known.

Subsequently, LED display processing is executed. In the LED display process, a process of setting a 7-segment LED segment table to be displayed on the given number display unit, etc. is executed.

Subsequently, the sub notification data output process is executed. In the sub notification data output process, whether or not the stop switch and the MAX bed switch can be effectively operated, whether the door is open or closed, etc. are transmitted to the sub control board.

Subsequently, game media number control notification processing is executed. In the game media number control notification process, the game media number control notification information is updated.

Subsequently, register restoration processing is executed. In the register restore process, the information saved in the stack by the register save process is restored.

Subsequently, interrupt permission processing is executed.

<Description of power-off processing controlled by the main control board P15 applicable to the present embodiment>
When the power supply of the game machine P is turned off, or when the power interruption detection signal is turned on due to an external factor such as a power failure, power supply interruption processing is executed. If the power-off detection signal is not ON, the power-off process is terminated. When the voltage falls below a predetermined value, a power failure detection signal is input to a predetermined input port, and when a power failure detection signal is input to a predetermined input port twice consecutively in interrupt processing, it is determined that the power has been shut off. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the voltage falls below a predetermined value even once, an external interrupt occurs and the power failure detection signal is turned ON. may be configured.

When it is determined that the power failure detection signal is ON, the output ports (0 to 6) are turned OFF.

Subsequently, stack pointer save processing is executed.

Subsequently, a power-off processing completion flag and RWM checksum data setting processing are executed.

Subsequently, RWM write prohibition processing is executed.

Subsequently, it enters a state of waiting for a reset signal, and thereafter loops this state.

<Description of power-on processing, main loop processing, and power-off processing controlled by game media count control board P16 applicable to the present embodiment>
When the game machine is powered on, the function of the game medium number control chip is set. In the function setting of the game media number control chip, the initial setting of the built-in register is executed.

Subsequently, RWM initialization processing is executed. In the RWM initialization process, the power status flag is checked and the RWM checksum data is calculated. Also, the RWM area outside the use area is initialized by the program outside the use area. In other words, the initialization range of the RWM differs depending on whether it is normal or abnormal. In the normal case, the total score stored in the total score storage area is not included in the initialized range, but in the abnormal case, the total score is not included. The total score stored in the storage area is also included in the initialization range.

Check the power status flag and calculate the RWM checksum data (checking the power status flag and calculating the RWM checksum data may be collectively referred to as determination of RWM abnormality), and if it is determined to be normal, Counting flag, gaming machine information notification timer A, gaming machine information notification timer B, gaming machine information notification timer C, serial number, counting serial number, counting points, cumulative counting points, lending serial number, lending point receipt result, MY counter for calculation , MY counter for output, main control chip ID, main control chip manufacturer code, main control chip product code, etc. are initialized (for example, 0 is stored in each storage area). Note that the initialization of various storage areas is performed regardless of whether the setting key switch is on or not. After the RWM initialization process, it is determined whether or not the total score clear switch is ON. If it is determined to be ON, the total score is initialized. Do not initialize the total score. With such a configuration, whether or not to clear the total score can be executed based on the operation of the total score clear switch, so that the total score can be prevented from being cleared carelessly.

If it is determined to be abnormal as a result of the determination of RWM abnormality, the storage area (counting flag, game machine information notification timer A, game machine information notification timer B, and game machine information notification timer C , serial number, counting serial number, counting points, cumulative counting points, lending serial number, lending point receipt result, MY counter for calculation, MY counter for output, main control chip ID, main control chip manufacturer code, main control chip product code, etc.) In addition to the initialization, it also initializes the storage areas that store information about the total score and the role ratio monitor (for example, stores 0 in various storage areas). Note that the initialization of various storage areas is performed regardless of whether the setting key switch is on or not.

When it is judged normal as a result of RWM abnormality judgment, it is judged whether or not the total score clear switch is ON, but when it is judged as abnormal as a result of RWM abnormality judgment, the total score clear switch is ON is not determined. This is because the total score is initialized by the initialization process that is executed when the results of checking the power supply status flag and calculating the RWM checksum data are determined to be abnormal. In other words, even if the total score clear switch is operated, the power status flag is checked and the RWM checksum data is calculated, and if an abnormality is determined, initialization is executed based on the operation of the total score clear switch. do not. By configuring in this way, it is possible to avoid executing the initialization of the storage area storing the total score twice, and it is possible to shorten the processing time for the initialization processing.

Incidentally, as determination of an RWM abnormality, two of checking the power supply state flag and calculating the RWM checksum data are performed, but either one may be performed. Also, other checking methods may be used to determine the RWM abnormality.

Also, if it is determined to be abnormal as a result of the determination of RWM abnormality, RWM initialization processing at the time of power return abnormality (for example, all RWM areas of the second main control RAM (including the storage area storing the total score) ), it may be determined whether or not the total score clear switch is ON. Then, it may be configured such that it is determined whether or not the total score clear switch is ON after executing the RWM initialization process at the time of power return failure.

According to such a configuration, when an abnormality is determined as a result of executing the check of the power status flag and the calculation of the RWM checksum data (when the result of checking the power status flag is determined to be abnormal, or when the RWM checksum data If the result of executing the data calculation is judged to be abnormal), after executing the RWM initialization process at the time of the power return abnormality, it is judged whether the total score clear switch is ON or not. If the clear switch is ON, the storage area storing the total score is also initialized again, and although the initialization ranges may overlap, the total score can be reliably initialized.

In addition, if it is determined that the total score clear switch is ON after determining that the RWM abnormality is normal as a result of the determination, the total score clear timer 1 (also referred to as medal count clear timer 1) is started after initializing the total score. Save in a predetermined storage area in RWM.

In addition, if it is determined to be abnormal as a result of the RWM abnormality determination, after initializing the RWM area including the total score, the total score clear timer 2 (also referred to as medal number clear timer 2) is set to a predetermined storage area (total (storage area different from score clear timer 1).

The total score clear timer 1 is a timer for counting 60 seconds, and the total score clear timer 2 is also a timer for counting 60 seconds. Total score clear timer 1 and total score clear timer 2 are decrement counters, and when the counter value becomes 0, 60 seconds have been counted. Note that the total score clear timer 1 and the total score clear timer 2 may be increment timers.

When a value for counting 60 seconds is stored as the value of the total score clear timer 1, the total score clear 1 information is transmitted to the main control means until the value of the total score clear timer 1 becomes 0, and the total score is When a value for counting 60 seconds is stored as the value of the clear timer 2, total score clear 2 information is transmitted to the main control means until the value of the total score clear timer 2 becomes zero.

When the main control means receives the total score clear 1 information, the main control means transmits predetermined information based on the reception of the total score clear 1 information to the sub control means as part of the no-operation command, When the control means receives the total score clear 2 information, the main control means sends predetermined information based on the reception of the total score clear 2 information to the sub control means (based on the reception of the total score clear 1 information (information different from predetermined information) is transmitted as part of the no-operation command.

When the sub control means receives the predetermined information based on the reception of the total score clear 1 information, the notification based on the predetermined information based on the reception of the total score clear 1 information is executed, and the sub control means When the means receives predetermined information based on the reception of the total score clear 2 information, notification based on the predetermined information based on the reception of the total score clear 2 information is executed. The notification based on the predetermined information based on the reception of the total score clear 1 information is the display of "Total score cleared" on the liquid crystal display or the message "Total score cleared normally". For example, it may be displayed, or a dedicated BGM may be output from a speaker. The notification based on the predetermined information based on the reception of the total score clear 2 information is displayed on the liquid crystal display as "abnormal power recovery" or "the total score has been cleared due to an abnormality". , outputting a dedicated BGM from a speaker.

In addition, when the sub control means receives the predetermined information based on the reception of the total score clear 1 information or the predetermined information based on the reception of the total score clear 2 information, the notification time is the total score clear timer It may be until the value of 1 or the value of the total score clear timer 2 becomes 0 (until 60 seconds have passed since the total score clear timer 1 or the total score clear timer 2 was set), or the sub control means After receiving the predetermined information based on the reception of the score clear 1 information or the predetermined information based on the reception of the total score clear 2 information, the sub-control means sets an arbitrary notification time (for example, 180 seconds, etc. ) may be managed and notified.

By setting the total score clear timer 1 or the total score clear timer 2 by the game media count control means in this way, notification based on predetermined information based on the reception of the total score clear 1 information by the sub control means Alternatively, notification based on predetermined information based on the reception of total score clear 2 information can be executed. As a result, the administrator can know that the total score has been cleared and what triggered the total score to be cleared. It is possible to recognize the initialization of

If the total score clear switch is pressed when the power is turned on, the total score is initialized, the total score clear timer 1 is set, and then the total score clear status is set to 1 (the total score clear status is turned ON). ).

Here, the reason why the total score clear timer 1 and the total score clear timer 2 are set to 60 seconds is to reliably transmit the command from the main control means to the sub control means. This is when the difference between the time it takes for the main control means to start up and the time it takes for the sub-control means to start up when the game machine P is turned on takes about 30 seconds at the maximum (the sub-control means is the main control means). 30 seconds after activation of the means), and even in that case, notification based on predetermined information based on the fact that the sub-control means has received the total score clear 1 information for 30 seconds, or This is to enable execution of notification based on predetermined information based on the reception of total score clear 2 information. When the power is turned on, the main control means is started after the game medium number control means is started, but the time difference between the game medium number control means and the main control means is relatively short. Since it is time (about 1 second), the explanation is based on the time difference between the main control means and the sub control means until the power is turned on. It should be added that if the time difference is long before the start of time, it is necessary to set the timer value in consideration of the time difference.

Note that the total score clear timer 1 and total score clear timer 2 may be managed by flags such as total score clear flag 1 and total score clear flag 2 instead of timer management. After storing 1 in the storage area) initialization processing (processing to store 0 in the storage area) is required, and timer management automatically sets the timer value to the initial value (0) as time passes. It is possible to reduce the program capacity.

The time counted by the total score clear timer 1 and the total score clear timer 2 is not limited to 60 seconds, and is arbitrary as long as the sub control means can receive the information of the total score clear timer 1 or the total score clear timer 2. You can set the time for

If a power failure occurs in a situation where the value of the total score clear timer 1 is not 0 (situation where the total score clear timer 1 is counting), it will be judged normal as a result of the RWM abnormality judgment when the power is restored. In initialization processing, the total score clear timer 1 is initialized. Also, the total score clear timer 1 is initialized in the initialization processing after it is determined that there is an abnormality as a result of the determination of the RWM abnormality when the power is restored. In other words, when the power is turned off while the notification based on the total score clear 1 information is being executed, and the power is restored, the sub control means receives the total score clear 1 information. Do not perform informed notifications.

<When the power is turned on by pressing the total score clear switch after the power is turned off while the total score clear timer is counting 1>
If the total score clear timer 1 value is not 0 (the total score clear timer 1 is counting) and the power is turned off, and the power is restored while the total score clear switch is being operated, After the total score clear timer 1 is initialized in the initialization processing after determining that the RWM abnormality is normal as a result of the determination of the RWM abnormality when the power is restored, the total score clear switch is turned ON, so the total score initialization processing After executing , save total score clear timer 1. In other words, the total score clear timer 1 is initialized when the power is restored after the power has been cut off, but is configured to be set again when the total score clear switch is ON.

With this configuration, even if the total score clear timer 1 is initialized by power failure, the total score clear timer 1 is saved again by turning on the total score clear switch when the power is turned on. It is possible to cause the means to perform notification based on predetermined information based on the reception of total score clear 1 information.

<When the power is turned on by pressing the total score clear switch after the power is turned off while the total score clear timer is counting 1>
When the total score clear timer 1 value is not 0 (the total score clear timer 1 is counting), the power is turned off, and the total score clear switch is operated. If an abnormality is determined as a result of the RWM abnormality determination at the time of power recovery, the RWM area including the total score clear timer 1 is initialized in the initialization processing after it is determined as an abnormality as the result of the RWM abnormality determination at the time of power restoration. After that, even if the total score clear switch is operated, it is not determined whether the total score clear switch is ON or not, and the total score clear timer 2 is saved. In other words, the total score clear timer 1 is initialized when the power is restored after the power is cut off, and the total score clear timer 2 is set even when the total score clear switch is ON. .

With this configuration, when the total score clear switch is operated and the power supply is restored, the total score clear timer 2 is saved when it is determined that the RWM abnormality is abnormal. It is possible to execute notification based on predetermined information based on the reception of total score clear 2 information.

If a power failure occurs in a situation where the value of the total score clear timer 2 is not 0 (situation where the total score clear timer 2 is counting), it will be determined as normal as a result of the RWM abnormality judgment when the power is restored. After initializing the total score clear timer 2 in the initialization process, the total score clear timer 2 is reset (a value for counting 60 seconds is stored as the total score clear timer 2 value). Further, in the initialization processing after it is determined that there is an abnormality as a result of the RWM abnormality determination at the time of power restoration, the total score clear timer 2 is initialized and the total score clear timer 2 is set. In other words, if the power supply is interrupted while the notification based on the predetermined information based on the total score clear 2 information is being received and the power is restored, the total score clear 2 information is received. Notification based on predetermined information based on can be executed. In addition, if the power failure occurs in a situation where the value of the total score clear timer 2 is not 0 (the situation where the total score clear timer 2 is counting), it is judged normal as a result of the RWM abnormality judgment when the power is restored. In a later initialization process, the total score clear timer 2 may be reset without initializing the total score clear timer 2 .

<When the power is turned on by pressing the total score clear switch after the power is turned off while the total score clear timer is counting 2>
When the total score clear timer 2 value is not 0 (the total score clear timer 2 is counting), the power is turned off, and the total score clear switch is operated. If an abnormality is determined as a result of the RWM abnormality determination at the time of power recovery, the RWM area including the total score clear timer 2 is initialized in the initialization processing after it is determined as an abnormality as the result of the RWM abnormality determination at the time of power restoration. After that, even if the total score clear switch is operated, it is not determined whether the total score clear switch is ON or not, and the total score clear timer 2 is saved. In other words, the total score clear timer 2 is initialized when the power is restored after the power has been cut off, and the total score clear timer 2 is set even when the total score clear switch is ON. .

With this configuration, when the total score clear switch is operated and the power supply is restored, the total score clear timer 2 is saved when it is determined that the RWM abnormality is abnormal. It is possible to execute notification based on predetermined information based on the reception of total score clear 2 information.

<When the power is turned on by pressing the total score clear switch after the power is turned off while the total score clear timer is counting 2>
When the total score clear timer 2 value is not 0 (the total score clear timer 2 is counting), the power is turned off, and the total score clear switch is operated. If normality is determined as a result of the RWM abnormality determination at the time of power recovery, the RWM area including the total score clear timer 2 is initialized in the initialization process after the normality is determined as the result of the RWM abnormality determination at the time of power restoration. After that, since the total score clear switch is ON, the total score clear timer 1 is saved after executing the total score initialization processing, and the total score clear timer 2 is also saved. In other words, the total score clear timer 2 is initialized when the power is restored after a power failure, but the total score clear timer 1 and the total score clear timer 2 are set even when the total score clear switch is ON. configured to be When the total score clear timer 1 and the total score clear timer 2 are set, the predetermined information based on the reception of the total score clear 1 information and the predetermined information based on the total score clear 2 information are received. is sent to the sub-control board, and when the sub-control board receives predetermined information based on the reception of the total score clear 1 information and predetermined information based on the reception of the total score clear 2 information Notification based on total score clear 2 information is preferentially executed.

With this configuration, when the power is restored in a state where the total score clear switch is being operated, the total score clear timer 1 and the total score clear timer 2 are saved when the RWM abnormality is judged to be normal. However, it is possible to make the sub-control means execute notification based on predetermined information based on the reception of total score clear 2 information.

In addition, when the value of the total score clear timer 2 is not 0 (when the total score clear timer 2 is counting), the power is turned off, and when the total score clear switch is operated, the power is restored. If the total score clear timer 2 is not initialized in the initialization process after it is determined to be normal as a result of the determination of the RWM abnormality when the power is restored, the total score clear switch is ON, so the total score is initialized. After executing the clearing process, the total score clear timer 1 may be saved and the total score clear timer 2 may be saved again. is being counted), the power is restored in the situation where the total score clear switch is being operated, and the initialization process after determining that it is normal as a result of the RWM abnormality judgment when the power is restored If the total score clear timer 2 is not initialized, the total score clear timer 2 is stored again without judging whether or not the total score clear switch is ON even if the total score clear switch is operated. Also, in a situation where the value of total score clear timer 2 is not 0 (situation where total score clear timer 2 is counting) and the power is cut off, the total score clear switch is operated. Even if the total score clear timer 2 is initialized in the initialization process after the power is restored and it is determined to be normal as a result of the determination of the RWM abnormality when the power is restored, the total score is cleared even if the total score clear switch is operated. The total score clear timer 2 may be stored again without judging whether or not the clear switch is ON. In any case, it is possible to make the sub-control means execute notification based on predetermined information based on the reception of total score clear 2 information.

In addition, the main control means sends predetermined information based on the reception of the total score clear 1 information and predetermined information based on the reception of the total score clear 2 information to the sub control means as a no-operation command. Although the example of sending a part has been described, the command is not limited to the example of sending a part of the no-operation command. A command corresponding to predetermined information based on the information received may be directly sent. In other words, a command corresponding to the predetermined information based on the reception of the total score clear 1 information or a command corresponding to the predetermined information based on the reception of the total score clear 2 information is generated and stored in the command buffer. A command corresponding to predetermined information based on the reception of the total score clear 1 information or a predetermined information based on the reception of the total score clear 2 information when the command transmission timing comes. A mode of transmitting a command may be used.

Subsequently, a program outside the use area is called to turn on a test pattern display flag for displaying a test pattern on the role ratio monitor.

After that, interrupt processing is started. The interruption cycle of the game media number control board P16 in this actual mode is set to 1 ms.

Subsequently, a power failure detection process is executed to determine whether power failure has been detected. In the power-off detection processing, when power-off is detected, power-off processing is executed, and when power-off is not detected, interrupt processing is awaited.

When the power supply of the gaming machine P is turned off or the voltage drops below a predetermined value due to an external factor such as a power failure, a power failure detection signal is input to a predetermined input port. If a power failure detection signal is input to the input port of the power supply, it is determined to be power failure and the power failure detection signal is turned ON. In such a case, an external interrupt may be generated to turn ON the power-off detection signal.

Next, in the power-off processing when a power-off is detected in the power-off detection processing, if the power-on is normal, the power status flag is saved as normal, and if the power-on is abnormal, the power status flag is saved as abnormal. do.

Subsequently, RWM write prohibition processing is executed.

Subsequently, the reset signal waiting state is entered, and thereafter the reset signal waiting state is looped.

<Description of Interval Interrupt Processing Controlled by Game Media Number Control Board P16 Applicable to this Embodiment>
Interval interrupt processing (also called timer interrupt processing or interrupt processing) controlled by the game medium number control board P16 will be described with reference to FIG.

The interval interrupt process controlled by the game media number control board P16 is executed every 1 ms.

In interval interrupt processing, first, WDT (watchdog timer) clear and restart processing is executed. In the WDT clear & restart process, "55h" is stored as the WDT clear & restart word in the watchdog timer command register.

Subsequently, check data for checking the number of game medals (also referred to as total score check), which will be described later, is set. As check data, 16h is stored in the B register and 04h is stored in the C register.

Here, 16h stored in the B register corresponds to the maximum payout number (maximum award number) of 15 points, and 04h stored in the C register corresponds to the maximum bet number of 3 points.

Further, 16h stored in the B register corresponding to the maximum payout number is called range check data 1, and 04h stored in the C register corresponding to the maximum bet number is called range check data 2.

If the maximum number of payouts is 10 points, 11h is stored in the B register as the range check data 1, so the value of the range check data 1 can be said to be the value of the maximum number of payouts + 01h. If the maximum number of bets is 5 points, 06h is stored in the C register as the range check data 2, so the value of the range check data 2 can be said to be the value of the maximum number of bets+1h.

Subsequently, game medal count check processing is executed. The game medal count check process will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the game medal count check process is executed twice in the interrupt process. The game medal number check process executed at this timing is called the first game medal number check process for convenience, and the game medal number check process executed at another timing is called the second game medal number check process for convenience. However, the first game medal number check process and the second game medal number check process are the same module, and the check data and the execution timing are different.

In the first game medal count check process, first, the game medal count (total score) is acquired. Specifically, the total score data stored in the total score storage means is stored in the HL register.

Subsequently, in the confirmation data setting process, the acquired number of game medals is stored in the IX register. Specifically, after the value of the IX register is saved in the DE register, the value of the HL register is saved in the IX register. At this point, the total score data stored in the total score storage means is stored in the IX register. In other words, the latest total score data is stored in the IX register each time the game medal count check process is executed. In addition, since the total score data stored in the total score storage area is stored in the IX register by the power-on processing, the check can be performed accurately even immediately after the power is turned on.

Next, the number of game medals ≧ confirmation data? In the process, the difference between the acquired number of game medals and the confirmation data is determined. Specifically, the total score data stored in the IX register stored in the DE register is subtracted from the total score data stored in the total score storage means, which is stored in the HL register. If it is a carry (the bit corresponding to the carry flag of the flag register is 0) (the value of the HL register is greater than or equal to the value of the DE register), the game medal count change value calculation process is executed, and the value is stored in the HL register. The total score data stored in the IX register stored in the DE register is subtracted from the total score data stored in the total score storage means, and the non-carry result (corresponding to the carry flag of the flag register) is subtracted. If the bit is 1) (when the value of the HL register is smaller than the value of the DE register), the value of the DE register and the value of the HL register are exchanged, and then the range check data 2 is set (04h stored in the C register is B register) and execute the game medal number change value calculation process.

In other words, the total score data stored in the IX register stored in the second game medal count check process and the total score data stored in the total score storage means called in the first game medal count check process are combined. This is the process of checking the difference.

Subsequently, in the game medal number change value calculation process, the total score stored in the IX register stored in the DE register is calculated from the total score data stored in the total score storage means stored in the HL register. Subtract the data and store the result of the subtraction in the HL register.

Subsequently, game medal number change value < range check data? In the processing, range check data 1 or range check data 2 stored in the B register is subtracted from the subtraction result stored in the HL register, the subtraction result is stored in the HL register, and there is a carry as the subtraction result ( If the bit corresponding to the carry flag in the flag register is 1), the first game medal number check process is terminated. 200 is stored as the timer value in the external increase/decrease timer storage area, and the first game medal count check process is terminated.

In other words, when range check data 1 is stored in the B register (when 16h is stored), the total score data stored in the IX register stored in the second game medal number check process is Since it is smaller than or not different from the total score data stored in the total score storage means called in the first game medal number check process, the first game medal number check is performed from the second game medal number check process. This means that the number of game medals has increased during processing, or the number of game medals has not increased or decreased.

Assuming that the number of game medals increases between the second game medal number check process and the first game medal number check process, the main control means adds the number of game medals (given points) by the payout process to the game medium control means. It is possible that there was

Assuming that the number of game medals has not increased or decreased between the second game medal number check process and the first game medal number check process, the main control means sends the game medium control means a score increase process by a payout process. It is conceivable that the main control means has not sent the game medium control means to reduce the score by the betting process.

Therefore, the maximum value obtained by subtracting the total score saved in the second game medal number check process from the total score saved in the first game medal number check process in a normal environment is 15, which is the maximum number of payouts. , setting 16 as the range check data 1, there is no situation where there is a carry as a result of 16-15.

Therefore, game medal number change value < range check data? In the process, if a carry occurs, the total score may increase due to fraudulent behavior, so 200 is stored as the timer value in the out-of-range increase/decrease timer storage area.

When 200 is stored as the timer value in the out-of-range increase/decrease timer storage area, an abnormal command is transmitted to the sub-control means via the main control means, and by executing an abnormality notification based on the abnormal command, fraudulent actions can be performed. can be notified to the surroundings.

If range check data 2 is stored in the B register (04h is stored), the total score data stored in the IX register stored in the second game medal number check process is 1. Since it is larger than the data of the total score stored in the total score storage means called in the second game medal count check process, the game medal count is determined between the second game medal count check process and the first game medal count check process. number has decreased.

When the number of game medals decreases between the second game medal number check process and the first game medal number check process, the main control means sends the game medium control means to subtract the number of game medals (throwing point) by betting processing. It is possible that there was

Since the DE register value and the HL register value are exchanged before range check data 2 is set, even if range check data 1 is set, even if range check data 2 is set, However, the game medal number change value calculation process can be executed with the same command. In other words, the total score stored in the IX register stored in the DE register is converted from the total score data stored in the total score storage means stored in the HL register in the game medal number change value calculation process. Subtracting data always results in a positive value.

Therefore, the maximum value obtained by subtracting the total score saved in the second game medal number check process from the total score saved in the first game medal number check process in a normal environment is 3, which is the maximum number of bets. , 04h is set as the range check data 2, so there is no situation where there is a carry as a result of 4-3.

Therefore, game medal number change value < range check data? In the process, if a carry occurs, the total score may decrease due to fraudulent behavior, so 200 is stored as the timer value in the out-of-range increase/decrease timer storage area.

When 200 is stored as the timer value in the out-of-range increase/decrease timer storage area, an abnormal command is transmitted to the sub-control means via the main control means, and by executing an abnormality notification based on the abnormal command, fraudulent actions can be performed. can be notified to the surroundings.

Subsequently, input port read processing is executed. In the input port reading process, input port 3 is read.

The input ports of the game medium number control board P16 are: game medium number control data signals 1 to 8 for input port 1; game medium number control data signals 9 to 16 for input port 2; A control data strobe signal, a power failure detection signal, a count button signal, a VL signal, and a medal count clear button signal can be input.

Input ports 1 and 2 are input ports used for parallel communication between the main control board P15 and the number-of-game-media control board P16, and the input ports are read when a command is received from the main control board P15. Input port 1 receives a command indicating the type of information, and input port 2 receives a command indicating information data.

The input port 3 is an input port used for serial communication with various switches, rental units, and the main control board P15, and the input port is read by the game media number control command reception process.

In the input port reading process, rising edge data of input port 3 is created from the previous level data of input port 3 and the current level data of input port 3 .

Next, when the bit data to which the power failure detection signal of the input port 3 is input is 1, 1 is added to the value of the power failure check counter. Then, the value of the power interruption check counter is checked, and if the value of the power interruption check counter is 7, it is determined that the power interruption has been detected, and 1 is stored in the power interruption detection flag. ON).

Next, the VL signal is checked to confirm connection failure with the rented unit. First, the VL abnormality flag is set to 0 (the VL abnormality flag is cleared). When the bit data to which the VL signal of the input port 3 is input is 0, FFh is stored in the VL abnormality flag (1 is subtracted from the value of the VL abnormality flag and stored). If the bit data to which the VL signal of the input port 3 is input is 1, it is normal, so the following processing is executed.

Subsequently, gaming machine information management processing (game media count control) is executed. In the game machine information management process (game medium number control), processes such as updating the game machine information notification timer A, the game machine information notification timer B, and/or the game machine information notification timer C are executed. As a result of updating the game machine information notification timer A, the game machine information notification timer B, and/or the game machine information notification timer C, the notification timing of hall control/fraud monitoring information, game machine installation information, or game machine performance information has come. If so, the gaming machine information at the notification timing is transmitted to the lending unit. Specific processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Subsequently, counting control processing is executed. In the counting control process, the counting process is executed according to the operation status of the counting switch P7. Specific processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Subsequently, a lending notification reception process is executed. In the lending notification reception process, lending processing is executed according to the lending notification received based on the operation status of the lending switch of the lending unit. Also, a program outside the use area is called, and flags for rented device communication errors 2 to 6 are set according to the communication state. Specific processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Subsequently, check data for checking the number of game medals for the second time is set. As check data, 51h is stored in the B register and 51h is stored in the C register.

Here, 51h stored in the B register corresponds to the maximum number of loaned medals (maximum loaned points) of 50 points, and 51h stored in the C register corresponds to 50 points which is the maximum countable medal number (maximum countable points). Yes.

Subsequently, the second game medal number check process (game medal number check process executed at the second timing in the same interrupt process) is executed. The second game medal number check process is different only in the set check data, has the same modules as the first game medal number check process, and executes the same commands.

In the first game medal number check process, the increase/decrease value of the total score from the second game medal number check process to the first game medal number check process is checked. In the process, the increase/decrease value of the total score from the first game medal number check process to the second game medal number check process is checked.

In other words, in the first game medal number check process, it is checked whether or not the increase/decrease value is normal in consideration of the number of bets and the number of payouts based on the command received from the main control means. In the game medal number check process, it is checked whether or not the increase/decrease value is normal by considering the counted medal number based on the command transmitted to the lending unit and the lending medal number received from the lending unit.

Next, the processing for managing the pressing time of the counting switch P7 (hereinafter also referred to as counting execution flag setting processing) will be described with reference to FIG.

Note that the counting execution flag setting process means that when the player is operating (depressing) the counting switch P7, or when the player is releasing (not depressing) the counting switch P7, the count switch P7 is pressed. It is processing for setting a flag indicating whether a short-pressing operation has been accepted as the operation of the counter switch P7 or whether a long-pressing operation has been accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7. A counting execution flag setting process that employs a process relating to the counting button state, which will be described later, is unnecessary.

First, for "count switch ON?", it is determined whether or not the count switch P7 is operated. As a method for determining whether or not the counting switch P7 is operated, as described above, before executing the counting execution flag setting process, the counting input to the input port 3 in the interrupt process of the game medium number control board P16 is performed. The input data (ON or OFF) of the switch P7 is stored in a storage area (also referred to as input port 3 level data storage area) in the RWM area of the game media number control board P16, and is stored in this storage area. If the input data of the counter switch P7 is a value indicating ON, it is determined YES, and if the input data of the counter switch P7 stored in the storage area is a value indicating OFF, it is determined NO. can be done.

“Count execution timer (also called “count button timer”)=0? ' determines whether or not the timer value that measures the time during which the counting switch P7 is operated is '0'. As a method for measuring the time during which the counting switch P7 is operated, for example, a counting execution timer storage area (_TM_CAL_ACT) for measuring the time during which the counting switch P7 is operated is set in the RWM area of the game medium number control board P16. If the value stored in the storage area is "0", then YES is determined, and the value stored in the storage area is a value other than "0" (for example, "200" or "500"). ), it can be determined as NO. Note that the counting execution timer storage area is a storage area capable of storing 2-byte data (0 to 65535) so that values from "0" to "500" can be stored.

“Count execution flag ≠ 0?” determines whether or not the count execution flag is “0”. Here, the counting execution flag is a flag for managing whether a short-pressing operation is accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7 or a long-pressing operation is accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7. For example, a counting execution flag storage area (_FL_CAL_ACT) for managing the counting execution flag is provided, and when the counting execution flag storage area is "0" (when the counting execution flag is 0), the counting switch P7 is still operated. indicates a situation in which it is not determined whether a short-press operation is accepted as an operation of the counting switch P7 or a long-press operation is accepted as an operation of the counting switch P7, and the count execution flag storage area is "1" (counting execution If the flag is 1), it indicates a situation in which it is determined that a short press operation has been accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7, and if the counting execution flag storage area is "2" (when the counting execution flag is 2) ) indicates a situation in which it is determined that a long press operation has been accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7.

Therefore, "counting execution flag ≠ 0?" is determined to be YES, and if "0" is stored in the counting execution flag storage area, it is determined to be NO.

The "save count execution flag=1" is a process of saving "1" in the count execution flag storage area. In other words, this is a process for determining that a short press operation has been received as the operation of the counting switch P7. For example, when the count switch P7 is not operated, the count execution timer storage area is "200", and the count execution flag storage area is "0", "1" is stored in the count execution flag storage area. do.

'Clear counting execution timer' is a process for resetting the counting execution timer storage area to an initial value (for example, '0'). As is clear from FIG. 39, the "count execution timer clear" is executed when the count switch P7 is not operated, and not only when "1" is stored in the count execution flag storage area, but also when "1" is stored in the count execution flag storage area. Even if "1" is not stored in the count execution flag storage area (for example, "1" or "2" is already stored in the count execution flag storage area), it is executed. That is, when the counting switch P7 is not operated, the counting execution timer storage area is set to the initial value, and when the counting switch P7 is operated again, the counting execution timer storage area is reset from the initial value. It is configured so that the value of

"Count execution timer ≥ 500" determines whether or not the timer value measuring the time the count switch P7 is being operated is "500" or more (the time the count switch P7 is being operated is 500 ms or more). . For example, if the value of the counting execution timer storage area is "500", it is determined to be YES, and if the value of the counting execution timer storage area is less than "500" (specifically, if the value of the counting execution timer storage area is If the value is "0" to "499"), it is judged as NO.

"Count execution timer +1" is a process of adding "1" to the timer value measuring the time during which the counting switch P7 is operated (updating the time during which the counting switch P7 is operated). As is clear from FIG. 39, when "count execution timer≧500" is YES, "count execution timer +1" is not executed. In other words, after the value of the counting execution timer storage area becomes "500", the value of the counting execution timer storage area is maintained at "500", so the value of the counting execution timer storage area is set to "0 to 500". can be accommodated. That is, since the time during which the counting switch P7 is operated does not exceed 500 ms (the value in the counting execution timer storage area is greater than 500), the value stored in the counting execution timer storage area overflows. configured not to. With this configuration, for example, when the maximum value that can be stored in the counting execution timer storage area is "65535", the "counting execution timer + 1" is executed, so that the counting execution timer storage area When the value becomes "0" and the counting switch P7 continues to be operated thereafter, the value in the counting execution timer storage area is updated, and when the value in the counting execution timer storage area is less than "500", the counting switch P7 is released. In this case, it is possible to prevent "1" from being stored in the counting execution flag storage area (determining that the short-pressing operation has been accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7).

'Save count execution timer' is a process of saving the value updated by 'count execution timer + 1' in the count execution timer storage area. For example, when the value of the count execution timer storage area is "0", the value of the count execution timer storage area is "1", and when the value of the count execution timer storage area is "499", the count The value of the execution timer storage area becomes "500".

The "save count execution flag=2" is a process of saving "2" in the count execution flag storage area. In other words, this is a process of determining that a long press operation has been accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7. Specifically, when it is determined that the timer value measuring the time during which the counting switch P7 is operated is "500" or more (the time during which the counting switch P7 is operated is 500 ms or more), the counting execution flag Save "2" in the storage area.

As described above, the counting execution flag setting process determines whether the short-pressing operation is accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7 or the long-pressing operation is accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7. Processing for measuring the operation time of the switch P7 is performed.

Subsequently, returning to the interruption process, the game medium number control command reception process is executed. In the game media number control command reception processing, reception processing of commands from the lending unit and the main control board P15 is executed. When a gaming machine fraudulent command is received from a rental unit, a program outside the use area is called to accumulate and store fraudulent information.

Also, when a role product operating state command is received from the main control board P15, a program outside the use area is called to save the role product operating state.

Also, when a ratio display command is received from the main control board P15, a program outside the use area is called to save the role ratio monitor type number.

Also, when a start lever reception command is received from the main control board P15, the program in the use area stores the entry point information used in the game information of hall control/fraud monitoring information in the data area (_WK_MDL_IN) of the use area. Then, the entry point information for calling the program outside the use area and displaying it on the role ratio monitor is stored in the data area (_SN_MDL_IN) outside the use area. In addition, the entry point information used in hall control/fraud monitoring information is "3" (if the entry point of the previous game is 3 points, the entry point of the previous game is is 2 points) is stored, and the input point information for displaying on the role ratio monitor is stored as "0" at the time of replay operation (replay winning in the previous game).

Further, when a command to stop all reels is received from the main control board P15, the program in the use area stores the point information used in the game information of hall control/fraud monitoring information in the data area (_WK_MDL_OUT) of the use area. In addition, the assigned point information for calling the program outside the use area and displaying it on the role ratio monitor is stored in the data area (_SN_MDL_OUT) outside the use area. It should be noted that the given point information used in hall control/fraud monitoring information is "3" (if the previous game gave 3 points. is 2 points) is stored, and the assigned point information for displaying on the role ratio monitor is stored as "0" at the time of replay operation (replay winning in the previous game).

It should be noted that (_SN_MDL_OUT), which is a data area outside the use area for giving point information to be displayed on the role ratio monitor, includes the cumulative instructed role ratio, the continuous role ratio between the latest 6000 games, the latest 6000 This information is necessary for determining the character ratio between games, the total consecutive character ratio, and the total character ratio. For example, a storage area capable of storing the cumulative number of given points, a storage area capable of storing the cumulative number of awards given when activating the cumulative role, and a storage area capable of storing the cumulative number of awards given when activating the role. By adding the information stored in (_SN_MDL_OUT), a storage area capable of storing the cumulative number of awards given, a storage area capable of storing the cumulative number of bonuses awarded when the bonus is activated, and a storage area capable of storing the cumulative number of bonuses awarded when the bonus is activated. It becomes possible to update the storage area that can store the number.

Also, when Bit 3 of game machine fraud 2 is "1" when a command to stop all reels is received from the main control board P15 (the total score is cleared by operating the total score clear switch when the power is turned on) If the total score clear status is ON), a program outside the use area is called to set (clear) Bit 3 of gaming machine fraud 2 to "0".

Further, when a command to stop all reels is received from the main control board P15, calculations for game performance information and role ratio monitoring are executed.

Also, when receiving an input request command from the main control board P15, it determines whether the value of the second control command is "0", and if it determines that it is "0", it performs an abnormal command reception process. If it is determined not to be "0", it is determined whether or not it exceeds "3" ("4" or more). If it is determined that the value of the second control command exceeds "3", the abnormal command reception process is executed, and if it is determined that it does not exceed "3" (below "3"), the VL abnormality flag is not "0". or not. If it is determined that the VL abnormality flag is "0", the acceptance rejection set process is executed, and if it is determined that the VL abnormality flag is not "0", the result of subtracting the number of input requests from the total score is a negative value. It is determined whether or not there is (whether the carry flag is 1 or not). If the result of subtracting the number of input requests from the total score is determined to be a negative value, the acceptance rejection set process is executed. If the result of subtracting the number of input requests from the total score is determined to be A value obtained by subtracting the number of input requests from the score is stored as the total score. Then, after storing the number of input requests in the input point storage area for transmitting hall control/fraud monitoring information, a command to be transmitted to the main control board P15 is set. The acceptance rejection set process is a process of setting a value indicating an abnormality as the data of the second control command to be transmitted to the main control board P15 (for example, setting the most significant bit of the data of the number of requests for processing to set). In addition, the abnormal command reception processing includes a value indicating communication abnormality (eg, FFh) as the type of the first control command to be transmitted to the main control board P15, and a value indicating abnormality (eg, FFh) as the data of the second control command. ) is set. After setting the command, the command is transmitted to the main control board P15 at any time.

Further, when receiving the settlement request command from the main control board P15, it determines whether or not the value of the second control command is "0". If it is determined not to be "0", it is determined whether or not it exceeds "3" ("4" or more). If it is determined that the value of the second control command exceeds "3", the abnormal command reception process is executed, and if it is determined that it does not exceed "3" (below "3"), the VL abnormality flag is not "0". or not. If it is determined that the VL anomaly flag is "0", the reception rejection setting process is executed. Determine whether or not it exceeds the upper limit (16383), and if it is determined that the value obtained by adding the number of settlements to the current total score exceeds the total score upper limit, execute the reception rejection set process, When it is determined that the value obtained by adding the settlement number does not exceed the total score upper limit, the value obtained by adding the settlement number to the current total score is stored as the total score. Then, after storing the value obtained by subtracting the number of settlement requests from the value in the input point storage area for transmitting hall controller/fraud monitoring information, a command to be transmitted to the main control board P15 is set. Note that the acceptance rejection set process is a process of setting a value indicating an abnormality as the data of the second control command to be transmitted to the main control board P15 (for example, setting the most significant bit of the processing to set). In addition, the abnormal command reception processing includes a value indicating communication abnormality (eg, FFh) as the type of the first control command to be transmitted to the main control board P15, and a value indicating abnormality (eg, FFh) as the data of the second control command. ) is set. After setting the command, the command is transmitted to the main control board P15 at any time.

When it is determined that the VL abnormality flag is not "0", it is determined whether or not the value obtained by adding the number of settlements to the current total score exceeds the upper limit value (16383) of the total score. When the upper limit caution value is reached, the settlement switch P6 becomes unacceptable, and in the normal assumed situation, the total score will not exceed the upper limit value due to settlement processing, so it was determined that the VL abnormality flag was not "0". Later, without judging whether the value obtained by adding the number of settlements to the current total score exceeds the total score upper limit value (16383), the settlement request is made from the value of the input point storage area for transmitting hall control/fraud monitoring information. A process of storing the value obtained by subtracting the number may be performed.

Also, when receiving a payout request command from the main control board P15, it determines whether the value of the second control command is not "1", and if it is determined not to be "1", it executes an abnormal command reception process. , is "1", it is determined whether or not the VL abnormality flag is not "0". If it is determined that the VL anomaly flag is "0", the reception rejection setting process is executed, and if it is determined that the VL anomaly flag is not "0", it is determined whether or not the total score is the upper limit value. When it is determined that the total score is the upper limit value, reception rejection set processing is executed, and when it is determined that the total score is not the upper limit value, a value obtained by adding "1" to the current total score is stored as the total score. Then, after updating the value of the assigned point storage area for transmitting hall control/fraud monitoring information, a command to be transmitted to the main control board P15 is set. The acceptance rejection set process is a process of setting a value indicating an abnormality as the data of the second control command to be transmitted to the main control board P15 (for example, setting the highest bit of the received payout request number data to "1" processing to set). In addition, the abnormal command reception processing includes a value indicating communication abnormality (eg, FFh) as the type of the first control command to be transmitted to the main control board P15, and a value indicating abnormality (eg, FFh) as the data of the second control command. ) is set. After setting the command, it is transmitted to the main control board P15 at any time.

If it is determined that the VL abnormality flag is not "0", it is determined whether or not the total score reaches the upper limit. becomes unacceptable, and the payout process does not cause the total score to exceed the upper limit under normal circumstances. may be stored as the total score by adding "1" to the current total score.

Note that the game medium number control command reception process may be performed in the reception interrupt process instead of the timer interrupt process. The reception interrupt process is a process executed when the main control means transmits a command and the game medium number control means receives the command, and is executed with priority over the timer interrupt.

Subsequently, state control processing is executed. In the state control processing, it is determined whether or not the VL abnormality flag, which is set when the VL signal is OFF, is ON, and whether or not the serial number abnormality flag, which is set when the serial numbers are not continuous, is ON. judgment processing of whether or not is executed. In other words, the VL abnormality flag is turned ON when the gaming machine P and the lending unit are not connected. When the gaming machine P and the lending unit are not connected, the gaming machine P is powered on and activated, but the lending unit is not powered on, or communication between the gaming machine P and the lending unit is not connected. This applies to situations in which an abnormality occurs.

If the value stored in the out-of-range increase/decrease timer storage area is not 0, the control state signal is set to cause the main control means to execute notification processing regarding the out-of-range increase/decrease timer.

Subsequently, LED display processing is executed. In the LED display process, display control of the game medium number display portion P9 is executed.

Subsequently, ratio control processing is executed. In the ratio control process, a program outside the use area is called to update various counters for calculating the display contents of the role ratio monitor, and the display process of the role ratio monitor is executed.

Subsequently, timer management processing is executed. In the timer management process, a program outside the use area is called to update the rental notification reception timer 1 and the rental notification reception timer 2. FIG. A rental notification reception timer 1 and a rental notification reception timer 2 are used to determine a communication abnormality.

Subsequently, interrupt permission processing is executed.

<Description of Coordination Method between Boards at Power-Off and Power-On Applicable to this Embodiment>
In the game described in this embodiment, when a power cut occurs, the main control board P15 determines whether or not the power is cut by two interrupts, and the game medium number control board P16 determines whether or not the power is cut by seven interrupts. to judge. In other words, the main control board P15 judges that the power is turned off 4.47 ms (2.235 ms×2 times) after the voltage falls below the predetermined value, and the game media number control board P16 determines 7 ms after the voltage falls below the predetermined value. After (1 ms x 7 times), it is determined that the power is turned off.

Therefore, when the power is cut off, the main control board P15 can execute the power cut-off processing before the game medium number control board P16. The board P16 can receive commands from the main control board P15.

When the power is turned on, the main control board P15 activates the user mode after activating the security mode for a predetermined period (for example, 2883.54 ms), and the game media count control board P16 activates the user mode without activating the security mode. to start. Alternatively, the game media number control board P16 activates the user mode after activating the security mode for a period shorter than a predetermined period (for example, 500 ms). The user mode is a mode for executing a game-related program, and the main control board P15 and the game medium number control board P16 first execute power-on processing.

Therefore, since the game media number control board P16 can be activated before the main control board P15 when power is turned on, the game medium number control board P16 can receive a command from the main control board P15.

Also, if the configuration is such that the power-off process is executed by an external interrupt after the power-off is detected, the power-off process will be executed even in a situation where the voltage drops to a predetermined value for only a moment (so-called momentary power failure). be done. In this case, since the WDT (watchdog timer) set at the time of power-off processing is not cleared after executing the power-off processing, a reset signal is output, and the main control board P15 keeps the security mode for a predetermined period (for example, 2883. 54 ms) Power-on processing is executed after activation, and power-on processing is executed without activating the security mode of the game media count control board P16. As a result, even if power-off processing is executed due to an instantaneous interruption, the game media number control board P16 can be activated before the main control board P15. can receive commands from

Further, for example, the total score stored in the total score storage means is 100 points, and immediately before the game machine P executes the payout process of 15 points, power failure occurs and the power failure processing is executed, and the total score is When the game machine P is turned on while the clear switch is pressed, the game medium number control board P16 is activated first, thereby initializing the total score managed by the game medium number control board P16. 15 points are added to the total score when the main control board P15 is activated (zero points).

In other words, the absolute difference between the time from power-on of the game machine P until the game medium number control board P16 activates the user mode and the time from power-on of the game machine P until the main control board P15 activates the user mode. The value is configured to be longer than the payout process execution time (the time from the start of the payout process to the end of the payout process) for the maximum number of payouts (15 points in this embodiment).

By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the total score from being cleared during the payout process when the power is turned on after the power failure occurs just before the start of the payout process, and the management of the number of game media can be performed accurately. becomes possible.

Also, the absolute value of the difference between the time from when the game machine P is turned on until the game medium count control board P16 starts the user mode and the time from when the game machine P is turned on until the main control board P15 starts the user mode. is the maximum number of payouts (in this embodiment, 15 points) is longer than the time until the end of the payout process.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the total score from being cleared during the payout process when the power is turned on after the power is turned off immediately after receiving the final stop operation, and the number of game media can be managed accurately. It becomes possible to

<Description of Game Features Using Advantageous Sections Applicable to the Present Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the prescribed number for starting the game is only three. In other words, the game cannot be started with anything other than the 3-coin stake, and the game can be started with only the 3-coin stake even when the bonus is activated.

In this embodiment, the effective line consists of one line consisting of the lower stage of the left reel P18L, the middle stage of the middle reel P18C, and the lower stage of the right reel P18R. Hereinafter, stopping the symbol combination on the active line is simply referred to as "stopping the symbol combination".

In this embodiment, there are ten kinds of patterns. They are called Red Seven, Blue Seven, Bar, Gold Bar, Blank, Cherry, Watermelon, Bell A, Bell B, and Replay, respectively. It should be noted that the names of the symbols and the types of the symbols are only examples, and there is no problem even if they are changed.

The reel arrangement of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, the number of symbols in one reel is 20, and the first reel (left reel P18L), the second reel (middle reel P18C), and the third reel (right reel P18R) are provided. there is

The symbol combinations in this embodiment are shown in FIGS. In the figure, the item "winning symbol/operating symbol/pattern symbol name" indicates the name of the condition device corresponding to the symbol combination. In addition, the "prescribed number and game state" shows the privilege to be given when the symbol combination for each prescribed number is stopped. If "Specified number and game state" is described as "1 type BB", it means that 1 type BB is awarded when the symbol combination stops, and if it is described as "Replay" indicates that replay is given when the symbol combination is stopped, and if a number is indicated, it indicates the number of payouts when the symbol combination is stopped, and if indicated as "-", it is applicable It shows that the symbol combination does not stop in the game state.

In this embodiment, the bonus is provided with one kind of BB, and the end condition is the provision of game media exceeding 11 points. In addition, this type 1 BB is a type in which the RB operates continuously, and the RB ends when either one of two wins or two games is satisfied. The specification is such that RB is automatically activated until the condition is met (given more than 11 points of game media).

As shown in FIG. 5, there are eight types of 1-type BB symbol combinations, and the drawing rate of the 1-type BB symbol combination on each reel (probability of stopping the symbols related to the symbol combination) is not 100%. In order to display the symbol combination of 1 type BB, it is necessary to press each reel.

In this embodiment, the RT transition starts from non-RT (also called 1 type BB non-inside), and if 1 type BB wins during non-RT and the 1 type BB symbol combination does not stop, the next game ( When the 1st BB symbol combination stops during RT1, RT1 ends and the 1st BB operates from the next game (1 BB ), and when the operation of the type 1 BB is completed, the next game is shifted to non-RT. In addition, since setting change is started from non-RT, if the setting change device is operated while RT1 or type 1 BB is operating, non-RT is set when the operation of the setting change device is completed. Since the RT state and the type 1 BB operating state are not cleared when the power is turned off without the setting change device operating (sometimes referred to as a normal power cut), when the power is restored, the state before the power cut is resumed. Specifically, when the power is cut off during the 1st type BB and then the power is restored, the 1st type BB operating state is during the 1st type BB, and the power is cut off in the state of RT1, and then the power is restored. If it does, the RT state is configured to be RT1.

Here, RT is an abbreviation for replay time, and is a state in which the probability of winning a replay can be varied for each of a plurality of RTs. For example, it is possible to make the replay winning probability of RT1 and the replay winning probability of RT2 different. Also, the different winning probabilities of replays may mean that the winning probabilities of the replays as a whole may be different, or only the winning probabilities of a certain replay may be different and the winning probabilities of the replays as a whole may not differ. The RT shift trigger can be set by stopping a predetermined combination of symbols, by winning a bonus (by activating a bonus condition device), by completing a predetermined number of games after the end of the bonus, etc. They can be combined as appropriate.

A condition device in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The item of "winning replay" in FIG. 10 describes numbers corresponding to winning numbers. In addition, the conditional device to be activated is described in the item of "conditional device". In addition, the simple name of the operating condition device is described in the item of "common name". For example, the common name corresponding to the replay-H condition device is "right push: strong-battle eye", and it is shown that the strong battle eye stops when the right reel P18R is stopped for the first time, and the winning-A1 condition device The common name corresponding to is "push order bell A group 123", and the operation mode of the left reel P18L first stop, the middle reel P18C second stop, and the right reel P18R third stop is the correct operation mode (in this case, winning 52 ( It is shown that it is an operation mode in which the symbol combination of (winning) with a larger number of payouts than the winning (01-02, 09, 29-31) is stopped. In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device is shown in the item of "component". For example, it is indicated that replay 01 or replay 02 can be displayed when the replay-A condition device operates (wins). It should be noted that "0" in the item "winning replay" corresponds to losing.

The internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in the non-internal 1 type BB in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 13. FIG. The internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means during non-1 type BB are 1 type BB, replay -A, replay -B, replay -C (+1 type BB), replay -D (+1 type BB), replay-E (+1 type BB), replay-F (+1 type BB), replay-G (+1 type BB), replay-H (+1 type BB), replay-I (+1 type BB), Replay-J (+1 type BB), Win-A1, Win-A2, Win-A3, Win-A4, Win-A5, Win-A6, Win-B1, Win-B2, Win-B3, Win -B4, Prize-B5, Prize-B6, Prize-C1, Prize-C2, Prize-C3, Prize-C4, Prize-C5, Prize-C6, Prize-D (+1 type BB), Prize-E (+1 type) BB), Prize-F (+1 type BB), Prize-G (+1 type BB), Prize-H (+1 type BB), Prize-I (+1 type BB), Prize-J (+1 type BB), Prize- Any of K (+1 kind BB) and there is no outlier.

Note that the above description of "replay-C (+1 type BB)" indicates that replay-C and 1 type BB are won simultaneously, and in FIGS. 11, 12 and 13, "bonus conditions This corresponds to the fact that the names are described in both "device" and "winning replay". 11, 12, and 13, the item "internal lottery" indicates whether or not the internal lottery is applicable for each game state. Indicates that it is not covered. 11, 12, and 13 indicates whether or not the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed for each game state. , "x" indicates that the advantageous section transition lottery is not executed. In this embodiment, when the advantageous section transition lottery is executed, a 100% win is made and the advantageous section transition is made. 11, 12, and 13, the items "R1" to "R6" indicate setting 1 to setting 6, respectively, and indicate the winning numbers of the internal lottery corresponding to the set values. 65536 numbers are assigned to each state.

In this embodiment, the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means inside the 1 type BB are replay-A, replay-B, replay-C, replay-D, replay-E, and replay. -F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Win-A1, Win-A2, Win-A3, Win-A4, Win-A5, Win-A6, Win-B1 , Prize-B2, Prize-B3, Prize-B4, Prize-B5, Prize-B6, Prize-C1, Prize-C2, Prize-C3, Prize-C4, Prize-C5, Prize-C6, Prize-D, Prize -E, Prize-F, Prize-G, Prize-H, Prize-I, Prize-J, Prize-K, and there is no exception.

In the present embodiment, the internal lottery result that can be determined by the internal lottery means in the 1 type BB is any of win-K, win-L, and lose.

In this embodiment, the conditions for shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section are replay-C, replay-D, replay-E, replay-F, replay-G, replay-H, and replay-I. , Replay-J, Win-A1, Win-A2, Win-A3, Win-A4, Win-A5, Win-A6, Win-B1, Win-B2, Win-B3, Win-B4, Win-B5, Prize-B6, Prize-C1, Prize-C2, Prize-C3, Prize-C4, Prize-C5, Prize-C6, Prize-D, Prize-E, Prize-F, Prize-G, Prize-H, Prize- Any one of I, Prize-J, and Prize-K wins, and replay-A and replay-B wins do not shift to the advantageous section. That is, in the normal section, replay-C, replay-D, replay-E, replay-F, replay-G, replay-H, replay-I, replay-J, winning-A1, Prize-A2, Prize-A3, Prize-A4, Prize-A5, Prize-A6, Prize-B1, Prize-B2, Prize-B3, Prize-B4, Prize-B5, Prize-B6, Prize-C1, Prize- C2, Prize-C3, Prize-C4, Prize-C5, Prize-C6, Prize-D, Prize-E, Prize-F, Prize-G, Prize-H, Prize-I, Prize-J, Prize-K If any one of them wins, it becomes an advantageous section from the next game.

In this embodiment, replay-C, replay-D, replay-E, replay-F, replay-G, replay-H, replay-I, replay-J, winning during the normal section -A1, Prize-A2, Prize-A3, Prize-A4, Prize-A5, Prize-A6, Prize-B1, Prize-B2, Prize-B3, Prize-B4, Prize-B5, Prize-B6, Prize-C1 , Prize-C2, Prize-C3, Prize-C4, Prize-C5, Prize-C6, Prize-D, Prize-E, Prize-F, Prize-G, Prize-H, Prize-I, Prize-J, Prize If any of -K wins, it will always shift to the advantageous section. That is, in the normal section, replay-C, replay-D, replay-E, replay-F, replay-G, replay-H, replay-I, replay-J, winning-A1, Prize-A2, Prize-A3, Prize-A4, Prize-A5, Prize-A6, Prize-B1, Prize-B2, Prize-B3, Prize-B4, Prize-B5, Prize-B6, Prize-C1, Prize- C2, Prize-C3, Prize-C4, Prize-C5, Prize-C6, Prize-D, Prize-E, Prize-F, Prize-G, Prize-H, Prize-I, Prize-J, Prize-K If any one of them wins, it becomes an advantageous section from the next game.

In this embodiment, in RT1 (inside 1 type BB), there is no deviation (either the replay role or the winning role will always win), so once it shifts to RT1, the pressing order bell group C (winning - C1 ~C6) It is possible to stop the BB symbol combination in some operation modes at the time of winning. The part of the pressing order bell C group winning is, for example, a partial spot pressing position of the middle reel P18C or the first stop of the right reel P18R at the time of winning-C1 winning. In addition, when winning-C1 wins in the advantageous section, the correct pressing order (in this case, "1, 2, 3") is displayed on the image display device), the winning 38 is stopped and the BB pattern combination does not stop. With such a configuration, the user can maintain RT1 by notifying the user of the operation mode in which the BB symbol combination does not stop. In addition, by setting the number of winnings during RT1 to 4 (because the design minimum winning probability is 1/17500 or more), and by constructing so that the BB symbol combination does not stop in other replay combinations and winning combinations. , the BB symbol combination may be stopped only when the combination is lost. "1, 2, 3" displayed on the image display device indicates that "1" corresponds to the left stop switch P4L, and "2" corresponds to the middle stop switch P4C. "3" indicates that it corresponds to the right stop switch P4R, and "1, 2, 3" displayed on the image display means the left stop switch P4L for the first stop and the middle stop switch P4C for the first stop. 2nd stop, 3rd stop of the right stop switch P4R is the correct order of pressing.

In this embodiment, as the game state (also referred to as main game state) managed by the main control means in the advantageous section, the advantageous section general state (also referred to as normal state), the chance zone (also referred to as CZ), and the state of AT are provided. , and transitions from the advantageous zone general state to CZ, from CZ to AT, from AT to the advantageous zone general state, or to CZ, respectively. In addition, there is also a case where the advantageous section general state (also referred to as normal state), CZ, or AT shifts to the normal section. In addition, the game state managed by the main control means in the normal section is only the normal section general state, and the game state does not transition until the transition to the advantageous section. In addition, in the advantageous section general state and the normal section general state, the flag related to the game state to be managed by the main control means may be in the same state or in a different state.

The normal state is a state in which an advantageous winning pushing order is not reported when any one of winning-A1 to winning-C6 is won as a result of the internal lottery.

CZ is a state that shifts when winning any of the winning-D to winning-H as an internal lottery result in the normal state, and during CZ, AT depending on the result of the internal lottery during CZ and the lottery at the start of CZ Perform a lottery to move to.

AT is a state that shifts when AT lottery in CZ is won, and is a state in which an advantageous operation mode (winning order) is notified when winning any one of prize-A1 to prize-C6.

In this embodiment, as a condition for always shifting from the advantageous section to the normal section (forced termination condition of the advantageous section), when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3000 times), in the advantageous section MY (difference number, difference number of sheets) exceeds a specific value (for example, 2400), initialization processing based on a setting change is performed, and the RAM clear switch becomes effective. The end condition of AT and the end condition of the advantageous section do not match. However, some of the AT end conditions (for example, in the specification that the end condition is that the game has been played 300 times after entering the AT, the number of games played is 300 times (in this case, the effect that the AT will end or when the number of obtained coins reaches a predetermined number (for example, 2300) or more) may be set as conditions for ending the advantageous section. Also, when you hit CZ in the advantageous section, you may shift to the normal section. In this case, it is determined whether or not to end the advantageous section according to the situation of the advantageous section when the CZ is hit in the advantageous section. It should be noted that it is not necessary to include the fact that the number of games played in the advantageous interval has reached a predetermined number in the conditions for ending the advantageous interval. In particular, in a gaming machine without real medals (sometimes referred to as a "medal-less gaming machine") in the present embodiment, the fact that the number of games played in the advantageous section has reached a predetermined number is not a condition for ending the advantageous section (games in the advantageous section unlimited number of times).

In addition, when the AT ends, a display such as a liquid crystal display that says, “Be careful not to get addicted. Prevents immersion.

In addition, in the medalless gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the difference number exceeds 19,000 (when the total difference number exceeds 19,000), the function to stop the game (hereinafter referred to as "stop function") ) is provided. Since 16383 is the storage upper limit of the total score storage means, the total score cannot be reached unless the total score is transferred to the lending unit by counting processing on the way.

The number of differences here is the cumulative value obtained by subtracting the number of inputs from the number of payouts (number of grants) in all game sections (each game) from the time the power is turned on, and is intended to be the number of acquisitions in the game of the day. .

For this reason, an advantageous section MY counter that counts only the number of differences in the advantageous section, or a difference number counter (also referred to as a "stop counter") that counts the number of differences in all game sections separately from the advantageous section difference number counter is provided. .

The difference counter is cleared to 0 when the power is turned on (including RWM abnormality and setting change), and all information related to the calculation of the difference counter is initialized.

The stopping process and the difference counter will be detailed later.

A method of calculating MY in an advantageous section will be described. The main control board P15 has an advantageous section MY counter as a storage area. The storage area of the advantageous section MY counter consists of a 2-byte storage area with consecutive addresses in the first main control RAM. Specifically, it is composed of a storage area for storing the lower 1-byte value and a storage area for storing the upper 1-byte value. In the following description, the storage area of the advantageous interval MY counter is simply referred to as the advantageous interval MY counter. The advantageous interval MY counter is set to "0" as an initial value at the timing of shifting to the advantageous interval, and increases or decreases according to the game result. Explanation is given assuming that the process ends.

The advantageous interval MY counter is an increment counter, and in the gaming machine when the value of the advantageous interval MY counter is "0", when the input point is "3" and the awarded point is "10", the advantageous interval The value of the MY counter becomes "10-3" and becomes "7".

In addition, since the advantageous section MY counter counts the maximum number of increments during the advantageous section, in a game when the value of the advantageous section MY counter is "0", the entry point is "3" and the awarded point is "0". , the value of the advantageous section MY counter is "0-3", but if the result of the calculation is a negative value, it is corrected to "0" and becomes "0". This is because the carry flag becomes "1" when a carry flag occurs as a result of the operation, and the instruction is used to set "0" if the carry flag is "1".

In addition, when the replay is won as a result of the game, the advantageous interval MY counter is not updated, so the value of the advantageous interval MY counter does not increase or decrease in the game in which the replay is won.

CZ is decided by lottery when winning any of the prize-D to prize-H (hereinafter also referred to as rare role), and basically the harder it is to win the internal lottery, the more CZ will be won. It's getting easier. In this embodiment, the order in which CZ is likely to be won is as follows: Winning-G> Winning-E> Winning-H> Winning-F> Winning-D.

In this embodiment, the CZ does not occur immediately after winning, but after hitting the CZ, the CZ is started when the advantageous section transitions to the normal section and again to the advantageous section (that is, the advantageous section transition in RT1 It is a specification that always starts CZ (it can be said that shifting from a normal section to an advantageous section is a condition for CZ to occur), and if you hit CZ in this advantageous section, dare to shift to the normal section and the next advantageous section. will generate CZ). As a result, it is possible to solve the problem that when the AT is hit from the CZ, the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is small and the ball cannot be put out. In particular, the smaller the number of net additions (expected number of coins to be acquired per game, also called slope value), the more effective. For example, in the case of a net increase of 2 cards, the maximum number of cards to be obtained in the advantageous section is about 2400, so 1200 games are required to obtain 2400 cards. However, AT is not always performed in the advantageous section, and various game states such as the above-mentioned normal state and CZ transition, so the number of remaining games in the advantageous section may be small (eg, 500 times) There are many. In this case, even if the game is played 500 times, since the number of net increase is 2, the player ends up getting about 1000 coins, which makes it difficult to meet the user's expectation of winning. Therefore, by ending the advantageous section once with a CZ win and starting the CZ when moving to a new advantageous section, even if the CZ is the number of games played 100 times, the advantageous section can be played the remaining 1400 times. , it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the user to win 2400 tickets.

In addition, the winning probability of CZ for the second and subsequent times within the same advantageous interval may be varied according to the value of the number of won (cumulative number of payouts−cumulative number of inputs) after the start of the advantageous interval. For example, if you start CZ at the time of transition to the advantageous section and hit AT, change the winning probability of CZ in the remaining advantageous section after the end of AT depending on whether you win 50 or 1000 at the AT. Aspects are conceivable. In this case, the CZ winning probability after obtaining 50 cards may be higher or lower than the CZ winning probability after obtaining 1000 cards.

If the CZ winning probability after winning 50 cards is higher than the CZ winning probability after winning 1000 cards, it becomes easier to give the next CZ to users who could not get much at AT, so expectations It is possible to play while maintaining it.

If the CZ winning probability after obtaining 50 cards is lower than the CZ winning probability after obtaining 1000 cards, the remaining advantageous section after obtaining 1000 cards is small (3000 times, which is the end condition of the advantageous section (because the number of games is close to 2400), even if CZ is set to a high probability, the gambling spirit is not remarkably increased due to the design of the ball output, and a new sense of expectation can be created for the user.

When the CZ is won, the game in which the CZ is won or when a predetermined number of games have been played (which can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the gaming machine P), a congratulatory effect of displaying characters such as "success" or "win" is performed. conduct. As a result, the user can understand that some kind of privilege has been granted, so that the user can intuitively understand the progress of the game. Then, from the next game onwards, the message "Preparing for CZ" can be displayed by the image display device or the lighting mode of the lamp, thereby making it possible to create a sense of expectation for the CZ for the user. "Under CZ preparation" corresponds to a state in which, when the CZ winning game is in an advantageous interval, the advantageous interval is ended and the advantageous interval is resumed in the subsequent normal interval. Since "CZ preparation" is internally a normal section, it is in a disadvantageous state for users who do not perform AT lottery or AT addition at all, but the ball output rate during CZ preparation is regarded as AT state. By making a comparison and lowering, it is possible to allocate the balls to the AT and create a wave of balls. In addition, since the expectations for the CZ are created during the CZ preparation, the user is less likely to feel a loss even if the payout rate is lowered.

Also, although the advantageous interval is ended in the next game after winning the CZ, the game may be executed a predetermined number of times from the game in which the CZ is won until the advantageous interval ends. In this case, in the game in which the CZ is won, it is conceivable that the CZ is not announced, and whether or not the CZ is won is performed over a predetermined number of games by means of an effect (so-called omen effect or continuous performance). Then, the blessing effect is executed at the timing when the game is executed a predetermined number of times, and the CZ is being prepared from the next game. This is because the advantageous section lamp is lit in the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section ends, the advantageous section lamp is turned off, so the advantageous section lamp is turned off from the CZ winning game to the notification that the CZ has been won. This is because it is not possible to know whether or not the player has won the CZ in the lighting mode. It should be noted that during CZ preparation it may be possible to move from the advantageous section to the normal section, in this case it is already notified that CZ is being prepared, so the result depends on the lighting mode of the advantageous section lamp during CZ preparation There is no such thing as knowing ahead of time.

In addition, CZ preparation does not necessarily have to be a normal section, and may be set to an advantageous section. Even in this case, the ratio of executing CZ preparation in the normal section is relatively higher than the ratio of executing CZ preparation in the advantageous section, and as a condition for executing CZ preparation in the advantageous section, the advantageous section The condition is that the number of remaining games is a predetermined number (for example, 1000 times) or more. By configuring in this way, in order to execute CZ preparation when there is a margin in the number of remaining games in the advantageous section, it is sufficient even if CZ is executed through CZ preparation and as a result AT is executed It is possible to create a feeling of winning. In addition, since the normal section is not used during CZ preparation, it is possible to create a surprise such as starting AT immediately after CZ preparation (in order to initialize information about AT at the end of the advantageous section, normal If the interval is used, AT cannot start because CZ will be executed at the start of the advantageous interval).

Also, when performing CZ preparation in the above-mentioned advantageous section, it may be determined whether or not to give AT by lottery when winning any of winning -D to winning -H during CZ preparation . In this case, the order of rare roles that are likely to be won by AT by AT lottery may be the same as the order that is likely to be won by CZ, or Win-E> Win-G> Win-F> Win-H> Win-D. You may make it partly different like the order of . By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the user expect to win a rare role even during CZ preparation.

Furthermore, in order to prevent the user who won the rare combination but did not win the AT from losing their desire to play, a privilege different from that of the AT may be given. As the privilege, for example, it is possible to display a two-dimensional code that can be read by the user terminal, or display a setting suggesting effect that allows the setting value to be determined. The privilege may be easier to grant as the number of games in the advantageous section is closer to the above-described predetermined number (eg, 3000 times), or the number of CZs is a specific number (eg, multiples of 5). You can make it easier.

In addition, as a condition for always shifting from the advantageous section to the normal section (forced termination condition of the advantageous section), when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3000 times), MY in the advantageous section In the explanation above, when a specific value (for example, 2400) is exceeded, when initialization processing is performed based on a setting change, and when the RAM clear switch becomes effective, all the conditions are from the advantageous section to the normal section. , and some conditions may be defined as conditions for always shifting from the advantageous section to the normal section. For example, when the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 3000 times), it is not necessary to include it in the condition for always shifting from the advantageous section to the normal section.

Next, when the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 3000 times) is not included as a condition for always shifting from the advantageous section to the normal section, and MY in the advantageous section exceeds 2400 A mode in which the advantageous section can be terminated (transitioned to the normal section) under an arbitrary termination condition when the time is included as a condition for always transitioning from the advantageous section to the normal section will be described. In addition, when MY in the advantageous section exceeds 2400, the explanation will be made as a condition that the advantageous section always transitions to the normal section, but it is not limited to 2400 and can be set to any value (for example, 4800). I will add.

Ending an advantageous section with an arbitrary termination condition means that the AT termination condition is satisfied when the MY in the advantageous section does not exceed 2400 (for example, the MY in the advantageous section is 1000). Playing 300 games after entering AT, winning a predetermined number (for example, 2300) or more), winning CZ in an advantageous section (not hitting CZ in an advantageous section) It may be determined whether or not to end the advantageous section according to the situation of the advantageous section at the time of execution).

In the case of ending the advantageous section with an arbitrary end condition, when the arbitrary end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, a predetermined storage area in the first main control RAM (for example, the advantageous section end storage area) stores a flag indicating the end of the advantageous section. If it is determined that a flag indicating the end of the advantageous interval is stored in the advantageous interval end storage area, the advantageous interval is ended (the information about the AT stored in the RAM of the first main control execution of initialization processing).

When the advantageous section ends with an arbitrary end condition, a 1-byte storage area (for example, an advantageous section end storage area) in the first main control RAM when the arbitrary end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied stores a flag indicating the end of the advantageous section. After that, when it is determined that a flag indicating the end of the advantageous interval is stored in the advantageous interval end storage area, the advantageous interval is ended (the information about the AT stored in the RAM of the first main control execution of initialization processing).

However, if a 1-byte advantageous interval end storage area is provided in the first main control RAM, the storage area of the first main control RAM will become tight. can be terminated with an arbitrary termination condition. In the following, a method for ending an advantageous interval under an arbitrary end condition using the advantageous interval MY counter will be described.

<Method of Ending Advantageous Sections with Any Termination Conditions Using the Advantageous Section MY Counter>
First, the storage area of the advantageous section MY counter will be described. Since the advantageous section MY counter needs to store a value for determining whether or not MY in the advantageous section exceeds 2400, a 2-byte storage area is required. An example will be given below to explain what values are stored in the high-order byte storage area and the low-order byte storage area of the advantageous interval MY counter. In addition, in order to facilitate the boundary between the value of the high-order byte storage area and the value of the low-order byte storage area, a "/" is written at the boundary between the value of the high-order byte storage area and the value of the low-order byte storage area, The value of the upper byte storage area/the value of the lower byte storage area. In addition, numbers with a suffix b indicate that they are expressed in binary numbers. Also, of the 8 bits (1 byte), the least significant bit is the D0 bit, the bit next to the D0 bit is the D1 bit, the bit next to the D1 bit is the D2 bit, and the D2 bit. D3 bit next to D3 bit D4 bit next to D4 bit D5 bit next to D4 bit D6 bit next to D5 bit D6 The bit next to the bit of is the D7 bit. That is, the least significant bit corresponds to the D0 bit, and the most significant bit corresponds to the D7 bit.

The D0 bit of the lower byte of the advantageous section MY counter indicates the first digit, the D1 bit of the lower byte of the advantageous section MY counter indicates the second digit, and the D2 bit of the lower byte of the advantageous section MY counter indicates the third digit. , the D3 bit of the lower byte of the advantageous section MY counter indicates the 4th digit, the D4 bit of the lower byte of the advantageous section MY counter indicates the 5th digit, and the D5 bit of the lower byte of the advantageous section MY counter indicates the 6th digit. The D6 bit of the lower byte of the advantageous section MY counter indicates the seventh digit, and the D7 bit of the lower byte of the advantageous section MY counter indicates the eighth digit. The D0 bit of the high-order byte of the advantageous section MY counter indicates the 9th digit, the D1 bit of the high-order byte of the advantageous section MY counter indicates the 10th digit, and the D2 bit of the high-order byte of the advantageous section MY counter indicates the 11th digit. , the D3 bit of the high-order byte of the advantageous section MY counter indicates the 12th digit, the D4 bit of the high-order byte of the advantageous section MY counter indicates the 13th digit, and the D5 bit of the high-order byte of the advantageous section MY counter indicates the 14th digit. The D6 bit of the high-order byte of the advantageous section MY counter indicates the 15th digit, and the D7 bit of the high-order byte of the advantageous section MY counter indicates the 16th digit.

(Example 1) When the value of the advantageous section MY counter is 10 00000000b/00001010b (upper byte: 0, lower byte: 10)
(Example 2) When the value of the advantageous section MY counter is 255 00000000b/11111111b (upper byte: 0, lower byte: 255)
(Example 3) When the value of the advantageous section MY counter is 256 00000001b/00000000b (upper byte: 1, lower byte: 0)
(Example 4) When the value of the advantageous section MY counter is 1000 00000011b/11101000b (upper byte: 3, lower byte: 232)
(Example 5) When the value of the advantageous section MY counter is 2400 00001001b/01100000b (upper byte: 9, lower byte: 96)
(Example 6) When the value of the advantageous section MY counter is 2414 00001001b/01101110b (upper byte: 9, lower byte: 110)

As described above, in a gaming machine in which the advantageous interval MY counter can store 0 to 2414 as the advantageous interval MY, D4 bits, D5 bits, D6 bits, and D7 bits are stored in the upper byte storage area of the advantageous interval MY counter. Bits are never used. Although the game machine in which 0 to 2414 can be stored as MY of the advantageous interval in the advantageous interval MY counter is exemplified, the upper limit value that can be stored as MY of the advantageous interval is not 2414, but any value between 2400 and 2413. Similarly, for values, bits D4, D5, D6, and D7 of the upper byte storage area of the advantageous interval MY counter are not used.

<<Processing at the end of the advantageous section>>
Next, a method of ending an advantageous interval with an arbitrary end condition using the advantageous interval MY counter will be described with reference to FIG. The advantageous interval end processing is one of the game state-specific processing described above, and is a control processing that is executed when the advantageous interval is terminated under an arbitrary end condition.

<<<Pattern 1>>>
In the <Pattern 1> of the advantageous interval end processing in FIG. 45, when the advantageous interval is to be ended under an arbitrary end condition, the specific bit of the value stored in the upper byte of the advantageous interval MY counter is set to 1 (specified store a 1 in the bit). Specifically, 1 is stored in the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the upper byte storage area of the advantageous section MY counter. For example, when the value stored in the upper byte storage area of the advantageous interval MY counter is 1 (00000001b), if the D7 bit in the upper byte storage area of the advantageous interval MY counter is set to 1, the advantageous interval MY counter The value stored in the upper byte storage area is 129 (10000001b).

This configuration is possible because, as described above, no value is stored in bits D4 to D7 of the upper byte storage area of the advantageous interval MY counter. That is, the D7 bit in the storage area of the upper byte of the advantageous interval MY counter can be used for another purpose (here, a flag indicating whether or not the conditions for ending the advantageous interval are satisfied). Also, setting the D7 bit of the value stored in the high-order byte of the advantageous interval MY counter to 1 means that the value stored in the advantageous interval MY counter is at least 32768 (2 to the 15th power) or more. is synonymous with being At this time, the processing of storing a value in the storage area of the lower byte of the advantageous section MY counter, the processing of storing 1 in a certain bit, etc. are not performed. For example, if 1000 (00000011b/11101000b (“/” indicates the boundary between the upper byte storage area value and the lower byte storage area value)) is stored in the advantageous interval MY counter, the advantageous interval MY When the D7 bit (most significant bit) of the value stored in the upper byte storage area of the counter is set to 1, 33768 (10000011b/11101000b) is stored in the advantageous section MY counter. In this way, a process of storing a value in both the lower byte storage area and the upper byte storage area (2-byte storage area) constituting the advantageous section MY counter, or setting a certain bit to 1 is performed. Instead of performing the processing to set a specific bit to 1 for the high-order byte storage area (1-byte storage area) of the advantageous interval MY counter, the program capacity can be reduced. . Although an example in which 1 is stored in the D7 bit in the storage area of the upper byte of the advantageous interval MY counter has been shown, the D7 bit is not limited to the storage area, and any bit from the D4 bit to the D7 bit can be used. good.

<<<Pattern 2>>>
In <Pattern 2> of the advantageous interval end processing in FIG. 45, when the advantageous interval is to be terminated under arbitrary conditions, a specific value (250 (11110000b)) is stored in the upper byte storage area of the advantageous interval MY counter. . For example, when the value stored in the upper byte storage area of the advantageous interval MY counter is 1 (00000001b), if 250 is stored in the upper byte storage area of the advantageous interval MY counter, the upper byte of the advantageous interval MY counter is 250 (11110000b).

This configuration is possible because, as described above, only bits D0 to D3 of the upper byte storage area of the advantageous interval MY counter are used for the values stored as MY in the advantageous interval. Specifically, if the upper limit of the value to be stored as MY of the advantageous interval is any value from 2400 to 2414, the upper byte storage area of the advantageous interval MY counter is 9 (00001001b) at maximum. can be stored. In other words, since there is no case of storing a value of 10 or more, by storing a value of 10 or more in the storage area of the upper byte of the advantageous interval MY counter, the advantageous interval MY counter is set to a value greater than at least 2414. be able to. At this time, the processing of storing a value in the storage area of the lower byte of the advantageous section MY counter, the processing of storing 1 in a certain bit, etc. are not performed. For example, if 1000 (00000011b/11101000b (“/” indicates the boundary between the upper byte storage area value and the lower byte storage area value) is stored in the advantageous interval MY counter, the advantageous interval MY counter When 250 is stored in the upper byte storage area of the advantageous interval MY counter, 61672 (11110000b/11101000b) is stored in the advantageous interval MY counter. , the storage area of the upper byte of the advantageous interval MY counter ( The program capacity can be reduced by executing the process of storing a specific value in a 1-byte storage area).In addition, an example of storing 250 in the upper byte storage area of the advantageous section MY counter is taken as an example. Although shown, the specific value is not limited to 250, and any value of 10 or more may be used.

<<Advantageous Section Clear Counter Management Processing>>
Next, the advantageous section clear counter management processing when the advantageous section MY counter is used to terminate the advantageous section under an arbitrary end condition will be described with reference to FIGS. 46, 47 and 48. FIG. Here, since there are three modes of advantageous section clear counter management processing patterns, FIG. FIG. 48 will be described as <Pattern 3> of the advantageous section clear counter management process. 46, 47, and 48 are executed by the game progress main process of the main control board P15 shown in FIG.

<<<Pattern 1>>>
FIG. 46 shows <Pattern 1> of the advantageous section clear counter management process. In <Pattern 1> of the advantageous interval clear counter management process, the advantageous interval is forcibly cleared by determining whether the value stored in the advantageous interval MY counter exceeds the upper limit value (for example, 2400) of the advantageous interval. This is a method that can simultaneously determine both the case where the termination condition is satisfied and the case where the arbitrary termination condition of the advantageous section is satisfied.

First, in "game in an advantageous section?", it is determined whether or not the current game is in an advantageous section. For example, whether or not the current game is a game in an advantageous interval can be determined by using a main game state of the current game or a flag (advantageous interval flag) that becomes 1 when the current game is in an advantageous interval. can be done. When it is determined that the current game is not a game in the advantageous section, the advantageous section clear counter management process is ended.

In "MY Counter Acquisition", the value stored in the advantageous section MY counter is transferred to the HL register (a general-purpose register of the CPU, a pair register that can store a 2-byte value by combining the H and L registers. , and so on). For example, if the value stored in the advantageous section MY counter is 1000, 1000 is stored in the HL register. Since 1000 is a 2-byte value, the upper byte value is stored in the H register and the lower byte value is stored in the L register. Therefore, storing 1000 in the HL register is synonymous with storing 00000011b in the H register and 11101000b in the L register.

At the time of "replay operation symbol display?", it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the replay has been stopped and displayed in the current game. When it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay has been stopped and displayed in the current game (in the case of YES), "Save MY counter" is executed. When it is not determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay in the current game has not been stop-displayed (in the case of NO) in the "replay operation symbol display time?"

In the "addition of number of awarded", the number of awarded game media awarded in the current game is added to the value stored in the HL register, and the value after the addition is stored in the HL register. For example, if the value stored in the HL register before addition is 1000 and the number of game media awarded in the current game is 1, 1001 is stored in the HL register after addition.

In the "bet number subtraction", the number of gaming media betted in the current game (bet number) is subtracted from the value stored in the HL register, and the value after subtraction is stored in the HL register. For example, if the value stored in the HL register before subtraction is 1001 and the number of bets for the current game is 3, 998 is stored in the HL register after subtraction.

In "subtraction result = less than 0?", it is determined whether or not the value stored in the HL register became less than 0 (there was a carry) due to the "bet number subtraction" executed before the relevant process. do. For example, when there is a carry-down (when the carry flag becomes 1) as a result of executing "subtraction of the number of bets", it is determined as YES, and "set MY counter initial value" is executed. On the other hand, when there is no carry-down (when the carry flag becomes 0) as a result of executing "subtraction of the number of bets", it is determined as NO, and "store MY counter" is executed.

In "MY counter initial value set", the value stored in the HL register is set to zero. As a result, 0 can be stored as the initial value of the advantageous section MY counter in the next "MY counter storage".

In "save MY counter", the value stored in the HL register is stored in the advantageous section MY counter. Even if the value stored in the HL register is stored in the advantageous section MY counter, the value stored in the HL register is maintained. For example, if 998 is stored in the HL register, 998 is stored in the advantageous section MY counter. Also, the value stored in the HL register remains 998. For example, if 0 is stored in the HL register, 0 is stored in the advantageous section MY counter. Also, the value stored in the HL register remains zero.

It is determined whether or not the value stored in the HL register exceeds 2400 for "MY counter > MY counter upper limit value?" Here, the value stored in the HL register is the same as the value stored in the advantageous section MY counter. Therefore, determining whether the value stored in the HL register exceeds 2,400 is synonymous with determining whether the value stored in the advantageous section MY counter exceeds 2,400. Also, although it is determined whether the value stored in the HL register exceeds 2400, it may be determined whether the value stored in the advantageous section MY counter exceeds 2400. However, the value stored in the advantageous section MY counter is the value stored in the RAM. Here, when comparing with a certain numerical value, comparing with the value stored in the register can reduce the program capacity rather than comparing with the value stored in the RAM. Therefore, determining whether the value stored in the HL register exceeds 2400 can reduce the capacity of the ROM (program).

An example of how to determine "MY counter>MY counter upper limit value?" will be described below according to the value stored in the HL register.
(Example 1) If 0 is stored in the HL register, it is determined as NO and the process is terminated.
(Example 2) When 998 is stored in the HL register, it is determined as NO and the processing is terminated.
(Example 3) If 2404 is stored in the HL register, it is determined YES, and the RAM is initialized at the end of the advantageous section.
(Example 4) When 33768 is stored in the HL register, it is determined as YES, and the RAM is initialized at the end of the advantageous section.
(Example 5) When 61672 is stored in the HL register, YES is determined, and the RAM is initialized at the end of the advantageous section.
Here, the case where a numerical value between 2400 and 2414 is stored as in (Example 3) is the case where the condition for forced termination of the advantageous section is satisfied. On the other hand, when a value exceeding 2414 is stored as in (Example 4) or (Example 5), it means that an arbitrary end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (<Pattern 1> of processing at the end of the advantageous section , or when <Pattern 2> of the processing at the end of the advantageous section is executed). In this way, depending on whether the MY counter > MY counter upper limit value? It is possible to execute transformation (end the advantageous section in this game).

In "initialize RAM at the end of the advantageous section", information about the AT and the like are initialized. By this process, the advantageous interval MY counter, the main game state, etc. are initialized, and the advantageous interval ends in the current game. Therefore, the next game can be a game in the normal section.
<<<Pattern 2>>>
FIG. 47 shows <Pattern 2> of the advantageous section clear counter management process. In <Pattern 2> of the advantageous interval clear counter management process, the advantageous interval is terminated depending on whether or not the predetermined bit of the value stored in the high-order byte of the advantageous interval MY counter is 1. and ending the advantageous section when the value stored in the advantageous section MY counter exceeds the upper limit (finishing the advantageous section by satisfying the forced termination conditions of the advantageous section) It is a method that can judge each.

First, in "game in an advantageous section?", it is determined whether or not the current game is in an advantageous section. For example, whether or not the current game is a game in an advantageous interval can be determined by using a main game state of the current game or a flag (advantageous interval flag) that becomes 1 when the current game is in an advantageous interval. can be done. When it is determined that the current game is not a game in the advantageous section, the advantageous section clear counter management process is terminated.

In the "MY counter acquisition", the value stored in the advantageous section MY counter is stored in the HL register. For example, if the value stored in the advantageous section MY counter is 1000, 1000 is stored in the HL register. Since 1000 is a 2-byte numerical value, the upper byte value is stored in the H register and the lower byte value is stored in the L register. Therefore, storing 1000 in the HL register is synonymous with storing 00000011b in the H register and 11101000b in the L register.

At "specific bit ON?", it is determined whether or not the specific bit of the value stored in the H register is "1". In other words, in this process, it is determined whether or not any condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied. For example, if processing to store 1 in the D7 bit of the upper byte storage area of the advantageous interval MY counter is executed by <Pattern 1> of the advantageous interval end processing, the specific bit corresponds to the D7 bit. . Further, when 250 (11110000) is stored in the storage area of the upper byte of the advantageous interval MY counter by <Pattern 2> of the advantageous interval end processing, the specific bit is the D7 bit, the D6 bit, or the D5 bit. bit, or corresponds to the D4 bit. In this way, the bit (specific bit) that becomes 1 when <pattern 1> of the advantageous interval end processing or <pattern 2> of the advantageous interval end processing is executed is determined. When the specific bit of the value stored in the H register is 1, "RAM initialization at the end of the advantageous section" is executed. On the other hand, when the specific bit of the value stored in the H register is not 1 (when it is 0), "At replay operation symbol display?" is executed. When the specific bit of the value stored in the H register is 1, it means that the specific bit of the value stored in the high-order byte of the advantageous interval MY counter is 1. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is determined whether the specific bit of the value stored in the H register is 1 or not. It may be determined whether there is

At the time of "replay operation symbol display?", it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the replay has been stopped and displayed in the current game. When it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay has been stopped and displayed in the current game (in the case of YES), "Save MY counter" is executed. When it is not determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay in the current game has not been stop-displayed (in the case of NO) in the "replay operation symbol display time?"

In the "addition of number of awarded", the number of awarded game media awarded in the current game is added to the value stored in the HL register, and the value after the addition is stored in the HL register. For example, if the value stored in the HL register before addition is 1000 and the number of game media awarded in the current game is 1, 1001 is stored in the HL register after addition.

In the "bet number subtraction", the number of gaming media betted in the current game (bet number) is subtracted from the value stored in the HL register, and the value after subtraction is stored in the HL register. For example, if the value stored in the HL register before subtraction is 1001 and the number of bets in the current game is 3, 998 is stored in the HL register after subtraction.

In "subtraction result = less than 0?", it is determined whether or not the value stored in the HL register became less than 0 (there was a carry) due to the "bet number subtraction" executed before the relevant process. do. For example, when there is a carry-down (when the carry flag becomes 1) as a result of executing "subtraction of the number of bets", it is determined as YES, and "set MY counter initial value" is executed. On the other hand, when there is no carry-down (when the carry flag becomes 0) as a result of executing "subtraction of the number of bets", it is determined as NO, and "store MY counter" is executed.

In "MY counter initial value set", the value stored in the HL register is set to zero. As a result, 0 can be stored as the initial value of the advantageous section MY counter in the next "MY counter storage".

In "save MY counter", the value stored in the HL register is stored in the advantageous section MY counter. Here, the value stored in the HL register is the same as the value stored in the advantageous section MY counter. Even if the value stored in the HL register is stored in the advantageous section MY counter, the value stored in the HL register is maintained. For example, if 998 is stored in the HL register, 998 is stored in the advantageous section MY counter. Also, the value stored in the HL register remains 998. For example, if 0 is stored in the HL register, 0 is stored in the advantageous section MY counter. Also, the value stored in the HL register remains zero.

It is determined whether or not the value stored in the HL register exceeds 2400 for "MY counter > MY counter upper limit value?" Here, the value stored in the HL register is the same as the value stored in the advantageous section MY counter. Therefore, determining whether the value stored in the HL register exceeds 2,400 is synonymous with determining whether the value stored in the advantageous section MY counter exceeds 2,400. Also, although it is determined whether the value stored in the HL register exceeds 2400, it may be determined whether the value stored in the advantageous section MY counter exceeds 2400. However, the value stored in the advantageous section MY counter is the value stored in the RAM. Here, when comparing with a certain numerical value, comparing with the value stored in the register can reduce the program capacity rather than comparing with the value stored in the RAM. Therefore, determining whether the value stored in the HL register exceeds 2400 can reduce the capacity of the ROM (program).

An example of how to determine "MY counter>MY counter upper limit value?" will be described below according to the value stored in the HL register.
(Example 1) If 0 is stored in the HL register, it is determined as NO and the process is terminated.
(Example 2) When 998 is stored in the HL register, it is determined as NO and the processing is terminated.
(Example 3) If 2404 is stored in the HL register, it is determined YES, and the RAM is initialized at the end of the advantageous section.
Here, the case where a numerical value between 2400 and 2414 is stored as in (Example 3) is the case where the condition for forced termination of the advantageous section is satisfied.

In "initialize RAM at the end of the advantageous section", information about the AT and the like are initialized. By this process, the advantageous interval MY counter, the main game state, etc. are initialized, and the advantageous interval ends in the current game. Therefore, the next game can be a game in the normal section.

<<<Pattern 3>>>
FIG. 48 shows <Pattern 3> of the advantageous section clear counter management process. In <Pattern 3> of the advantageous interval clear counter management process, the advantageous interval is terminated depending on whether or not the value of the upper byte stored in the advantageous interval MY counter is a specific value (if an arbitrary termination condition of the profitable interval is satisfied). and ending the advantageous section when the value stored in the advantageous section MY counter exceeds the upper limit (finishing the advantageous section by satisfying the forced termination conditions of the advantageous section) It is a method that can judge each.

First, in "game in an advantageous section?", it is determined whether or not the current game is in an advantageous section. For example, whether or not the current game is a game in an advantageous interval can be determined by using a main game state of the current game or a flag (advantageous interval flag) that becomes 1 when the current game is in an advantageous interval. can be done. When it is determined that the current game is not a game in the advantageous section, the processing is terminated.

In the "MY counter acquisition", the value stored in the advantageous section MY counter is stored in the HL register (general-purpose register of the CPU). For example, if the value stored in the advantageous section MY counter is 1000, 1000 is stored in the HL register. Since 1000 is a 2-byte numerical value, the upper byte value is stored in the H register and the lower byte value is stored in the L register. Therefore, storing 1000 in the HL register is synonymous with storing 00000011b in the H register and 11101000b in the L register.

In "advantageous section end data?", it is determined whether or not the value stored in the H register is a specific value. In other words, in this process, it is determined whether or not any condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied. For example, if 250 (11110000b) is stored in the upper byte storage area of the advantageous interval MY counter by <Pattern 2> of the advantageous interval end processing, the specific value corresponds to 250 (11110000b). In this way, it is determined whether or not the value is the value stored when <Pattern 2> of the processing at the end of the advantageous section is executed. When the value stored in the H register is a specific value, "RAM initialization at the end of the advantageous section" is executed. On the other hand, when the value stored in the H register is not the specific value, "At replay operation symbol display?" is executed. When the value stored in the H register is the specific value, it means that the specific value is stored in the upper byte of the advantageous section MY counter. Therefore, although it is determined whether the value stored in the H register is a specific value, it is also possible to determine whether the value stored in the upper byte of the advantageous section MY counter is a specific value. good.

At the time of "replay operation symbol display?", it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the replay has been stopped and displayed in the current game. When it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay has been stopped and displayed in the current game (in the case of YES), "Save MY counter" is executed. When it is not determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay in the current game has not been stop-displayed (in the case of NO) in the "replay operation symbol display time?"

In the "addition of number of awarded", the number of awarded game media awarded in the current game is added to the value stored in the HL register, and the value after the addition is stored in the HL register. For example, if the value stored in the HL register before addition is 1000 and the number of game media awarded in the current game is 1, 1001 is stored in the HL register after addition.

In the "bet number subtraction", the number of gaming media betted in the current game (bet number) is subtracted from the value stored in the HL register, and the value after subtraction is stored in the HL register. For example, if the value stored in the HL register before subtraction is 1001 and the number of bets in the current game is 3, 998 is stored in the HL register after subtraction.

In "subtraction result = less than 0?", it is determined whether or not the value stored in the HL register became less than 0 (there was a carry) due to the "bet number subtraction" executed before the relevant process. do. For example, when there is a carry-down (when the carry flag becomes 1) as a result of executing "subtraction of the number of bets", it is determined as YES, and "set MY counter initial value" is executed. On the other hand, when there is no carry-down (when the carry flag becomes 0) as a result of executing "subtraction of the number of bets", it is determined as NO, and "store MY counter" is executed.

In "MY counter initial value set", the value stored in the HL register is set to zero. As a result, 0 can be stored as the initial value of the advantageous section MY counter in the next "MY counter storage".

In "save MY counter", the value stored in the HL register is stored in the advantageous section MY counter. Even if the value stored in the HL register is stored in the advantageous section MY counter, the value stored in the HL register is maintained. For example, if 998 is stored in the HL register, 998 is stored in the advantageous section MY counter. Also, the value stored in the HL register remains 998. For example, if 0 is stored in the HL register, 0 is stored in the advantageous section MY counter. Also, the value stored in the HL register remains zero.

It is determined whether or not the value stored in the HL register exceeds 2400 for "MY counter > MY counter upper limit value?" Here, the value stored in the HL register is the same as the value stored in the advantageous section MY counter. Therefore, determining whether the value stored in the HL register exceeds 2,400 is synonymous with determining whether the value stored in the advantageous section MY counter exceeds 2,400. Also, although it is determined whether the value stored in the HL register exceeds 2400, it may be determined whether the value stored in the advantageous section MY counter exceeds 2400. However, the value stored in the advantageous section MY counter is the value stored in the RAM. Here, when comparing with a certain numerical value, comparing with the value stored in the register can reduce the program capacity rather than comparing with the value stored in the RAM. Therefore, determining whether the value stored in the HL register exceeds 2400 can reduce the capacity of the ROM (program).

An example of how to determine "MY counter>MY counter upper limit value?" will be described below according to the value stored in the HL register.
(Example 1) If 0 is stored in the HL register, it is determined as NO and the process is terminated.
(Example 2) When 998 is stored in the HL register, it is determined as NO and the processing is terminated.
(Example 3) If 2404 is stored in the HL register, it is determined YES, and the RAM is initialized at the end of the advantageous section.
Here, the case where a numerical value between 2400 and 2414 is stored as in (Example 3) is the case where the condition for forced termination of the advantageous section is satisfied.

In "initialize RAM at the end of the advantageous section", information about the AT and the like are initialized. By this process, the advantageous interval MY counter, the main game state, etc. are initialized, and the advantageous interval ends in the current game. Therefore, the next game can be a game in the normal section.

As described above, in a game that satisfies an arbitrary end condition of the advantageous interval, the value stored in the upper byte storage area of the advantageous interval MY counter is updated by the advantageous interval end processing (the lower byte of the advantageous interval MY counter is not updated), and the advantageous interval is ended in a game that satisfies any desired termination condition of the advantageous interval by the advantageous interval clear counter management processing executed after the advantageous interval end processing. (The next game can be a normal section game).

Processing related to setting change in this embodiment will be described.

When the setting change device is activated, the above-described RAM initialization processing is performed at the timing when the setting change device is activated or at the timing when the set values are determined. If the gaming state immediately before the RAM initialization processing is performed is RT1, the information in RT1 is initialized when the RAM initialization processing is performed, and the gaming state after the RAM initialization processing becomes non-RT. Also, if the game state immediately before the RAM initialization processing is performed is in the 1st type BB, the information in the 1st type BB is initialized when the RAM initialization processing is performed, and the game state after the RAM initialization processing is non-volatile. RT. Note that the total score is not initialized in the RAM initialization process accompanying the setting change (the entry point is initialized).

Also, if the game state immediately before the RAM initialization process is performed is in the advantageous section, when the RAM initialization process is performed, information on the advantageous section is initialized, and the game state after the RAM initialization process becomes the normal section. In other words, the gaming state during the advantageous section is the normal state, CZ, or AT, but regardless of which state the game is in, when the RAM initialization process is performed, the game shifts to the normal section.

When the RAM initialization process is performed, the game will be started from the non-RT and normal section, but in this embodiment, since it is a specification to start CZ when shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section , After the setting change, it is in an advantageous state (a state in which CZ can be started by shifting to an advantageous section without playing a game to win CZ).

By configuring in this way, since the state is advantageous after the setting change, it is possible to motivate customers to come to the store in the morning, and to increase the effect of attracting customers.

In addition, if a state that is too advantageous (a state in which the game is shifted to CZ after only playing a few times) can be set after the setting change, there is a risk that gambling will be significantly aroused (so-called "morning"). Therefore, it is conceivable to change the contents of CZ according to the situation when shifting to the advantageous section.

In this case, if the RT state of the next game determined to shift to the advantageous section is RT1, CZ is started because it is a basic game flow, and the RT state of the next game determined to shift to the advantageous section is non- If it is RT, CZ is not started because it is after setting change. As the game that has been determined to move to the advantageous section, the above-mentioned replay-C, replay-D, replay-E, replay-F, replay-G, replay-H, replay-I, replay Game-J, Win-A1, Win-A2, Win-A3, Win-A4, Win-A5, Win-A6, Win-B1, Win-B2, Win-B3, Win-B4, Win-B5, Win- B6, Prize-C1, Prize-C2, Prize-C3, Prize-C4, Prize-C5, Prize-C6, Prize-D, Prize-E, Prize-F, Prize-G, Prize-H, Prize-I, Either Win-J or Win-K wins.

Also, Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, Winning-K overlap with 1 type BB, so the RT state of the next game won is RT1, and CZ is started. , Prize-A1, Prize-A2, Prize-A3, Prize-A4, Prize-A5, Prize-A6, Prize-B1, Prize-B2, Prize-B3, Prize-B4, Prize-B5, Prize-B6, Prize -C1, Winning-C2, Winning-C3, Winning-C4, Winning-C5, Winning-C6 do not overlap with 1 type BB, so the next game won is non-RT and CZ does not start.

With such a configuration, since there is a case where the non-RT shifts to the advantageous section, it is possible to suppress the specifications related to the morning such as shifting to the CZ only by playing the game several times after the setting change, and the gambling property can be suppressed.

It is also conceivable to reduce the gambling property by changing the game state managed by the main control means in the advantageous section by referring to the RT state of the next game determined to be shifted to the advantageous section. In this case, AT is not performed in the advantageous section shifted to non-RT (1 type BB non-internal), and AT is made possible in the advantageous section shifted to RT1 (1 type BB internal). good too. With such a configuration, when the game is shifted to the non-RT advantageous section after the setting change, it is not possible to win the ball because the AT is not performed, so the gambling nature is suppressed. The termination condition of the advantageous section at this time may be until the above-mentioned CZ is won, or the predetermined number of games (for example, 3000 times) have been played.

In addition, the transition of CZ is controlled by referring to the RT state of the next game that wins the advantageous interval transition lottery, but not limited to this, the condition device that is operating in the game that wins the advantageous interval transition lottery is controlled. may be referenced to control the transition of CZ. In this case, when winning-A1 wins inside the 1st class BB in the normal section, CZ should be started at the start of the advantageous section based on the fact that the 1st class BB and winning-A1 condition device is operating. Control. In addition, when Winning-A1 wins during non-inside 1 type BB in the normal section, it controls not to start CZ at the start of the advantageous section based on the fact that the Winning-A1 condition device is operating.

In the present embodiment, only one type of BB is the lottery target, but instead of this, RB or MB may be the lottery target, or two or all of the one type BB, RB, and MB may be the lottery target. .

Telegrams used for communication between the gaming machine P and the lending unit will be described with reference to FIG.

The data configuration of messages used for communication between the gaming machine P and the lending unit can be divided into the following five types.
(1) Message length (2) Command (3) Serial number (4) Data part (5) Checksum A data group consisting of the above five items is called a message and is transmitted in one transmission. (Do not divide and send.)

Since the lending unit is configured to regard it as one electronic message when it fails to receive the next start bit within 3.9 ms after the start bit reception starts, data (1-byte data ) is designed so that the transmission interval is less than 3.9 ms. In addition, some types of data to be transmitted have a specified transmission time, within 13.9 ms for game machine information notification, within 5.5 ms for count notification, and within 4.9 ms for lending receipt result response. there is For example, even if the game machine information notification is sent within 3.9ms, if it takes more than 13.9ms from sending the message length to sending the checksum, the lending unit discards the data received up to that point. Therefore, it is necessary to keep the interval between data within 3.9 ms and the time until transmission completion within 13.9 ms.

Note that the stipulation of 3.9 ms or less between data is a stipulation that can be satisfactorily satisfied without being consciously designed if the normal transmission method is used.

Each data structure is explained below.

(1) Message length This indicates the length of the data consisting of the message length, command, serial number, data part, and checksum, and consists of 1-byte data. For example, if the message length is 1 byte, the command is 1 byte, the serial number is 1 byte, the data part is 14 bytes, and the checksum is 1 byte, the message will be 18 bytes (1 byte + 1 byte + 1 byte + 14 bytes + 1 byte). The message length is data (12h) corresponding to 18 bytes.

(2) Command The above message is used for any one of game machine information notification, count notification, rental notification, and rental reception result response, which will be described later. With this command, it is possible to notify the type of message.
For example, 01h for game machine information notification, 02h for count notification, 13h for rental notification, and 03h for rental receipt result response are set as commands. The command data length consists of 1-byte data.

(3) Serial number The number included in the gaming machine information notification, counting notification, lending notification, and lending receipt result response, which will be described later, is called a serial number. The serial number included in the gaming machine information notification is called the serial number, the serial number included in the counting notification is called the counting serial number, the serial number included in the lending notice is called the lending serial number, and the serial number included in the lending receipt result response is called the lending serial number. These various serial numbers are numerical values within the range of 0 to 255 and consist of 1-byte data. Various serial numbers will be described later.

(4) Data Section Data corresponding to gaming machine information notification, counting notification, rental notification, and rental reception result response, which will be described later, is referred to as a data section. The data included in the data portion will be described later, but the data length varies from 1 byte to 53 bytes depending on the content of notification.

(5) Checksum Data consisting of the message length, command, serial number, data part, and checksum are added, and the lower 1 byte of the total is used as the checksum. By using this checksum, the receiving side can grasp the damage of data during communication. It is possible to check the failure status etc. For example, in the gaming machine P, the number of telegrams whose checksums do not match is displayed on the image display device in a predetermined situation (during a setting confirmation mode in which setting values can be confirmed or in a setting change mode in which setting values can be changed). and so on.

Of the telegrams output from the gaming machine P to the lending unit, the gaming machine information notification will be described with reference to FIG.

(1) Message length Indicates the length of the data consisting of five data: message length, command, serial number, data part (including game machine type, game machine information type, and game machine information), and checksum. It consists of 1-byte data. The message length changes according to the type of gaming machine information, which will be described later.

(2) Command The command, as described above, plays a role of notifying any of gaming machine information notification, counting notification, lending notification, and lending reception result response. 01h (fixed value) corresponds to the game machine information notification command.

(3) Serial Number The serial number is a numerical value between 0 and 255, and serves as a serial number for notification of gaming machine information. Specific examples will be described below.
a) When the power is turned on, it is controlled so that the serial number "00h(0)" is notified.
b) After the power is turned on, the serial number is updated (+1) each time notification is made.
c) The value next to the serial number "FFh (255)" is updated (+1 twice) to "01h (1)".
As described above, the first serial number after the power is restored is 0, and thereafter increases by 1 as gaming machine information notifications are output. When the serial number of the gaming machine information notification becomes 255, the serial number of the next gaming machine information notification becomes 1 (not 0).

(4) Game machine type The game machine type is information constituting the data section, and is information for identifying the type of the game machine P and the like. This information, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 6, is data for notifying the management medium, group classification, and gaming machine type.

(5) Game machine information type The game machine information type is the information that constitutes the data part. This is information for identifying the As the game machine information type, 00h corresponds to the notification of the gaming machine performance information, 01h corresponds to the notification of the gaming machine installation information, and 02h corresponds to the notification of the hole controller/fraud monitoring information. The gaming machine performance information will be described later with reference to FIG. 17, the gaming machine installation information will be described with reference to FIG. 18, and the hall controller/fraud monitoring information will be described later with reference to FIG.

(6) Game machine information The game machine information is information that constitutes the data part, and the game machine information notification to be notified this time is any of the game machine performance information, the game machine installation information, or the hole controller/fraud monitoring information. This information is notified according to the Details of the gaming machine information will be described later.

(7) Checksum Consists of 5 items: message length, command, serial number, data part (including three types of gaming machine type, gaming machine information type, gaming machine information), and checksum of the gaming machine information notification to be notified this time. Add the data and use the lower 1 byte of the total as the checksum.

Among the information included in the gaming machine information notification, the gaming machine type will be described with reference to FIG.

The gaming machine type is 1-byte data, with Bits 0 to 3 indicating the type of gaming machine, Bits 4 to 6 indicating the group to which the manufacturer belongs, and Bit 7 indicating whether the machine uses conventional game balls or not. This is game medium information indicating whether the game machine uses medals.

It should be noted that the types of gaming machines listed are the types of gaming machines stipulated by the Law Concerning the Regulation of Amusement Businesses and the Optimization of Businesses.

Next, using the gaming machine type list shown in FIG. 16, a specific example will be given to explain what the gaming machine types are.

a) Pattern 1
By game model: Pachinko machine P
Group classification: Group A
Management medium: old game ball In this case, 01h is set as the game machine type.

b) Pattern 2
By game model: Spinning machine Group classification: Group A
Management medium: old game medal In this case, 82h is set as the game machine type.

c) Pattern 3
By game model: Arrange ball game machine Group classification: Group A
Management medium: old game medal In this case, 83h is set as the game machine type.

D) Pattern 4
By game model: Jiyan ball game machine Group classification: Group A
Management medium: old game medal In this case, 84h is set as the game machine type.

E) Pattern 5
By game model: Pachislot game machine Group classification: Group B
Management medium: old game medal In this case, 92h is set as the game machine type.

Of the game machine information notifications, the game machine information included in the message when the game machine performance information is set will be described with reference to FIG.

a) Total number of inputs The total number of inputs is information on the cumulative number of game media that have been input since the power was turned on. 0 can be output as For example, in a game played 1000 times in total, if the total number of game media inserted is 2000, the total number inserted is 2000, and 2000 can be output as information on the total number inserted. Then, when the power is turned off and then turned on, 0 can be output as information on the total number of turned on. If a replay combination (also referred to as a replay combination) is won by internal lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the number of inserted gaming media betted on the next game after that game is added to the total number of inserted gaming media. are not included.

b) Total number of grants The total number of grants is the information on the cumulative number of game media granted since the power was turned on. 0 can be output as For example, if the cumulative number of game media awarded is 2000 in a total of 1000 games, the total awarded number is 2000, and 2000 can be output as the total awarded number information. Then, when the power is turned off and then turned on, 0 can be output as the information on the total number of grants. When a replay combination is won by internal lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the number of given game media in the game is not included in the total number of given.

c) MY
MY is information on the maximum number of differences that can be calculated from the number of game media provided and the number of game media inserted since the power was turned on. 0 can be output as Specifically, based on the point at which the number of game media decreased the most when the game result was obtained, the maximum Call the difference number MY. For example, in a total of 1000 games, the 100th game is the game in which the player loses the most, and the number of game media that the player loses at that time is -200. The 800th game from the beginning is the game in which the player has gained the most, and when the number of game media acquired by the player at that time is 800, 1000, which is the difference between -200 and 800, becomes MY, and MY is 1000 can be output. When the power is turned off and then turned on, 0 can be output as MY information.

In order to output this MY, the game media number control board uses a calculation MY counter and an output MY counter. Since the MY counter for calculation and the MY counter for output are both initialized (set to 0) when the power is turned on, MY from when the power is turned on to when the power is turned off is output. In other words, since the power supply is turned off at the end of the day's business at the amusement arcade, MY for the day is output.

The calculation MY counter is configured so as to be updateable regardless of the game state or the prescribed number, calculates the awarded points-thrown points in one game, and accumulates and stores the calculation results. For example, if the game started when the value of the calculation MY counter is "0", the input point is "3" points and the awarded point is "10" points, the result of calculating "10-3" is " 7" is added to the calculation MY counter, and the value of the calculation MY counter is stored as "7". Also, in the next game, if the input point is "3" and the given point is "10", "7", which is the result of calculating "10-3", is added and the value of the MY counter for calculation is " 14” is stored.

Further, for example, if the game started when the value of the calculation MY counter is "0", the input point is "3" points and the awarded point is "0" points, the result of calculating "0-3" is Although "-3", "0" is stored in the calculation MY counter. This is because the carry flag is set to "1" when a carry flag occurs as a result of the operation, and "0" is set when the carry flag is "1".

When the previous game is not a replay (in other words, when 3 points are actually bet), the MY counter for calculation treats the input point of the game that won the replay as "3" and the awarded point as "0". handle. Then, by setting the entry point to "0" in the next game (the game at the time of the replay operation), the actual MY can be corrected. For example, if the previous game was not a replay and the value of the MY counter for calculation was "10" (a game won by the replay), the input point is "3" and the awarded point is "0". ' point, "-3", which is the result of calculating "0-3", is added to the calculation MY counter, and "7" is stored as the value of the calculation MY counter. In addition, when a small winning combination that gives "10" points is won in the game next to the game in which the replay was won, "0" points are given as input points, "10" points are given, and "10-0" is given. is added to the calculation MY counter, and the value of the calculation MY counter is stored as "17".

The output MY counter updates the value of the calculation MY counter to the value of the output MY counter when the value stored in the calculation MY counter is greater than the value stored in the output MY counter. For example, if the game started when the value of the MY counter for calculation is "10" and the value of the MY counter for output is "12", the input point is "3" and the awarded point is "10". "10-3" is added to the result "7", and "17" is stored as the value of the calculation MY counter. Also, "17" of the calculation MY counter and "12" of the output MY counter are compared, and since the value of the calculation MY counter is larger, the value of the output MY counter is updated to "17".

The game media number control board is configured to transmit the value of the output MY counter to the lending unit.

The MY counter for calculation and the MY counter for output are initialized when the power is turned on, but the advantageous section MY counter is not initialized when the power is turned on. By configuring in this way, it is possible to appropriately protect the value of the advantageous section MY counter, which may cause a disadvantage to the player.

The MY counter for calculation and the MY counter for output can be updated regardless of the game interval (normal interval, advantageous interval). ).

Both the calculation MY counter and the output MY counter have their upper limits set to "917490". By configuring in this way, it is sufficiently higher than the maximum MY that is normally achieved in one day, so the possibility of reaching the upper limit value can be significantly reduced. Further, even if the MY counter for calculation and the MY counter for output are incremented by an illegal act, they do not immediately reach the upper limit value, so that the counter value is made difficult to restart from "0".

d) Total number of bonuses provided The total number of bonuses provided means that game media are provided by the operation of the bonus (single bonus (SB), regular bonus (RB), challenge bonus (CB)) after the power is turned on. If the power is turned off and then turned back on, 0 can be output as the information on the total number of granted accessories. For example, if the total number of game media obtained by activating a role is 100 in a total of 1000 games, the total number of given roles is 100, and 100 is the information on the total number of given roles. can be output. Then, when the power is turned off and then turned on, 0 can be output as the information on the total number of grants.

E) Total number of consecutive bonuses provided The total number of consecutive bonuses provided is the cumulative number of provided game media due to the operation of the first-class special bonus (regular bonus (RB)) after the power was turned on. , and when the power is turned off and then turned on, 0 can be output as the information of the total number of continuous bonuses to be given. For example, when the total number of game media obtained by the operation of the first class special role is 100 in the cumulative total of 1000 games, the total number of continuous role provided is 100, and the total number of continuous role provided is 100. 100 can be output as the number information. Then, when the power is turned off and then turned on, 0 can be output as the information on the total number of continuous bonuses to be given. In addition, the number of game media provided by the actuation of the first class special role by the first class special role continuous operating device (also referred to as the first type BB) is also accumulated.

f) Role ratio The role ratio is a ratio in which the cumulative number of awards given is the denominator and the cumulative number of awards given when the role (RB, CB, SB) is activated is the numerator. For example, if the cumulative number of games played is a predetermined number (for example, 17500) or more, the cumulative number of grants is 20000, and the cumulative number of grants at the time of activation of the role is 10000, then 50 as the role ratio information. can be output. It should be noted that the cumulative total does not have to be the cumulative total of all games. For example, if the cumulative number of grants reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, 65535), or (as a result of adding the number of grants in this game to the cumulative number of grants, the upper limit is exceeded) , and in subsequent games, the cumulative number of grants and the cumulative number of grants upon actuation of the accessory are not updated. In other words, the character product ratio is configured not to change. In addition, when the total number of games played is less than a predetermined number (for example, 17500 times), FFh is output as the role product ratio information.

G) Continuous role ratio The continuous role ratio is a ratio in which the cumulative number of given bonuses is the denominator and the cumulative number of consecutive bonuses provided by the operation of the continuous bonus (RB) is the numerator. For example, when the total number of games played is a predetermined number (for example, 17500 times) or more, the total number of grants is 20000, and the cumulative number of continuous grants at the time of activation is 10000, the information of the role ratio is 50 can be output. It should be noted that the cumulative total does not have to be the cumulative total of all games. For example, if the cumulative number of grants reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, 65535), or (as a result of adding the number of grants in this game to the cumulative number of grants, the upper limit is exceeded) , and in subsequent games, the cumulative award number and the cumulative award number at the time of continuous accessory activation are not updated. In other words, the character product ratio is configured not to change. In addition, when the total number of games played is less than a predetermined number (for example, 17500 times), FFh is output as the consecutive role ratio information.

H) Advantageous section ratio The advantageous section ratio is a ratio in which the cumulative number of games played is the denominator and the cumulative number of advantageous section games played is the numerator. For example, when the total number of games played is 20000 and the total number of games played in the advantageous section is 18000, 90 can be output as the advantageous section ratio information. It should be noted that the cumulative total does not have to be the cumulative total of all games. For example, when the cumulative number of games reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, 65535), the cumulative number of games and the number of advantageous section games are not updated in subsequent games. there is In other words, the advantageous section ratio is configured not to change.
It should be noted that the cumulative total does not have to be the cumulative total of all games. For example, if the cumulative number of games reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, 65535), or (as a result of adding the number of games played this time to the total number of games, the upper limit is exceeded) In subsequent games, the cumulative number of games played and the cumulative number of advantageous section games are not updated. In other words, the advantageous section ratio is configured not to change. In addition, when the total number of games played is less than a predetermined number (for example, 17500 times), FFh is output as the advantageous section ratio. Also, the gaming machine P that does not have an advantageous section is configured to output FFh.

i) Indicated role ratio The indicated role ratio is the total number of given roles given by the operation of the role (RB, CB, SB), and the operation of the instruction function. It is a ratio whose numerator is the sum of the cumulative number of given instructions given by (announcement of the operation mode of the stop switch P4). Note that the sum here may be a value derived by calculation based on the number of given when the role is activated and the number of instructions given, or it is added when given when the role is activated or given when the instruction function is activated. It may be one storage area. For example, if the number of times is 175,000 or more, the cumulative number of grants is 200,000, and the sum of the cumulative number of grants upon actuation of the role product and the cumulative number of instruction grants is 100,000, 50 can be output as the role ratio information. . It should be noted that the cumulative total does not have to be the cumulative total of all games. For example, if the cumulative number of grants reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, 1677215), or (as a result of adding the number of games played this time to the total number of games, the upper limit is exceeded) , and in subsequent games, the cumulative number of grants and the sum of the cumulative number of grants when the accessory is activated and the cumulative number of command grants are not updated. In other words, the advantageous section ratio is configured not to change. In addition, when the total number of games played is less than a predetermined number (for example, 175000 times), FFh is output as the role product ratio information. In addition, even the gaming machine P that does not have an accessory or an instruction function is configured to output FFh.

J) Accessory status ratio Accessory status ratio is the number of games played with the cumulative number of games played as the denominator, and the number of games in which the accessories (RB, CB, SB) are activated, or the continuous operation device (1BB, 1BB, 2BB) is the ratio of the cumulative number of specific games played as the numerator. For example, when the total number of games played is 20000 and the total number of specific games played is 5000, 25 can be output as the information on the state ratio of the accessory. It should be noted that the cumulative total does not have to be the cumulative total of all games. For example, when the cumulative number of games reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, 1677215), in subsequent games, the cumulative number of games and the specific number of games are not updated. there is In other words, the accessory state ratio is configured not to change. When the total number of games played is less than a predetermined number (for example, 175000 times), FFh is output as the role item state ratio. In addition, the gaming machine P that does not have the accessory or the accessory continuous operating device is configured to output FFh.

(c) Number of games played The number of games played is the cumulative number of games played since the power of the gaming machine was turned on. Cleared when the game machine is powered on.

d) Spare A spare is prepared in advance for the possibility of future use. When only the above information from a) to s) is to be output, 00h should be output. ing.

S) Reservation 1
Reservation 1 is not used only on the gaming machine P main body. For example, after transmission from the gaming machine P to the rental unit, the rental unit uses the 3-byte area reserved as a reservation on the unit side to output from the rental unit to an external party such as an A or B organization (for example, a gaming machine information center). used when Examples of usage include outputting the maximum MY calculated by the lending unit to the outside (for example, a game machine information center) in addition to the above-mentioned a) to c).

C) Reservation 2
Reservation 2 is not used only on the main body of the game machine P. For example, after transmitting from the gaming machine P to the rental unit, the rental unit uses the 2-byte area reserved as a reservation on the unit side to output from the rental unit to an external party such as an A or B organization (for example, a gaming machine information center). used when Examples of use include outputting the number of games calculated by the lending unit to an external device (for example, a game machine information center) in addition to the above-mentioned a) to c).

Among the game machine information notifications, the game machine information included in the message when the game machine installation information is set will be described with reference to FIG.

a) Main control chip ID number The main control chip ID number is information including a chip individual number for identifying the main control chip integrated with the CPU, RWM, and ROM provided on the main control board P15. Yes, even if it is the same model, it will be different information. For example, when the chip individual number is 4 bytes of 12345678h and the main control chip is purchased from company A, the main control chip ID number is 000000001234567821h (the lower 1 byte, 21h, is the main control chip of model number X purchased from company A). ) can be output to the lending unit. Also, for example, when the chip individual number is 4 bytes of 23456789h and the main control chip is purchased from company B, the main control chip ID number is 000000002345678941h (41h in the lower 1 byte is the main control chip of model number Y purchased from company B). (indicating that it is a control chip) can be output to the lending unit.

b) Main control chip maker code This is information indicating the gaming machine maker stored in the built-in memory of the main control chip.

c) Main control chip product code This is information indicating the model name of the gaming machine P stored in the built-in memory of the main control chip.

The above-described main control chip ID number, main control chip manufacturer code, and main control chip product code are transmitted from the main control board P15 to the game media number control board in the power-on process when the game machine P is powered on. It is designed to be sent to P16. A main control chip ID number, a main control chip manufacturer code, and a main control chip product code are stored in the RWM areas provided on the game medium number control board P16.

d) Game media count control chip ID number The game media count control chip ID number is for identifying the game media count control chip integrated with the CPU, RWM, and ROM provided on the game media count control board P16. The information includes the individual chip number, and even if the model is the same, the information is different for each.
For example, if the chip individual number is 98765432h, which is 4 bytes, and it is a game media count control chip purchased from company A, the game media count control chip ID number is 000000009876543221h (the lower 1 byte, 21h, is the model number X purchased from company A). ) can be output to the lending unit.
For example, if the chip individual number is 4 bytes of 87654321h, and the chip is a game media count control chip purchased from company B, the game media count control chip ID number is 000000008765432141h (the lower 1 byte, 41h, is the model number Y purchased from company B). ) can be output to the lending unit.

In the case of a gaming machine P not equipped with the game medium number control board P16, 000000000000000000h can be output to the lending unit as the game medium number control chip ID number.

E) Game media count control chip maker code Information indicating the game machine maker stored in the built-in memory of the game media count control chip.
In the case of a gaming machine P not equipped with the game medium number control board P16, 000000h can be output to the lending unit as the game medium number control chip maker code.

f) Game media number control chip product code This is information indicating the model name of the game machine P stored in the built-in memory of the main control chip.
In the case of a gaming machine P that does not have the game medium number control board P16, 0000000000000000h can be output to the lending unit as the game medium number control chip product code.

Of the gaming machine information notifications, the gaming machine information included in the telegram when hall controller/fraud monitoring information is set will be described with reference to FIG.

a) Total Score The total score is the value of the current number of game media stored in the game media count control board P16, and can be increased or decreased by inserting game media or winning a prize. The current total score is displayed on the game medium number display portion P9 provided in the gaming machine P. Total score information is sent to the lending unit. For example, if 2000 points are stored as the total score, 0007D0h can be output to the lending unit. The upper limit of the total score that can be stored in the game medium number control board P16 is 16383 points.

B) Entry point The entry point indicates the number of inserted game media. For example, when betting 3 points, 03h can be output to the lending unit. Also, before starting the game from a situation where 3 points are bet (before the start switch P3 is operated), FDh is lent when 3 points are settled on the game medium number control board P16 by operating the settlement switch P6. It is possible to output to the unit. In other words, the information of -3 points (FDh) to +3 points (03h) can be output to the rental unit.

C) Granted points The awarded points (also called winning points) indicate the number of game media awarded according to the mode of the symbol combination stopped (winning) on the active line after all the reels have stopped. For example, when 8 points are awarded, 08h information can be output, and when 15 points are awarded, 0Fh can be output to the lending unit.

The gaming machine P detects an abnormality in the total score using the total score information managed by the lending unit by transmitting the above-described "total score", "input point", and "given point" to the lending unit. It is possible.

d) Main control state 1
Main control state 1 indicates a state related to the game state. Specifically, in the 1-byte data, each bit is assigned which game state it is. For example, when Bit0 is 1, it is possible to output information indicating the RB state to the lending unit. For example, when Bit1 is 1, information indicating the BB state can be output to the lending unit. For example, when Bit2 is 1, it is possible to output information indicating the AT state to the rental unit. Bit3-Bit6 correspond to gaming machine status signals 1-4. The gaming machine state signals 1 to 4 can be used for different purposes or not used depending on the type of the gaming machine P. For example, every time the score obtained in the AT game reaches 100 points, the gaming machine state signal 1 is output. Bit 7 is unused, and is configured so that 0 can be output regardless of the type of game machine P. FIG. With this configuration, for example, when notifying that the unit is in the AT state, it is possible to output 00000100B to the lending unit.

e) Main control state 2
The main control state 2, like the main control state 1, indicates a state related to the game state. Bit0-Bit2 correspond to gaming machine status signals 5-7. The gaming machine state signals 5 to 7 can be used for different purposes or not used depending on the type of the gaming machine P. For example, outputting the gaming machine state signal 5 when shifting to a specific RT state (replay probability fluctuation state) can be mentioned. Bit3 to Bit7 are unused, and are configured so that 0 can be output regardless of the type of gaming machine P. FIG. By constructing in this way, for example, when a transition is made to a specific RT state, it is possible to output 00000001B to the lending unit.

F) Game machine error state The game machine error state indicates an error state composed of information including an error code or the like indicating an error occurring in the game machine P. FIG.

Specifically, Bit0 to Bit5 indicate an error code. Bit6 indicates whether there is an error in the number-of-game-media control board P16 (in this case, Bit6 is 0) or an error in the main control board P15 (in this case, Bit6 is 1). Bit 7 only reports an error in the rental unit (Bit 7 is 0 in this case), or an error is reported in the rental unit and an error code is also notified to the hall computer (HC) through the rental unit. indicates whether it is true (in this case, Bit7 is 1).

For example, assume that the gaming machine P is capable of detecting random number anomaly and radio wave anomaly as types of errors. At this time, it is possible to define error codes such as 00001B for random number anomaly and 00010B for radio wave anomaly, and to output information including these error codes. Specifically, when the random number abnormality is an error in the main control board P15 and the lending unit only reports the error, 01000001B can be output to the lending unit. Also, if the radio wave abnormality is an error in the game media number control board P16 and the lending unit notifies the error and also notifies the hall computer of the error code, 10000010B can be output to the lending unit. . If no error has occurred or if the gaming machine P does not have an error code, 00000000B can be output to the lending unit.

g) Gaming machine fraud 1 (main control)
The gaming machine fraud 1 (main control) indicates information regarding the detection of fraud related to the main control board P15 and the state related to the main control board P15. The game machine fraud 1 (main control) signal is treated as a hall computer signal. In other words, each signal of game machine fraud 1 (main control) output from the game machine P is output to the hall computer through the lending unit.

Each signal that constitutes gaming machine fraud 1 (main control) is described below.

A setting changing signal is assigned to Bit0. In other words, it indicates that the setting is being changed (during the setting change mode) and that the setting has been changed. Bit 0 of the setting change signal is 1 from the time the setting is being changed to the end of one game after the setting change (for example, when all the reels are stopped and the payout process is finished). Bit 0 becomes 0 in situations other than the end of one game during setting change to after setting change. The setting changing signal is output while the setting changing status is ON ("1" is stored in the setting changing status storage area of the RWM). The setting changing status is turned ON after the setting change mode is activated, RAM initialization processing is executed, and setting values are displayed. At the end of one game after the setting change, the setting changing status is turned OFF ("0" is stored in the setting changing status storage area of the RWM), thereby stopping the output of the setting changing signal.

In other words, the setting changing signal is not output when the gaming machine P turns on the setting changing status, but after the gaming machine P turns on the setting changing status, hall control/illegal monitoring is performed. When it is time to transmit information, a setting changing signal is output (Bit0 becomes 1) based on the fact that the setting changing status is ON. Similarly, when one game ends and the setting change status is turned OFF, after the setting change status is turned OFF, the setting change status will be displayed when it is time to send hall controller/fraud monitoring information. The output of the setting changing signal is stopped (Bit0 becomes 0) based on the fact that it is OFF.

With this configuration, it is possible to control the output information of the setting changing signal included in the hall controller/unauthorized monitoring information by managing ON or OFF of the setting changing status.

Subsequently, a setting confirmation signal is assigned to Bit1. That is, Bit1 is 1 when the setting is being checked (during the setting checking mode), and Bit1 is 0 when the setting is not being checked.

The signal during setting confirmation shows an example in which Bit is 1 only during setting confirmation, but it is not limited to this. may be configured. In other words, when the setting confirmation mode is started in the main control board P15 (for example, when the setting key switch is turned on in the game standby state), the game medium number control board P16 is notified that the setting confirmation mode is in effect. and the gaming machine fraud 1 bit sent from the game media count control board P16 to the lending unit becomes 1, and the main control board P15 sets the timer for setting confirmation, and the main control board P15 confirms the setting. When it is judged that 5 seconds have elapsed as a result of measuring the timer for setting (judgment that the count value of the timer for setting confirmation is "0"), a command related to the fact that 5 seconds have elapsed in the setting confirmation mode is sent to the game media number control board. P16, and having already received a command regarding the end of the setting confirmation mode from the main control board P15, the game machine fraud 1 bit sent from the game media number control board P16 to the lending unit becomes 0. configuration can be considered.

In this case, if 5 seconds have elapsed during the setting confirmation mode, a command regarding the lapse of 5 seconds in the setting confirmation mode may or may not be transmitted. Also, if 5 seconds have passed during the setting confirmation mode, the Bit of the gaming machine fraud 1 remains 1 until the setting confirmation mode is terminated. Also, even if the setting confirmation mode ends in less than 5 seconds (for example, 2 seconds), for the remaining 3 seconds (a total of 5 seconds), the game machine fraud 1 bit indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress is 1. there is With this configuration, even if the setting confirmation mode ends in a very short time, it is possible to secure sufficient time to transmit the setting confirmation mode information to the lending unit, and to detect an unauthorized setting key switch operation. becomes possible.

Further, when the setting confirmation mode is started in the main control board P15 (for example, when the setting key switch is turned on in the game standby state), the game medium number control board P16 indicates the setting confirmation mode. A command is sent, and the game machine fraud 1 bit sent from the game media number control board P16 to the lending unit becomes 1, and the setting confirmation timer is set in the main control board P15, and the setting confirmation timer is set. every time the main control board P15 updates the setting confirmation timer, the game media number control board P16 transmits a command related to the updating of the setting confirmation timer to the game medium number control board P16, and the game medium number control board P16 transmits from the main control board Based on the setting confirmation timer value (count value), it is determined that 5 seconds have passed in the setting confirmation mode (determining that the timer (count value) of the setting confirmation timer is 0). A configuration is conceivable in which the gaming machine fraud 1 bit transmitted from the control board P16 to the lending unit is set to 0.

In this case, if 5 seconds have passed during the setting confirmation mode, the command regarding the update of the setting confirmation timer will not be transmitted. Also, if 5 seconds have passed during the setting confirmation mode, the Bit of the gaming machine fraud 1 remains 1 until the setting confirmation mode is terminated. Also, even if the setting confirmation mode ends in less than 5 seconds (for example, 2 seconds), for the remaining 3 seconds (a total of 5 seconds), the game machine fraud 1 bit indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress is 1. there is With this configuration, even if the setting confirmation mode ends in a very short time, it is possible to secure sufficient time to transmit the setting confirmation mode information to the lending unit, and to detect an unauthorized setting key switch operation. becomes possible.

Further, when the setting confirmation mode is started in the main control board P15 (for example, when the setting key switch is turned on in the game standby state), the game medium number control board P16 indicates the setting confirmation mode. When the command is transmitted, the game machine fraud 1 bit transmitted from the game medium number control board P16 to the lending unit becomes 1, and the game medium number control board P16 sets the timer for setting confirmation, and the game medium number control board P16 determines that 5 seconds have elapsed in the setting confirmation mode based on the value (count value) of the setting confirmation timer (judging that the timer (count value) of the setting confirmation timer is 0), thereby controlling the number of game media A configuration is conceivable in which the gaming machine fraud 1 bit transmitted from the board P16 to the lending unit is set to 0.

In this case, when 5 seconds have passed during the setting confirmation mode, updating of the setting confirmation timer is terminated. Also, if 5 seconds have passed during the setting confirmation mode, the Bit of the gaming machine fraud 1 remains 1 until the setting confirmation mode is terminated. Also, even if the setting confirmation mode ends in less than 5 seconds (for example, 2 seconds), for the remaining 3 seconds (a total of 5 seconds), the game machine fraud 1 bit indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress is 1. there is With this configuration, even if the setting confirmation mode ends in a very short time, it is possible to secure sufficient time to transmit the setting confirmation mode information to the lending unit, and to detect an unauthorized setting key switch operation. becomes possible.

The timing for setting the setting confirmation timer may be after the setting confirmation mode is started and the setting values are displayed. Then, when either of the conditions "in the setting confirmation mode" and "the setting confirmation timer is not 0" is satisfied, the setting confirmation status is turned ON, the setting confirmation signal is output, When neither of the conditions "in the setting confirmation mode" and "the timer for setting confirmation is not 0" is satisfied, the setting confirmation status is turned OFF, and the output of the setting confirmation signal is stopped.

Output control of the setting confirmation signal will be described in detail.

When determining whether or not the setting key switch has been turned on during the game standby of the game progress main processing (determining whether or not the setting key switch has changed from OFF to ON), and when it is determined that the setting key switch has been turned on. sets a timer for 5 seconds (exactly 5004.165 ms) as the setting confirmation signal output period (because the interrupt processing interval is 2.235 ms, "2239" is set as the count value).

In the timer measurement processing in the interrupt processing that is executed after setting the timer for the setting confirmation signal output period (setting "2239" as the count value), the timer for the setting confirmation signal output period is decremented (the count value is set to "1" is subtracted), and in the game machine information management process in the interrupt process, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation signal output period has passed for 5 seconds (whether the count value is "0" or not). ), and if 5 seconds have not elapsed (if it is determined that the count value is not "0" (the zero flag is not set)), a setting confirmation signal is set, and if 5 seconds have elapsed ( If it is determined that the count value is "0" (the zero flag is set), the process proceeds to another process without setting the setting confirmation signal. Here, after the setting confirmation signal is set, the setting confirmation signal is output (transmitted to the lending unit side) when the transmission timing of the hall controller/unauthorized monitoring information notification arrives.

Whether or not the setting confirmation signal output period has passed for 5 seconds is determined by whether or not the zero flag is set. As a result of subtraction by timer measurement processing, when the timer for the setting confirmation signal output period is 0, the zero flag is set, so it is determined that 5 seconds have elapsed, and as a result of subtraction by timer measurement processing, the setting confirmation signal is output. If the period timer has not reached 0, it is determined that 5 seconds have not elapsed since the zero flag is not set. Note that the timer is set to 0 after 5 seconds or more have passed after the end of the setting confirmation mode and the output of the setting confirmation signal is completed. Since the zero flag is set, after 5 seconds have passed since the end of the setting confirmation mode, the setting confirmation signal is not set unless the setting confirmation mode is entered again.

In addition, during the game standby of the game progress main processing, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch has risen, and when it is determined that the setting key switch has risen, a timer of 5 seconds is set as a setting confirmation signal output period. After that, it is determined whether or not there is a fall of the setting key switch signal (the fall of the setting key switch) by the processing immediately after (determining whether or not the setting key switch has changed from ON to OFF). If it is determined that there is no setting confirmation signal output period, the timer is set again for 5 seconds, and the process returns to the process of determining whether or not the setting key switch has fallen.

After judging that the setting key switch rises in this way, the timer continues to set a 5-second setting confirmation signal output period until it judges that the setting key switch has fallen. A setting-confirming signal will be sent. In addition, even if it is determined that the setting key switch has fallen and the setting confirmation mode ends, the setting confirmation signal is transmitted until the timer for the setting confirmation signal output period reaches 0, so the setting confirmation mode is set to 5. Even if it ends within seconds, the setting confirmation signal can be transmitted for 5 seconds after the setting confirmation mode ends, and the setting confirmation signal can be reliably transmitted to the lending unit side.

In addition, even if a fraudulent act such as switching to the normal mode is performed after switching to the setting confirmation mode and spying on the setting value, since the setting confirmation signal is transmitted for 5 seconds, no trace of the fraud can be left. It becomes possible.

In addition, since the processing for setting the timer for the setting confirmation signal output period is executed using the loop processing of the game progress main processing, after the timer measurement processing in the interrupt processing is executed and the timer is subtracted, the game progresses. When setting the timer for the setting checking signal output period again in the loop processing of the main processing, the processing for setting the setting checking signal output period timer can be executed multiple times. A timer can be set to an initial value (5 seconds). In other words, in order to allow the process of setting the timer during the setting confirmation signal output period to be executed a plurality of times (at least twice), the time for executing the timer setting process once during the setting confirmation signal output period is set to 2. It is configured to be less than .235ms/2 (half the time between interrupt processing).

Further, according to such a configuration, the output period of the setting confirmation signal can be controlled by the process of setting the timer, so that the output of the setting confirmation signal can be accurately controlled with a simple program. Note that the output period of the setting confirmation signal is an example, and the output period of the setting confirmation signal may be any period (for example, 1 second, 3 seconds, 10 seconds, etc.), or the output of the setting confirmation signal may be stopped immediately after the setting confirmation mode ends.

Further, when it is determined that the setting key switch has risen during the game standby of the game progress main process, a sub-control command including at least a command based on the setting key switch rising is set. Further, when it is determined in the game progress main process that the set key switch has fallen, a sub-control command including at least a command based on the fall of the set key switch is set. In the sub-control command transmission processing in the interrupt processing, the set sub-control command is transmitted to the sub-control board P12, and when the sub-control command is received by the sub-control board P12, the sub-control command is analyzed. Execute the processing according to the result of the operation. For example, when a command based on the rise of the setting key switch is received, an effect corresponding to the setting confirmation mode is executed, and when a command based on the fall of the setting key switch is received, the setting confirmation mode is terminated and the normal mode or A production corresponding to the standby state is executed.

The effect corresponding to the setting confirmation mode does not directly correspond to the output period of the setting confirmation signal. For example, immediately after the setting confirmation mode ends, the setting confirming signal is continuously output for 5 seconds, but a command based on the falling edge of the setting key switch is sent to the sub control board P12, When the command is received, the effect corresponding to the setting confirmation mode is terminated immediately. If the performance corresponding to the setting confirmation mode is executed even though the setting confirmation mode is finished, the player will be under the illusion that the game cannot be progressed. By doing so, it is possible to immediately switch the effect state when the setting confirmation mode ends, and it is possible to prevent the player from being hindered in progressing the game. Furthermore, since the setting confirmation signal is output for 5 seconds even after the setting confirmation mode ends, it is possible to reliably transmit the setting confirmation signal to the lending unit side.

Subsequently, fraud detection signal 1 is assigned to Bit2, fraud detection signal 2 is assigned to Bit3, and fraud detection signal 3 is assigned to Bit4. For example, in a game machine P in which random number abnormality is detected as fraud, when detection of random number abnormality is assigned to fraud detection signal 1, Bit 2 becomes 1 when random number abnormality is detected, and random number abnormality is not detected. Bit2 becomes 0 in this case.

In addition, when the game machine is outputting any one of the fraud detection signal 1, fraud detection signal 2, and fraud detection signal 3, the progress of the game is stopped. In addition, when the lending unit receives any one of fraud detection signal 1, fraud detection signal 2, and fraud detection signal 3, it is impossible to insert and return the card through the card slot. In other words, when the lending unit receives any one of fraud detection signal 1, fraud detection signal 2, and fraud detection signal 3, the card is not returned even if the card return switch is operated, and A new card cannot be inserted from the card slot in the lending unit. Also, lending or replaying is possible in the lending unit. It is also possible to receive count notifications at the lending unit. It is also possible to deposit money from the banknote slot.

Further, even if the progress of the game is stopped while the game machine is outputting any one of the fraud detection signal 1, fraud detection signal 2, and fraud detection signal 3, the communication with the rental unit is continued. Running. Specifically, the lending unit and gaming machine information are sent every 300ms, and when the counting switch of the gaming machine is operated, a value other than 0 (for example, 50) is sent to the lending unit as a counting notification. sent.

Subsequently, Bit5 is assigned a security signal. Specifically, when the fraud detection signal is output (when Bits 2 to 4 are 1), when the setting change signal is output (when Bit 0 is 1), the setting confirmation signal is output. (When Bit 1 is 1), or when a complete signal is output (when Bit 6 is 1) due to the execution of stop processing (when the safety device (complete function) is operating) Bit5 is 1, and Bit5 is 0 in other situations.

It should be noted that the progress of the game is stopped while the gaming machine is outputting the security signal. In addition, in a situation where the lending unit is receiving a security signal and is receiving any one of the fraud detection signal 1, fraud detection signal 2, and fraud detection signal 3, the security signal from the card slot Cards cannot be inserted or returned. In other words, in a situation where the lending unit is receiving the security signal and is receiving any one of the fraud detection signal 1, fraud detection signal 2, and fraud detection signal 3, the card return switch is turned on. The card is not returned even if it is operated, and a new card cannot be inserted from the card slot in the lending unit. Also, lending or replaying is possible in the lending unit. It is also possible to receive count notifications at the lending unit. It is also possible to deposit money from the banknote slot.

In addition, even if the progress of the game is stopped while the game machine is outputting the security signal, the communication with the rental unit is continuously executed. Specifically, the lending unit and gaming machine information are sent every 300ms, and when the counting switch of the gaming machine is operated, a value other than 0 (for example, 50) is sent to the lending unit as a counting notification. sent.

In addition, a situation where the lending unit receives the security signal and does not receive any of the fraud detection signal 1, fraud detection signal 2, and fraud detection signal 3 (the lending unit does not receive the security signal) a situation in which a setting change signal is being received, a situation in which the lending unit is receiving a security signal and a setting confirmation signal is being received, or a situation in which the lending unit is receiving In a situation where a security signal is received and a complete signal is received), the card can be returned when the card return switch is operated. Also, in the lending unit, it is possible to insert a new card through the card slot. Also, lending or replaying is possible in the lending unit. It is also possible to receive count notifications at the lending unit. It is also possible to deposit money from the banknote slot.

Subsequently, Bit 6 is assigned the complete signal (also called stop signal, safety device actuation signal, or complete function actuation signal). For example, Bit6 becomes 1 when the stopping process is being executed because the value of the difference counter exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 19000), and Bit6 becomes 0 in other cases.

The complete signal is configured to be output for at least 10 seconds after the operation of the complete function is started. Therefore, even if the predetermined termination condition for terminating the operation of the complete function is satisfied, the output can be performed for at least 10 seconds. In other words, even if the predetermined termination condition is satisfied within 10 seconds after the complete function is activated, the complete signal is output to the lending unit for 10 seconds after the complete function is activated.

In addition, like the above-mentioned setting confirmation signal, when the complete function is in operation, updating of the counter that manages the output time of the complete signal is substantially stopped (while the complete function is in operation, the counter is always set to the initial value). Since the complete signal can be output for 10 seconds after the completion of the operation of the function, the complete signal output period can be output for the time during the operation of the complete function plus 10 seconds. Therefore, the complete signal can be output to more lending units.

Although details will be described later, initialization processing by setting change processing corresponds to a predetermined termination condition for terminating the operation of the complete function. For this reason, the complete function is activated and the output of the complete signal is started at the first timing, and then at the second timing, which is 10 seconds before the first timing, the game machine is powered off and the setting key switch is turned off. When it is turned to the ON position, the game machine is powered on, the setting change mode is activated, a setting change signal and a complete signal are output, and if the setting is being changed at the timing 10 seconds after the first timing, The output of the signal during setting change is maintained, but the output of the complete signal is terminated. The time (10 seconds) for outputting the complete signal may or may not include the time during which the game machine is powered off.

In addition, since the output of the setting change signal ends when one game is completed after the setting change is completed, the complete function is activated and the output of the complete signal is started at the first timing, after which 10 seconds elapse from the first timing. At the previous second timing, the game machine is powered off, the setting key switch is turned to the ON position, the power of the game machine is turned on, the setting change mode is activated, and the setting changing signal and the complete signal are output. If the timing 10 seconds after the first timing is after the end of the setting change mode and before the execution of one game, the output of the setting changing signal is maintained, but the output of the complete signal is ended. The time (10 seconds) for outputting the complete signal may or may not include the time during which the game machine is powered off.

In addition, the complete function is actuated to start outputting the complete signal at the first timing, and then at the second timing 10 seconds before the first timing, the game machine is powered off and the setting key switch is turned on. The game machine is turned to the position, the power of the game machine is turned on, the setting change mode is activated, the setting change signal and the complete signal are output, and the timing 10 seconds after the first timing is after the setting change mode ends. After one game has been executed, the output of the setting changing signal is finished, and the output of the complete signal is also finished. The time (10 seconds) for outputting the complete signal may or may not include the time during which the game machine is powered off.

In addition, when the complete signal output count is substantially stopped when the complete function is activated (when the complete signal is always output during the complete function is activated), the complete function is activated and the complete signal is output at the first timing. After that, even if 10 seconds have passed since the first timing, the output of the complete signal is maintained at the second timing when the complete function is operating, and then the game machine is turned off, and the setting key switch is turned to the ON position to turn on the power of the game machine, and at the third timing when the setting change mode is activated, the setting change in progress signal and the complete signal are output. At the fourth timing before 10 seconds have elapsed since the execution of the change processing, the setting change signal and the complete signal are output. If the timing 10 seconds after the execution of the change processing is after the end of the setting change mode and before the execution of one game, the output of the signal during setting change is maintained, but the output of the complete signal is ended.

In addition, when the complete signal output count is substantially stopped when the complete function is activated (when the complete signal is always output during the complete function is activated), the complete function is activated and the complete signal is output at the first timing. After that, even if 10 seconds have passed since the first timing, the output of the complete signal is maintained at the second timing when the complete function is operating, and then the game machine is turned off, and the setting key switch is turned to the ON position to turn on the power of the game machine, and at the third timing when the setting change mode is activated, the setting change in progress signal and the complete signal are output. At the fourth timing before 10 seconds have elapsed since the execution of the change processing, the setting change signal and the complete signal are output. If the timing 10 seconds after the execution of the change processing is after the end of the setting change mode and after the execution of one game, the output of the setting changing signal is finished and the output of the complete signal is also finished.

In this way, even if another signal is output to the lending unit while the complete signal is being output, the output of the complete signal is maintained. Other signals include a door open signal, a setting door open signal, a setting confirmation signal, fraud detection signals 1 to 3, and the like.

Subsequently, Bit7 is unused and Bit7 becomes 0.

Here, focusing on the setting changing signal, the setting checking signal, and the security signal, the output of the signals will be described with examples. Although fraud detection signal 1, fraud detection signal 2, and fraud detection signal 3 are not mentioned here, fraud detection signal 1, fraud detection signal 2, and fraud detection signal 3 are also output as "0" or "1." ing. Also, the first game refers to the first game after the setting change mode is performed.

(Case 1) For example, after changing the settings, the first game ends (the end of the game means that all the reels have stopped or the point giving process corresponding to the symbol combination has ended. , the same.) In this case, "1" (ON) is output as the setting change signal from a predetermined timing when the setting change mode is started, and "0" (OFF) is output as the setting change signal after the first game is completed. be. In this case, if the setting confirmation mode has not been entered, "0" (off) continues to be output as the setting confirmation signal. In addition, even when "0" (off) is output as the fraud detection signal 1, fraud detection signal 2, and fraud detection signal 3, the setting change signal "1" is output. The signal outputs "1" (on), and at the timing of outputting "0" as the setting change signal, any one of fraud detection signal 1, fraud detection signal 2, and fraud detection signal 3 is set to " When not outputting "1", it outputs "0" as a security signal. Note that if any one of fraud detection signal 1, fraud detection signal 2, and fraud detection signal 3 outputs "1" as the fraud detection signal at the timing of outputting "0" as the setting change signal, the security Output "1" as a signal.

(Case 2) For example, after changing the settings, it is assumed that the power switch is turned off (the power is cut off) before the first game ends, and then turned on (the power is restored). After that, the first game is executed and the first game is finished. In this case, "1" (on) is output as a setting change signal from a predetermined timing when the setting change mode is started, and while the power is off, the output process is not performed, and the setting is changed from a specific timing after the power is restored. "1" (ON) is output as a medium signal, and "0" (OFF) is output as a setting change signal after the first game is completed. In this case, if the setting confirmation mode has not been entered, "0" (off) continues to be output as the setting confirmation signal. In addition, even when "0" (off) is output as the fraud detection signal 1, fraud detection signal 2, and fraud detection signal 3, the setting change signal "1" is output. The signal outputs "1" (on), and at the timing of outputting "0" as the setting change signal, any one of fraud detection signal 1, fraud detection signal 2, and fraud detection signal 3 is set to " When not outputting "1", it outputs "0" as a security signal. Note that if any one of fraud detection signal 1, fraud detection signal 2, and fraud detection signal 3 outputs "1" as the fraud detection signal at the timing of outputting "0" as the setting change signal, the security Output "1" as a signal.

(Case 3) For example, it is assumed that after changing the setting, the setting confirmation mode is entered before the first game is started, and then the setting confirmation mode is terminated. After that, the first game is executed and the first game is finished. In this case, "1" (on) is output as the setting change signal from a predetermined timing when the setting change mode is started, and "1" (on) is output as the setting change signal even during the setting confirmation mode. After the first game is finished, "0" (off) is output as a setting change signal. In this case, in the setting confirmation mode, "1" (ON) is continuously output as the setting confirmation signal. In addition, even when "0" (off) is output as the fraud detection signal 1, fraud detection signal 2, and fraud detection signal 3, the setting change signal "1" is output. The signal outputs "1" (on), and at the timing of outputting "0" as the setting change signal, any one of fraud detection signal 1, fraud detection signal 2, and fraud detection signal 3 is set to " When not outputting "1", it outputs "0" as a security signal. Note that if any one of fraud detection signal 1, fraud detection signal 2, and fraud detection signal 3 outputs "1" as the fraud detection signal at the timing of outputting "0" as the setting change signal, the security Output "1" as a signal.

H) Gaming machine fraud 2 (main control or game media count control)
The gaming machine fraud 2 (main control or game media count control) refers to the detection of fraud related to the main control board P15 or the game media count control board P16, and information related to the state of the main control board P15 or the game media count control board P16. show. The game machine fraud 2 (main control or game medium count control) signal is treated as a hall computer signal. In other words, each signal of game machine fraud 1 (main control) output from the game machine P is output to the hall computer through the lending unit.

Each signal constituting gaming machine fraud 2 (main control or game medium number control) is described below.

A setting door open signal is assigned to Bit0. The setting door open signal is a signal that indicates whether or not a setting key switch cover member that covers a setting key switch for changing settings is open. When the setting key switch cover member is open, Bit0 becomes 1 and information indicating that the setting key switch cover member is open is included in the game machine fraud 2, and the setting key switch cover member is closed. When it is on, Bit 0 becomes 0 and information indicating that the setting key switch cover member is closed is included in game machine fraud 2 . Bit0 is 0 in a game machine P that is not provided with a setting key switch cover member or a game machine P that does not have a function of detecting the opening of the setting key switch cover member.

Next, Bit1 is assigned a door open signal (also referred to as a door switch signal). The door open signal is a signal indicating whether or not the front door P2 of the gaming machine P is open. When the front door P2 of the gaming machine P is open, Bit0 becomes 1 and information indicating that the front door P2 is open is included in the gaming machine fraud 2, and the front door P2 of the gaming machine P is opened. When closed, Bit0 becomes 0, and information indicating that the front door P2 is closed is included in the game machine fraud 2.例文帳に追加

The door open signal performs output control according to the opening/closing mode of the front door P2 depending on the detection status of ON or OFF of the door switch by the input port reading process in the interrupt process described above.

When it is determined that the front door P2 is open by the input port reading process in the interrupt process, a timer of 5 seconds (exactly 5001.93 ms) is set (interrupt process interval is 2.235 ms). Therefore, "2239" is set as the count value). Then, the timer is measured (the count value is decremented by "1") by timer measurement processing within the same interrupt processing. Then, the game machine information management process in the same interrupt process determines that the output time of the door open signal has not passed 5 seconds (as a result of subtracting the count value, the count value is not 0 (the zero flag is set). ), the door open signal is set, and it is determined that the output time of the door open signal has passed 5 seconds (as a result of subtracting the count value, the count value is 0 (the zero flag is set). If it is determined that the game machine has been set), a signal setting process relating to other game machine information is executed without setting the door open signal.

Then, when it is determined that the front door P2 is open by the input port read processing in the next interrupt processing, the timer for 5 seconds is set again (because the interval between interrupt processing is 2.235 ms, the count value to "2239" again). In other words, when the front door P2 is open, the 5-second timer is repeatedly set (the timer setting process is executed multiple times).

In this way, when the front door P2 is open, the timer for 5 seconds continues to be set for each interrupt process, so even if the timer is subtracted (the count value is subtracted), the zero flag is not raised. In other words, the process of subtracting "1" from the count value "2239" is repeated each time the timer measurement process in the interrupt process is executed. According to such a configuration, the door open signal is always output under the condition that the front door P2 is open.

Further, when the front door P2 is closed, it is determined that the front door P2 is closed by detecting that the door switch is ON by the input port reading process in the interrupt process, and the front door P2 is closed. If so, do not reset the 5 second timer. Then, the timer is measured (the count value is decremented by "1") by timer measurement processing within the same interrupt processing. Then, it is determined whether the output time of the door open signal has passed 5 seconds by the game machine information management process in the same interrupt process. Here, when the front door P2 is closed, the 5-second timer is not reset. The value is decremented and the timer (count value) approaches "0".

In this embodiment, the timer setting process and the timer subtraction process are executed in the same interrupt process. ' is set, the number of interrupts until it becomes '0' is 2237, which is less than 5 seconds (4999.7 ms to be exact). Therefore, the preset initial value is set to "2238+1 (2239)". In other words, the count value becomes "2238" by the timer measurement processing in the interrupt processing in which the initial value "2239" is set, and the number of interrupts can be set to 2238 times.

When the count value becomes "0" by the timer measurement processing, the output of the door open signal can be stopped because the zero flag is set. In other words, the door open signal is output for 5 seconds after the front door P2 is closed, and the output of the door open signal is stopped after 5 seconds. Note that the timer is set to 0 after 5 seconds or more have passed since the door was closed and the output of the door open signal is finished. When the timer is set to 0, the result of subtraction by the timer measurement process is also set to 0, and the zero flag is set. Therefore, after 5 seconds have passed since the door was closed, the door open signal is not set unless the door is opened again. In other words, five seconds after the front door P2 is closed, Bit1 is set to 1 and the information indicating that the front door P2 is open is included in the gaming machine fraud 2, and after five seconds have passed, Bit1 is 0, and information indicating that the front door P2 is closed is included in the gaming machine fraud 2, and in a situation where the front door P2 is closed, the front door P2 is opened to the gaming machine fraud 2. There are cases where the gaming machine fraud 2 contains information indicating that the front door P2 is closed.

According to such a configuration, the output period of the door open signal can be controlled by setting the timer, so that the output of the door open signal can be accurately controlled with a simple program. The output period of the door open signal is an example, and the output period of the door open signal is any period (eg, 1 second, 3 seconds, 10 seconds, etc.) so that the output of the door open signal is not stopped immediately after the door is closed. ) may be set, or the output of the door open signal may be stopped immediately after the door is closed.

Further, in the sub notification data output process in the interrupt process, a door switch signal is transmitted to the sub control board P12 according to whether the door switch is ON or OFF, and the sub control board P12 outputs the door switch signal. When the OFF signal is received, it is determined that the door is open, and control is performed such that door opening notification performance such as door opening sound and door opening message display is executed.

The door open effect does not directly correspond to the output period of the door open signal. For example, immediately after the door is closed, the door open signal is continuously output for 5 seconds, but the door switch signal becomes an ON signal and is transmitted to the sub-control board P12. However, by configuring the sub control board P12 side to execute the door opening effect for five seconds after detecting that the door switch signal has changed from OFF to ON, the output period of the door open signal and the door opening effect can be made similar. This makes it possible to visually recognize the output period of the door open signal, and makes it easier for the administrator to grasp the signal output period.

In the present embodiment, the output period of the door open signal and the execution period of the door opening effect are made similar, but the execution period of the door open effect may be longer than the output period of the door open signal. You can shorten it.

In this embodiment, the timer is set for each interrupt process. However, the timer may be set for each predetermined number of interrupts, which is two or more. However, in order to prevent the timer value (count value) from becoming 0 after setting the timer until the next timer is set, the interrupt interval for executing timer set processing is shorter than the time indicated by the timer (count value). need to be

Further, in a situation where the game machine is outputting the set door open signal or the door open signal, progress of the game is stopped. In addition, when the lending unit receives either the door open signal or the door open signal, lending or replay, card insertion and return from the card slot, and deposit from the bill slot is not allowed. In other words, when the lending unit receives either the door open signal or the door open signal, the card cannot be returned even if the card return switch is operated. In addition, even if a lending switch or a replay switch is operated in a lending unit, lending or replaying cannot be performed, and bills cannot be thrown into a bill slot. Note that it is possible for the lending unit to receive the count notification.

Further, even if the progress of the game is stopped while the gaming machine is outputting the set door open signal or the door open signal, the communication with the lending unit continues. Specifically, the lending unit and gaming machine information are sent every 300ms, and when the counting switch of the gaming machine is operated, a value other than 0 (for example, 50) is sent to the lending unit as a counting notification. sent.

In addition, when the gaming machine is outputting the set door open signal or the door open signal, even if the lending switch of the lending unit is operated, 0 is sent to the gaming machine as a lending notification as the number of lending medals. Further, since communication between the gaming machine and the lending unit is normally performed, the lending unit can normally transmit the lending serial number to the gaming machine.

Subsequently, Bit2 is unused and Bit2 becomes 0.

Bit 3 is assigned to detect clearing of the number of game media. Clearing the number of game media means that the total score stored in the number-of-game-media control board P16 is cleared when the total score clear switch provided on the number-of-game-media control board P16 is operated. For example, when the bet score is "3" and the total score stored in the game media count control board P16 is "1000", the bet score is reduced to "1000" by operating the total score clear switch. 3", and the total score stored in the number-of-game-media control board P16 is "0". In other words, the bet score is not cleared when the total score clear switch is operated. Bit3 becomes "1" when the operation of the total score clear switch is detected, and Bit3 becomes "0" when the operation of the total score clear switch is not detected. Bit 3 becomes "0" in the case of the gaming machine P that does not have a total score clear switch. When the total score is initialized, Bit3 is kept at "1" until the end of the game after the total score is initialized.

Subsequently, Bit4 to Bit7 are unused, and Bit4 to Bit7 are 0.

i) Gaming machine fraud 3 (main control or game media count control)
The gaming machine fraud 3 indicates information regarding the detection of fraud related to the main control board P15 or the game medium number control board P16 provided as a spare and the state related to the main control board P15 or the game medium number control board P16.
In the gaming machine P of this embodiment, it is unused because it is not used. In other words, Bit0 to Bit7 are 0.

Bit2, Bit4, and Bit5 of gaming machine fraud 2 and Bit0 and Bit1 of gaming machine fraud 3 are not used, so they are basically set to "0". When the bit is "1", it is transmitted to the lending unit and received by the SC board in the lending unit, the lending operation is prohibited (invalidate even if the lending switch is operated, etc.).

This is because in the event of an illegal program or malicious data being installed in an unused storage area, if the unused area is used, the lending operation will be prohibited. This is to prevent it from happening.

In addition, it is also assumed that a management gaming machine (also referred to as an enclosed gaming machine) that plays games using game balls and a medal-less gaming machine in this embodiment use a common lending unit. Bit 2 of fraud 2 is used for fraudulent radio wave detection, Bit 4 of gaming machine fraud 2 is used to detect winning ball number abnormality 1, Gaming machine fraud 2 Bit 5 is used to detect winning ball number abnormality 2, Gaming machine fraud 3 Bit 0 of is used for small ball detection, and Bit 1 of gaming machine fraud 3 is used for iron ball detection. is configured to By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the burden on the hall regarding the introduction of the management game machine and the medalless game machine. Note that once the rental unit is prohibited from being rented, the reset switch mounted on the gaming machine P is operated, and an error release signal is received, thereby allowing the rental unit to be rented.

Fraud detection means for detecting fraud may be provided in the main control board P15 and/or the game media number control board P16. Hereinafter, the behavior of the game machine P when, for example, radio wave abnormality is detected by the fraud detection means will be illustrated.

As the first behavior, when the game machine P (main control board P15 or game medium number control board P16) detects an abnormality in radio waves, the game in the main control means is stopped (an error state is established). . At this time, the communication between the game media count control board P16 and the lending unit (outputting and receiving various messages) may be continued, or the communication between the game media count control board P16 and the lending unit may be stopped. You can Further, the communication between the main control board P15 and the game medium number control board P16 may be continued, or the communication between the main control board P15 and the game medium number control board P16 may be stopped. Furthermore, the communication between the main control board P15 and the effect control board may be continued, or the communication between the main control board P15 and the effect control board may be stopped. It should be noted that the error notification using a lamp, an image display device, or an amplifier (sound) may be executed under the control of the effect control board.

As a second behavior, when the game machine P (the main control board P15 or the game medium number control board P16) detects a radio wave abnormality, it is possible to play games in the main control means. At this time, the communication between the game media count control board P16 and the lending unit (outputting and receiving various messages) may be continued, or the communication between the game media count control board P16 and the lending unit may be stopped. You can Further, the communication between the main control board P15 and the game medium number control board P16 may be continued, or the communication between the main control board P15 and the game medium number control board P16 may be stopped. Furthermore, the communication between the main control board P15 and the effect control board may be continued, or the communication between the main control board P15 and the effect control board may be stopped. Although the game can be executed under the control of the main control board P15, error notification using a lamp, an image display, or an amplifier (sound) may be executed under the control of the performance control board.

Although the radio wave anomaly has been explained as an example, the behavior described above is not limited to the radio wave anomaly. Detected by fraud detection means for detecting fraud, such as a set value abnormality that is determined to be abnormal when it is not, and an RWM abnormality that is determined to be abnormal when the data stored in the RWM of the main control board P15 is not normal when the power is restored Other possible anomalies are also applicable.

Furthermore, when a plurality of abnormalities can be detected by the fraud detection means for detecting fraud, the above-described first behavior is performed for the first abnormality (for example, random number abnormality), and the second abnormality is detected. (For example, radio wave anomaly) may be configured to behave differently according to the type of anomaly, such as performing the second behavior described above.

Next, a) number of game information, c) type information 1, c) count information 1, c) type information 2, and c) count information 2, which are game information in hall control/fraud monitoring information to be described later, will be described.

Information composed of type information 1 and count information 1 may be referred to as game information 1, type information 2, and count information 2 as game information 2 in some cases. This game information 1 or game information 2 consists of a total of 2 bytes of type information (upper 1 byte) and count information (lower 1 byte).

The type information consists of a data type (upper 4 bits) and a data number (lower 4 bits). When the data type is "0001B", it is information indicating the prescribed number (the number of bets). Further, when the data type is "0010B", it is information indicating the number of grants. Note that data types "0" and "3" to "15" are unused. The data number is fixed to "0001B" depending on whether the data type is "0001B" indicating the prescribed number or "0010B" indicating the assigned number. That is, data numbers "0" and "2" to "15" are unused.

In addition, the setting contents of the count information are different for each data type, and when the data type is "0001B" indicating the specified number, the count information can take values from "00000001B" to "00000011B". there is In other words, Bits 4-7 are unused and Bits 0-3 are used. In addition, when the data type is "0010B" indicating the number of grants, the count information can take values from "00000001B" to "00001111B" (values up to the maximum number of grants for each gaming machine can be taken). (they are supposed to be obtained). In other words, Bits 4-7 are unused and Bits 0-3 are used.

Also, when the number of game information is 0, the type information and the count information are not transmitted. This game information is treated as a hall computer signal. In other words, the game information output from the game machine P is output to the hall computer through the lending unit.

J) Number of game information This is information indicating the number of pieces of game information composed of type information and count information. For example, when the number of game information is 0, type information 1, count information 1, type information 2, and count information 2 are not output. Further, for example, when the number of game information is 1, the type information 1 and the count information 1 are output. Further, for example, when the number of game information is 2, type information 1 and count information 1 are output, and type information 2 and count information 2 are output.

S) Type information 1, and S) Type information 2
The type information is information constituting the game information described above. When indicating the number of bets (throwing points) used in a game, the type information is "00010001B" as the type information 1. FIG. Further, in the case of indicating the given number (given points) given as a result of the game, the type information as type information 1 or type information 2 is "00100001B".

c) count information 1 and c) count information 2
The count information is information constituting the game information described above. When the number of bets (throwing points) used in the game is output as the count information 1, a value corresponding to the number of bets (throwing points) used in the game is set. When outputting the given number (given points) as a result of the game as the count information 1 or the count information 2, a value corresponding to the given number (given points) given in the game is set. As a game result of the game, if a replay combination is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, a value corresponding to the number of bets (input points) used in the game is given according to the game result. It is set as the given number (given points).

For example, when the start switch is operated after betting three cards, "00000001B" is output as the number of game information based on the reception of the start switch acceptance command, and the number of bets used in the game is output as the game information. "0001000100000011B (1103h)" is output, in which the type information indicating (throwing point) is the upper 1 byte and the count information, which is the value corresponding to the number of bets (throwing point) used in the game, is the lower 1 byte.

Further, for example, as a result of the internal lottery for determining the winning combination, if a lottery result that can award 10 points is won and all the reels are stopped and the symbol combination that awards 10 points is stopped and displayed, the game ends. When (when a command to stop all reels is received), as the number of game information, the upper 1 byte of the type information indicating the number of awarded points (points awarded) given as a result of the game, "00000001B" is output with the count information corresponding to the point) as the lower 1 byte, and "0010000100001010B (210Ah)" is output as the game information.

Further, for example, when a start switch acceptance command is received in the case of using 3 points as the entry point immediately after receiving a command to stop all reels in the case of giving 10 points as the number of points to be given, the number of game information is "00000010B". is output, and as game information 1, the type information indicating the number of bets (throwing points) used in the game is the upper 1 byte, and the count information, which is the value corresponding to the number of bets (throwing points) used in the game, is the lower 1 byte. "0001000100000011B (1103h)" is output as a byte, and as the game information 2, the upper 1 byte of the type information indicating the number of awarded points (points awarded) given as a result of the game, "0010000100001010B (210Ah)" is output with the count information, which is the value corresponding to the point), as the lower 1 byte.

The input point uses the information stored in (_WK_MDL_IN) described above, and the given point uses the information stored in (_WK_MDL_OUT) described above. The entry point storage area for outputting the entry point of game machine information for hall control/fraud monitoring information is stored in a storage area different from the entry point storage area for outputting the entry point of game information. there is Similarly, the memory area for the points to be awarded for outputting the points for the gaming machine information of hall controller/fraud monitoring information is stored in a storage area different from the storage area for the points for outputting the points for game information. there is A storage area (_WK_MDL_IN) capable of storing game information input points and a storage area (_WK_MDL_OUT) capable of storing game information points are initialized after transmission.

<Notification of counting>
The above-mentioned count notification (see FIG. 20) is composed of a 7-byte message length, and is a signal transmitted from the game machine P to the lending unit when the game machine P accepts the operation of the count switch P7. be.

The information that constitutes the count notification includes the message length (1 byte), command (1 byte), count serial number (1 byte), count point (1 byte), count cumulative point (2 bytes), checksum (1 byte). ).

The telegram length indicates the length of the telegram of the counting notification, and since it is 7 bytes, it is "0x07".

The command is "0x02" indicating a count notification.

The counting serial number is a serial number dedicated to counting, and is a dedicated serial number that is different from the serial number described above and the lending serial number described later. The count serial number ranges from "0x00" to "0xFF", and is incremented by the game machine P each time the game machine P transmits a count notification. "0x00" of the count serial numbers is a count serial number that is transmitted only when the power is turned on, and the value following "0xFF" is "0x01".

The counting points are the points related to the counting transmitted in one gaming machine information notification out of the gaming machine information notifications transmitted by the gaming machine P every 300 ms. Since the count points range from "0x00" to "0x32", a maximum of 50 points are sent to the lending unit in one gaming machine information notification. Further, when the total score stored in the game media number control board P16 is 50 points or more, the data "0x32" indicating 50 points is transmitted. If the score is less than 50 points, data corresponding to the current total score stored in the game media number control board P16 is transmitted (for example, if the total score stored in the game medium number control board P16 is 30). In the case of points, "0x1E" data indicating 30 points is transmitted).

The above-described example of counting points is an example in which 50 points are counted when the operation of the counting switch P7 is accepted only once (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a short-press operation). When the pressing operation is accepted, 1 point may be counted, and when the long-pressing operation of the counting switch P7 is accepted, 50 points may be counted.

In this case, accepting the short-pressing operation of the counting switch P7 means that the game medium number control board P16 has a value indicating that the level data regarding the acceptance of the operation of the counting switch P7 is ON (operation of the counting switch P7 in interrupt processing). A case can be exemplified in which the period during which the reception has a value indicating ON is less than a predetermined period (for example, less than 500 ms). That is, when the operation of the counting switch P7 is accepted during the first period less than the predetermined period, it is assumed that the short-press operation of the counting switch P7 has been accepted, and one point is counted.

Further, when the long-pressing operation of the counting switch P7 is accepted, the level data regarding the acceptance of the operation of the counting switch P7 of the game medium number control board P16 is a value indicating ON (the operation of the counting switch P7 is accepted in the interrupt processing). is a value indicating ON) is longer than or equal to a predetermined period (for example, 500 ms or longer). That is, when the operation of the counting switch P7 is accepted for a second period longer than the predetermined period, it is assumed that the long pressing operation of the counting switch P7 has been accepted, and 50 points are counted. If the counting switch P7 is still pressed long at the timing of sending the counting notification after the counting point "50" is sent to the lending unit as the counting notification, the counting point "50" is sent to the lending unit as the counting notification. do. In other words, after the long-press determination is made, the count point "50" is sent to the rental unit as a count notification until the count switch P7 is no longer operated (until the level data regarding the reception of the operation of the count switch P7 becomes a value indicating OFF). Continue (however, if the total score is less than 50, count that value). In this case, counting is not performed until it is determined that the counting switch P7 is being pressed for a long time (for example, 500 ms).

In addition, after accepting the operation of the counting switch P7, the game medium number control board P16 increments the value of the counting switch timer for each interrupt processing (every 1 ms) (initial value is "0"). When the value of the count switch timer reaches 500 (when the count switch P7 is pressed for 50 ms), the increment process is not executed in the next interrupt process. In other words, the value of the counting switch timer maintains 500 even if the time during which the counting switch P7 is actually pressed exceeds 500 ms, such as 1000 ms.

This is because the value of the counting switch timer continues to be incremented, the value of the counting switch timer exceeds the storage upper limit, the value of the counting switch timer is counted again from 0, and the value of the counting switch timer is changed to the second week. This is to prevent the count point from becoming "1" when the count switch P7 is released when the count is between 0 and 499.

Therefore, when the count switch timer value is incremented, it is determined whether the count switch timer value is 500 or not. is configured to execute the next process without executing the increment process.

When the counting switch P7 is released while the counting switch timer value is being counted, the counting switch timer value is initialized to 0 so that when the counting switch P7 is pressed again, the counting switch timer value is reset to 0. can be counted.

Moreover, although the count of the counting switch timer has been described as being incremented, it may be decremented. In this case, 501 is set as the counting switch timer value when the operation of the counting switch P7 is accepted, and when the counting switch timer value is 1, the decrement processing is not executed. effect can be obtained.

The count accumulation point is a value obtained by accumulating count points from when the game machine P is powered on. The count accumulation point is in the range from "0x0000" to "0xFFFF", and the count point is added each time the count is performed. When the count accumulation point exceeds "0xFFFF", the value next to "0xFFFF" is set to "0x0000". Also, when the gaming machine P is powered on, the count accumulation point is cleared to zero.

The checksum is a value obtained by adding the values of message length (1 byte), command (1 byte), count serial number (1 byte), count point (1 byte), and count accumulation point (2 bytes). The checksum is used for judging whether or not the count notification received by the lending unit against the count notification transmitted from the gaming machine P is correct.

<Rental Notice>
The lending notification consists of a message length of 5 bytes, and is a signal transmitted from the lending unit to the game machine P when the lending unit accepts the operation of the lending switch. When the lending unit receives the count notification from the game machine P, it transmits the lending notification to the game machine P. - 特許庁However, if the gaming machine information notification has not been received, or if the gaming machine information type of the gaming machine information notification is other than "0x02" (notified other than hall control/fraud monitoring information), the count notification will be counted. When the point is notified in the range of 1 to 50 (value other than 0), the lending point is set to 0 and notified to the game machine P.

The information that constitutes the rental notification consists of a message length (1 byte), a command (1 byte), a rental serial number (1 byte), the number of rental game media (1 byte), and a checksum (1 byte). .

The telegram length indicates the length of the telegram of the rental notification, and since it is 5 bytes, it is "0x05".

The command is "0x13" indicating a rental notice.

The lending serial number is a serial number dedicated to lending, and is a serial number dedicated to lending that is different from the serial numbers and counting serial numbers described above. The lending serial number ranges from "0x00" to "0xFF" and is incremented each time a lending receipt result response, which will be described later, is transmitted from the gaming machine P. Among the rental serial numbers, "0x00" is a rental serial number that is transmitted only when communication with the gaming machine P is started, and the value following "0xFF" is "0x01".

The lending points are points related to lending transmitted to the game machine P by operating a lending switch provided in the lending unit. Since the lending points range from "0x00" to "0x32", a maximum of 50 points are transmitted to the gaming machine P in one gaming machine information notification. In addition, when the number of points that can be borrowed stored in the storage medium (member card, visitor card, etc.) inserted in the lending unit is 50 points or more, the data "0x32" indicating 50 points is transmitted to the game machine P. However, if the number of points that can be borrowed stored in the storage medium is less than 50, data corresponding to the current number of points that can be borrowed stored in the storage medium is transmitted (for example, If there are 20 points available for rent, the data "0x14" indicating 20 points is transmitted).

The checksum is a value obtained by adding the message length (1 byte), command (1 byte), lending serial number (1 byte), and lending point (1 byte). The checksum is used when the gaming machine P receives the lending notification sent from the lending unit to the gaming machine P to determine whether or not the received lending notification is correct.

<Rental Receipt Result Response>
The lending receipt result response consists of a message length of 5 bytes, and is a signal transmitted from the gaming machine P to the lending unit based on the gaming machine P receiving the lending notification. When the gaming machine P receives the lending notification from the lending unit, it transmits a lending reception result response to the lending unit. However, if the lending serial numbers notified from the lending unit are not consecutive, or if the game machine P cannot be rented due to a RAM error in the main control board P15 or the game medium number control board P16, etc., the game medium number control If the value obtained by adding the total score and the loaned points stored in the board P16 exceeds the total score memory upper limit value (for example, 16383 described above) stored in the game medium number control board P16, or the game medium number control board P16 If the stored total score is a value (15000 or more) equal to or greater than the threshold value, it responds with a value indicating an abnormality as a loan point acceptance result. The information that constitutes the lending acceptance result response consists of a message length (1 byte), a command (1 byte), a lending serial number (1 byte), a lending point acceptance result (1 byte), and a checksum (1 byte). ing.

The telegram length indicates the length of the telegram of the rental notification, and since it is 5 bytes, it is "0x05".

The command is "0x03" indicating a loan receipt result response.

As the lending serial number, the lending serial number stored in the lending notice received from the lending unit is used as it is. For example, if the lending serial number of the lending notification is 0x01, the lending serial number of the lending reception result response sent to the lending unit is set to 0x01. However, when the lending point receipt result is not normal (abnormal), the lending serial number received from the lending unit when the lending point receipt result was normal is returned as the lending serial number. In other words, the gaming machine P stores the lending notification transmitted from the lending unit (for example, message length, command, lending serial number, number of lending game media, all or part of the checksum), and returns the lending point receipt result. When is abnormal, it is prepared to respond with the loan point receipt result when it is normal. In addition, the lending notice to be stored may be only the immediately preceding one, and when the lending point reception result is abnormal, the newest lending notice can be transmitted to the lending unit in a normal state by preventing new storage. It should be noted that a plurality of lending notices may be stored in addition to the immediately preceding one. The lending serial number is cleared to 0 when the game machine P is powered on.

The lending point reception result is "0x00" when normal, and "0x01" when abnormal. If the value is abnormal, the lending serial number notified from the lending unit is not continuous, or the game machine P is in a state where lending is impossible due to a RAM error of the game medium number control board P16, etc. If the value obtained by adding the total score stored in the control board P16 and the lending points exceeds the storage upper limit of the total score stored in the game medium number control board P16, or the total stored in the game medium number control board P16 The score may be a value equal to or higher than the threshold (15000 or higher). Also, when the value is other than "0x00" and "0x01" due to some other factor, the rented unit is determined to be abnormal.

The checksum is a value obtained by adding the message length (1 byte), command (1 byte), lending serial number (1 byte), and lending point receipt result (1 byte). The checksum is used to determine whether or not the lending receipt response received by the lending unit is correct for the lending receipt response sent to the lending unit.

Also, when a command is transmitted from the game media number control board P16 to the lending unit side, a lending control command set process (also called message set process) is executed. In the lending control command set process, the message length set in the A register, the command set in the A register, the lending serial number set in the A register, the lending point receipt result set in the A register, and the Set the checksum, etc. in the transmission data register.

Also, when a plurality of commands are continuously transmitted from the game media number control board P16 to the lending unit side, a lending control command continuous setting process (also referred to as message continuous setting process) is executed. In the continuous lending control command set process, after the lending control command set process is executed, the address is updated and the lending control command set process is executed again. The number of times the lending control command set process is executed is based on the value set in the B register. In other words, the number of commands is set in the B register before the lending control command continuous setting process is executed.

Further, when transmitting a command with a value of 0 as information to be transmitted to the lending unit side, lending control command zero set processing is executed. In the lending control command zero set process, a command with a value of 0 is set in the A register, and the lending control command set process is executed a predetermined number of times.

The lending control command zero set process is used to align the digits to 9 bytes when transmitting the game media number control chip ID to the lending unit side. For example, if the game media count control chip ID number of the game media count control board P16 is 21876543, the lending control command set processing within the lending control command zero set processing is executed four times to set the upper 4 bytes to 0. is sent four times, then the lending control command set processing in the lending control command continuous set processing is executed four times to transmit 21h, 87h, 65h, 43h, and finally the identification code is sent in the lending control command set processing 41h is sent.

Since the main control chip ID number is previously transmitted from the main control board P15 as 9-byte data and stored in the game medium number control board P16, the lending control command zero set process is not used. In other words, the game media number control board P16 transmits the main control chip ID number of the 9-byte data transmitted from the main control board P15 to the lending unit as it is.

In addition, since 0 data is also transmitted for the spare, reservation 1, and reservation 2 in the gaming machine performance information, a command with a value of 0 is transmitted to the rental unit using the rental control command zero set process.

A basic communication sequence between the gaming machine P and the lending unit will be described with reference to FIG.

<Basic communication sequence>
The game machine P transmits the game machine installation information, the game machine performance information, and the hall controller/fraud monitoring information as the above-described game machine information notification to the rental unit.

The gaming machine installation information is transmitted to the lending unit every 60 s (60,000 ms) from the time the gaming machine P is completely activated. The gaming machine performance information is transmitted to the lending unit every 180 s (180,000 ms) from the time the gaming machine P is completely activated. Hall control/fraud monitoring information is transmitted to the lending unit every 300 ms after the gaming machine P is completely activated.

Gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, hall controller/fraud monitoring information may be sent to the rental unit at the same timing. For example, after 60 seconds have elapsed from the completion of activation of the game machine P, the game machine installation information and hall control/fraud monitoring information can be at the same timing. In this case, the gaming machine installation information is preferentially transmitted, and after 300 ms has passed, the hole controller/fraud monitoring information is transmitted.

Further, for example, after 180 seconds have passed since the activation of the game machine P is completed, the game machine installation information, the game machine performance information, and the hall control/fraud monitoring information can be at the same timing. In this case, the gaming machine installation information is preferentially transmitted, then the gaming machine performance information is transmitted after 300 ms has elapsed, and the hole controller/fraud monitoring information is transmitted after 300 ms has elapsed.

In this way, regarding the priority of information transmission, the gaming machine installation information has the highest priority, followed by the gaming machine performance information, and finally the hole controller/fraud monitoring information. Therefore, the transmission timing of the hall control/fraud monitoring information is delayed by 600 ms at maximum.

However, if any of the main control state 1 and main control state 2 information of the hall controller/unauthorized monitoring information shown in FIG. 19 is updated (if it is determined that the main control state is updated If it is determined YES in "main control state change?")), or if there is game information (if it is determined YES in FIG. The transmission priority of the connection/fraud monitoring information is the highest.

Specifically, Bit 0 indicating RB in main control state 1, Bit 1 indicating BB, Bit 2 indicating AT, Bit 3 indicating gaming machine status signal 1, Bit 4 indicating gaming machine status signal 2, and gaming machine status signal 3 When one of Bit 5 and Bit 6 indicating the gaming machine state signal 4 is updated from "0" to "1" (corresponding to the case where the game state shifts to the game state corresponding to each Bit), the main Determine that there is an update of the control state. In this way, when it is determined that there is an update of the main control state, it is possible to transmit the hall controller/fraud monitoring information to the lending unit with the first priority.

Bit 0 indicating RB in main control state 1, Bit 1 indicating BB, Bit 2 indicating AT, Bit 3 indicating gaming machine state signal 1, Bit 4 indicating gaming machine state signal 2, Bit 5 indicating gaming machine state signal 3, game The main control state is updated when any one of the Bits 6 indicating the machine state signal 4 is updated from "1" to "0" (corresponding to the end of the game state corresponding to each Bit). I judge. In this way, when it is determined that there is an update of the main control state, it is possible to transmit the hall controller/fraud monitoring information to the lending unit with the first priority.

Bit 7 of the main control state 1 is unused, but if Bit 7 is updated from "0" to "1" or from "1" to "0", it is determined that the main control state is not updated. ing. By configuring in this way, even if unused Bit 7 is updated by noise or the like, the transmission priority of the hall controller/unauthorized monitoring information does not change, so normal communication with the rental unit can be realized.

However, it is not limited to this mode, and if the unused Bit 7 is updated from "0" to "1" or from "1" to "0", it is determined that there is an update of the main control state. may In this case, there is no need to check the update for each bit (it is checked by whether or not the RAM value in main control state 1 has changed), reducing the program capacity and speeding up the program related to the update checking process. can. It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether the RAM value is greater than "40h (01000000B)" or "7Fh (01111111B)", and if it is greater than that, branch so as not to change the priority of transmission. Well, according to this configuration, normal communication with the rental unit can be realized by checking the value of the RAM and not changing the transmission priority even if the unused bit changes from "0" to "1".

Subsequently, one of Bit 0 indicating gaming machine status signal 5 in main control status 2, Bit 1 indicating gaming machine status signal 6, and Bit 2 indicating gaming machine status signal 7 is updated from "0" to "1". It is determined that there is an update of the main control state when it is (corresponding to the case where the game state has shifted to the game state corresponding to each Bit).

Further, any one of Bit0 indicating the gaming machine state signal 5 in the main control state 2, Bit1 indicating the gaming machine state signal 6, and Bit2 indicating the gaming machine state signal 7 is updated from "1" to "0". When (corresponding to the game state corresponding to each Bit has ended), it is determined that there is an update of the main control state.

Bit3 to Bit7 of the main control state 2 are unused, but if any of Bit3 to Bit7 is updated from "0" to "1" or from "1" to "0", the main It is judged that there is no update of the control state. With this configuration, even if unused Bits 3 to 7 are updated due to noise or the like, the transmission priority of whole controller/unauthorized monitoring information does not change, so normal communication with the rental unit can be realized.

However, it is not limited to this aspect, and when unused Bit3 to Bit7 are updated from "0" to "1" or from "1" to "0", an aspect in which it is determined that there is an update of the main control state may be In this case, there is no need to check the update for each bit (check whether the value of the RAM in main control state 2 has changed), reducing the program capacity and speeding up the program related to the update checking process. can. It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not the RAM value is greater than "04h (00000100B)" or "07h (00000111B)", and if so, branch so as not to change the priority of transmission. Well, according to this configuration, normal communication with the rental unit can be realized by checking the value of the RAM and not changing the transmission priority even if the unused bit changes from "0" to "1".

Subsequently, as a mode in which it is determined that there is game information, in the input point storage area (_WK_MDL_IN) and the given point storage area (_WK_MDL_OUT) stored for outputting game information among the information constituting the hole contest/fraud monitoring information It judges whether or not the stored information is "0".

The closing point information stored in the closing point storage area is stored when the start switch acceptance command transmitted from the main control board P15 is received. Further, the assigned point information stored in the assigned point storage area is stored when the all reel stop command transmitted from the main control board P15 is received. This command reception processing is executed in the interruption processing, and within the interruption processing, after execution of the command reception processing, the gaming machine information management processing (game medium number control) is executed in order.

In the game machine information management process (game medium count control), processing for transmitting hall control/fraud monitoring information to the lending unit is executed. Judging whether the entry point information stored in the area and the provision point information stored in the provision point storage area are respectively "0", and if the entry point or the provision point is not 0, immediately hole It is possible to transmit the connection/fraud monitoring information to the lending unit with the first priority. In other words, it becomes possible to transmit the whole control/fraud monitoring information to the lending unit with the first priority in the interrupt process that stores the entry point or the given point.

It was determined that the entry point information stored in the entry point storage area and the award point information stored in the award point storage area were both "0", and that the main control state was not updated. In this case, the information to be output is selected based on the gaming machine installation information notification request flag and the gaming machine performance information notification request flag. In other words, the priority of the gaming machine installation information is the first priority, the priority of the gaming machine performance information is the second priority, and the priority of the hall controller/fraud monitoring information is the third priority.

Further, as a mode in which it is determined that there is game information, it may be determined whether or not the number of game information is "0". The number of game information is stored in the game information number storage area ( _WK_INF_GAM) can be '1' or '2'. Then, in the game machine information management (game media number control) of the interrupt process, before transmitting the hole control/fraud monitoring information, the number of game information is generated from the information in the entry point storage area and the given number storage area (game information number storage area), and when the number of game information is "1" or "2", it is possible to transmit hall control/fraud monitoring information to the lending unit as the first priority.

In this way, by changing the priority of the hole controller/fraud monitoring information according to the situation, when the gaming machine information notification is transmitted, it is possible to insert the information at the time of transition to the game state (start or end of the game state). If the points or assigned points are not 0, hall controllers and fraud monitoring information can be transmitted preferentially even at the timing of transmission of gaming machine installation information and gaming machine performance information. , it is possible to accurately manage in which game state the input point and the payout point are.

In addition, in order to associate the gaming machine state signal of the hole control/fraud monitoring information with the game information (input point or grant point) of the hall control/fraud monitoring information, a end) is executing a freeze.

For example, as the Nth game in the normal state, the game is started with 3 pieces (the operation of the start lever is accepted), the BB is won, the BB symbol combination is stopped by the stop operation, and the BB state signal is output. When it is turned ON, in order to ensure that the period from the start of the game until the BB state signal turns ON exceeds 300 ms, there is a predetermined period of time after the BB symbol combination is stopped and before the BB state signal is turned ON. Perform freeze over X.

FIG. 35 shows an unfavorable example in which the input number signal and the BB status signal are simultaneously transmitted in the hall controller/unauthorized monitoring information notification. FIG. 36 shows a preferable example in which the input number signal and the BB status signal are accurately transmitted in the hall controller/unauthorized monitoring information notification.

The "insertion number information" is information for transmitting the insertion number signal of the type information 1 or 2 of the game information shown in FIG. is. "0" in the input number information means that 0 is stored in the input number information, and "n" in the input number information means that any one of 1 to 3 is stored in the input number information. means that The number-of-throws-in information is set to any one of information "1" to "3" as a prescribed number for the game by transmitting a command indicating the number of pieces to be put to the game-medium-number control board P16 when the main control board P15 accepts the start lever. is stored in the game media count control board P16, and after transmitting the hall controller/fraud monitoring information notification including the inserted count signal, the game media count control board P16 stores "0" in the inserted count information.

"BB state information" is information for transmitting the BB state signal of the main control state 1 of the game machine information shown in FIG. 19, and is information stored in a certain area of the RAM of the main control board P15. "0" in the BB state information means that 0 is stored in the BB state information, and "1" in the BB state information means that 1 is stored in the BB state information. As for the BB state information, when the BB symbol combination is stopped after all the reels are stopped, "1" is stored in the operating state setting process in the operating state management process, and the BB gaming state is set after all the reels are stopped. When finished, "0" is stored in the operating state setting process in the operating state management process. In other words, the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification including the BB status signal is transmitted from the start of the BB to the end of the BB. Further, when "1" is stored in the BB state information, a main control state command is transmitted to the game medium number control board P16 by interrupt processing of the main control board P15, and the game medium number control board P16 receives the received main control. BB signal information is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the game medium number control board P16 for acquiring the state command and storing the main control state for transmitting hall console fraud monitoring information notification if the main control state is the BB state. Remember.

"Freeze information" is information indicating that the freeze is being executed, and is stored in a certain area of the RAM of the main control board P15. It should be noted that instead of the information indicating that the freeze is being executed, the timer information related to the execution of the freeze may be used. can be judged.

In FIG. 35, the operation of the start lever is accepted immediately after the notification of hall control/fraud monitoring information is transmitted, "n (n is a numerical value)" is stored in the input number information, and the hall controller/fraud monitoring information notification is transmitted. It shows a case where all the stop switches are operated and the BB symbol combination is stopped within 300 ms after the BB state information and "1" is stored. In this case, at the timing of transmitting the Hall control/fraud monitoring information notification after the BB symbol combination is stopped, the input count signal and the BB status signal may be turned ON and transmitted to the lending unit side.

In FIG. 35, the input number signal and the BB status signal are transmitted at the same time. Since the information in the normal game state before entering the BB game state is correct, the insertion number signal here is transmitted as erroneous information (information on the number of insertions in the BB game state).

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36, when the BB symbol combination is displayed, freezing is executed for a predetermined period X ("X" in FIG. 36), and "1" is stored in the BB state information after the freezing is completed. configured to The value of X should be (300 ms) - (the shortest time Y from accepting the start lever operation (game start) to storing 1 in the BB state information), and if it is designed as Y = 200 ms, X = 100 ms. It will be designed with a value exceeding Also, since the time required for playing the game varies depending on the skill of the player, X may be set to 300 ms in order to ensure transmission. Since the interval between hall control/fraud monitoring information notifications is 300 ms, if the freeze is executed for 300 ms or more, it is possible to reliably transmit an accurate number-of-insertions signal under any circumstances.

Further, the timing of executing the freeze may be any period from when the BB symbol combination is stopped until when "1" is stored in the BB state information. It is conceivable to store "X" in the RAM as a (count value), and store "1" in the BB state information RAM after it is determined that X has become 0.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to match the consistency between the number-of-insertions information and the main control state information for each game, so that accurate information can be transmitted to the lending unit side.

Further, for example, as the N-th game in the BB state, the game is started with three pieces (the operation of the start lever is accepted), a small winning combination is won, and the small winning combination is stopped by a stop operation, and a predetermined number of symbols are played. When the BB state ends due to the payout of , and the BB state signal turns OFF, the BB state After the end of , the freeze is executed for a predetermined period of time X before the BB state signal is turned OFF.

FIG. 37 shows an unfavorable example in which the number-of-payouts signal and the BB status signal are not simultaneously transmitted in the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification. FIG. 38 shows a preferred example in which the payout number signal and the BB status signal are correctly transmitted in the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification.

"Payout number information" is information for transmitting a payout number signal of type information 1 or 2 of game information shown in FIG. is. "0" in the payout amount information means that 0 is stored in the payout amount information, and "m" in the payout amount information means that any one of 1 to 15 is stored in the payout amount information. means that When the main control board P15 transmits a command indicating the number of payouts to the game medium number control board P16 when all the reels are stopped, the number of payouts information is any of the number of payouts "1" to "15" as the number of payouts for the game. is stored in the game medium number control board P16, and after transmitting the hall controller/fraud monitoring information notification including the payout number signal, the game medium number control board P16 stores "0" in the payout number information.

Other information is the same as the description of FIGS. 35 and 36. FIG.

In FIG. 37, all reels are stopped after transmitting the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification, "m (m is a numerical value)" is stored in the payout amount information, and within 300 ms after the hall controller/fraud monitoring information notification is transmitted. shows the case where the BB game state ends and "0" is stored in the BB state information. In this case, the number-of-payouts signal may be ON and the BB state signal may be OFF at the timing of transmitting the hall control/fraud monitoring information notification after the BB game state is completed.

In FIG. 37, the number-of-payouts signal and the BB status signal are not transmitted at the same time. Since the payout number signal here is correct information in the BB game state, it is transmitted as erroneous information (payout number information in the normal game state).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38, in this embodiment, when the payout process ends, the freeze is executed for a predetermined period X ("X" in FIG. 38), and after the freeze ends, the BB state information is set to "0". Configure to remember. The value of X may be (300 ms)-(the shortest time Z from the end of the payout process until 0 is stored in the BB status information), and if Z=250 ms, the value of X exceeds 50 ms. Also, since the time required for the payout process varies depending on the setting of the maximum number of payouts for each gaming machine, X may be set to 300 ms in order to ensure transmission. Since the interval between hall control/fraud monitoring information notifications is 300 ms, if freezing is executed for 300 ms or more, it is possible to reliably transmit an accurate payout number signal in any situation.

Also, the timing of executing the freeze may be between the end of the payout process and the storage of "0" in the BB state information. For example, the freeze timer value ( It is conceivable to store "X" in the RAM as the count value) and store "0" in the RAM for the BB state information after it is determined that X has become 0.

With this configuration, the consistency between the number-of-payouts information and the main control state information for each game can be matched, so accurate information can be transmitted to the lending unit side.

Although the relationship between the input number signal and the BB status signal, and the payout number signal and the BB status signal has been described above, the BB status signal can be replaced with another status signal. For example, an RB state signal for determining whether it is in the RB state, an AT state signal for determining whether it is in the AT state, or a specific main game for determining whether it is in another specific main game state A status signal and the like are included.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, it has been explained that the freeze is executed for the predetermined period X until "1" or "0" is stored in the BB state information. You may set to the period which assumed until the end. For example, the response time of each device such as the SC board until the input number information or the payout number information transmitted by the game machine P reaches the hall computer is 1000 ms, and the output time of 1 pulse received by the hall computer 100 ms, when the maximum number of pulses received by the hall computer is 15 (because the maximum number of payouts of the reel-type game machine is 15), 1000 ms + 100 ms x 15 = 2500 ms, and the value of the predetermined period X is set to 2500 ms or more. It is desirable to

The gaming machine P transmits the gaming machine information notification to the lending unit at a cycle of 300 ms, and then transmits the counting notification 100 ms later. Then, the lending unit transmits the lending notification to the gaming machine P within 170 ms after receiving the counting notification. Then, the game machine P transmits a lending reception result response within 10 ms after receiving the lending notification. Since the next gaming machine information notification is sent 300 ms after the next gaming machine information notification is sent, it takes 20 ms or longer to transmit the next gaming machine information notification after the lending reception result response is sent.

The activation sequence of the game machine P and the lending unit will be described with reference to FIG.

<Startup sequence>
A case where the game machine P is started before the rental unit is explained.

When the gaming machine P and the rental unit are powered off, the VL signal and the PSI signal of the gaming machine P and the rental unit are OFF. The VL signal is an I/F signal shared power source and is a power source supplied from the lending unit, so it remains OFF until the lending unit is activated. Also, since the PSI signal is a connection signal between the gaming machine P and the lending unit, it remains OFF until the lending unit is activated.

Subsequently, in a situation where activation of the gaming machine P is completed but activation of the lending unit is not yet completed, a gaming machine information notification is transmitted to the lending unit when the activation of the gaming machine P is completed, After that, it sends a count notification. However, since the lending unit has not yet started, it cannot receive the transmitted game machine information notification and counting notification. Furthermore, since the lending unit does not receive the counting notification even though the gaming machine P transmits the counting notification, the lending unit does not transmit the lending notification, and the gaming machine P transmits the lending reception result response. Nor.

Note that the serial number of the gaming machine information notification and the counting serial number of the counting notification that are transmitted first after the activation of the gaming machine P is completed transmit "0x00". In addition, since the serial number and counting serial number are updated regardless of whether or not the gaming machine P is connected to the lending unit, the next transmission timing (300 ms after the game machine information notification first transmitted after the game machine P has been activated) 0x01 is transmitted as the serial number and the counting serial number at the later transmission timing).

In other words, regardless of whether or not the game machine P is connected to the rented unit, the electronic message is transmitted and the serial number is updated.

Subsequently, when the start-up of the lending unit is completed, the VL signal and the PSI signal are turned ON, and the operation of the bet switch P5 and the counting switch P7 of the game machine P becomes valid. In addition, the rental unit can receive the information transmitted from the game machine P.

As described above, since the gaming machine P transmits the gaming machine information notification and the counting notification regardless of whether or not the lending unit is activated, the lending unit is sent to the gaming machine P after the activation of the lending unit is completed. It manages from the serial number of the gaming machine information notification sent from and the counting serial number of the counting notification. With this configuration, the game machine P can transmit information without judging the situation of the rented unit, so that the program capacity for judging the situation of the rented unit can be reduced.

The activation sequence of the gaming machine P and the lending unit will be described with reference to FIG.

A case where the lending unit is activated before the gaming machine P will be described.

When the lending unit is activated before the gaming machine P, the system waits until the gaming machine P is activated. Here, the VL signal and the PSI signal of the gaming machine P are OFF until the gaming machine P is activated, but when the activation of the lending unit is completed, the VL signal and the PSI signal of the lending unit are ON. Become. In this state, the lending unit waits until the gaming machine P is completely activated.

Subsequently, when the game machine P is completely activated, the VL signal and the PSI signal of the game machine P and the lending unit are turned ON, and the game machine P sends the game machine information notification serial number "0x00" and the counting notification serial number "0x00". , respectively. Here, since the rental unit has already been activated, it receives the gaming machine information notification with the serial number “0x00” and the counting notification with the counting serial number “0x00”, and starts management. With this configuration, the game machine P can transmit information without judging the situation of the rented unit, so that the program capacity for judging the situation of the rented unit can be reduced.

A count notification sequence between the game machine P and the rented unit will be described with reference to FIG.

<Counting notification sequence>
A case where the gaming machine P transmits a count notification to the rented unit will be described. In this description, the situation before accepting the operation of the count switch P7 is the situation where the total score managed by the game medium number control board P16 is "200" and the lendable points managed by the lending unit is "20". do.

The gaming machine immediately after accepting the operation of the counting switch P7 provided in the gaming machine P under the condition that the gaming machine P and the lending unit have been started and the gaming machine P and the lending unit can communicate with each other. At the timing of transmitting the information notification to the rental unit, the serial number “n (n is a numerical value)” and the total score “200” are transmitted as the gaming machine information notification, and the counting serial number “m (m is a numerical value)” and the total score are transmitted as the counting notification. Since the score is 200 and the total score stored in the number-of-game-media control board P16 is 50 or more, the count "50" is transmitted as described above. Further, when the processing related to the counting is the processing related to the first counting after the gaming machine P is completely activated, the counting cumulative point “50” is transmitted as the counting notification. Note that the gaming machine P subtracts the count points from the total score stored in the total score storage area before executing the process of transmitting the count notification.

Subsequently, when the lending unit receives the count notification, it updates the lendable points to "70" and transmits the lending serial number "k (k is a numerical value)" and the lending points "0" to the game machine P as the lending notification. (Because the loan button is not operated). Also, when the gaming machine P receives a rental notification from the rental unit, it checks the consistency between the information indicated by the rental notification and the information indicated by the previous rental notification.

Subsequently, after the gaming machine P receives the lending notice, it sends the lending serial number “k” and the lending point receipt result “normal” to the lending unit as a lending receipt result response (the information indicated by the lending notice and the previous lending notice If the result of checking the consistency with the indicated information is normal).

Subsequently, at the next timing when the game machine P transmits the game machine information notification to the lending unit, if the operation of the counting switch P7 has not already been accepted (when the counting switch P7 is released), the game machine information notification Transmit serial number "n+1" and total score "150". In addition, as a count notification, the count serial number “m+1”, the count point “0”, and the count cumulative point “50” are transmitted. Also, the lending unit transmits a lending serial number “k+1” and a lending point “0” to the gaming machine P as a lending notification to the gaming machine P. Further, the game machine P transmits a lending serial number "k+1" and a lending point receipt result "normal" as a lending reception result response to the lending unit.

Further, when the operation of the counting switch P7 is accepted at the timing of transmitting the second game machine information notification after the operation of the counting switch P7 is accepted (when the counting switch P7 is long pressed), the game machine information notification , the serial number "n+1" and the total score "150" are transmitted. In addition, as a count notification, the count serial number “m+1”, the count point “50”, and the count cumulative point “100” are transmitted. Also, the lending unit transmits a lending serial number “k+1” and a lending point “0” to the gaming machine P as a lending notification to the gaming machine P. Further, the game machine P transmits a lending serial number "k+1" and a lending point receipt result "normal" as a lending reception result response to the lending unit.

In this way, during the period from when the operation of the counting switch P7 is accepted until when the operation of the counting switch P7 is no longer accepted (while the counting switch P7 is long pressed), the game machine P counts the rented units every 300 ms. Keep sending notifications. With this configuration, a certain amount of counting points (50) can be sent to the rental unit every 300 ms without requiring complicated operations (only a long press), reducing the user's burden of counting operations. can do.

Since the count switch P7 is connected to the game medium number control board P16, the input port is checked for each interrupt processing of the game medium number control board P16, and information indicating ON is input to the input port indicating the count switch P7. If so, it is assumed that the operation of the counting switch P7 has been accepted, and if information indicating OFF is inputted to the input port indicating the counting switch P7 after that, it is assumed that the operation of the counting switch P7 has not been accepted.

A lending notification sequence between the gaming machine P and the lending unit will be described with reference to FIG.

<Rental notification sequence>
A case where the rental unit transmits a rental notification to the gaming machine P will be described. In this description, it is assumed that the total score managed by the game media number control board P16 is "10" and the lendable points managed by the lending unit is "100" before the operation of the lending button is accepted. . Since the total score stored in the game media number control board P16 is less than "50", it can be said that "10" is counted when the counting switch P7 is operated.

When the gaming machine P and the lending unit have been activated and the gaming machine P and the lending unit can communicate with each other, when the operation of the lending button provided on the lending unit is accepted, the gaming machine P , a serial number "n (n is a numerical value)" and a total score of "10" are transmitted as a game machine information notification, and a counting serial number "m (m is a numerical value)" and a count point "0" are transmitted as a counting notification. Then, at the timing of transmitting the lending notification to the game machine P when the counting point included in the counting notification is "0", the lending serial number "k" and the lending point "50" are transmitted as the lending notification.

Subsequently, the lending unit updates the lendable points to "50" when sending the lending notification. The timing at which the lending unit updates the lendable points may be the timing at which the lending acceptance result response is received.

Subsequently, after the gaming machine P receives the lending notice, it sends the lending serial number “k” and the lending point receipt result “normal” to the lending unit as a lending receipt result response (the information indicated by the lending notice and the previous lending notice If the result of checking the consistency with the indicated information is normal).

Subsequently, the gaming machine P updates the total score to "60" during the period from receiving the rental notification to transmitting the rental reception result response.

Subsequently, when the operation of the lending button provided on the lending unit is continuously accepted, at the next timing when the gaming machine P transmits the gaming machine information notification to the lending unit, the serial number " n+1" and total score "60".

Subsequently, the game machine P transmits the count number "m+1", the count point "0", and the count accumulation point "0" as a count notification. , the lending point "50" is transmitted to the game machine P, and the lendable point is updated to "0". Further, the game machine P transmits a lending serial number "k+1" and a lending point receipt result "normal" as a lending reception result response to the lending unit.

In this example, the lending unit determines the operation level and accepts the operation of the lending button when the lending button is continuously operated. may In this case, even if the lending button is continuously operated, the lending operation will be accepted only at the timing when the lending button is operated for the first time, so even if the lending button is continuously operated, the second and subsequent times At the timing of transmitting the rental notification, the rental point is transmitted as "0".

In addition, when the count notification transmitted from the gaming machine P when the lending button is accepted has a counting point of 1 or more, the lending point of the lending notification to be sent to the gaming machine P next is transmitted as "0". The lending button accepted at this time may be invalidated, or the lending unit may store the operation acceptance flag of the lending button, and the lending unit may store the lending button in the lending notification sent after the counting point of the counting notification becomes "0". may be sent as "50". Further, in the case where the lending unit stores the operation acceptance flag of the lending button, when the lending button is operated again while the flag related to accepting the operation of the lending button is stored, the flag may be rewritten to the flag that the lending button has been operated twice. and the second and subsequent operations may be invalidated.

Further, when the lending unit transmits the lending notification to the game machine P and the gaming machine P receives the lending notification, all the information of the lending notification is stored in the lending notification information storage area provided in the game machine P. As a result, when the game machine P transmits a lending receipt result response, it can be determined whether the information of the lending point receipt result is "normal" or "abnormal".

Specifically, "k" is stored as the rental serial number information in the rental notification information storage area provided in the gaming machine P, and when the rental serial number of the rental notification transmitted from the rental unit is "k+1", it is stored. is incremented to "k" to generate "k+1" and then compared with the received lending serial number "k+1". ” is stored in the rental notification information storage area provided in the gaming machine P.

In addition, "k" is stored as the rental serial number information in the rental notification information storage area provided in the gaming machine P, and when the rental serial number of the rental notification transmitted from the rental unit is "k+2", the stored " increment to k" to generate "k+1" and then compare it with the received lending serial number "k+2". Since the generated lending serial number and the received lending serial number do not match, the received lending serial number "k+2" is stored. No (the lending serial number of the lending notification information storage area provided in the gaming machine P is "k").

Also, since the upper limit of the lending serial number is 255, if the lending serial number is 255 and the lending serial number is incremented, the lending serial number becomes 0. However, since the lending serial number 0 is a lending serial number that can be transmitted to the gaming machine only immediately after the lending unit is activated, it is incremented again to make the lending serial number 1. In other words, when the lending serial number is 255 and the gaming machine updates the lending serial number, the next lending serial number becomes 1 by incrementing twice.

In the above example, as a comparison method, the lending serial number stored in the game machine P is incremented and then it is determined whether or not it matches the lending serial number received from the lending unit. , a method of decrementing the lending serial number received from the lending unit and then comparing it with the lending serial number stored in the gaming machine P to see if it matches, or a method in which the gaming machine P stores the lending serial number received from the lending unit. It is also possible to use a method of subtracting the lending serial number from the current number and judging whether or not the result is "1".

The lending notification information storage area provided in the game machine P is composed of a lending notice receiving buffer 1, a lending notice receiving buffer 2, a lending notice receiving buffer 3, a lending notice receiving buffer 4, and a lending notice receiving buffer 5.

The lending notice receiving buffer 1 stores the message length, the lending notice receiving buffer 2 stores the command, the lending notice receiving buffer 3 stores the lending serial number, the lending notice receiving buffer 4 stores the lending point, and receives the lending notice. A buffer 5 stores a checksum.

For example, if the rental notification received by the gaming machine P has a message length of “0x05”, a command of “0x13”, a rental serial number of “0x01”, a rental point of “0x32”, and a checksum of “0x4B”, the corresponding rental notification reception buffer memorize to The game machine P subtracts the rental point "0x32" stored in the rental notification reception buffer 4 from the checksum "0x4B" stored in the rental notification reception buffer 5, calculates "0x19", and calculates the rental notification reception buffer from "0x19". Subtract the lending serial number "0x01" stored in 3 to calculate "0x18", subtract the command "0x13" stored in the lending notification reception buffer 2 from "0x18" to calculate "0x05", and calculate "0x05" The message length "0x05" stored in the lending notification reception buffer 1 is subtracted from the "0x00" to calculate "0x00".

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the calculation result is "0x00", and if it is "0x00" as described above, it is determined that the checksum is normal. If the calculation result is not "0x00", it is determined that the checksum is abnormal, all the storage areas of the lending notification reception buffers 1 to 5 are cleared (for example, rewritten to "0x00"), and the lending receipt result As a response, a message length of "0x05", a command of "0x03", a lending serial number of "0x00", a lending point receipt result of "0x01 (abnormal)", and a checksum of "0x09" are transmitted. A communication error during lending will be described later.

Subsequently, when it is determined that the checksum is normal, it is determined whether or not the command information stored in the lending notice receiving buffer 2 is "0x13". If the command information stored in the lending notification reception buffer 2 is "0x13", it is determined to be normal. If the command information stored in the lending notice receiving buffer 2 is not "0x13", it is judged to be abnormal, and all the storage areas of the lending notice receiving buffers 1 to 5 are cleared (for example, rewritten to "0x00"). etc.), a message length of "0x05", a command of "0x03", a lending sequence number of "0x00", a lending point receipt result of "0x01 (abnormal)", and a checksum of "0x09" are sent as a lending receipt result response.

Subsequently, when it is determined that the command is normal, it is determined whether or not the message length information stored in the lending notification reception buffer 1 is "0x05". If the telegram length information stored in the lending notification reception buffer 1 is "0x05", it is determined to be normal. If the message length information stored in the rental notification reception buffer 1 is not "0x05", it is judged to be abnormal, and all the storage areas of the rental notification reception buffers 1 to 5 are cleared (for example, to "0x00"). rewriting, etc.), and as a loan receipt result response, the message length "0x05", the command "0x03", the lending sequence number "0x00", the lending point receipt result as "0x01 (abnormal)", and the checksum "0x09" are sent.

Since the message length information stored in the rental notification reception buffer 1 and the command information stored in the rental notification reception buffer 2 are fixed values, they do not change if they are normal. In addition, since the checksum is an abnormal value due to its nature, it may match the normal value. It is possible to bring the probability of determining to be infinitely close to 0.

In order to determine whether or not the rental notification information is normal, determination was made in the order of checksum, command, and message length, but the determination order is not limited to this, and any combination may be used. In addition, if it is determined to be abnormal at any timing during the process of normality determination of checksum, command, message length, all the storage areas of the rental notification reception buffers 1 to 5 are cleared, and subsequent determination processing is performed. However, it is not limited to this, and even if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the checksum, command, or message length determination process, all the storage areas of the rental notification reception buffers 1 to 5 are not cleared, It may be configured to clear all the storage areas of the lending notification receiving buffers 1 to 5 when any of the determination results is determined to be abnormal after all determinations are completed.

Note that when error detection is performed using only the checksum, since the checksum is 1-byte data, the reliability is (1-(1/256))×100=99.609375000%, but the fixed value ( 1-byte data) is included, the reliability is (1-((1/256) x (1/256))) x 100 = 99.998474121%, and the fixed value (1-byte data) is 2 The reliability when one is included is (1−((1/256)×(1/256)×(1/256)))×100=99.999999977%. Therefore, if the fixed value of 1-byte data is determined by two fixed values in addition to the checksum, the reliability becomes almost 100%, making it easier to detect fraud and abnormality.

A recovery sequence from disconnection of the dedicated interface between the gaming machine P and the lending unit will be described with reference to FIG.

<Recovery sequence from dedicated interface disconnection>
A description will be given of the flow of various notification information when the communication is restored after the communication between the game machine P and the rental unit is disabled due to disconnection. In this description, it is assumed that the total score managed by the game media number control board P16 is "100".

When the gaming machine P and the lending unit have been activated and communication between the gaming machine P and the lending unit is possible, at the timing of transmitting the gaming machine information notification to the lending unit, the serial number " n (n is a numerical value)” and the total score of “100” are transmitted, and as a count notification, a count serial number “m (m is a numerical value)” and a count point of “0” are transmitted. Further, when the processing related to the counting is the processing related to the first counting after the game machine P is completely activated, the counting cumulative point “0” is transmitted as the counting notification. Note that the gaming machine P subtracts the count points from the total score stored in the total score storage area before executing the process of transmitting the count notification.

Subsequently, when the lending unit receives the count notification, the lending unit transmits the lending serial number “k (k is a numerical value)” and the lending point “0” to the game machine P as the lending notification. Also, when the gaming machine P receives a rental notification from the rental unit, it checks the consistency between the information indicated by the rental notification and the information indicated by the previous rental notification.

Subsequently, after the gaming machine P receives the lending notification, it transmits the lending sequence number "k" and the lending point receipt result "normal" to the lending unit as a lending reception result response.

Next, as a game machine information notification, the line is disconnected immediately after the game machine P transmits the serial number “n+1” and the total score “100” (the VL signal on the game machine P side is OFF and the VL signal on the rental unit side is When the PSI signal is both OFF and the power of the gaming machine P and the rental unit is ON), the counting notification transmitted by the gaming machine P includes the counting serial number "m+1", the counting point "0", and the counting accumulation. Send the point '0'. Note that even if the operation of the counting switch P7 was accepted before the disconnection, the counting process is performed when the VL signal on the gaming machine P side is turned OFF and the acceptance of the counting switch P7 is invalidated. In order to cancel the count, the counting point is set to "0" in the count notification after disconnection. Further, when the VL signal on the gaming machine P side is turned OFF, acceptance of betting operations is also disabled.

After that, the lending unit side does not receive the count notification and therefore does not transmit the lending notification, and the gaming machine P side does not transmit the lending reception result response. Then, after 300 ms have passed since the transmission of the previous gaming machine information notification, the next gaming machine information notification is transmitted, but the gaming machine P in the case where the communication between the gaming machine P and the lending unit has not yet been restored A serial number of "n+2" and a total score of "100" are transmitted as a machine information notification, and a count serial number of "m+2", a count point of "0", and a cumulative count point of "0" are transmitted as a count notification.

That is, in a situation where the communication between the gaming machine P and the lending unit is disconnected, the gaming machine P continues to transmit only the gaming machine information notification and the counting notification. At this time, the serial number and counting serial number are updated and transmitted.

Subsequently, when the communication between the gaming machine P and the lending unit is restored immediately before the gaming machine P transmits the next gaming machine information notification, the serial number "n+3" and the total score "100" are transmitted as the gaming machine information notification. Then, as a count notification, the count serial number “m+3”, the count point “0”, and the count cumulative point “0” are transmitted.

Subsequently, the lending unit that has received the counting notification transmits the lending serial number “0” and the lending point “0” to the gaming machine P as the lending notification. As a result, the rental serial number "0" is transmitted when the disconnection is restored, so that the game machine P can determine whether or not it is the first rental notification after the disconnection.

Subsequently, after the game machine P receives the lending notification, it transmits a lending serial number "k" as a lending receipt result response and a lending point receipt result response "abnormal" to the lending unit. Here, as the lending serial number, the lending serial number "k" that was received normally last time is sent, and the lending point reception result response is "0", which is the lending serial number sent from the lending unit, and " Since it is different from "k+1" obtained by incrementing "k", it is judged as "abnormal". Also, when the lending unit receives the lending serial number "k", it stores "k" in the lending serial number storage area of the lending unit. It should be noted that other methods described above may be used to determine whether the loan serial number is abnormal.

Subsequently, when 300 ms have elapsed since the previous gaming machine information notification, the serial number “n+4” and the total score “100” are transmitted as the gaming machine information notification, and the counting serial number “m+4” and the counting point “0” are transmitted as the counting notification. Transmit the count accumulation point "0".

Subsequently, the lending unit that has received the counting notification transmits the lending serial number "k+1" and the lending point "0" to the gaming machine P as the lending notification. As a result, when the gaming machine P receives the lending notification, the lending point reception result becomes "normal".

Subsequently, after the gaming machine P receives the lending notification, it transmits the lending serial number "k+1" as the lending reception result response and the lending point receipt result response "normal" to the lending unit. At this timing, recovery from disconnection is completed, and subsequent communication proceeds according to the normal sequence.

In the above example, when the lending unit transmits the lending serial number "0", the lending point as the lending notice transmits "0" even if the operation of the lending button is accepted. In other words, even if the operation of the lending button is accepted after the VL signal and the PSI signal of the lending unit are both turned ON and before the first lending notification is sent, the lending point with the lending sequence number of "0" is Although it is configured to transmit "0", it is not limited to this, and if the operation of the lending button is accepted when the lending serial number is "0", the lending point is "50" even if the lending serial number is "0". may be sent.

Further, in the above example, if the dedicated interface recovers from the disconnection immediately after the gaming machine P transmits the gaming machine information notification after the dedicated interface is disconnected and the rental unit does not receive the gaming machine information notification, The lending unit may transmit the lending notification due to receiving the count notification transmitted from the gaming machine P, or the lending unit may transmit from the gaming machine P because it has not received the gaming machine information notification. The rental notification may be transmitted after receiving the counting notification after receiving the next game machine information notification without transmitting the rental notification after the counting notification.

A communication error during counting between the game machine P and the rented unit will be described with reference to FIG.

<Communication error during counting>
A case will be described in which the lending unit does not receive the counting notification sent from the gaming machine P to the lending unit. In this description, the situation before accepting the operation of the count switch P7 is the situation where the total score managed by the game medium number control board P16 is "200" and the lendable points managed by the lending unit is "20". do.

The gaming machine immediately after accepting the operation of the counting switch P7 provided in the gaming machine P under the condition that the gaming machine P and the lending unit have been started and the gaming machine P and the lending unit can communicate with each other. At the timing of transmitting the information notification to the lending unit, the serial number "n" and the total score "200" are transmitted as the gaming machine information notification, and the count serial number "m" and the count point "50" are transmitted as the counting notification. Further, when the processing related to the counting is the processing related to the first counting after the gaming machine P is completely activated, the counting cumulative point “50” is transmitted as the counting notification. Note that the gaming machine P subtracts the count points from the total score stored in the total score storage area before executing the process of transmitting the count notification.

Subsequently, when the lending unit receives the count notification, it updates the lendable points to "70" and transmits the lending serial number "k" and the lending point "0" to the game machine P as the lending notification (when the lending button is operated). (because it is not). Also, when the gaming machine P receives a rental notification from the rental unit, it checks the consistency between the information indicated by the rental notification and the information indicated by the previous rental notification.

Subsequently, after the gaming machine P receives the lending notice, it sends the lending serial number “k” and the lending point receipt result “normal” to the lending unit as a lending receipt result response (the information indicated by the lending notice and the previous lending notice If the result of checking the consistency with the indicated information is normal).

Subsequently, the gaming machine P transmits the serial number “n+1” and the total score “150” as the gaming machine information notification, and then the gaming machine P transmits the counting serial number “m+1”, the counting point “50”, and the cumulative counting point “150” as the counting notification. 100” but the lending unit does not receive the count notification, the lending unit does not send the lending notification. When the lending unit does not receive the count notification even after 300 ms have passed since the game machine information notification was received, the VL signal and the PSI signal are turned OFF. In this case, the lending unit determines that an error has occurred in communication with the game machine P, and the same operation as the recovery sequence described above is performed. In order to recover from the disconnected state, it is conceivable that the hall clerk operates the error release switch of the rental unit or the initialization switch of the rental unit.

Further, even after the lending unit determines that an error has occurred in the communication with the gaming machine P and the lending unit turns off the VL signal and the PSI signal, the gaming machine P repeats transmission of the gaming machine information notification and the counting notification. . In this case, the serial number as the gaming machine information notification and the counting serial number as the counting notification are updated and then transmitted to the rented unit (the rented unit cannot receive them). If the counting switch P7 continues to be pressed even after the lending unit has turned off the VL signal and the PSI signal, the gaming machine P will also Since the operation of the counting switch P7 is invalidated due to the VL signal being turned OFF, 0 is sent as the counting point as a counting notification.

A communication error between the gaming machine P and the rental unit during rental will be described with reference to FIG.

<Communication error during rental>
A case where the rental unit transmits a rental notification to the gaming machine P will be described. In this description, it is assumed that the total score managed by the game media number control board P16 is "10" and the lendable points managed by the lending unit is "100" before the operation of the lending button is accepted. .

When the gaming machine P and the lending unit have started up and communication between the gaming machine P and the lending unit is possible, when the operation of the lending button provided on the lending unit is accepted, the gaming machine P A serial number "n" and a total score of "10" are transmitted as the gaming machine information notification, and a counting serial number "m" and a counting point "0" are transmitted as the counting notification. Then, at the timing of transmitting the lending notification to the game machine P when the counting point included in the counting notification is "0", the lending serial number "k" and the lending point "50" are transmitted as the lending notification.

Subsequently, the lending unit updates the lendable points to "50" when sending the lending notification. The timing at which the lending unit updates the lendable points may be the timing at which the lending acceptance result response is received.

Subsequently, after the gaming machine P receives the lending notice, it sends the lending serial number “k” and the lending point receipt result “normal” to the lending unit as a lending receipt result response (the information indicated by the lending notice and the previous lending notice If the result of checking the consistency with the indicated information is normal).

Subsequently, the gaming machine P updates the total score to "60" during the period from receiving the rental notification to transmitting the rental reception result response.

Subsequently, when the gaming machine P transmits a lending receipt result response but the lending unit fails to receive the lending receipt result response, the lending unit does not receive the lending receipt result response after 10 ms or more have passed since the lending notification was sent. If so, it is determined that the rental is incomplete, and a value indicating that the rental is incomplete is stored in the rental information storage area provided in the rental unit.

Subsequently, the gaming machine P transmits the serial number “n+1” and the total score “60” as the gaming machine information notification, and transmits the counting serial number “m+1” and the counting point “0” as the counting notification. Then, when the lending unit determines that the lending has not been completed in response to the previous lending notification, the lending serial number "k" and the lending point "50" are sent as the lending notification at the timing of transmitting the lending notification to the gaming machine P. to send. This lending notice has the same information as the lending notice sent last time.

Subsequently, when the gaming machine P receives the lending notification, if it is normal, it should have received the information of "k+1" as the lending serial number. As the lending receipt result response sent by P, the lending serial number "k" and the lending point receipt result response "abnormal" are sent to the lending unit.

Subsequently, since the lending serial number "k" of the lending notification sent when the lending unit received the lending receipt result response matches the lending serial number "k" of the lending receipt result response received, the lending unit It is determined that the notification has normally arrived at the game machine P, and a value indicating the completion of lending is stored in the lending information storage area provided in the lending unit.

<Error type>
Errors that can be determined for the game machine P and the state of the game machine P in this embodiment include input request communication error, settlement request communication error, payout request communication error, game media number control reception error, main control reception error, total score upper limit Abnormality, total score threshold reached state, rental device connection abnormality (VL abnormality), rental serial number abnormality, rental device communication abnormality 1, rental device communication abnormality 2, rental device communication abnormality 3, rental device communication abnormality 4, rental device communication abnormality 5 , there is a rental device communication error 6 .

The insertion request communication error is an abnormality detected by the main control board P15, and is an insertion request command sent by the main control board P15 to the game media number control board P16 (when the bet switch is operated, the game medium number control board P16 A command for confirming whether or not the number of bets from the managed total score can be assigned to the insertion point managed by the main control board P15) and a response command received by the main control board P15 from the game medium number control board P16 (acceptance request for insertion) If the input request rejection command) does not match, or if a response command is not received from the game media number control board P16, an E1 error is assumed and a display corresponding to "E1" is made on the given number display section. If an E1 error occurs, it can be canceled when the setting/reset switch operation is accepted. Since the input request is canceled when the E1 error occurs, the input request command is not resent even if the E1 error is canceled. Then, when an E1 error occurs, processing for stopping the progress of the game includes bet processing by operating the bet switch, reel rotation processing by operating the start switch, reel stop processing by operating the stop switch, and settlement switch operation. Disable the settlement process by operation. It should be noted that it is sufficient that the progress of the game is stopped, and the reel stop processing by operating the stop switch need not be invalidated. This is because if the start of the game is invalidated, the reels do not rotate, and the operation of the stop switch is effectively invalidated.

Further, when an E1 error occurs, the main control board P15 transmits an E1 error command to the sub control board P12, thereby notifying the error by means of an image display device or a lamp. When the E1 error is canceled, the main control board P15 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub-control board P12, and when the sub-control board P12 receives the error cancellation command, the E1 error notification is terminated. When the sub-control board P12 receives the error cancellation command, the E1 error notification may not be terminated immediately, but may be terminated after a predetermined period of time.

The settlement request communication error is an abnormality detected by the main control board P15. The settlement request command sent by the main control board P15 to the game media count control board P16 and the response received by the main control board P15 from the game media count control board P16. If the commands (settlement request acceptance command or settlement request unacceptable command) do not match, or if a response command is not received from the game media count control board P16, an E2 error is assumed, and "E2" is displayed in the given number display section. to be displayed. If an E2 error occurs, it can be canceled when the setting/reset switch operation is accepted. Since the settlement request is canceled when the E2 error occurs, the settlement request command is not resent even if the E2 error is canceled. Then, when the E2 error occurs, as processing for stopping the progress of the game, bet processing by operating the bet switch, reel rotation processing by operating the start switch, reel stop processing by operating the stop switch, and settlement switch Disable the settlement process by operation. It should be noted that it is sufficient that the progress of the game is stopped, and the reel stop processing by operating the stop switch need not be invalidated. This is because if the start of the game is invalidated, the reels do not rotate, and the operation of the stop switch is effectively invalidated.

Also, when an E2 error occurs, the main control board P15 transmits an E2 error command to the sub-control board P12, thereby notifying the error by means of an image display device or a lamp. When the E2 error is canceled, the main control board P15 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub-control board P12, and when the sub-control board P12 receives the error cancellation command, the E2 error notification is terminated. When the sub-control board P12 receives the error cancellation command, the E2 error notification may be terminated after a predetermined period of time instead of immediately termination.

A payout request communication error is an abnormality detected by the main control board P15. If the commands (payout request acceptance command or payout request unacceptable command) do not match, or if a response command is not received from the game medium number control board P16, an E3 error is assumed, and "E3" is displayed in the given number display section. to be displayed. If an E3 error occurs, it can be canceled when the setting/reset switch operation is accepted. Since the payout request is continued without being canceled when the E3 error occurs, the payout request command is resent when the E3 error is canceled. Then, when an E3 error occurs, processing for stopping the progress of the game includes bet processing by operating the bet switch, reel rotation processing by operating the start switch, reel stop processing by operating the stop switch, and settlement switch operation. Disable the settlement process by operation. It should be noted that it is sufficient that the progress of the game is stopped, and the reel stop processing by operating the stop switch need not be invalidated. This is because if the start of the game is invalidated, the reels do not rotate, and the operation of the stop switch is effectively invalidated.

Further, when an E3 error occurs, the main control board P15 transmits an E3 error command to the sub control board P12, thereby notifying the error by means of an image display device or a lamp. When the E3 error is canceled, the main control board P15 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub-control board P12, and when the sub-control board P12 receives the error cancellation command, the E3 error notification is terminated. When the sub-control board P12 receives the error cancellation command, the E3 error notification may not be terminated immediately, but may be terminated after a predetermined period of time.

When an input request communication error, settlement request communication error, or payout request communication error occurs, the game medium number control board P16 controls the input request unacceptable command, the settlement request unacceptable command, or the payout request unacceptable command, respectively. Although an example of outputting to the board P15 has been described above, the same command may be used for the input request unacceptable command, the settlement request unacceptable command, or the payout request unacceptable command. For example, the game media count control board P16 outputs the same unacceptable command regardless of whether an insertion request communication error, settlement request communication error, or payout request communication error occurs.

The game media count control reception abnormality is an abnormality detected by the game media count control board P16, and receives an input request, settlement request, or payout request sent from the main control board P15 to the game media count control board P16. If the command received at that time is not a correct command, it is assumed that the number of game media control reception is abnormal. In the case of game media number control reception abnormality, error display is not performed on the given number display section. No operation is required to cancel the game media number control reception abnormality, and it can be canceled automatically. Then, when the game medium number control reception abnormality occurs, the progress of the game is not stopped.

Further, when a game medium number control reception abnormality occurs, the game medium number control board P16 transmits information indicating a game medium number control reception abnormality to the main control board P15, and the main control board P15 transmits from the game medium number control board P16. The main control board P15 sets the game medium number control reception abnormality as an error state, and the main control board P15 sends a game medium number control notification command to the sub control board P12. By transmitting the information, an error is notified by an image display device or a lamp. Even after the game medium number control reception abnormality is automatically canceled, the notification of the game medium number control reception abnormality is not terminated immediately, but is terminated after a predetermined period of time.

The game media number control notification command is a command that the main control board P15 transmits to the sub control board P12 for each interrupt. This command notifies the sub-control board P12 of various abnormalities such as main control reception abnormality and the state of the gaming machine. Moreover, various abnormalities and the state of the gaming machine may be reported to the sub-control board P12 by a no-operation command.

The main control reception abnormality is an abnormality detected by the main control board P15. When P15 receives a command from the game media number control board P16, it is assumed that main control reception is abnormal. Main control reception abnormality does not display an error in the given number display section. There is no need to operate to cancel the main control reception abnormality, and it can be canceled automatically. Then, when the main control reception abnormality occurs, the progress of the game is not stopped.

In addition, when the main control reception abnormality occurs, the main control board P15 transmits the game medium number control notification command to the sub control board P12, and the error is notified by the image display device or the lamp. Even after the main control reception abnormality is automatically canceled, the notification of the main control reception abnormality is not terminated immediately, but is terminated after a predetermined period of time.

The total score upper limit abnormality is an abnormality detected by the game medium number control board P16. Total score upper limit error. Total score upper limit abnormality does not perform error display on the number display part of giving. In order to cancel the total score upper limit abnormality, the counter switch P7 provided in the gaming machine P is operated to perform counting processing, and when the total score becomes 16368 or less, which is the upper caution value, the cancellation becomes possible. ing. When the total score upper limit is abnormal, the start switch P3, the bet switch P5, and the settlement switch P6 are processed to disable the game, or the processing based on the start switch P3 is invalidated and the bet is made. The processing based on the switch P5 is invalidated, and the processing based on the settlement switch P6 is invalidated. In other words, when the total score managed by the game medium number control board P16 reaches the upper caution value, the next game is executed unless the total score managed by the game medium number control board P16 falls below the upper caution value. configured so that it cannot. With this configuration, the total score managed by the game media number control board P16 can be prevented from exceeding the upper limit. If the upper limit of the total score is reached without detecting the total score upper limit abnormality, the score exceeding the upper limit is not stored.

Further, in the case of the total score upper limit abnormality, no error display is performed on the given number display section, but an error display may be performed on the game medium number display section P9. For example, in the case of total score upper limit abnormality, it is conceivable to display "HF□□□" in the game medium number display portion P9. When displaying an error on the game medium number display part P9, the error display is not displayed on the game medium number display part P9 when the error is canceled. At this time, the notification being executed by the sub-control board P12 may be terminated at a timing substantially simultaneous with the cancellation of the error, or may be notified for a certain period of time after the cancellation of the error. When the total score threshold is reached, an error is not displayed in the awarded number display section and the game medium number display section P9, so that the player misunderstands that the gaming machine P is out of order when the total score threshold is reached. becomes difficult.

Next, a method for preventing the game media number control board P16 from storing the total score exceeding the upper limit value will be described using the score giving process (also called payout process) in the main control board P15 shown in FIG. do.

Note that the score giving process is a process executed after judging the combination of symbols stopped on the activated line and determining the points to be given based on the judgment result. For example, this processing is executed after it is determined that a predetermined symbol combination capable of giving 8 points has been stopped and displayed on the activated line, and after 8 is stored in the given point storage area, which will be described later.

In "Give points?", the main control board P15 determines whether or not there are points to be given (whether or not the combination of symbols to which points can be given is stopped and displayed). becomes NO. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the assigned point storage area, which is a storage area capable of storing assigned points provided in the RWM area of the main control board P15, is "0". If it is determined that the value in the given point storage area is "0", the answer to the question "Score given?" is NO, and the score given process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value in the given point storage area is not "0", the answer to "Score given?" is YES.

In the "score giving time elapsed?", it is determined whether or not the value stored in the score giving timer area, which will be described later, is "0". If the value stored in the score giving timer area is "0", the result is YES, and if the value stored in the score giving timer area is not "0", the result is NO. This is a process of looping until the value stored in the score award timer area becomes "0" (in other words, delaying the "set of the award request command", which will be described later). Note that an initial value (“27” in this embodiment) is stored in the score giving timer area by “saving score giving time”, which will be described later.

In "save point giving time", "27" is stored in the point giving timer area provided in the RWM area of the main control board P15. Here, the value stored in the score giving timer area is configured to be updated according to the execution of a timer interrupt on the main control board P15 side (for example, when one timer interrupt process is executed). is configured to decrement by 1 when the Note that the timer interrupt on the main control board P15 side is configured to be executed at a period of about 2.235 ms. Therefore, storing "27" in the score giving timer area is synonymous with storing a time corresponding to approximately 60 ms. Further, even if the timer interrupt process is executed when "0" is stored in the score giving timer area, the value of the score giving timer area maintains "0".

In this way, by setting the processing order of “score grant time passed?”→“score grant time save”, the “grant request command set” process, which will be described later, is executed at predetermined intervals when a plurality of points are awarded. The Rukoto. For example, when the number of points to be given is "8", the (first) "arrangement request command set" corresponding to the first point is before "27" is stored in the score provision timer area. This is done under the condition that "0" is stored in the timer area. Therefore, standby processing based on the score giving timer is not executed. Therefore, the main control board P15 can cause the game medium number control board P16 to quickly execute the processing for adding the first point to the total score.

On the other hand, for the "request command set" corresponding to the 2nd to 8th points, "27" is stored in the score award timer area by "save score award time", and "0" is stored in the "score award timer area?" It becomes executable after In other words, the “addition request command set” corresponding to the second to eighth points can be executed at a rate of about once every 60 ms. In other words, updating of the total score in the game media count control board P16 based on the "grant request command set" can be executed approximately every 60 ms, and updating of the display of the game media count display section P9 capable of displaying the total score can also be performed approximately It can be updated every 60ms. By configuring in this manner, the player can visually recognize how the total score displayed in the game medium number display portion P9 is updated by "1".

It should be noted that, unlike the above-described embodiment, the order may be set to "save point giving time"→"score giving time passed?". In this case, the main control board P15 executes standby processing for a time period corresponding to the score giving time (score giving timer), and then the game media number control board P16 reaches the total score. 1 point will be added. Further, in the present embodiment, "27" is stored in the score award timer area as "save score award time", but the total score displayed in the game medium number display portion P9 is updated by "1". An arbitrary numerical value (for example, a numerical value within the range of "10" to "200") may be stored so that the player can visually recognize how the game progresses.

In the "grant request command set", a command for transmitting a grant request command indicating that one point is awarded from the main control board P15 to the game media number control board P16 is stored in the command buffer of the main control board P15. do. Commands stored in the command buffer of the main control board P15 are configured to be transmitted to the game medium number control board P16 by timer interrupt processing on the main control board P15 side. Therefore, the "set of the grant request command" is synonymous with transmission of a grant request command indicating that one point is awarded from the main control board P15 to the game medium number control board P16.

For example, when a symbol combination capable of awarding 8 points is stopped and displayed, an award request command indicating awarding of 1 point is transmitted eight times to the game medium number control board P16, thereby increasing the total score. Configured for updates. By updating the total score one by one in this way, even if the payout process is stopped due to an abnormality during the payout process, the payout process can be executed again after the abnormality is cancelled.

"Command reception" refers to receiving a response command from the game media count control board P16 after the main control board P15 has transmitted a grant request command indicating that one point of game media is to be awarded.

In this embodiment, at least the following two commands are provided as response commands from the game media count control board P16.
a) Giving permission command A command indicating that one point is to be added.
Specifically, when adding 1 point to the total score after the game media count control board P16 receives the award request command indicating that 1 point is to be awarded, the total score before addition exceeds the upper limit value. If the game media count control board P16 determines that there is no such, it transmits to the main control board P15 a grant permission command indicating that one point is to be added to the total score.
b) Giving refusal command Refers to a command indicating not to add 1 point.
Specifically, when adding one point to the total score after the game media number control board P16 receives the award request command indicating that one point is to be awarded, the total score before addition is the upper limit value. When the game media count control board P16 makes the determination, it transmits to the main control board P15 a grant refusal command indicating that one point cannot be added to the total score.

At "cannot be granted?", it is determined whether or not the command received from the game media number control board P16 is a grant refusal command. It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not the command received from the game media number control board P16 is the grant permission command, and if it is not the grant permission command, it may be determined as NO.

With this configuration, even if the game medium number control board P16 receives the award request command indicating that one point is to be awarded in a situation where an abnormality occurs during the score awarding process, the game medium number control board P16 receives the award command. P16 may choose not to update the total score. In addition, when the main control board P15 determines that "cannot be given (YES)" in the "cannot be given?" until all are counted), ``Score giving time passed?'', ``Score giving time saved'', ``Grant request command set'', ``Command received'', ``Cannot be given?'' Bet processing, etc. for starting is disabled. Even if such a loop situation occurs, if the reset switch is operated and the abnormality is canceled, even if it is a loop situation, "NO" is returned in the determination of "Is it possible to grant?" It is possible to proceed to the processing of "scoring data -1".

Note that the loop situation described above is not limited to this. You can loop.

With "scoring data -1", 1 is subtracted from the value of the score storage area. For example, when "8" is stored as the value of the given point storage area, the value of the given point storage area becomes "7" by the processing. Also, when the value of the given point storage area is "1", the value of the given point storage area becomes "0" by the processing.

In the case of "end of giving points?", it is determined whether or not the value of the given point storage area is "0". If the value in the given point storage area is not "0", the process returns to "Time to give points?" Then, if the value in the given point storage area is "0", the process ends.

By executing such a score giving process, it is possible to control the number-of-game-media control board P16 so as not to store the total score exceeding the upper limit value.

Also, if the process of awarding points one by one is performed at a high speed, the player will not be able to recognize that one point has been awarded one by one. Therefore, after giving 1 point, the score giving timer is set for 60.35 ms (for 27 interrupt processes), and every time 1 point is given, the timer is updated (the count value is subtracted by "1"), and 60.35 ms has elapsed. 1 point is given again later. By configuring in this way, the player can recognize that one point has been paid out one by one, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In the above-described embodiment, the main control board P15 gives one score to the game media number control board P16, but the present invention is not limited to this, and they may be given all at once.

For example, when the main control board P15 gives 8 points as a score, it requests the game medium number control board P16 as an award request command whether or not 8 points can be added to the total score. The game media number control board P16 determines whether or not the total score plus 8 points exceeds the upper limit value (determines whether or not "total score + awarded points>16383" is YES), and determines whether or not the upper limit value is If it exceeds (if determined as YES), a command to the effect that 8 points cannot be added to the total score (equivalent to a grant refusal command) is sent to the main control board P15, and the main control board P15 adds 8 points to the total score. When a command to the effect that points cannot be added is received, a grant request command is sent to the game medium number control board P16 again to request whether or not 8 points can be added to the total score. Since there is no change in the total score, a command indicating that 8 points cannot be added to the total score is sent again. will do. That is, it is configured to loop until 8 points are added. By constructing in this way, the score to be given is not discarded, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In addition, since the total score does not exceed the upper limit in the normal assumption in the score giving process, it may not be determined whether or not the total score exceeds the upper limit.

Further, for example, when the main control board P15 gives 8 points as a score, it requests the game medium number control board P16 as an award request command whether or not 8 points can be added to the total score. The game media number control board P16 determines whether or not the total score plus 8 points exceeds the upper limit value (determines whether or not "total score + awarded points>16383" is YES), and determines whether or not the upper limit value is If not (determined as NO), a command to the effect that 8 points can be added to the total score (equivalent to a grant permission command) is transmitted to the main control board P15, and the game media number control board P16 controls the total score. 8 points are added to and the score giving process ends.

In addition, since the total score does not exceed the upper limit in the normal assumption in the score giving process, it may not be determined whether or not the total score exceeds the upper limit.

Further, when the total score upper limit is abnormal, the game medium number control board P16 transmits the information that the total score upper limit is abnormal to the main control board P15, and the main control board P15 receives the information from the game medium number control board P16. The main control board P15 receives the information that the total score upper limit is abnormal, sets the total score upper limit abnormality as an error state, and the main control board P15 transmits a game medium number control notification command to the sub control board P12, thereby displaying an image. An error is reported by a device or a lamp. Then, when the total score upper limit abnormality is canceled by operating the counter switch P7, the main control board P15 sets the bit corresponding to the total score upper limit abnormality of the game medium number control notification command to a value (for example, "0") that becomes normal. ) and transmits it to the sub-control board P12, the sub-control board P12 terminates the notification. When the sub-control board P12 receives the game media number control notification command, if the bit corresponding to the total score upper limit abnormality is changed to a normal value, the notification is not stopped immediately, but after a predetermined period of notification. Notification may be stopped.

Further, when the total score upper limit abnormality occurs after the score giving process, the operation part of the MAX bet switch P5M or the lamps around it and the game medium insertable lamp are extinguished (does not light up). The operation part of the MAX bet switch P5M or the lamp around it and the game media ready lamp are turned off when the game media number control board P16 detects the total score upper limit abnormality, the main control board P16 and the sub control board P12. is the timing to execute the processing based on the total score upper limit abnormality. Also, the timing of turning on the operating portion of the MAX bet switch P5M, the lamps around it, and the game medium insertable lamp is the timing when the counting switch P7 is operated and the total score becomes a value of 16368 or less.

An example will be described in which the counting switch P7 is operated when the score becomes 16371 in the score giving process and the total score upper limit is abnormal. If the count switch is pressed long when the total score is "16371", "50" will be counted. The game media number control board P16 calculates "16371-50" on the register and stores "16321" as the total score in order to store the subtraction result when subtracting the count point from the total score in the counting process. When the number-of-game-media control board P16 detects that the total score upper limit error has been canceled, it transmits the information that the total score upper limit error has been canceled to the main control board P15, and the main control board P15 detects that the total score upper limit error has been canceled. When the canceled information is received, the bet switch is made receivable, and the operation part of the MAX bet switch P5M or the lamps around it and the game medium insertable lamp are lit. In addition, when controlling the operating portion of the MAX bet switch P5M, the lamps around it, and the game media insertable lamp by the sub-control board P12, the main control board P15 receives the information that the total score upper limit abnormality has been canceled. Later, the information that the total score upper limit abnormality is canceled is transmitted to the sub control board P12, and when the sub control board P12 receives the information that the total score upper limit abnormality is canceled, the operation part of the MAX bet switch P5M or the peripheral thereof The lamp and the game medium insertable lamp are lit. In addition, when the counting switch P7 is pressed for a short time and the counting point is counted by "1", at the timing when the total score becomes "16368", the operation part of the MAX bet switch P5M, or the lamp around it, and Lights up the game media insertable lamp.

In addition, when the total score upper limit abnormality occurs after the settlement process, the operation part of the MAX bet switch P5M or the lamps around it and the game medium insertion possible lamp are extinguished (does not light up). The operation part of the MAX bet switch P5M or the lamp around it and the game media ready lamp are turned off when the game media number control board P16 detects the total score upper limit abnormality, the main control board P16 and the sub control board P12. is the timing to execute the processing based on the total score upper limit abnormality. Also, the timing of turning on the operating portion of the MAX bet switch P5M, the lamps around it, and the game medium insertable lamp is the timing when the counting switch P7 is operated and the total score becomes a value of 16368 or less.

An example will be described in which the count switch P7 is operated when the total score becomes 16371 in the settlement process and the total score upper limit is abnormal. If the counting switch is pressed long when the total score is "16371", "50" will be counted. The game media number control board P16 calculates "16371-50" on the register and stores "16321" as the total score in order to store the subtraction result when subtracting the count point from the total score in the counting process. When the number-of-game-media control board P16 detects that the total score upper limit error has been canceled, it transmits the information that the total score upper limit error has been canceled to the main control board P15, and the main control board P15 detects that the total score upper limit error has been canceled. When the canceled information is received, the bet switch is made receivable, and the operation part of the MAX bet switch P5M or a lamp in the vicinity thereof and a game medium insertable lamp are lit. In addition, when controlling the operating portion of the MAX bet switch P5M, the lamps around it, and the game media insertable lamp by the sub-control board P12, the main control board P15 receives the information that the total score upper limit abnormality has been canceled. Later, the information that the total score upper limit abnormality is canceled is transmitted to the sub control board P12, and when the sub control board P12 receives the information that the total score upper limit abnormality is canceled, the operation part of the MAX bet switch P5M or the surrounding The lamp and the game medium insertable lamp are turned on. In addition, when the counting switch P7 is pressed for a short time and the counting point is counted by "1", when the total score reaches "16368", the operation part of the MAX bet switch P5M, or the lamps around it, and Lights up the game media insertable lamp.

In addition, when the total score upper limit abnormality occurs in a situation where the operation part of the start switch P3 or the lamp around it and the game executable lamp are lit, the operation part of the start switch P3 or the lamp around it, Also, the game executable lamp may be turned off and turned on when the total score upper limit abnormality is canceled.

The total score threshold reached state is a state detected by the game media count control board P16, and when the total score managed by the game media count control board P16 reaches a threshold before the upper limit (16383), the total score threshold is reached. state. An example of the threshold value is 15000, and any value (less than 16333) can be set as long as it is less than the upper limit of the total score (16383) minus the count value (50) for one run. The state of reaching the total score threshold value is not displayed in the number display section. In order to cancel the state of reaching the total score threshold value, the count switch P7 provided in the gaming machine P is operated to perform counting processing, and the total score can be canceled when the total score falls below the threshold value of 15000. . In other words, the total score threshold reached state is an abnormal state that is set when the total score is 15000 or more and 16368 or less.

When the total score reaches the threshold value of 15000 or more, the game medium number control board P16 turns on the overflow signal (the overflow signal rises). The overflow signal is kept ON until the total score falls below 15,000, and when the total score falls below 15,000, the game media count control board P16 turns the overflow signal OFF (the overflow signal falls). The game media number control board P16 transmits an overflow signal to the main control board P15, and when the main control board P15 determines that the overflow signal is ON, it outputs an overflow test signal to the test IF board. process for

When the overflow test signal is turned ON and output to the test IF board, the counter switch P7 connected to the test IF board is operated, so the overflow test signal is output ON. At the same time, the counting switch signal is ON and output (counting switch P7 is operated), and the counting process is executed.

As processing for outputting the overflow test signal, the main control board P15 turns ON the overflow test signal to be output to the test IF board, and stores the overflow test signal timer value (count value) in a predetermined storage area. The overflow test signal timer value is for managing the time to turn ON the overflow test signal, and the overflow test signal is maintained ON until the overflow test signal timer value is determined to be zero. Also, the main control board P15 stores the overflow test signal timer value when turning ON the overflow test signal. When the game media number control board P16 executes counting processing and the overflow signal turns OFF, and when the main control board P15 determines that the overflow signal has turned OFF (detects the fall of the overflow signal), The main control board P15 starts subtracting the stored overflow test signal timer value. That is, the overflow test signal remains ON until the overflow test signal timer value becomes 0 even after the overflow signal is turned OFF, and when the overflow test signal timer value becomes 0, the overflow test signal is turned OFF. Since the overflow test signal timer value is stored in the main control board P15 when the overflow signal is turned ON, it is determined that the overflow test signal timer value is not 0 even when the overflow signal is turned ON. Thus, the overflow test signal is turned ON. In other words, the overflow test signal is never turned OFF while the overflow signal is ON.

Further, the main control board P15 determines whether or not the overflow test signal timer value before subtraction is 0, and when determining that the overflow test signal timer value before subtraction is not 0, turns on the overflow test signal, When it is determined that the overflow test signal timer value before subtraction is 0, the overflow test signal is turned OFF. The main control board P15 sets the overflow test signal timer value when the overflow test signal is turned ON (it may be determined that the overflow signal is turned ON), and the timer value is set while the overflow signal is being output. is not subtracted, the counting switch signal is not turned OFF while the overflow signal is being output during the gaming machine test.

In the above example, the main control board P15 determines whether or not the overflow test signal timer value before subtraction is 0, and outputs the overflow test signal when determining that the overflow test signal timer value before subtraction is not 0. Although the embodiment in which it is ON has been described, this is not the only option, and it is determined whether or not the overflow test signal timer value after subtraction is 0, and when it is determined that the overflow test signal timer value after subtraction is not 0 The overflow test signal may be turned ON.

The main control board P15 stores, for example, 1209 (2702.115 ms) as the overflow test signal timer value stored when the overflow test signal is turned ON. This is because the interrupt processing interval of the main control board P15 is 2.235 ms, and 2702.115 ms elapses when the interrupt processing is executed 1209 times. Further, 2702.115 ms is the time required to transmit the game machine information notification nine times since the game machine information notification transmission interval for the game medium number control board P16 to the rented unit is 300 ms. That is, when the game media number control board P16 turns on the overflow signal and the main control board P15 turns on the overflow test signal, the count switch signal turns on and 50 is counted as the count point, and then the game media number control board P16. After the total score fell below the threshold value of 15000 and the overflow signal was turned OFF by the game media count control board P16, the overflow test signal was turned ON for 1209 interrupt processing times of the main control board P15. , the count switch P7 can be maintained ON for 2702.115 ms, so that 450 points are counted with the gaming machine information notification being counted nine times. Therefore, when the test IF board and the main control board P15 are connected (when the game machine test is being performed), when the game media number control board P16 turns ON the overflow signal once, the count switch signal is also turned ON. By turning ON, in addition to one counting process (50 count points) that is executed when the overflow signal is turned ON, the counting process can be executed nine times even after the overflow signal is turned OFF. 500 points will be counted. As a result, 500 points can be subtracted from the total score after the total score reaches 15000 points or more during the game machine test, thereby preventing the overflow signal from turning ON immediately after the overflow signal has turned OFF. Even if the gaming machine under test is in an advantageous state such as AT, the frequency of performing counting processing due to the total score reaching 15000 points or more is reduced, so malfunction of the gaming machine P It is possible to reduce the output frequency of error sounds during the machine test.

Note that the overflow test signal timer value is not limited to the value described above, and may be any value longer than or equal to the time (300 ms or longer) for transmitting the gaming machine information notification once. In other words, when updating (subtracting) the interrupt overflow test signal timer value, any value of 135 or more may be stored as the overflow test signal timer value.

In the above example, the main control board P15 updates the timer value of the overflow test signal every interrupt. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Timer values may be updated. In this embodiment, the overflow test signal timer value can be reduced. For example, when the main control board P15 updates the overflow test signal timer value once every 5 interrupts, 242 is stored as the overflow test signal timer value. In this case, it is possible to set the overflow test signal ON time to 2704.35 ms while keeping the overflow test signal timer value within 1 byte.

In addition, since the game machine P is capable of progressing the game (bet processing, internal lottery processing based on the operation of the start switch P3, stop control processing based on the operation of the stop switch P4, etc.) even during the counting process, A game machine test is not interrupted even if counting processing is executed in a total score threshold reached state during the test. Therefore, the gaming machine test can be executed smoothly.

Further, when the total score threshold reached state occurs, the game media count control board P16 transmits information indicating that the total score threshold reached state is reached to the main control board P15, and the main control board P15 sends a game media count control notification command to the sub control board P12. is transmitted, the status is notified by the image display device or the lamp. Then, when the total score threshold reached state is canceled by the counting operation, the main control board P15 sets the bit corresponding to the total score threshold reached state of the game media count control notification command to a value (for example, "0") that is normal. , and transmits it to the sub-control board P12, thereby ending the status notification of the sub-control board P12. When the sub-control board P12 receives the game media number control notification command, if the bit corresponding to the total score threshold reached state is changed to a normal value, the notification is not stopped immediately but is notified for a predetermined time. You may stop alerting|reporting later.

In the above-described embodiment, the bit positions of the total score upper limit abnormality and the total score threshold reached state of the game media number control notification command transmitted from the main control board P15 to the sub control board P12 are different, but the same bit positions are used. can be managed by In this case, even if the total score upper limit is abnormal or the total score threshold value is reached, the sub-control board P12 cannot change the effect based on the received game medium number control notification command (the same mode of effect is executed). is done). However, regarding the effect of prompting the operation of the counting switch P7 regardless of the total score upper limit abnormality or the total score threshold reached state, the sub control board P12 distinguishes between the total score upper limit abnormality and the total score threshold reached state. It is possible to run without it. Also, since the number of information transmitted by the main control board P15 is reduced, the program capacity can be reduced.

The notification mode by the sub control board P12 in the above-described total score upper limit abnormality and the total score threshold reached state is the same mode (specifically, the bit position of the total score upper limit abnormality and the total score threshold reached state in the game media number control notification command is In the same case, even if the bit position is different, the same mode of notification is performed by the judgment of the sub control board P12, etc.), or a different mode (specifically, the total score upper limit abnormality in the game media number control notification command) The bit position of the total score threshold reaching state is a different bit position, and a different mode of notification is performed depending on the judgment of the sub control board P12. In the case of reaching the score threshold value, the number of game media control notification command 2 may be transmitted, etc.).

If the reporting mode is the same mode, for example, "Please operate the counting switch" may be displayed on the image display device. The value has been reached. Please operate the counting switch." is displayed on the image display device, and when the total score threshold is reached, the upper limit is reached in XX points. Please operate the counting switch. ” may be displayed on the image display device. When displaying the score up to the total score upper limit in the total score threshold reached state, the main control board P15 or the game medium number control board P16 calculates the total score upper limit minus the current total score and transmits it to the sub control board P12. Alternatively, the current total score information received by the sub control board P12 may be used to calculate the total score upper limit minus the current total score.

Note that the display mode of the image display device that prompts the operation of such a counting switch may be referred to as a counting switch prompting display. The count switch prompt display is a concept that includes a display when the total score upper limit is abnormal, a display when the total score threshold is reached, and a display when the total score upper limit is abnormal and the total score threshold is reached. In addition, when the total score upper limit abnormality or the total score threshold reaching state is canceled, the display of the counting switch prompting display ends.

In addition, when the notification mode by the sub control board P12 in the total score upper limit abnormality and the total score threshold reaching state is the same mode, the same notification mode is used from the total score reaching the threshold value (15000) to the upper limit value reaching (16383). Since the total score is notified in advance from reaching the threshold value to reaching the upper limit value, the notification mode does not suddenly change or the notification is not given when the upper limit value is reached. As a result, the player is notified in advance and the notification mode does not change even after reaching the upper limit value, so that even if points exceeding the upper limit value are given as a result of winning, the players are not thought to have lost the excess. (makes it look like there is no urgency).

It should be noted that although the game can be progressed when the total score threshold is reached, the game cannot be progressed when the total score upper limit is abnormal (the start switch P3, the bet switch P5, and the settlement switch P6 cannot be accepted). state).

Also, when the total score reaches the threshold value (15000) to the upper limit value (16383), the lending reception result response sent to the lending unit is abnormal.

A rented device connection abnormality (VL abnormality) is an abnormality detected by the game media number control board P16. When the VL signal between the game media number control board P16 and the rented unit is turned OFF, it is regarded as a rented device connection abnormality. No error display is made on the number display section for the connection error of the rented device. In order to cancel the rental device connection abnormality, the connection with the rental unit becomes normal and the VL signal is turned ON. In the event of an abnormality in the connection of the lending device, processing for stopping the progress of the game includes betting processing by operating the bet switch, reel rotation processing by operating the start switch, reel stop processing by operating the stop switch, and settlement. Disable the settlement process by operating the switch. It should be noted that it is sufficient that the progress of the game is stopped, and the reel stop processing by operating the stop switch need not be invalidated. This is because if the start of the game is invalidated, the reels do not rotate, and the operation of the stop switch is effectively invalidated. However, since communication with the rental unit is not possible, counting is disabled as the game machine P (counting processing based on the operation reception of the counting switch is invalidated (the number of medals counted in the count notification is set to 0). , or invalidate the counter switch operation reception itself). Note that although the counting may be valid, it is desirable to repeat the same counting process because it cannot be transmitted to the lending unit.

In addition, when a rented device connection abnormality occurs, the game medium number control board P16 transmits information indicating that the rented device connection is abnormal to the main control board P15, and the main control board P15 transmits a game medium number control notification command to the sub control board P12. By doing so, an error is notified by an image display device or a lamp. Then, when the rental device connection abnormality is canceled due to the VL signal turning ON, the main control board P15 sets a value (for example, "0") and transmits it to the sub-control board P12, so that the sub-control board P12 terminates the notification. When the sub-control board P12 receives the game media number control notification command, if the bit corresponding to the rental device communication abnormality has been changed to a normal value, the notification is not stopped immediately, but after a predetermined time has passed. Notification may be stopped.

The lending serial number abnormality is an abnormality detected by the game medium number control board P16, and if the lending serial number received from the lending unit is not a value obtained by adding 1 to the previously received lending serial number, it is regarded as a lending serial number abnormality. If there is an error in the lending serial number, no error is displayed in the assigned number display section. In order to cancel the lending serial number abnormality, it is possible to cancel by receiving a normal lending notice from the lending unit. The progress of the game is not stopped when the rental serial number abnormality occurs, but the progress of the game may be stopped when the rental serial number abnormality is detected more than a predetermined number of times (including once). When stopping the progress of the game, some or all of bet invalidation, invalidation of the operation of the start switch P3, invalidation of the operation of the stop switch P4, and invalidation of the settlement are performed.

Further, when an abnormality in the lending serial number occurs, the game medium number control board P16 transmits information indicating that the lending serial number is abnormal to the main control board P15, and the main control board P15 transmits a game medium number control notification command to the sub control board P12. , an error is reported by an image display device or a lamp. Then, when the lending serial number abnormality is canceled by transmitting a normal lending notification from the lending unit, the main control board P15 sets the bit corresponding to the lending device communication abnormality of the game medium number control notification command to a value that is normal. By changing it to (for example, "0") and transmitting it to the sub-control board P12, the sub-control board P12 terminates the notification. When the sub-control board P12 receives the game media number control notification command, if the bit corresponding to the rental device communication abnormality has been changed to a normal value, the notification is not stopped immediately, but after a predetermined time has passed. Notification may be stopped.

Rental device communication error 1 is an abnormality detected by the game media number control board P16, and when the number of times of receiving the rental notification since the previous transmission of the gaming machine information notification is not 1 (rental If the value of the notification reception counter is not "1"), the rented device communication error 1 is assumed. In the case of rental device communication error 1, an error display is not performed on the number display section. In order to cancel the rental device communication error 1, when the gaming machine information notification is sent, the number of times the rental notification is received since the previous gaming machine information notification transmission becomes 1. there is The progress of the game is not stopped when the rented device communication abnormality 1 occurs, but the progress of the game may be stopped when the rented device communication abnormality 1 is detected more than a predetermined number of times (including once). . When stopping the progress of the game, the processing for stopping the progress of the game includes bet processing by operating the bet switch, reel rotation processing by operating the start switch, reel stop processing by operating the stop switch, and settlement switch operation. Disable the settlement process by operation. It should be noted that it is sufficient that the progress of the game is stopped, and the reel stop processing by operating the stop switch need not be invalidated. This is because if the start of the game is invalidated, the reels do not rotate, and the operation of the stop switch is effectively invalidated.

Further, when the rented device communication error 1 occurs, the game media number control board P16 transmits the information indicating that the rented device communication error 1 has occurred to the main control board P15, and the main control board P15 sends the game media number control notification command to the sub control board P12. is transmitted, the error is notified by the image display device or the lamp. When the rented device communication abnormality 1 is canceled, the main control board P15 changes the bit corresponding to the rented device communication abnormality of the game medium number control notification command to a normal value (for example, "0"). By transmitting to the sub-control board P12, the sub-control board P12 terminates the notification. When the sub-control board P12 receives the game media number control notification command, if the bit corresponding to the rental device communication abnormality has been changed to a normal value, the notification is not stopped immediately, but after a predetermined time has passed. Notification may be stopped.

The renting device communication error 2 is an abnormality detected by the game medium number control board P16. and In case of rental device communication error 2, an error is not displayed in the given number display section. In order to cancel the rental device communication error 2, when the rental notification is received, the number of receptions of the rental notification from the transmission of the gaming machine information notification becomes one. The progress of the game is not stopped when the rented device communication abnormality 2 occurs, but the progress of the game may be stopped when the rented device communication abnormality 2 is detected more than a predetermined number of times (including once). . When stopping the progress of the game, the processing for stopping the progress of the game includes bet processing by operating the bet switch, reel rotation processing by operating the start switch, reel stop processing by operating the stop switch, and settlement switch operation. Disable the settlement process by operation. It should be noted that it is sufficient that the progress of the game is stopped, and the reel stop processing by operating the stop switch need not be invalidated. This is because if the start of the game is invalidated, the reels do not rotate, and the operation of the stop switch is effectively invalidated.

In addition, when the rented device communication error 2 occurs, the game media number control board P16 transmits the information that the rented device communication error 2 has occurred to the main control board P15, and the main control board P15 sends the game media number control notification command to the sub control board P12. is transmitted, the error is notified by the image display device or the lamp. When the rented device communication abnormality 2 is canceled, the main control board P15 changes the bit corresponding to the rented device communication abnormality of the game medium number control notification command to a normal value (for example, "0"). By transmitting to the sub-control board P12, the sub-control board P12 terminates the notification. When the sub-control board P12 receives the game media number control notification command, if the bit corresponding to the rental device communication abnormality has been changed to a normal value, the notification is not stopped immediately, but after a predetermined time has passed. Notification may be stopped.

Rental device communication abnormality 3 is an abnormality detected by the game media number control board P16, and when the rental notification is received, less than 100 ms or more than 270 ms from the transmission of the gaming machine information notification (game machine information notification timer A < 100 ms , or gaming machine information notification timer A > 270 ms) is regarded as rental device communication error 3. In case of rental device communication error 3, no error display is performed on the number display unit. In order to cancel the rental device communication error 3, when the rental notification is received, it can be automatically canceled when 100 ms or more or 270 ms or less has elapsed since the transmission of the game machine information notification. The progress of the game is not stopped when the rented device communication abnormality 3 occurs, but the progress of the game may be stopped when the rented device communication abnormality 3 is detected more than a predetermined number of times (including once). . When stopping the progress of the game, the processing for stopping the progress of the game includes bet processing by operating the bet switch, reel rotation processing by operating the start switch, reel stop processing by operating the stop switch, and settlement switch operation. Disable the settlement process by operation. It should be noted that it is sufficient that the progress of the game is stopped, and the reel stop processing by operating the stop switch need not be invalidated. This is because if the start of the game is invalidated, the reels do not rotate, and the operation of the stop switch is effectively invalidated.

Also, when the rented device communication error 3 occurs, the game media number control board P16 transmits the information indicating that the rented device communication error 3 has occurred to the main control board P15. is transmitted, the error is notified by the image display device or the lamp. Then, when the rented device communication abnormality 3 is canceled, the main control board P15 changes the bit corresponding to the rented device communication abnormality of the game medium number control notification command to a normal value (for example, "0"). By transmitting to the sub-control board P12, the sub-control board P12 terminates the notification. When the sub-control board P12 receives the game media number control notification command, if the bit corresponding to the rental device communication abnormality has been changed to a normal value, the notification is not stopped immediately, but after a predetermined time has passed. Notification may be stopped.

The rented device communication error 4 is an abnormality detected by the game medium number control board P16. In case of rental device communication error 4, an error is not displayed in the given number display section. In order to cancel the lending device communication error 4, the lending device communication error 4 can be automatically canceled when the number of loaned medals becomes 50 or less when the lending notification is received. The progress of the game is not stopped when the rented device communication abnormality 4 occurs, but the progress of the game may be stopped when the rented device communication abnormality 4 is detected more than a predetermined number of times (including once). . When stopping the progress of the game, the processing for stopping the progress of the game includes bet processing by operating the bet switch, reel rotation processing by operating the start switch, reel stop processing by operating the stop switch, and settlement switch operation. Disable the settlement process by operation. It should be noted that it is sufficient that the progress of the game is stopped, and the reel stop processing by operating the stop switch need not be invalidated. This is because if the start of the game is invalidated, the reels do not rotate, and the operation of the stop switch is effectively invalidated.

Further, when the rented device communication error 4 occurs, the game media number control board P16 transmits information indicating that the rented device communication error 4 has occurred to the main control board P15. is transmitted, the error is notified by the image display device or the lamp. When the rented device communication abnormality 4 is canceled, the main control board P15 changes the bit corresponding to the rented device communication abnormality of the game medium number control notification command to a normal value (for example, "0"). By transmitting to the sub-control board P12, the sub-control board P12 terminates the notification. When the sub-control board P12 receives the game media number control notification command, if the bit corresponding to the rental device communication abnormality has been changed to a normal value, the notification is not stopped immediately, but after a predetermined time has passed. Notification may be stopped.

The lending device communication error 5 is an anomaly detected by the game media count control board P16. When the lending notice is received, the number of lending tokens is not 0, and the lending notice is received after the hole contest/illegal monitoring information has been sent. In this case, it is set as rental device communication error 5. In the case of rental device communication error 5, no error display is performed on the display of the number of grants. In order to cancel the lending device communication error 5, when the lending notice is received, the number of lending medals is not 0, and the lending notice is received after the hall controller/unauthorized monitoring information is sent. there is The progress of the game is not stopped when the rented device communication abnormality 5 occurs, but the progress of the game may be stopped when the rented device communication abnormality 5 is detected more than a predetermined number of times (including once). . When stopping the progress of the game, the processing for stopping the progress of the game includes bet processing by operating the bet switch, reel rotation processing by operating the start switch, reel stop processing by operating the stop switch, and settlement switch operation. Disable the settlement process by operation. It should be noted that it is sufficient that the progress of the game is stopped, and the reel stop processing by operating the stop switch need not be invalidated. This is because if the start of the game is invalidated, the reels do not rotate, and the operation of the stop switch is effectively invalidated.

In addition, when the rented device communication error 5 occurs, the game media number control board P16 transmits information indicating that the rented device communication error 5 has occurred to the main control board P15, and the main control board P15 sends a game medium number control notification command to the sub control board P12. is transmitted, the error is notified by the image display device or the lamp. When the rented device communication abnormality 5 is canceled, the main control board P15 changes the bit corresponding to the rented device communication abnormality of the game medium number control notification command to a normal value (for example, "0"). By transmitting to the sub-control board P12, the sub-control board P12 terminates the notification. When the sub-control board P12 receives the game media number control notification command, if the bit corresponding to the rental device communication abnormality has been changed to a normal value, the notification is not stopped immediately, but after a predetermined time has passed. Notification may be stopped.

The lending device communication error 6 is an error detected by the game medium number control board P16. do. In case of rental device communication error 6, no error display is performed on the number display unit. In order to cancel the lending device communication error 6, the number of borrowed medals must be not 0 and the number of counted medals must be 0 when the lending notification is received, or the number of borrowed medals must be 0 when the lending notification is received. , and the number of counted medals is not 0, or when the number of loaned medals is 0 and the number of counted medals is 0 at the time of receiving the lending notification, the cancellation is possible. The progress of the game is not stopped when the rented device communication abnormality 6 occurs, but the progress of the game may be stopped when the rented device communication abnormality 6 is detected more than a predetermined number of times (including once). . When stopping the progress of the game, the processing for stopping the progress of the game includes bet processing by operating the bet switch, reel rotation processing by operating the start switch, reel stop processing by operating the stop switch, and settlement switch operation. Disable the settlement process by operation. It should be noted that it is sufficient that the progress of the game is stopped, and the reel stop processing by operating the stop switch need not be invalidated. This is because if the start of the game is invalidated, the reels do not rotate, and the operation of the stop switch is effectively invalidated.

Also, when the rented device communication error 6 occurs, the game media number control board P16 transmits information indicating that the rented device communication error 6 has occurred to the main control board P15. is transmitted, the error is notified by the image display device or the lamp. Then, when the rented device communication abnormality 6 is canceled, the main control board P15 changes the bit corresponding to the rented device communication abnormality of the game medium number control notification command to a normal value (for example, "0"). By transmitting to the sub-control board P12, the sub-control board P12 terminates the notification. When the sub-control board P12 receives the game media number control notification command, if the bit corresponding to the rental device communication abnormality has been changed to a normal value, the notification is not stopped immediately, but after a predetermined time has passed. Notification may be stopped.

In the present embodiment, the above-described rental device connection abnormality, rental serial number abnormality, rental device communication abnormality 1, rental device communication abnormality 2, rental device communication abnormality 3, rental device communication abnormality 4, rental device communication abnormality 5, rental device communication Regarding the abnormality 6, information indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the sub-control board P12 is transmitted, but information that can specify the type of abnormality is not transmitted. In addition, with respect to rental device communication error 1, rental device communication error 2, rental device communication error 3, rental device communication error 4, rental device communication error 5, and rental device communication error 6, the lighting mode of the status display lamp is one. It is configured so that the type of rental device communication abnormality cannot be determined from the lighting mode of the status display lamp.

With this configuration, rental device connection failure, rental serial number failure, rental device communication failure 1, rental device communication failure 2, rental device communication failure 3, rental device communication failure 4, and rental device communication failure 5 caused by fraud , it is possible to make it difficult to confirm under what conditions the rental device communication error 6 occurs.

In addition, with respect to rental device connection abnormality, rental serial number abnormality, rental device communication abnormality 1, rental device communication abnormality 2, rental device communication abnormality 3, rental device communication abnormality 4, rental device communication abnormality 5, and rental device communication abnormality 6, sub control It is also possible to send information that can specify the type of abnormality to the board P12. With such a configuration, it is possible to manage the error history in the sub control board P12.

In addition to the above-described abnormalities, the abnormalities detected by the game machine P include radio wave abnormalities (for example, abnormalities when the radio waves received by the game machine P are determined to be abnormal), random number abnormalities (for example, game machine P Abnormality when P determines that the random number used in internal lottery or AT lottery is abnormal), or setting value abnormality (for example, abnormality when the set value used in internal lottery or AT lottery is determined to be abnormal), etc. There is no problem even if anomalies are prepared.

Among the errors that can be detected by the main control board P15, there is an unrecoverable error that cannot be recovered even by operating the reset switch (can be recovered by initialization processing such as setting change). Unrecoverable errors are "when the power supply cannot be restored normally", "when the symbol combination display is abnormal when all reels are stopped", "when the set value is out of range", and "RCK for random number update". This occurs when an abnormality in the frequency of the clock input to the pin is detected, and when an abnormality in the update state of the internal random number is detected.

In addition, when an abnormality is detected in the game media number control board P16, an example has been described in which a command is sent to the sub control board P12 via the main control board P15. and the sub control board P12 may be directly connected with a communication cable (harness, etc.), and commands may be transmitted from the game medium number control board P16 to the sub control board P12 without going through the main control board P15.

In addition, although a mode has been described in which notification of an error is performed by the given number display section, notification of an error may be performed by the game medium number display section P9.

Further, when an error command is received from the main control board P15 due to an error occurring in the main control board P15 or the game medium number control board P16, the sub control board P12 receives the received time and the contents of the error. It may be configured to be stored in a predetermined storage area in association with the game state.

When storing the time, since an RTC (real time clock) is mounted on the sub control board P12, the time is stored in a predetermined storage area based on information from the RTC. A predetermined storage area is backed up by a backup power source and is configured not to be initialized when the power is turned off or turned on. Also, it is configured not to be initialized even when the settings are changed.

When the game state is stored, the content based on the command regarding the main game state (CZ, AT, etc.) from the main control board P15 and the content indicating that the game is being played based on the start start command or game end command are stored in a predetermined manner. store in the area. A predetermined storage area is backed up by a backup power source and is configured not to be initialized when the power is turned off or turned on. Also, it is configured not to be initialized even when the settings are changed.

The "receiving time", "error content", and "game status" stored in this way can be browsed by the operation of the gaming facility manager. For example, by pressing the reset button (reset switch) once while changing settings or checking settings, the administrator menu screen is displayed, and among the multiple items in the administrator menu screen, the "error history" item is selected. A mode of browsing by selection is conceivable. It should be noted that it is possible to accumulate and display a plurality of error contents in the error history item. In addition, if there are many error histories, the administrator can narrow down the viewing range by selecting the date range, error type, etc. so that the administrator can easily check the desired error history. configured as possible. Furthermore, if there are many error histories, even if it is configured to display one of the latest error histories based on the current time, or a plurality of error histories out of the latest error histories based on the current time. good.

The method for displaying the administrator menu screen is not limited to pressing the reset button once during setting change or setting confirmation. It is conceivable that In other words, it is sufficient that the player is configured not to be able to display the administrator menu screen (so that it is difficult) and the administrator is configured to be able to display the administrator menu screen.

By configuring in this way, for example, it becomes possible to store information such as ``On year, month, day, hour, minute, and second, an input request communication error occurred while waiting for a game'' in the sub-control board P12. , the administrator can check the desired error history by selecting the error history item. In addition, you may display to "millisecond" as a display mode.

Further, the sub control board P12 may store the information related to the total score stored in the game medium number control board P16 in association with the above-described error contents. For example, the error content is an error related to rental notification, rental device connection error, rental serial number error, rental device communication error 1, rental device communication error 2, rental device communication error 3, rental device communication error 4, rental device communication error 5. , when a rental device communication error 6 occurs, a command related to the total score is transmitted to the main control board P15, and further transmitted from the main control board P15 to the sub-control board P12, whereby the error related to the rental notification and the total score information are transmitted. It is conceivable to associate and store.

With this configuration, the increase or decrease in the total score at the time of lending notification is stored, so even when the lending notification is fraudulent, the history can be stored in the sub-control board P12. It becomes possible. The errors to be stored in association with the total score are not limited to the errors described above, and all errors may be associated with information on the total score.

Further, the sub control board P12 may be configured to store history information not only when an error occurs but also when counting processing is performed. possible to remember. For example, when the counting switch P7 is pressed and the counting process is executed, the counting points and the total score are associated and stored. In addition, when the count switch P7 is pressed for a long time to continuously count every 300 ms, all the count information for every 300 ms is stored.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to store the entire history of the counting process, so that when an abnormal numerical value is counted, it becomes possible to indicate the material for determining whether or not it is fraudulent.

Further, the sub control board P12 may be configured to store history information not only when an error occurs but also when a lending notice is received. can be considered. For example, upon receiving a lending notification, the lending points and the total score may be associated and stored. In other words, even if rental notifications are continuously received every 300 ms, all the rental notification information for each 300 ms may be stored.

Further, the sub control board P12 may be configured to store history information not only when an error occurs but also periodically. be done. For example, the game media number control board P16 periodically (for example, every 60 seconds, every 180 seconds, etc.) transmits the total score information to the main control board P15, and the main control board P15 transmits the received total score information to the sub control board P15. The sub-control board P12 stores the received total score information and time information in association with each other.

With this configuration, the sub-control board P12 can periodically store the total score information, the time information, etc. in association with each other even when there is no event that triggers the storage of the history information, such as when an error occurs. , history information can be stored against frauds that do not use the counting switch P7 or the lending switch, and the presence or absence of fraud can be determined based on this history information.

Further, the sub-control board P12 may independently determine an error even when it does not receive an error command. For example, it may be determined that an error has occurred when a command related to rental notification or a command related to counting notification is received twice within 300 ms. This is because the communication between the game media count control board P16 and the lending unit is configured such that the lending notice or the count notice is received or sent once every 300 ms, and twice within 300 ms. This is because it can be said that the communication is not normal when it is received or transmitted twice.

In this case, the sub control board P12 sets a timer corresponding to 300 ms when it receives a command related to rental notification or a command related to counting notification from the main control board P15. If it is determined that the timing of receiving the command related to the notification is within 300ms, an error-suggesting notification (for example, "Please check the total score" is displayed on the LCD, or the lamp is changed to a lighting pattern corresponding to the abnormality. light it up, output an audio message saying "Abnormality detected", etc.). As a method for judging this abnormality, a timer corresponding to 300 ms is set for each command reception (if the interval of interrupt processing of the sub-control board P12 is 1 ms, the timer corresponding to 300 ms is set to a count value "299"), Periodically (for example, each interrupt) the timer is decremented and it is determined whether the timer is 0 when a command is received. It is conceivable that the state is judged to be abnormal at times. However, it is not limited to this mode, and a method of setting the initial value of the timer to 0 and adding the timer may be used.

By configuration in this way, for example, information such as "○ years ○ Month ○ Sunday ○ hour ○ minute ○ seconds, an abnormal number notifications occur during the game waiting, and the total number is 2000, and the total score is 2000." can be stored in the sub control board P12, and even if the game media number control board P16 cannot transmit an error command due to fraud, the sub control board P12 can determine the error, so fraud can be prevented. machine can be provided.

In addition, it is conceivable that the sub-control board P12 determines that there is an abnormality when it receives rental notifications a plurality of times (for example, 10 times) consecutively every 300 ms. If it is determined to be abnormal, a notification that suggests an abnormality (for example, "Please check the total score" is displayed on the liquid crystal, the lamp is lit in a lighting pattern corresponding to the abnormality, or "abnormality detected done”, etc.). By configuring in this way, even if the main control board P15 and the game medium number control board P16 do not determine that there is an abnormality, there is a possibility that the rental notification is being transmitted to the game machine P by an illegal method. Since the abnormality can be determined by the sub-control board P12, it is possible to prevent fraud and provide a safer gaming machine.

The above-mentioned unrecoverable error, insertion request communication error, settlement request communication error, and payout request communication error are errors that can be detected by the main control means, and the bet processing by operating the bet switch, the reel rotation processing by operating the start switch, The progress of the game is stopped by invalidating the reel stop processing by operating the stop switch and the settlement processing by operating the settlement switch. In addition, any of the unrecoverable error, input request communication error, settlement request communication error, or payout request communication error occurs in a state where it is possible to shift to the setting confirmation mode, and an unrecoverable error, input request communication error, settlement request Even if the setting key switch is turned to the ON position in a situation where the communication error or the payout request communication error has not been canceled, the setting confirmation mode is not entered.

As a result, in consideration of the case where an abnormality is caused by fraud, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized acquisition of advantageous information by not shifting to the setting confirmation mode in which advantageous setting value information is displayed during an error. can.

In addition, the rental device connection abnormality (VL abnormality) and the total score upper limit abnormality are errors that can be detected by the game medium number control means. In order to stop the game, bet processing by operating the bet switch, reel rotation processing by operating the start switch, reel stop processing by operating the stop switch, and settlement processing by operating the settlement switch are disabled.

Rental device connection failure (VL failure) and total score upper limit failure can also occur due to fraud, but they can also occur due to equipment failure, equipment failure, or normal power-on work, so the progress of the game will stop. turns the setting key switch to the ON position to shift to the setting confirmation mode. In other words, either the lending device connection error (VL error) or the total score upper limit error occurs in a situation where it is possible to shift to the setting confirmation mode, and the lending device connection error (VL error) or the total score upper limit error is canceled. If the setting key switch is turned to the ON position in a situation where the setting confirmation mode is entered.

As a result, even if a rental device connection error (VL error) or a total score upper limit error occurs during normal work, it is possible to quickly shift to the setting confirmation mode and confirm the setting values.

In addition to the errors described above, there are cases where counting cannot be performed due to an error on the lending unit side. For example, after the gaming machine and the lending unit start communicating, if the lending unit side cannot normally receive the telegrams sent from the gaming machine for a predetermined period of time, the lending unit cannot lend, play again, or receive the count. Not possible. In this case, even if the count switch of the game machine is operated, the rented unit cannot be counted, and the count information is not stored in the card.

Information received by the gaming machine from the lending unit includes a lending notification, so if there is no VL abnormality, the failure of communication with the lending unit can be determined by not receiving the lending notification. Therefore, when the game machine detects a state in which it cannot receive a rental notification (when one rental device communication error is set), it determines that the rental notification has not been received for a predetermined number of times (including one time) and counts. The functionality of the switch can be disabled so that count notifications are not sent to the lending unit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game machine from transmitting a counting notification in which the number of medals to be counted is not 0 when the lending unit cannot receive the counting notification.

<Counting process>
Next, counting processing will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

The count control start processing (synonymous with the count control processing described above) in FIG. 28 is mainly processing for outputting a count notification from the gaming machine to the lending unit. Specifically, it is one of the processes executed by the timer interrupt process of the game media number control board P16. The period of the timer interrupt processing of the game medium number control board P16 is 1 ms.

"Count button check" is processing for setting the count button state. The count button check process will be described with reference to FIG.

Note that the count button check process is a process for not counting 50 as a count point even if the count notification timing comes after the count button is released in a situation where multiple long-press determinations have been made in the count process. This is a process that is executed in place of the above-described counting execution flag process. In other words, processing such as storing the counting button state associated with the counting button check processing is unnecessary when counting processing using the counting execution flag is used. Also, if you want to execute a process that does not count 50 as a count point even if the count notification timing comes after the count button is released in a situation where multiple long-press determinations have been made in the count process, check the count button. Processing such as saving the counting button state associated with the processing is executed, and processing related to the counting execution flag is not executed.

"Acquisition of count button state" acquires the value corresponding to the count button state stored in the count button state storage area (storage in the A register). As a value corresponding to the count button state stored in the count button state storage area, "0" represents the count button state = 0, indicating that the count button is not pressed, and "1" counts. Button state = 1 indicates that the count button is pressed for a short time, and if it is "2", count button state = 2 indicates that the count button is pressed long (first time), and "3". , the count button state is represented as 3, indicating that the count button has been pressed for a long time (for the second and subsequent times).

"Count button state=1?" determines whether the count button state=1 or not, and if the count button state=1, executes the "count button timer clear" process.

"Count button state = 2?" determines whether or not the count button state = 2, and if the count button state = 2, executes the "count button timer clear" process.

"Count button signal ON?" determines whether or not the count button is pressed. If the count button is not pressed, the "count button state = 0 set" process is executed.

"Count button state ≠ 0?" determines whether the count button state ≠ 0, and if the count button state is not 0 (normally, the count button state = 3), the "count button Execute timer clear processing.

"Count execution timer +1" executes a process of adding 1 to the value stored in the count execution timer storage area. In the "count execution timer +1", if the value stored in the count execution timer storage area exceeds 500, the value stored in the count execution timer storage area is corrected to 500, and the count execution timer If the value stored in the storage area is less than 500, the value stored in the counting execution timer storage area is incremented by one.

"Counting button timer < 500?" determines whether the value stored in the counting execution timer storage area added by "counting execution timer +1" is less than 500. If less than 500, count button check processing is performed. exit. When the count button timer is less than 500, it means that 500 ms has not passed since the count button was pressed, and it is a state before it is determined that the count button has been pressed for a long time.

"Counting button state = 2 set" executes processing to store "2" in the A register when the value stored in the counting execution timer storage area added by "counting execution timer + 1" is 500 or more. do.

"Save count button state" executes a process of storing the value of the A register in the count button state storage area. A value corresponding to the count button state is stored in the A register, and count button state=0, count button state=1, and count button state=2 can be set in the count button check process.

"Count button timer clear" executes a process of initializing (setting to 0) the value of the counting execution timer storage area.

"Count button state=0 set" is a process executed when the count button is not pressed in "Count button signal ON?", and executes a process of storing "0" in the A register.

"Counting button timer = 0?" is a process of determining whether the value of the counting execution timer storage area is 0 or not. ' processing, if the count button state=0 and the value in the count execution timer storage area is not 0, then 'count button state=1 set' is executed.

"Count button state=1 set" executes the process of storing "1" in the A register. This process can be executed when the count button is pressed with the count button state=0 and the count execution timer is counting, and the count button is released before the count value of the count execution timer reaches 500. It has become. In other words, the processing is executable when the count button is pressed for a short time.

When "counting button timer clear" is executed, "counting button check" is terminated, the process returns to counting control start processing, and "counting notification timing?" is executed.

"Count notification timing?" determines whether or not it is time to output the count notification to the lending unit. Specifically, it is determined based on the value of a storage area (_TM_INF_CTL_A) for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A, which will be described later. When the value stored in the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A is "200" (in other words, when 100 ms have passed since the gaming machine information notification was output), the count notification is sent to the lending unit. If the value stored in the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A is not "200", it is determined to be NO.

"Clear medal count" clears (sets to 0) a count point storage area (_CT_CAL_VAL) which is an RWM area of the game medium number control board P16 and can store count points to be counted. Data stored in the count accumulation point storage area (_CT_CAL_ALL) capable of storing count accumulation points is not cleared at this timing.

“Clear counting flag” clears (sets to 0) a counting flag (_FL_CAL_EXE) indicating whether counting is in progress, which is the RWM area of the game medium number control board P16.

"VL abnormality flag ≠ 0?" determines whether or not the connection between the gaming machine and the rental unit is abnormal. Specifically, when the VL abnormality flag (_FL_VL_ABN), which is the RWM area of the game media number control board P16, is a value indicating normality (for example, "0"), NO is determined, and the VL abnormality flag indicates abnormality. If it is a value (for example, "FFh"), YES is determined. The VL abnormality flag is a flag that is updated by execution of timer interrupt processing of the game medium number control board P16, and when there is input data of the VL signal from the lending unit (the gaming machine and the lending unit are electrically connected). ), a value indicating normality is stored in the VL abnormality flag, and when there is no input data of the VL signal from the lending unit (when the gaming machine and the lending unit are not electrically connected), the VL A value indicating an abnormality is stored in the abnormality flag.

"Total score = 0?" determines whether or not the total score (total number of points) is 0 based on the total score storage area (_NB_MEDAL) which is the RWM area of the game media number control board P16 and can store the total score. . If the total score is 0 as a result of this determination, YES is determined. Also, when the total score is not 0 by this determination, it is determined as NO. Note that when it is determined that a value indicating an abnormality is stored in the VL abnormality flag, a count notification is output without determining the total score.

“Count execution flag=1?” determines whether the count execution flag is “1”. As described above, the counting execution flag is a flag for managing whether a short-pressing operation is accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7 or a long-pressing operation is accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7. For example, if a counting execution flag storage area (_FL_CAL_ACT) for managing the counting execution flag is provided in the RWM area of the game media number control board P16, and the value stored in the counting execution flag storage area is "0" (counting execution If the flag is 0), it indicates a situation in which it is not yet determined whether the short-pressing operation is accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7 or the long-pressing operation is accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7. ing. When the value stored in the counting execution flag storage area is "1" (when the counting execution flag is 1), it indicates a situation in which it is determined that a short press operation has been accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7. there is When the value stored in the counting execution flag storage area is "2" (when the counting execution flag is 2), it indicates a situation in which it is determined that a long press operation has been accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7. there is Therefore, if YES in the "counting execution flag=1?" is. Specifically, in order to determine whether the count execution flag is "1", the value stored in the count execution flag storage area is stored in the A register, and the value of the A register is compared with "1". As a result, if the values are the same, YES is determined. A detailed method of generating the counting execution flag will be described later in "Counting execution flag set".

“Count execution flag=0?” determines whether the count execution flag is “0”. Specifically, when the counting execution flag storage area is "0" (whether a short-pressing operation is accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7 or a long-pressing operation is accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7). If not determined), YES is determined.

When the counting button check process is employed as described above, "counting execution flag = 1?" is replaced with "counting button state = 1?", and "counting execution flag = 0?" button state=0?". Similar to the counting execution flag, if the "counting button state=1" and the "counting button state=0" are not set, "counting point=50 set" is executed.

"Counting point = 50 set" sets 50 as the counting point (specifically, stores 50 in the A register).

"Total score≧counting point?" performs arithmetic processing (subtraction arithmetic processing) of comparing the total score with 50 (the value stored in the A register).

"Get Total Score" stores the total score in the A register. That is, this is the process of updating the value of the A register from "50" to "total score". This process is executed when it is determined NO by "total score≧counting point?", in other words, when it is determined that 50 is greater than the total score (when the total score is less than 50).

“Save count points” is a process of storing count points in a count point storage area (_CT_CAL_VAL) capable of storing count points to be counted, which is the RWM area of the game media number control board P16. Specifically, it is a process of storing the value of the A register in the counting point storage area. For example, if "counting execution flag=1?" is YES, the value of the A register is "1", so "1" is stored in the counting point storage area. Also, if the answer to "total score≧counting point?" is YES, the value of the A register is "50", so "50" is stored in the counting point storage area. Furthermore, if the result of "total score≧counting point?" is NO, the value of register A is "total score", so "total score" is stored in the counting point storage area. In this way, when a short press operation is accepted as an operation of the count switch P7, the count point can be derived using the value of the count execution flag storage area, thereby simplifying the processing ("1" as the count point). ”). When a short press operation is accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7, the processing of setting "1" as the counting point may be executed without using the value of the counting execution flag storage area.

As described above, when the short-pressing operation of the counting switch P7 is accepted, the count point is "1", and when the long-pressing operation is accepted as the operation of the counting switch P7, the total score is 50 or more. When the count point is "50" and a long-press operation is accepted as the operation of the count switch P7, and the total score is less than 50, the count point becomes "total score". That is, the maximum number of points that can be counted at one time (with one count notification) is 50.

In the counting process, it is first determined whether or not the counting switch P7 has been operated (whether the counting execution flag is other than 0). It is also possible to determine whether or not the total score is 0, and not to determine whether or not the total score is 0 when the counting switch P7 is not operated.

In such a configuration, the situation where the total score is 0 is more likely to occur than the situation where the counting switch P7 is operated (the time period of occurrence is longer), so counting is performed first. By determining whether the switch P7 is operated or not, the processing time becomes shorter than determining whether or not the total score is 0 at the beginning.

"Total score update" stores the value obtained by subtracting the count points from the total score in the total score storage area. In other words, the total score is updated according to the counting points before outputting the counting notification.

"Update accumulated count points" is a count accumulated point storage area (_CT_CAL_ALL) which is an RWM area of the game medium number control board P16 and can store count accumulated points. Update the point storage area (_CT_CAL_ALL).

After that, the "counting flag set" sets the counting flag (_FL_CAL_EXE) (stores "FF") because it is decided that the counting point will be "1" or more. In other words, when the count point is "0", the counting flag is not set.

"Count notification output" outputs the count notification to the lending unit. Specifically, 0x07 is output as the message length, 0x02 is output as the command, and the count serial number is stored in the count serial number storage area (_NB_CAL_NUM) that stores the count serial number, which is the RWM area of the game media number control board P16. output the count serial number stored in the count point storage area (_CT_CAL_VAL) as the count point, and output the count point stored in the count point storage area (_CT_CAL_VAL) as the count point; Outputs the count accumulation points stored in the point storage area (_CT_CAL_ALL), and outputs the checksum value (1 byte) of the output various data.

"Update count serial number" executes the process of updating the count serial number (the process of adding 1). When the counting serial number is 255, the result of adding +1 is 0. Therefore, when it becomes 0 (when it is determined as 0), the processing of updating the counting serial number again (processing of adding 1) to run. In other words, when the counting serial number is 255, the counting serial number is updated to 1 by executing the processing for updating the counting serial number twice. Also, when the counting serial number is a value less than 255 (for example, 10), the result of executing the counting serial number updating process (adding +1) does not become 0, so the counting serial number updating process is executed only once. By doing so, the counting serial number can be updated (eg, 11).

"Counting execution flag clear" is a process of clearing (for example, 0) the value stored in the counting execution flag storage area. With this configuration, the value stored in the counting execution flag storage area can be reset to an initial value (eg, 0) each time the counting control start process is executed (every 300 ms period). In other words, even when "0" is output as the count point of the count notification, such as when the VL abnormality flag is not 0 or when the total score is 0, it is stored in the count execution flag storage area. The value can be an initial value (eg 0). In the counting control start process, the value of a timer area (counting execution timer storage area (_TM_CAL_ACT), which will be described later) for measuring the time during which the counting switch P7 is operated is not cleared.

When the counting button check process is adopted as described above, the "counting button state < 2?" is executed without executing the "counting execution flag clear". Conversely, when the count execution flag process is employed, the "count button state <2?" is not executed.

"Count button state < 2?" is a process for determining whether or not the count button state stored in the count button state storage area is less than two.

If it is determined that the count button state is less than 2 (count button state = 0 or count button state = 1), the value stored in the count button state storage area is cleared (count button state = 0). If it is determined that the count button state is not less than 2 (count button state = 2 or count button state = 3), 3 is stored in the count button state storage area (count button state = 3).

As described above, when the process related to the count button state is executed, after the count process related to the long press is performed once or more (before the next count notification timing after counting 50 as a count point once or more) If the count button is released at the beginning of the count, the state of the count button becomes 0 in the count button check process. Therefore, the count point becomes 0 instead of 50 in the count control start process, and the count notification is transmitted. It's like In other words, since counting is not performed after the count button is released after the count processing related to the long press is performed one or more times, the processing based on the player's operation can be executed, and dissatisfaction with the game specifications can be eliminated.

In addition, if the counting button is pressed and held for 500 ms or more and the counting point = 50 has not yet been transmitted as a counting notification, the counting button state = 2, so the counting control start process will set the counting point = 50 and count. It's supposed to send notifications. In other words, since the player who has been pressing the counting button for 500 ms or more is the player who wants to count 50 as the counting point, the counting button is released after the counting button is pressed for 500 ms or longer before the counting notification is sent. Since the count value of 50 can be transmitted as a count notification even when the game is over, processing based on the player's operation can be executed, and dissatisfaction with the game specifications can be eliminated.

Although each storage area is described as being provided in the RWM of the game medium number control board P16, in the case of a gaming machine P or the like that does not have the game medium number control board P16, the main control board A configuration that is provided for the RWM of P15 may be used.

Also, information based on the counting flag (_FL_CAL_EXE) is transmitted to the main control board P15. This allows the main control board P15 to know that counting is in progress. Further, for example, by transmitting information indicating that counting is in progress from the main control board P15 to the effect control board, the effect corresponding to the counting can be performed by the effect control board.

40 to 43, the mode of counting points according to the timing of depression and separation of the counting switch P7 will be described. Note that T1, T2, T3, T4, and T5 shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 all indicate count notification timings, and count notifications are transmitted to the lending unit every 300 ms. Also, in FIGS. 40 to 43, the count value for the long press is "50", but when the total score is less than 50 points, the total score value becomes the count value (for example, when the total score is 30 points). count value is "30").

FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the counting process executed when the timing at which the counting switch P7 is released from the state in which the counting switch P7 is long-pressed by the player is before the count notification timing. .

In FIG. 40, the counting switch P7 is pressed at the timing of S1, and the counting switch P7 is released at the timing of S2 after 500 ms or more (after 700 ms have elapsed) for long-press determination. The counting execution flag becomes 2 at timing F1, 500 ms after S1, and becomes 0 at timing F2 (T4), which is the counting notification timing after timing S2.

In FIG. 40, the timing of T4 has not yet been reached at the timing of S2 when the counting switch P7 that has been pressed and held for 500 ms or more is released. (counting processing with a count value of "50") can be executed, so the player's operation can be reflected without wasting the pressing time from T3 to S2.

FIG. 41 shows counting executed when the counting switch P7 is released from the state in which the counting switch P7 is long-pressed by the player, and the counting switch P7 is pressed and released again before the next count notification timing. It is a figure explaining a process.

In FIG. 41, the counting switch P7 is pressed at the timing of S1, and the counting switch P7 is released at the timing of S2 after 500 ms or more (after 700 ms have passed) for judging the long press. Before reaching T4, the counting switch P7 is pressed again at the timing of S3, and the counting switch P7 is separated at the timing of S4 before reaching T4. The counting execution flag is set to 2 at timing F1, 500 ms after S1, and is set to 0 at timing F2 (T4), which is the counting notification timing after timing S2.

In FIG. 41, the counting switch P7 is pressed for a short time after the timing S2 when the counting switch P7 is released for 500 ms or longer until the next counting notification timing T4. (The counting switch P7 is pressed at the timing of S3 and released at the timing of S4 after 50 ms). The execution flag=2 is maintained, and "50" is counted as the count value at the timing of T4. In this way, even if there is a short press after a long press, the count process by long press can be executed, so even if there is an erroneous operation or noise after the long press, the count value by long press can be sent to the rental unit at the count notification timing. becomes possible.

At timing T3 in FIG. 41, since the count execution flag is set to 2 due to the long depression of the count switch P7, "50" is counted as the count value. Since the counting switch P7 continues to be pressed, the counting execution flag is once set to 0 after outputting "50" as the counting value to the lending unit side at the timing of T3, and in the next interrupt processing, the counting execution timer is turned on. Since it is "500", the count execution flag=2 again.

FIG. 42 shows counting executed when the counting switch P7 is released from the state in which the counting switch P7 is long-pressed by the player, and the counting switch P7 is pressed and released again before the next count notification timing. It is a figure explaining a process.

In FIG. 42, the counting switch P7 is pressed at the timing of S1, and the counting switch P7 is released at the timing of S2 after 500 ms or more (after 700 ms have passed) for judging the long press. The counting switch P7 is pressed again at the timing of S3 before reaching T4, and the counting switch P7 is separated at the timing of S4 before reaching T5 across T4. The counting execution flag is set to 2 at timing F1, 500 ms after S1, and is set to 0 at timing F2 (T4), which is the counting notification timing after timing S2. Also, at the timing of S4 when the counting switch P7 is released before 500 ms has elapsed from the timing of S3, the counting execution flag is set to 1, and the counting is executed at the timing of F4 (T5) which is the counting notification timing after the timing of S4. Flag=0.

In FIG. 42, the counting switch P7 is pressed for a short time after the timing S2 when the counting switch P7 is released for 500 ms or longer until the next counting notification timing T4. (The count switch P7 is pressed at the timing of S3 and released at the timing of S4 after 200 ms). "50" is counted as the count value at the timing. Further, when the counting switch P7 is released at the timing of S4, in which 500 ms has not elapsed from the timing of S3, during the period from the timing of T4 to the timing of T5, the counting switch P7 pressed at the timing of S3 Since the requirement for a short press is satisfied, the count execution flag is set to 1 at the timing of S4 (F3), and "1" is counted as the count value at the count notification timing T5. In this way, even if there is a short press after a long press, the counting process by the long press can be executed, and if the time of the short press straddles the count notification timing, the counting process by the short press can be executed. Even if the player performs a short press after a long press, it is possible to execute counting processing of long presses and short presses, and control can be executed in accordance with the player's operation intention.

At timing T3 in FIG. 42, since the count execution flag is set to 2 due to the long depression of the count switch P7, "50" is counted as the count value. Since the counting switch P7 continues to be pressed, the counting execution flag is once set to 0 after outputting "50" as the counting value to the lending unit side at the timing of T3, and in the next interrupt processing, the counting execution timer is turned on. Since it is "500", the count execution flag=2 again.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the counting process executed when the counting switch P7 is released by the player at the timing of short pressing and the counting switch P7 is pressed again before the next counting notification timing.

In FIG. 43, the counting switch P7 is pressed at the timing of S1, and the counting switch P7 is released at the timing of S2 after 50 ms has passed. is pressed, and the counting switch P7 is released at the timing of S4 before reaching T5 across T3 and T4. The counting execution flag becomes 1 at timing F1 50 ms after S1 (timing S2 when the counting switch P7 is released 50 ms after the counting switch P7 is pressed at timing S1), and the counting is notified after timing S2. The counting execution flag=1 is maintained at the timing of S3 prior to the timing of T3, and the counting execution flag is set to 0 at the timing of T3 (F2). At timing T4, 300 ms after T3, 500 ms has not passed since timing S3 when the counting switch P7 was pressed again, and the counting switch P7 is still pressed, so the count execution flag=0. It has become. In addition, the counting execution flag is set to 2 at timing F3, which is 500 ms after timing S3 when the counting switch P7 is pressed again, and since the counting switch P7 is separated from T4 to T5, F4 ( At the timing of T5), the count execution flag=0.

In FIG. 43, the counting switch P7 pressed in S1 is released at S2, which is the timing of short pressing, and the counting switch P7 is pressed again at the timing of S3, which is the time until T3, which is the next count notification timing. In this case, at the timing of T3, the counting process for the count value "1" of the short press is executed, but since the count execution timer starts counting from the timing of S3 before reaching T3, it counts at the timing of S4. Even if the switch P7 is separated, the counting process of "50" can be executed as the count value at the timing of T5. In this way, even if there is a long press after a short press, the counting process can be executed by the short press and the long press, and the counting execution timer for judging the long press is the long press timing of the pressing of the counting switch P7. Therefore, even if the player performs a long press after a short press, it is possible to execute the counting process of the long press and the short press. can be set to the timing S3 when the counting switch P7 is pressed, which is earlier than the timing F2 when the short-press counting process is executed.

Next, the effect during counting will be described.

As described above, when the counting switch P7 is operated and counting (when counting), by transmitting information based on the counting flag (_FL_CAL_EXE) to the main control board P15, the effect control board counts It is possible to produce a corresponding performance inside. Effects corresponding to the counting include effects using sounds and/or images.

In addition, as an effect corresponding to the counting, the length of the effect output according to the count point (referred to as one count point) counted by one operation (including long press operation etc.) of the count switch P7 can be different. In the case of such a configuration, since the length of the performance differs according to the amount of counting points based on the operation of the counting switch P7, it is possible to add joy to the act of counting the total points accumulated.

As described above, the maximum number of points that can be counted in one count notification (one cycle) is "50", and the cycle of outputting the count notification is about 0.3 seconds.

Below, the length of the effect due to the difference in the number of points counted by one operation of the count switch P7 (including a long press operation, etc.) will be exemplified.

Example 1) When the count point for one time is "25" Since the count point is greater than "0" and less than "50", an effect of about 0.3 seconds (0.3 seconds x 1) is uniformly executed. be. Note that the coefficient (here, x1) indicates the number of count notifications for counting all the count points. The same applies to the following.

Example 2) When the count point for one time is "50" Since the count point is "50", an effect of about 0.3 seconds (0.3 seconds x 1) is executed.

Example 3) When the count point for one time is "130" Since the count point is greater than "100" and less than "150", an effect of about 0.9 seconds (0.3 seconds x 3) is executed. Note that the coefficient (here, x3) indicates the number of count notifications for counting all the count points.

Example 4) When the count point for one time is "1480" Since the count point is greater than "1450" and equal to or less than "1500", an effect of about 9 seconds (0.3 seconds x 30) is executed. Note that the coefficient (here, x30) indicates the number of counting notifications for counting all the counting points.

Also, as an effect corresponding to the counting, it is possible to vary the type of effect output according to the number of points (total score) that can be counted by one operation of the counting switch P7. When configured in this manner, the type and/or length of the performance differs according to the amount of counting points based on the operation of the counting switch P7. becomes possible. In the case of such a configuration, for example, the information of the total score storage area (_NB_MEDAL) capable of storing the total score is transmitted to the main control means, and the number of points that can be counted by one operation of the counting switch P7 is calculated. (Total score) can be grasped by the main control board P15 and/or the performance control board.

For example, when the counting switch P7 is operated and counted when the total score is less than "500", the production A can be executed as a corresponding production during counting, and the total score is "500" or more. When the counting switch P7 is operated and counted when the total score is less than '1000', the performance B can be executed as a corresponding performance during counting, and when the total score is '1000' or more, the counting switch. When P7 is operated and counted, an effect C may be executed as a corresponding effect during counting.

Below, the difference in the number of points counted by one operation (including a long-pressing operation, etc.) of the counting switch P7 and the effect due to the difference in the total score will be exemplified.

Example 1) When the total score is "25" and the single counting point is "25" Since the total score is less than "500" and the counting point is greater than "0" and less than "50", it is uniformly 0 0. 3 seconds×1, which is about 0.3 seconds of the effect A is executed. Note that the coefficient (here, x1) indicates the number of count notifications for counting all the count points.

Example 2) When the total score is "300" and the single counting point is "50" Since the total score is less than "500" and the counting point is "50," A 0.3 second effect A is executed. Note that the coefficient (here, x1) indicates the number of count notifications for counting all the count points.

Example 3) When the total score is "300" and the single counting point is "150" Since the total score is less than "500" and the counting point is greater than "100" and less than or equal to "150", 0.3 Effect A for about 0.9 seconds, which is seconds×3, is executed. Note that the coefficient (here, x3) indicates the number of count notifications for counting all the count points.

Example 4) When the total score is "700" and the single counting point is "150" Because the total score is "500" or more and less than "1000" and the counting point is greater than "100" and less than "150" , 0.3 seconds×3, which is approximately 0.9 seconds of effect B is executed. Note that the coefficient (here, x3) indicates the number of count notifications for counting all the count points.

Example 5) When the total score is "700" and the single counting point is "700" Because the total score is "500" or more and less than "1000" and the counting point is greater than "650" and less than "700" , 0.3 seconds×14, about 4.2 seconds of effect B is executed. Note that the coefficient (here, x14) indicates the number of counting notifications for counting all the counting points.

Example 6) When the total score is "2000" and the single counting point is "700" Since the total score is "1000" or more and the counting point is greater than "650" and less than "700", 0.3 Effect C for about 4.2 seconds, which is seconds×14, is executed. Note that the coefficient (here, x14) indicates the number of counting notifications for counting all the counting points.

Example 7) When the total score is "2000" and the single counting point is "2000" Since the total score is "1000" or more and the counting point is greater than "1950" and less than "2000", 0.3 Effect C for about 12.0 seconds, which is seconds×40, is executed. Note that the coefficient (here, x40) indicates the number of count notifications for counting all the count points.

As described above, even if the count points are the same, the total score is different as in example 5) and example 6), so that the effects to be output can be controlled differently. In addition, even if the total score is the same, if the number of points for one round is different, the length of the effect to be output is controlled to be different even if the effect is the same as in example 6) and example 7). can do.

Here, if the player stops operating the count switch P7 while counting the total score (halfway through), the total score is not counted as in example 6). One count may end. In other words, the player can once again enjoy the performance during counting by temporarily stopping the operation of the counting switch P7 after enjoying the performance during counting halfway and then operating the counting switch P7 again.

In this embodiment, one switch is provided as the counting switch P7, and "50" is set as the maximum counting point by the counting notification, but another counting switch P7 is provided for counting the total score collectively. may

Further, in the present embodiment, the specification is such that counting is performed when the counting switch P7 is operated. You may count the total points for all

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the specification is such that counting is performed when the counting switch P7 is operated. It may be configured to count by a predetermined unit (for example, "50") when it is operated. Note that the predetermined unit is 50, but this is just an example. For example, if the count switch P7 is operated when the remaining total score is 38 points, "38" will be counted.

Here, in this embodiment, it is possible to perform counting based on the operation of the counting switch P7 even during the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. However, when the counting switch P7 is operated in a situation where points can be betted, an effect based on the operation of the counting switch P7 is executed during the setting change mode and/or during the setting confirmation mode. When the counting switch P7 is operated, the effect based on the operation of the counting switch P7 may not be executed. The reason for this configuration is that when the count switch P7 is operated during the setting change mode and/or during the setting confirmation mode, there is a high possibility that the hall clerk is counting (game (because it is highly likely that they are not

In other words, even if the counter switch P7 is operated during the setting change mode and/or the setting confirmation mode, the dedicated screen during the setting change mode and/or the setting confirmation mode is displayed on the image display device. By continuing to display with , or continuing to output voice, necessary information can be provided to the hall clerk. It should be noted that while displaying a screen dedicated to the setting change mode and/or the setting confirmation mode, a notification indicating that counting is in progress (for example, displaying "counting" on the screen) may be performed. This notification is configured to be different from the above-described effect during counting.

In addition, in the present embodiment, counting based on the operation of the counting switch P7 is possible even during errors (predetermined partial (predetermined) errors or all errors). . However, when the counting switch P7 is operated under the condition that the points can be betted, an effect based on the operation of the counting switch P7 is executed, and when the counting switch P7 is operated during an error, An effect based on the operation of the count switch P7 may not be executed. The reason for such a configuration is that if the count switch P7 is operated during an error, there is a high possibility of fraudulent activity.

In other words, even if the counting switch P7 is operated during an error, the hall clerk can be notified by continuing to display the dedicated screen during the error on the image display device or continuing to output the sound. Can provide necessary information. It should be noted that a notification indicating that counting is in progress (for example, displaying "counting in progress" on the screen) may be performed while displaying a dedicated screen for errors. This notification is configured to be different from the above-described effect during counting. It should be noted that, at this time, the bet number may not be settled by the settlement switch P6.

In addition, there are recoverable errors that can be recovered by operating the reset switch ("input request communication error", "settlement request communication error", "withdrawal request communication error", etc.) and those that cannot be recovered by operating the reset switch. Unrecoverable errors (recoverable by initialization processing such as setting change) are provided. Inside, it may be configured such that the counting process is disabled by operating the counting switch P7. According to such a configuration, recoverable errors that can occur in normal operation can be counted, and unrecoverable errors, which are more likely to be fraudulent than recoverable errors, cannot be counted. A fair game can be realized.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to count based on the operation of the counting switch P7 even during the game (for example, while the reels are rotating). However, when the counting switch P7 is operated in a situation where points can be betted, an effect based on the operation of the counting switch P7 is executed, and when the counting switch P7 is operated during the game, An effect based on the operation of the count switch P7 may not be executed. The reason why such a structure is adopted is that there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act is being carried out when the counting switch P7 is operated during a game.

In other words, even if the counting switch P7 is operated during an error, the hall clerk can be notified by continuing to display the dedicated screen during the error on the image display device or continuing to output the sound. Can provide necessary information. It should be noted that a notification indicating that counting is in progress (for example, displaying "counting in progress" on the screen) may be performed while displaying a dedicated screen for errors. This notification is configured to be different from the above-described effect during counting.

Even if the player can select the volume of the effect sound during the game from a plurality of levels by operating a switch (for example, a sub switch) during the game standby (under the situation where the game is not being executed). good. For example, it is configured to be selectable from five levels of volume 1 to volume 5, and is configured so that volume 1 is the lowest sound effect sound is output, volume 5 is the loudest sound effect sound is output. ing. When configured in this way, a specific effect sound (for example, a dialogue effect sound, BGM during a normal game, BGM during AT, BGM during BB, tenpai sound, etc.) has a volume corresponding to the selected effect sound. However, it is preferable that the effect sound output during counting be output at the same volume regardless of which one of volume 1 to volume 5 is selected. Specifically, even if the player counts by an illegal method after selecting the volume 1, the effect sound output during counting at a low volume is prevented from being output. A player who is trying to count by the method can be restrained. Also, even for ordinary players, the counting is a blissful time, so even when the volume is set to 1, the volume is the same as when other volume is set. By being output, it attracts the attention of players other than the player who is counting, and the player's interest in counting can be heightened.

In the present embodiment, the gaming machine P transmits the gaming machine information notification to the lending unit every 300 ms, but it is not limited to this, and can be transmitted at any timing within the range of 300 ms to 310 ms. good too. However, it does not take a random value every time it is sent, but a predetermined value is sent.

In the present embodiment, the gaming machine P transmits the counting notification to the lending unit 100 ms after transmitting the gaming machine information notification. You can send it in time. However, it does not take a random value every time it is sent, but a predetermined value is sent.

Next, game machine information management will be described with reference to FIG.
Game machine information management is control for transmitting game machine information notifications from the game machine P to the lending unit. FIG. be. In other words, the game machine information management is executed each time the timer interrupt process is executed (with a period of 1 ms).

First, various terms in FIG. 30 will be explained.

The gaming machine information notification timer A is a timer for measuring 300 ms. As a storage area (_TM_INF_CTL_A) for measuring the game machine information notification timer A, 2 bytes of the RWM area of the game medium number control board P16 are used. The storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A stores an initial value (“0”) by initialization processing when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine information notification timer B is a timer for measuring 60 seconds. As a storage area (_TM_INF_CTL_B) for counting the game machine information notification timer B, 1 byte of the RWM area of the game medium number control board P16 is used. The storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer B stores an initial value (“0”) by initialization processing when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine information notification timer C is a timer for measuring 180 seconds. As a storage area (_TM_INF_CTL_C) for measuring the game machine information notification timer C, 1 byte of the RWM area of the game medium number control board P16 is used. The storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer C stores an initial value (“0”) by initialization processing when the power is turned on.

The gaming machine performance information notification request flag is a flag that changes from “0” to “1” when a cycle for transmitting gaming machine performance information among gaming machine information notifications arrives. The storage area for storing the gaming machine performance information notification request flag uses the D0 bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL), which is a 1-byte storage area in the RWM area of the game medium number control board P16. .

The gaming machine installation information notification request flag is a flag that changes from "0" to "1" when the cycle of transmitting the gaming machine installation information among the gaming machine information notifications arrives. The storage area for storing the gaming machine installation information notification request flag uses the D1-th bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL), which is a 1-byte storage area in the RWM area of the game medium number control board P16. .

Note that the gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL) stores an initial value (“0”) (each bit becomes “0”) by initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Next, control processing in each step will be described with reference to FIG.

“Game machine information notification timer A-1” is an operation process for subtracting 1 from the storage area for measuring the game machine information notification timer A. FIG. In addition, if the arithmetic processing results in a carry (when the arithmetic processing for subtraction is executed while the game machine information notification timer A is "0" (also referred to as "less than "0")) By storing "300" in the game machine information notification timer A, the count value can be stored in the game machine information notification timer A.

As described above, since the cycle of the timer interruption of the game medium number control board P16 in this embodiment is 1 ms, by storing "300" as the count value in the game machine information notification timer A, the count of 300 ms can be reduced. Although it is possible, it is not limited to this, and if the timer interrupt period of the game medium number control board P16 is set to 2 ms, "150" may be stored as the count value in the game machine information notification timer A, If the timer interrupt period of the game medium number control board P16 is set to 2.235 ms, any value from "135" to "138" may be stored in the game machine information notification timer A as the count value. In this way, if it is not divisible, an arbitrary value can be set so that the gaming machine information notification transmission timing is between 300 ms and 310 ms.

Here, there is a case where the zero flag and the carry flag of the flag register (also called F register) provided in the CPU become "1" due to the "gaming machine information notification timer A-1". The zero flag is a flag that becomes "1" when the result of the arithmetic processing becomes "0". On the other hand, the carry flag is a flag that becomes "1" when the result of arithmetic processing is less than "0".

The zero flag and the carry flag will be described below using specific numerical values as examples.

Example 1) In gaming machine information management executed when "10" is stored in the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A, "9" is obtained by subtracting one. At this time, the zero flag and carry flag do not change (become "0").
Example 2) In gaming machine information management executed when "1" is stored in the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A, subtracting "1" results in "0". At this time, the zero flag becomes "1". On the other hand, the carry flag does not change (becomes "0").
Example 3) When "0" is stored in the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A, the result becomes "300" by subtracting 1. At this time, the zero flag does not change (becomes "0"). On the other hand, the carry flag becomes "1".

A DCPWLD instruction can be given as an operation instruction for the above-mentioned "gaming machine information notification timer A-1". The DCPWLD instruction is an instruction for storing a predetermined value when the carry flag becomes "1" as a result of subtraction by one. The predetermined value in the embodiment described above is "300".

Subsequently, "timer value before update = 0?" means that the value of the storage area for measuring game machine information notification timer A before executing "game machine information notification timer A -1" is "0". determine whether it was For example, when the carry flag is "1" after executing "game machine information notification timer A-1", the game machine information notification timer A before executing "game machine information notification timer A-1" is measured. It can be determined that the value of the storage area for the update was "0" (the result of the determination of "timer value before update=0?" is YES). On the other hand, when the carry flag is "0" after executing "game machine information notification timer A-1", the game machine information notification timer A before executing "game machine information notification timer A-1" is measured. Therefore, it can be determined that the value of the storage area for is not "0" (the result of the determination of "timer value before update=0?" is NO).

If the value of the storage area for measuring the game machine information notification timer A before executing the "game machine information notification timer A -1" is "0" ("timer value before update = 0?" If the result of the judgment is YES), the “transmission of hall control/unauthorized monitoring information” is executed. Note that YES in this step means that the gaming machine information management is executed in the first interrupt process after the power is turned on in the state where the power is turned off. This is because, as described above, the memory area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A is initialized by the initialization process when the power is turned on, and "0" is stored. Also, if the value before the update is "0", the carry flag is "1". 300" can be stored.

Furthermore, without executing the process of updating the game machine information notification timer B or the game machine information notification timer C, it is possible to immediately execute the "transmission of hall controller/fraud monitoring information" after the power is restored. This has the effect of shortening the time and reducing the program capacity. The reason why the game machine information notification timer B and the game machine information notification timer C are not updated when the power is turned on will be described later.

Subsequently, when the result of the determination of "timer value before update=0?" is NO, the determination of "timer value before update=1?" is executed.

"Timer value before update = 1?" means whether the value of the storage area for measuring the game machine information notification timer A before executing "game machine information notification timer A - 1" was "1". to judge whether

For example, when the zero flag after executing "game machine information notification timer A-1" is "1", to measure game machine information notification timer A before executing "game machine information notification timer A-1" was "1" (the result of the determination of "timer value before update=1?" is YES). If the result of the determination of "timer value before update=1?" is YES, "save gaming machine information notification timer A count value" is executed.

On the other hand, when the zero flag after executing the "game machine information notification timer A-1" is "0", the gaming machine information notification timer A before executing the "game machine information notification timer A-1" is measured. is not "1" (the result of the determination of "timer value before update=1?" is NO).

If the value of the storage area for measuring the game machine information notification timer A before executing "game machine information notification timer A - 1" is not "1" ("timer value before update = 1?" If the determination result is NO), the gaming machine information management is terminated. Note that the situation in which the value of the storage area for measuring the game machine information notification timer A before executing the "game machine information notification timer A - 1" is "1" means that the game machine information notification timer A is measured. This corresponds to a situation in which 300 interrupt processes have been executed (300 ms has elapsed).

In addition, the situation in which the value of the storage area for measuring the game machine information notification timer A before executing the "game machine information notification timer A - 1" was not "1" means that the game machine information notification timer A This corresponds to a situation where the value is "2" to "300" and that the gaming machine information notification timer A is counting. In addition, the value of the storage area for measuring the game machine information notification timer A before executing the "game machine information notification timer A - 1" is not "1", but "0" is also included. In the case of "0", since the determination was made in the previous process, the process does not proceed to this determination process.

Next, “storage of gaming machine information notification timer A count value” is a process of storing “300” in the storage area for counting gaming machine information notification timer A. FIG. By this process, "0" stored in the gaming machine information notification timer A can be updated to "300". As described above, in this embodiment, the "game machine information notification timer A -1" is executed using the DCPWLD instruction, so when the carry flag becomes "1", the game machine information notification timer A "300" is stored, but before the game machine information notification timer A becomes "0" (when it becomes "1") except immediately after the power is turned on, by "game machine information notification timer A count value save", Since "300" is stored, the game machine information notification timer A will not become "0" except immediately after the power is turned on (except for abnormalities), so the count value is stored in this process. I'm trying

Next, "response permission flag clear" is processing for clearing the value of the response permission flag storage area to zero. The response permission flag will be described later.

Next, "Communication error 1 flag clear" is processing for clearing the value of the communication error 1 flag storage area to zero. Communication error 1 means rental device communication error 1 .

Next, "if the rental notification reception counter is not equal to 1, set the communication abnormality 1 flag" is processing to set the value of the communication abnormality 1 flag storage area to 1 when the value of the rental notification reception counter storage area is not 1 (communication abnormality 1 (also referred to as processing related to). The rental notification reception counter will be described later.

Next, "clearing the lending notification reception counter" is a process of clearing the value of the lending notification reception counter storage area to zero. In other words, after the gaming machine information notification timer A is decremented by -1, the value of the lending notification reception counter is initialized, and 0 is stored as the initial value.

Next, “gaming machine information notification timer B +1” is an operation process using a special addition instruction to add 1 to the value in the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer B. FIG. In this arithmetic processing, when a value less than "199" is stored in the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer B, 1 is added to the value of the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer B. When a value less than "199" is not stored in the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer B (that is, when a value of "199" is stored under normal operating conditions) This is arithmetic processing for storing "0" as the value of the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer B. FIG. Specific examples are described below.

Example 1) When "0" is stored in the storage area for measuring game machine information notification timer B, if arithmetic processing using a special addition instruction to add 1 is performed, game machine information notification timer B is set to The value of the storage area for measurement is "1".
Example 2) When "100" is stored in the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer B, if arithmetic processing using a special addition instruction to add 1 is performed, the gaming machine information notification timer B is set to The value of the storage area for measurement is "101".
Example 3) When "199" is stored in the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer B, if arithmetic processing using a special addition instruction to add 1 is performed, the gaming machine information notification timer B is set to The value of the storage area for measurement becomes "0" instead of "200".

Thus, in the "gaming machine information notification timer B +1", when "199" is stored in the value of the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer B, a special addition instruction for adding 1 is used. When the calculation process described above is performed, by executing the addition process for storing "0", it is possible to circulate "0" to "199" as the value of the storage area for measuring the game machine information notification timer B. Further, the situation in which "1" is added when "199" is stored in the value of the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer B is the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A. This corresponds to a situation in which the opportunity for the area to become "0" has arrived 200 times. In other words, the gaming machine information notification timer B is incremented by 1 each time the interrupt process is executed 300 times, so the interrupt process is executed 300 times×200 times (=60000 times) (300 ms×200 times ( = 60000ms (60s) passed). Normally, a 3-byte storage area must be provided in order to measure whether interrupt processing has been executed 60,000 times. The storage area can be 1 byte, and the storage capacity of the RWM can be reduced.

Note that an ICPLD instruction can be given as an operation instruction for the above-described special addition instruction "gaming machine information notification timer B +1".

In this embodiment, an addition instruction such as "game machine information notification timer B +1" is used, but a subtraction instruction may be used. In the case of a subtraction command, "200" may be stored as a count value in the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer B when the power is turned on, and then it may become "0", or when the power is turned on. It is also possible to store "199" as a count value in the storage area for measuring the game machine information notification timer B, and then when the carry flag becomes "1".

In addition, in this embodiment, since an addition command such as "gaming machine information notification timer B +1" is used, processing for setting an initial value can be omitted compared to the case of a subtraction command (initialization processing when power is turned on). , the initial value becomes "0"), there is an effect of improving the processing speed and reducing the program capacity.

Next, for “Game machine information notification timer B time elapsed?”, YES is determined when the count number of game machine information notification timer B reaches 200 by “game machine information notification timer B +1”. For example, when the value in the storage area of the game machine information notification timer B becomes "0" by "game machine information notification timer B + 1" (when the addition instruction is executed 200 times from the initial value "0" ) can be determined as YES. On the other hand, if the value in the storage area of the game machine information notification timer B does not become "0" by "game machine information notification timer B + 1" (200 addition instructions have not been executed from the initial value "0"). case), it can be determined as NO.

If the determination result of "Game machine information notification timer B time elapsed?" is NO, "Game machine installation information notification request?" is executed.

When the determination result of "game machine information notification timer B time elapsed?" is YES, "game machine information notification timer C +1" is executed.

Next, “gaming machine information notification timer C +1” is arithmetic processing using a special addition instruction for adding 1 to the value in the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer C. In the arithmetic processing, when a value less than "2" is stored in the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer C, 1 is added to the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer C. , when a value less than "2" is not stored in the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer B (that is, when a value of "3" is stored under normal operating conditions), the gaming machine This is arithmetic processing for storing "0" in the storage area for measuring the information notification timer C. Specific examples are described below.

Example 1) When "0" is stored in the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer C, if arithmetic processing using a special addition instruction to add 1 is performed, the gaming machine information notification timer C is set to The value of the storage area for measurement is "1".
Example 2) When "1" is stored in the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer C, if arithmetic processing using a special addition instruction to add 1 is performed, the gaming machine information notification timer C is set to The value of the storage area for measurement is "2".
Example 3) When "2" is stored in the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer C, if arithmetic processing using a special addition instruction to add 1 is performed, the gaming machine information notification timer B is set to The value of the storage area for measurement becomes "0" instead of "3".

In this way, in the "gaming machine information notification timer C+1", when "2" is stored in the value of the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer C, addition processing for storing "0" is performed. By executing this, it is possible to circulate "0" to "2" as the value of the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer C. Further, the situation in which "1" is added when "2" is stored in the value of the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer C means that the memory for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer B This corresponds to a situation in which the opportunity for the area to become "0" has arrived three times. In other words, the gaming machine information notification timer B is incremented by 1 each time the interrupt process is executed 300 times, and the processing for adding 1 to the gaming machine information notification timer B has arrived three times. times x 3 times (= 180000 times) (300 ms x 200 times x 3 times (= 180000 ms (180 s)) has elapsed). Normally, a 3-byte storage area should be provided in order to measure whether interrupt processing has been executed 180,000 times. The storage area of the game machine information notification timer C can be set to 1 byte, and the storage capacity of the RWM can be reduced.

An ICPLD instruction similar to the operation instruction of the "game machine information notification timer B +1" can be given as an operation instruction of the "game machine information notification timer C +1" which is the special addition instruction described above.

In the present embodiment, an addition instruction such as "gaming machine information notification timer C+1" is used, but a subtraction instruction may be used. In the case of a subtraction command, "3" may be stored as a count value in a storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer C when the power is turned on, and then it may become "0", or when the power is turned on. It is also possible to store "2" as a count value in the storage area for measuring the game machine information notification timer B, and then when the carry flag becomes "1".

In addition, in the present embodiment, an addition instruction such as "game machine information notification timer C + 1" is used. , the initial value becomes "0"), there is an effect of improving the processing speed and reducing the program capacity.

Next, for “Game machine information notification timer C time elapsed?”, YES is determined when the count number of the game machine information notification timer C reaches 3 by “Game machine information notification timer C +1”. For example, when the value in the storage area of the game machine information notification timer C becomes "0" by "game machine information notification timer C + 1" (when the addition command is executed three times from the initial value "0" ) can be determined as YES. On the other hand, if the value in the storage area of the gaming machine information notification timer C does not become "0" by "gaming machine information notification timer C + 1" (the addition instruction has not been executed three times from the initial value "0"). case), it can be determined as NO.

If the determination result of "game machine information notification timer C time elapsed?" is NO, "set game machine installation information notification request flag" is executed.

If the determination result of "gaming machine information notification timer C elapsed?" is YES, "set gaming machine performance information notification request flag" is executed.

Next, “set gaming machine performance information notification request flag” is control to store “1” in the D0th bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL). As described in the flow chart of FIG. 30, "game machine performance information notification request flag set" is executed when "game machine information notification timer C time elapsed?" becomes YES. In other words, when the cycle of 180 seconds arrives, the "gaming machine performance information notification request flag set" is executed.

Next, the “game machine installation information notification request flag set” is control to store “1” in the D1-th bit of the game machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL). As described in the flowchart of FIG. 30, the "game machine installation information notification request flag set" is executed when "game machine information notification timer C time elapsed?" This is when the game machine performance information notification request flag setting" is executed (when the question "game machine information notification timer C time elapsed?" becomes YES). In other words, when the period of 60 seconds arrives, the "game machine installation information notification request flag set" is executed. Therefore, in the case of the period of 180 seconds, which is three times the period of 60 seconds, the control of both the "game machine performance information notification request flag set" and the "game machine installation information notification request flag set" is executed. Become.

In this way, in order to manage the timing of transmitting the gaming machine installation information to the rental unit and the timing of transmitting the gaming machine performance information to the rental unit with flags, hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine It is possible to simplify the process of transmitting the performance information to the rental unit (by interlocking the timers corresponding to various types of information, it is possible to transmit to the rental unit without managing them individually). Further, by not updating the game machine information notification timer B and the game machine information notification timer C when the power is turned on, hall controller/fraud monitoring information, game machine installation information, and game machine performance information are transmitted. Since the measurement start timing of the timer for this purpose does not deviate, accurate transmission is possible. In other words, by updating only the gaming machine information notification timer A when the power is turned on, the timing of transmitting the linked gaming machine information notification timer B and the gaming machine information notification timer C to the lending unit can be adjusted without complicated processing. It is possible to prevent deviation.

Next, "change in main control state?" compares the current main control state with the main control state after the hall controller fraud monitoring information is transmitted, and determines whether or not there has been a change in the main control state. processing. This is the processing for determining the priority of the above-mentioned hall controller/unauthorized monitoring information.

Next, "insertion information ≠ 0 or payout information ≠ 0?"

Next, "Game machine installation information notification request?" is control for determining whether or not the game machine installation information notification request flag is set. For example, if the D1 bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL) is "1", the determination is YES, and if the D1 bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL) is "0", the determination is NO. do.

If the determination result of "game machine installation information notification request?" is NO, "game machine performance information notification request?" is executed.

If the result of the determination of "game machine installation information notification request?" is YES, "game machine installation information transmission" is executed.

Next, "game machine performance information notification request?" is control for determining whether or not the gaming machine performance information notification request flag is set. For example, if the D0 bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL) is "1", the determination is YES, and if the D0 bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL) is "0", the determination is NO. do.

If the judgment result of "Game machine performance information notification request?"

If the result of the determination of "game machine performance information notification request?" is YES, "game machine performance information transmission" is executed.

Incidentally, as described in the flowchart of FIG. 30, the processing order is such that "game machine installation information notification request?" is determined, and then "game machine performance information notification request?" is determined. By adopting such a processing order, in a situation where both the gaming machine installation information notification request flag and the gaming machine performance information notification request flag are set (for example, in a situation where the 180 second cycle has arrived), " Gaming machine installation information notification request?", the transmission control of the gaming machine installation information can be executed prior to the transmission control of the gaming machine performance information. Further, by simply judging the gaming machine installation information notification request before judging the gaming machine performance information notification request, it is possible to perform communication according to the priority without using complicated processing.

Next, "transmission of whole control/unauthorized monitoring information" corresponds to control processing for transmitting the above-described "whole control/unauthorized monitoring information" to the lending unit. The content transmitted to the lending unit at this time is the information stored in the storage area of the RWM acquired at the timing of transmission. For example, as for the total score included in the "hall control/fraud monitoring information", the information stored in the total score storage area (_NB_MEDAL) at the time of transmission is transmitted. In other words, if the transmission timing of every 300 ms, which is the original transmission timing of hall control/fraud monitoring information, coincides with the transmission timing of gaming machine installation information, the gaming machine installation information has a higher priority. At the timing, the hole check/fraud monitoring information is not transmitted, and the hole check/fraud monitoring information is transmitted after the next 300 ms. Regarding this "hall control/fraud monitoring information to be sent after the next 300 ms", instead of transmitting the hall control/fraud monitoring information at the time when the transmission timing of the game machine installation information matches,・By transmitting the hole control and fraud monitoring information acquired at the timing of transmitting fraud monitoring information, it is possible to transmit the latest information even if the transmission timing is off.

Also, the serial number is updated (+1) after the processing for transmitting the "hall controller/fraud monitoring information" to the lending unit is completed. As with the count serial number, the serial number will be "0" when it is sent immediately after the power is restored, and after that, any one of "1" to "255" can be sent ("1" to " 255"). This serial number is a serial number that is updated when any one of the three pieces of information of hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information is transmitted. In other words, since the same serial number is used for hall controller/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information, the serial number is updated at intervals of 300 ms when the power is on. It is configured.

When the "transmission of hole control/illegal monitoring information" is completed, the gaming machine information management is completed.

Next, the “game machine installation information transmission” corresponds to the control process of transmitting the above-mentioned “game machine installation information” to the rental unit. The content to be transmitted at this time is the information stored in the storage area of the RWM acquired at the timing of transmission.

Also, after the processing for transmitting the "gaming machine installation information" to the rented unit is completed, the gaming machine installation information notification request flag is cleared. Specifically, the D1 bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL) is set to "0". Also, after the processing for transmitting the "gaming machine installation information" to the rental unit is completed, the serial number is updated (+1).

When the "game machine installation information transmission" is completed, the game machine information management is terminated.

Next, the “gaming machine performance information transmission” corresponds to the control process of transmitting the aforementioned “gaming machine performance information” to the lending unit. The content to be transmitted at this time is the information stored in the storage area of the RWM acquired at the timing of transmission. In other words, when the transmission timing of each 180 seconds, which is the original transmission timing of the gaming machine performance information, coincides with the transmission timing of the gaming machine installation information, the gaming machine installation information has a higher priority. The gaming machine performance information is not sent, and the gaming machine performance information is sent after the next 300ms. Regarding this "gaming machine performance information to be sent after the next 300ms", instead of sending the gaming machine performance information at the time when the timing of sending the gaming machine installation information matches, "gaming machine performance information will be sent after the next 300ms" By transmitting the gaming machine performance information acquired at the timing of transmission, it is possible to transmit the latest information even if the transmission timing is off.

Also, after the processing for transmitting the "gaming machine performance information" to the lending unit is completed, the gaming machine performance information notification request flag is cleared. Specifically, the D0 bit of the gaming machine information notification request flag (_FL_INF_CTL) is set to "0". Also, after the processing for transmitting the "gaming machine performance information" to the rental unit is completed, the serial number is updated (+1).

When the "game machine performance information transmission" is completed, the game machine information management is completed.

As described above, the gaming machine information notification is configured to be transmitted to the lending unit every 300 ms. In addition, the blink switching timing of the role ratio monitor is also switched every 300 ms. However, while the timer update processing that measures 300 ms for transmitting the game machine information notification uses the carry flag and the zero flag to transmit to the lending unit, The timer update process for measuring 300 ms is switched using only the carry flag.

This is because the gaming machine information notification causes more damage if it is fraudulently, so two kinds of flags are used for management in order to improve the accuracy of the information to be transmitted.

Next, the transmission timing of the game machine information notification (any one of hall control/illegal monitoring information, game machine installation information, and game machine performance information) after the power of the game machine P is turned on will be described based on FIG. to explain.

FIG. 31 shows the transmission timing of the game machine information notification from the game medium number control board P16 to the lending unit after the power of the game machine P is turned on. "Timer B" indicates "game machine information notification timer B"; "Timer C" indicates "game machine information notification timer C"; "After activation" indicates "the first interrupt process in the game medium number control board P16", and "after 1 ms" indicates "the next interrupt process". Further, "timer A=0" indicates that the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A (timer value) is zero. Also, the timer value indicates the timer value at the start of interrupt processing, and is a value that has not been updated. In other words, it is the value updated in the previous interrupt processing.

As described above, the game machine information notification timer A, the game machine information notification timer B, and the game machine information notification timer C are initialized at the time of initial start-up, so that the respective timer values are "0". Then, since the timer value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is "0" (the timer value before subtraction is 0), hall controller/fraud monitoring information is transmitted as the first gaming machine information notification. Although the game machine installation information and the game machine performance information also have a timer value of "0", since the zero flag is "0" here, the game machine installation information and the game machine performance information are not transmitted.

Next, the timing of transmitting the second hall control/unauthorized monitoring information will be described with reference to FIG. Note that wording appearing in FIG. 32 is the same as that in FIG. 31, so description thereof will be omitted.

The timing of the second hall control/fraud monitoring information transmission is when the timer value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is "1". When the timer value of the game machine information notification timer A is "1" (the timer value before subtraction is 1), it becomes "0" by the subtraction processing, and as a result, the zero flag becomes "1", and hall control/illegal monitoring information is transmitted, and "300" is stored as the timer value of the gaming machine information notification timer A. Further, the timer value of the game machine information notification timer A changes from "1" to "0", and the timer value of the game machine information notification timer B becomes "1".

Next, the transmission timing of the game machine information notification when the transmission timing of the hall control/fraud monitoring information and the game machine installation information match will be described with reference to FIG. Note that wording appearing in FIG. 33 is the same as in FIGS. 31 and 32, so description thereof will be omitted.

The timing for sending hall control/fraud monitoring information is when the timer value of game machine information notification timer A changes from "1" to "0" and "300" is stored. When the timer value changes from "199" to "0", the gaming machine installation information notification request flag becomes "1". For this reason, in the interrupt processing when the transmission timing of hall control/fraud monitoring information and gaming machine installation information occurs at the same time, the gaming machine installation information notification request flag is set to "1". Information is sent, but hole control/fraud monitoring information is not sent. Then, in the next interrupt process, the gaming machine installation information notification request flag is "0", but the timer value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is "300", so the zero flag is "0". , and hole control/fraud monitoring information will not be sent.

In other words, when the transmission timings of the hall control/fraud monitoring information and the game machine installation information match, the transmission of the game machine installation information has a higher priority, so the hall control/fraud monitoring information is not transmitted. Until the timer value of the information notification timer A changes from "1" to "0" and "300" is stored (until the next 300 ms elapses), the hall control/fraud monitoring information will not be transmitted. Further, the timer value of the gaming machine information notification timer A changes from "1" to "0", the timer value of the gaming machine information notification timer B changes from "199" to "0", and the gaming machine information notification timer C changes from "199" to "0". The timer value changes from "0" to "1".

In addition, since the transmission timing of the hall control/fraud monitoring information and the game machine installation information match, even if the transmission of the hall control/fraud monitoring information is 300 ms later, the timer for the game machine information notification timer A Since the value is continuously updated, even if the hall control/fraud monitoring information is not sent once, the transmission timing of the hall controller/fraud monitoring information, game machine installation information, and game machine performance information will not be delayed. .

Also, if the transmission timing of the hall control/fraud monitoring information and the game machine installation information match, and the transmission of the hall controller/fraud monitoring information is delayed by 300 ms, the hall controller/fraud monitoring information will be sent after the next 300 ms. is acquired at the timing of transmission, so information 300 ms before is not transmitted. As a result, old information will not be transmitted even if the transmission timing of the hall control/unauthorized monitoring information is shifted.

Next, the transmission timing of the gaming machine information notification when the transmission timings of the hall controller/fraud monitoring information, the gaming machine installation information, and the gaming machine performance information match, will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the wording appearing in FIG. 34 is the same as in FIGS. 31 to 33, so description thereof will be omitted.

The timing for sending hall control/fraud monitoring information is when the timer value of game machine information notification timer A changes from "1" to "0" and "300" is stored. When the timer value changes from "199" to "0" and the timer value of the gaming machine information notification timer C changes from "2" to "0", the gaming machine installation information notification request flag becomes "1" and the game is played. The machine performance information notification request flag becomes "1". For this reason, in interrupt processing when the transmission timings of hall control/fraud monitoring information, game machine installation information, and game machine performance information occur at the same time, the game machine installation information notification request flag is set to "1". Therefore, the gaming machine installation information is transmitted, and the hall controller/fraud monitoring information and gaming machine performance information are not transmitted. Then, in the next interrupt process, the gaming machine installation information notification request flag is "0" and the gaming machine performance information notification request flag is "1", but the timer value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is "300", the zero flag is "0", and the hole controller/fraud monitoring information is not transmitted. Not sent. However, the gaming machine performance information notification request flag is stored as "1".

In other words, when the transmission timing of hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information match, the transmission of gaming machine installation information has a higher priority, so the hall control/fraud monitoring information and gaming machine performance No information is transmitted, and next time the timer value of the gaming machine information notification timer A changes from "1" to "0" and "300" is stored, the gaming machine performance information notification request flag is "1". Based on this, the gaming machine performance information is transmitted preferentially over hall control/fraud monitoring information. Since the gaming machine performance information notification request flag becomes "0" after the gaming machine performance information is transmitted, the timer value of the gaming machine information notification timer A changes from "1" to "0" and becomes "300". When it is stored (when 300 ms elapse next), the hall control/fraud monitoring information is transmitted.

In addition, since the transmission timing of hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information match, the transmission of gaming machine performance information is 300 ms later, and the transmission of hall controller/fraud monitoring information is 600 ms later. Even if this occurs, the timer value of the gaming machine information notification timer A continues to be updated. The transmission timing of machine installation information and game machine performance information is not shifted.

In addition, since the transmission timing of hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, and gaming machine performance information coincides, the gaming machine installation information is transmitted at that timing, and then the gaming machine performance information is transmitted 300 ms later. , if hall control/fraud monitoring information is transmitted after 600 ms, the gaming machine performance information is transmitted 300 ms after the gaming machine installation information is transmitted. timing) is not transmitted. In addition, hall control/fraud monitoring information, which is sent 300 ms after the game machine performance information is sent, is acquired at the time of transmission, so information 600 ms before (the timing when the game machine installation information is sent) is not sent. . As a result, even if the transmission timings of hall control/fraud monitoring information and gaming machine performance information are not synchronized, old information will not be transmitted.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the request flag of the gaming machine performance information transmitted every 180 seconds always becomes 1 at the same timing as the gaming machine installation information transmitted every 60 seconds. In other words, at the timing when the gaming machine performance information notification request flag becomes 1, the gaming machine installation information notification request flag always becomes 1. Therefore, the gaming machine performance information cannot be transmitted at the timing when the gaming machine performance information notification request flag becomes 1, and is transmitted after the next 300 ms. However, even in this case, since the timing when the gaming machine performance information notification request flag becomes 1 is 180 seconds after the gaming machine performance information notification request flag becomes 1, the gaming machine performance information is periodically updated. It is possible to send.

In addition, the storage areas for storing the game machine information notification timer A, game machine information notification timer B, and game machine information notification timer C managed by the game medium number control board P16 are initialized by power-off (initialization by power-on processing). ), but the timer that measures the wait time (4.1 seconds, also called the minimum game time) managed by the main control board P15 is saved when the power is turned off and is not initialized when the power is turned on. After the input, it is configured to start the measurement from the continuation. By adopting such a configuration, various game machine information notification timers for transmitting game machine information notifications to the lending unit can be reset after the power is turned on, and periodic communication becomes possible.

In addition, the storage areas for storing the game machine information notification timer A, game machine information notification timer B, and game machine information notification timer C managed by the game medium number control board P16 are initialized by power-off (initialization by power-on processing). ), but the timer that measures the freeze time (also called reel performance time) managed by the main control board P15 is saved even when the power is turned off and is not initialized when the power is turned on, so that the freeze after power is turned on. It is configured to measure the time from the continuation. By adopting such a configuration, various game machine information notification timers for transmitting game machine information notifications to the lending unit can be reset after the power is turned on, and periodic communication becomes possible.

<Description on operation check mode applicable in this embodiment>
Since the game machine in this embodiment is prohibited from performing a game operation unless it communicates with the rented unit, it is necessary to install a dummy unit instead of the rented unit when it is desired to check the operation of the game machine alone. Dummy units can communicate with gaming machines in the same way as rental units. must be very strict. For this reason, in order for the second-hand dealer to check the operation of the second-hand gaming machine, it is necessary to borrow a dummy unit from the gaming machine maker, and it takes time to check the operation.

Therefore, in order to check the operation of the game machine by itself, the game machine is equipped with an operation confirmation mode in which the game machine can operate without being connected to the lending unit or the dummy unit. Since this operation confirmation mode is a mode for confirming whether or not the game machine operates normally, it is configured such that game media are not inserted or paid out.

It is desirable to configure the operation confirmation mode so that the player cannot easily execute it. For this reason, the input port for a predetermined switch is read during power-on processing, and the operation confirmation mode is activated when it is determined that the operation of the predetermined switch is detected during power-on processing. As a predetermined switch, any one of 1 bet switch, MAX bet switch, start switch, left stop switch, middle stop switch, right stop switch, settlement switch P6, reset switch, counting switch P7, setting key switch, or A combination of two or more is conceivable. As a combination of two or more, for example, turning on the setting key switch while the power is off and pressing the counter switch P7 while turning on the power is conceivable. Alternatively, a dedicated switch that cannot be operated unless the front door is opened may be provided, and the operation check mode may be activated by turning on the power while operating the dedicated switch.

The operation confirmation mode is a mode that allows a game to be played even with a single gaming machine, but it is possible to activate the operation confirmation mode even if it is connected to a rental unit. For this reason, it is assumed that the rental unit and the gaming machine P are connected or not connected during the operation confirmation mode, so communication with the rental unit is executed in the same manner as in the normal operation during the operation confirmation mode. do. For example, it executes the reception of a rental notification and the transmission of a rental reception result response.

When the operation check mode is activated, the display of the five segment display portions of the game medium number display portion P9 is displayed as "-----". Furthermore, in the operation confirmation mode, every game, 3 points are automatically put in, and the operation of the start switch becomes effective. Also, in order to make it easier to recognize that it is in the operation confirmation mode, a part of the image may be displayed as "in operation confirmation mode". The display "in operation check mode" is always displayed in the same size even if the effect is switched due to the effect lottery or the transition to the demo screen.

When the start switch is operated in the operation confirmation mode, the game progress program such as the same lottery processing as the normal game operation (for example, the main control board P15 for internal lottery processing, reel control processing, effect lottery processing, command transmission processing By operating the game machine using the game medium number control board P16 and the program executed by the sub control board P12, it is possible to check whether the game machine is normal. However, the payout process is not executed, and only the given number is displayed on the given number display section, and the display of the game medium number display section P9 is not updated. In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that does not have a given number display unit, the given number is displayed on the liquid crystal display during the operation confirmation mode, since the given number is displayed on the liquid crystal. Also, since the minimum game time is measured even in the operation confirmation mode, if the start switch is operated before the minimum game time elapses, the rotation of the reels waits until the minimum game time elapses.

Further, in the operation confirmation mode, the communication processing between the game machine and the rental unit may not be executed. By configuring in this way, the abnormality determination process based on the communication process performed between the gaming machine and the rental unit is not executed.

In addition, in the operation confirmation mode, a predetermined set value (for example, "1" at which the payout rate is the lowest or "6" at which the payout rate is the highest) is set in advance as a set value related to the player's advantage. The gaming machine may be configured to operate, or may be configured to operate after setting an arbitrary set value. Furthermore, during the operation check mode, the set value may be displayed on the set value display by operating the setting key switch, or the set value may be displayed on the set value display regardless of the operation of the setting key switch. It may be configured so that the setting value can be displayed, or it may be configured so that the setting value display does not display the setting value even when the setting key switch is operated.

In addition, in the operation confirmation mode, the presentation by the display device such as the liquid crystal, the lighting mode of the frame lamp, the voice output from the speaker, etc. are performed as usual. For this reason, when the game is played for a long time in the operation confirmation mode, it is possible to easily confirm an effect with a low appearance rate (so-called premium effect) in the operation confirmation mode, and the confirmed premium effect is uploaded on the web as a video or image. Therefore, when the game is executed a predetermined number of times in the operation confirmation mode, the operation confirmation mode is automatically terminated (in other words, the operation confirmation mode A predetermined number of times is set as the upper limit of the number of games that can be executed, and after reaching the predetermined number of times, the game in the operation confirmation mode can not be played). The predetermined number of times may be, for example, 1 time, 10 times, 20 times, or the like. When a predetermined number of games have been played during the operation confirmation mode, the operation confirmation mode may be ended and the subsequent normal game may be prohibited. In order to make the normal game executable from the state in which the normal game is prohibited, operations such as turning on the power again and shifting to the setting change mode (turning on the power switch while the setting key switch is on) are included. . It should be noted that, when the conditions for starting the operation check mode are satisfied from the state in which the normal game is prohibited, the operation check mode is started again.

Also, if you want to end the operation check mode arbitrarily, turn off the power during the operation check mode (execute the operation check mode end processing during the power off processing) or turn off the power during the operation check mode. It is desirable to end with a normal operation such as turning on the power (executing the operation confirmation mode ending process during the power-on process). This is because the situations where the operation check mode is required are limited to situations such as when moving used equipment, so even if the operation check mode is accidentally activated while changing settings at amusement arcades, etc., the power may be turned off. This is because the possibility of entering the operation check mode during business hours is reduced by immediately terminating the normal operation such as. The method of arbitrarily ending the operation check mode is not limited to turning off the power during the operation check mode, but by the operation of shifting to the setting change mode (turning on the power switch while the setting key switch is on). The operation check mode may be ended in the initialization process accompanying the setting change process that is executed.

Also, in the operation check mode, if the power is turned off while the reel is rotating, the operation check mode can be terminated without re-rotating the reel when the power is turned on, or the reel can be restarted when the power is turned on. It is conceivable that the action confirmation mode is terminated after the game is completed by rotating the terminal. Although the description has been given while the reels are rotating, the same operation is performed when the power supply is interrupted between the operation of the start switch and the end of the game.

Further, when ending the operation mode, a process of initializing the RWM used in the operation mode is performed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game in the operation mode from being handed over to the normal game. However, the RWM required for signal output to the lending unit is not initialized. In addition, when the operation mode is terminated and the normal game is started, an operation to shift to the setting change mode (the power switch is turned on while the setting key switch is ON) is required. If the specification is such that the used RWM is initialized, the RWM used in the operation mode does not need to be initialized when the operation mode ends.

In addition, the above-described example is such that, during the operation check mode, the production by the display device such as the liquid crystal, the lighting mode of the frame lamp, the voice output from the speaker, etc. are executed as usual, but this is not the only option. No effect by the device is executed (the display of "in operation check mode" is continuously displayed on a black background), the lighting mode of the frame lamp is set to non-lighting or a dedicated lighting mode, and the sound is not output from the speaker. , or a mode in which dedicated BGM or voice is output. Since it is enough to determine whether the operation of the main control board P15 and the game medium number control board P16 is normal or not, it is sufficient to check the operation of the sub control board P16. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a game is erroneously played in the operation confirmation mode or a premium effect appears during the operation confirmation mode.

Also, the result of a game played during the operation confirmation mode is configured not to affect the normal game mode after the operation confirmation mode is finished. For example, even if you win the AT lottery in the game played during the operation confirmation mode and end the operation confirmation mode in a situation where you have obtained the right to AT, the normal game mode after ending the operation confirmation mode is configured to start a game without the right of the AT.

Also, during the operation confirmation mode, the role ratio monitor is configured to display a test pattern. By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine whether or not the operation confirmation mode is in progress by the display of the role ratio monitor. In the operation check mode, the test pattern may be displayed for 5 seconds after the power is turned on. Various ratios may be displayed on the role ratio monitor without displaying the test pattern at the time of input.

Also, the result of a game played during the action confirmation mode is configured so as not to affect the ratio of various items displayed on the role ratio monitor. For example, based on the game played during the operation confirmation mode, each storage area for calculating the ratio of various items displayed on the role ratio monitor (total number of games played, total number of grants, etc.) is not updated. Configure. By configuring in this way, it is possible to display various ratios showing behavior in the actual market on the role ratio monitor.

<Determination order of abnormality>
A description will be given of determination of abnormality in command communication between the main control board P15 and the number-of-game-media control board P16.

Commands that can be transmitted from the main control board P15 to the game media number control board P16 include an insertion request command, a settlement request command, a payout request command, and the like.

As described above, if the insertion point received when the game media number control board P16 receives the insertion request command is a value other than 1 to 3, after transmitting the medal number control reception abnormality command to the main control board P15 It is configured to confirm whether or not there is a VL abnormality (VL signal OFF). This is to preferentially execute processing relating to the total score, which is the most important information in the gaming machine according to this embodiment. If the order is to determine the command abnormality after determining the VL abnormality, even if there is an abnormality in the command communication between the main control board P15 and the game medium number control board P16 in the case of the VL abnormality, the determination is made. I can't. This is because the betting process for invalidating the betting operation is not executed when it is determined that the VL is abnormal.

The reason why the number-of-game-media control board P16 is configured to check the data of the second control command and then check for VL abnormality when receiving the settlement request command or payout request command is the same as for the insertion request command. be.

In order to prevent such a situation, it is confirmed whether or not there is an abnormality in command reception from the main control board P15 before determining whether or not there is a VL abnormality.

In addition, when all commands transmitted from the main control board P15 are received, regardless of the example described above, it is determined whether or not the command contents are normal before determining whether or not the VL is abnormal.

<Timer measurement of basic communication sequence>
As described in FIG. 20, the gaming machine information notification is output from the gaming machine to the lending unit every 300ms. Also, the count notification is output from the gaming machine to the lending unit 100 ms after the game information notification is output. Also, the rental notification is output from the rental unit to the gaming machine within 170 ms after outputting the counting notification. Also, the lending receipt result response is output from the gaming machine to the lending unit within 10 ms after receiving the lending notification. In this way, it is necessary to output and receive information at prescribed timings. For this reason, it is possible to provide a plurality of timers to measure the timing of transmission and reception of information, but in order to reduce the capacity of RWM, one timer is used to measure the timing of transmission and reception of information. method can be adopted. An example using a storage area (_TM_INF_CTL_A) for measuring gaming machine information notification timer A (a timer for measuring 300 ms) will be described below.

<Game machine information notification timer A>
As described above, the value of the storage area for measuring the game machine information notification timer A is decremented by one each time the game medium number control board P16 timer interrupt processing is performed. For example, when the value of the storage area for measuring the game machine information notification timer A is "300", it is "299", and when the value of the storage area for measuring the game machine information notification timer A is "1", it is "300" ” (when it becomes 0, “300” is stored). In other words, except immediately after power-on, in principle, it is configured to circulate from 300 to 1 (0 immediately after power-on). Further, when the value of the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A is "300", the processing for outputting the gaming machine information notification is executed.

<Notification of counting>
When the value of the storage area for counting the gaming machine information notification timer A is "200", the processing for outputting the count notification is executed. In other words, when the value of the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A is "200", it means that 100 ms have elapsed since the gaming machine information notification was notified.

<Rental Notice>
If the value of the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A is greater than "200" when the rental notification is received, or if the value of the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A is "30" is smaller than , it is judged to be abnormal. In other words, when the value of the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A is greater than "200", it is the timing before 100 ms has passed since the gaming machine information notification was notified. In other words, it means the timing before executing the processing for outputting the count notification. Further, when the value of the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A is smaller than "30", it is the timing after 270 ms have passed since the gaming machine information notification was notified. In other words, it means the timing after 170 ms has passed after executing the processing for outputting the count notification. If it is determined that there is an abnormality based on the value of the storage area for storing the gaming machine information notification timer A, processing for determining whether or not the checksum is normal based on the received rental notification, Processing to determine whether or not the lending serial number is normal based on the notification, processing to add the lending score to the total score based on the received lending notice, and outputting the basic lending receipt result response corresponding to the received lending notice Do not perform any processing for

<Rental Receipt Result Response>
When the rental notification is received, the value of the storage area for measuring the gaming machine information notification timer A is "200" or less and "30" or more (when the rental notification is received, the gaming machine information notification timer A is not determined to be abnormal based on the value of the storage area for storing), processing for outputting a lending receipt response is performed in the interrupt processing in which the lending notification is received. Incidentally, as described above, when it is determined that there is an abnormality based on the value of the storage area for storing the game machine information notification timer A, the process of determining whether the checksum is normal based on the received rental notification , processing to determine whether or not the lending serial number is normal based on the received lending notice, processing to add the lending score to the total score based on the received lending notice, and lending receipt result response corresponding to the received lending notice Do not perform processing to output . In other words, no response indicating abnormality is made as a loan receipt result response. In other words, if the gaming machine receives the lending notification at a timing other than the timing based on the basic communication sequence, there is a possibility that the received lending notification is an unauthorized lending notification. It is configured not to output to

<Lighting control of each LED>
The state display lamps 1 to 5, each segment display portion of the game medium number display portion P9, and each segment display portion of the role ratio monitor are subjected to dynamic lighting control.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the LED display counter takes five different values (01h, 02h, 04h, 08h, 10h), so that it is lit up every five interrupts. When the LED display counter value is 01h, LED digit A corresponds, when the LED display counter value is 02h, LED digit B corresponds, and when the LED display counter value is 04h, LED digit A corresponds. C corresponds, LED digit D corresponds when the LED display counter value is 08h, and LED digit E corresponds when the LED display counter value is 10h.

The LEDs controlled by the LED digit A are the first digit LED of the game media number display section P9, the LED of the status display lamp 1, and the fourth digit LED of the role ratio monitor. The second-digit LED of the game media number display portion P9, the LED of the status display lamp 2, and the third-digit LED of the role ratio monitor. The LED of the eyes, the LED of the status display lamp 3, and the second-digit LED of the role ratio monitor. The LED, which is the first digit LED of the role ratio monitor and is controlled by the LED digit E, is the fifth digit LED of the game medium number display portion P9 and the LED of the status display lamp 5 .

<Performance during rental>
Normal reception when the game machine P receives a lending notification of information including a predetermined number (for example, an arbitrary number other than 0, such as 47 points) as a lending point by operating a lending button provided in the lending unit. If the total score after addition does not exceed 15,000 points, the total score is updated by adding the lending points to the total score, and then the gaming machine P transmits a lending reception result response to the lending unit. It's becoming

When the lending process is executed and the lending points are added to the total score, the gaming machine P is configured to output an effect sound (sometimes referred to as a lending sound) for a predetermined period of time. Examples of the lending sound include a sound effect such as "picon" and a voice such as "rented out".

Concretely, it will be described based on the flow chart regarding the lending process in FIG. 49 .

<Get received data>
Acquire the data of the lending notification transmitted by operating the lending button of the lending unit. The acquired reception data is stored in the rental notification reception buffers (five storage areas of rental notification reception buffers 1 to 5). Since the lending notice has a message length of 5 bytes, all the lending notice data is acquired by executing the reception data acquisition process and the lending notice reception buffer saving process five times.

<Rental notification normal reception? ＞
It is determined whether the data indicating the message length of the received rental notification is "0x05" and the data indicating the command is "0x13". In this determination process, if the data indicating the message length is not "0x05" or the data indicating the command is not "0x13", it is determined that the lending notice could not be received normally, and the lending notice receiving buffer (lending notice receiving buffer 1 to 5) are cleared.

<Communication error 2 to 6 check>
This is a process of executing a check for communication anomalies 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 and storing a communication anomaly flag. The communication error flag is 1 byte. If the D0 bit is 1, it indicates communication error 1; if the D1 bit is 1, it indicates communication error 2; if the D2 bit is 1, it indicates communication error 3; 1 indicates communication error 4; if the D4 bit is 1, indicates communication error 5; if the D5 bit is 1, indicates communication error 6; A specific description will be given based on the flow chart of FIG.

<<Communication error flag initial value set>>
A process of storing 0 in the A register as the initial value of the communication error flag is executed.

<<Rental notification reception counter +1 (maximum value 2)>>
Execute processing to add 1 to the value of the rental notification reception counter. Here, if the result of adding 1 by a special addition instruction (one instruction) exceeds 2, it is corrected to 2. Therefore, when the value of the lending notification reception counter exceeds 255 and becomes 0 again due to fraud, the value of the lending notification reception counter becomes 1 when the processing for increasing the value of the lending notification reception counter by 1 is executed. can be prevented.

<<Rental notification reception counter ≠ 1? >><<Communication error 2 flag set>>
Determine whether the value of the rental notification reception counter is not 1. If the value of the rental notification reception counter is not 1, set the communication error 2 flag (set the D1 bit of the communication error flag to 1) (communication (Also referred to as processing for anomaly 2).

Here, the lending notification reception counter is initialized to 0 when a gaming machine information notification is sent (when hall control/fraud monitoring information, gaming machine installation information, or gaming machine performance information is sent). +1 when notification is received. In other words, the game machine information notification is transmitted every 300 ms, and the rental notification is received every 300 ms. Since the lending notification reception counter is incremented by 1 in the lending notification reception counter +1 processing in the lending notification reception processing, the lending notification reception counter = 1 when executing the lending notification reception counter ≠ 1 determination processing. Therefore, if the lending notification reception counter is other than 1, there is a possibility that the lending notification has been received multiple times or the value of the RAM has been rewritten due to fraud between the transmission of the gaming machine information notification and the receipt of the lending notification. Therefore, the communication error 2 flag is set.

In addition, by judging the rental notification reception counter at multiple timings (at the time of sending game machine information notification and at the time of receiving rental notification), it is possible to detect multiple abnormalities (communication abnormality 1 and communication abnormality 2) with one counter. , it is possible to reduce the program capacity and lighten the processing.

<< Receiving range error? >><<communication error 3 flag set>>
It is determined whether the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is less than 100ms or the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A exceeds 270ms, and the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A is less than 100ms or the value of the gaming machine information notification timer If the value of A exceeds 270 ms, the communication error 3 flag is set (the D2 bit of the communication error flag is set to 1) (also referred to as processing related to communication error 3).

The time to receive the rental notification from the rental unit is 100 ms or later from the transmission of the gaming machine information notification, and is set to 270 ms or less. Therefore, the communication error 3 flag is set.

<< number of loaned medals > 50? >><<Communication error 4 flag set>>
Determine whether or not the number of loaned medals included in the received loan notification exceeds 50. If the number of loaned medals exceeds 50, set the communication error 4 flag (set the D3 bit of the communication error flag to 1). ) (also referred to as processing related to communication error 4).

<< Number of loaned medals = 0? >>
It is determined whether or not the number of loaned medals included in the received loan notification is 0, and if the number of loaned medals is 0, a communication error flag update process is executed. This is because the communication error flag 5 and the communication error flag 6 may be set when the number of loaned medals is not 0. Therefore, when the number of loaned medals is 0, the communication error flag 5 and the communication error flag 6 are set. It is possible to speed up the execution of the program by not executing the judgment processing of the abnormality flag 6 .

<<Response permission flag=0? >><<communication error 5 flag set>>
Determine whether the response permission flag is 0 or not, and if the response permission flag is 0, set the communication error 5 flag (set the D4 bit of the communication error flag to 1) (also referred to as processing related to communication error 5) ). If the response permission flag is 0, it means that the reception of the lending notification is not permitted (it is not after the hole control/fraud monitoring information has been sent). In the case of 0, it means that the lending notice has been received even though the reception of the lending notice is not permitted, and it is possible to judge the possibility that the lending notice has been received fraudulently.

In addition, the lending notification normal reception determination processing is executed before the communication abnormality 2 to 6 check processing, the data indicating the message length of the received lending notification is "0x05", and the data indicating the command is "0x13". By judging the response permission flag even after judging whether or not the reception is normal, it is possible to realize a gaming machine that is more resistant to fraud.

<< Number of medals ≠ 0? ? >><<communication error 6 flag set>>
It is determined whether or not the number of counted medals is 0, and if the number of counted medals is not 0, the communication error 6 flag is set (the D5 bit of the communication error flag is set to 1) (also referred to as processing related to communication error 6). Since lending processing and counting processing are not performed at the same time, if the number of counted medals is not 0 when the number of lent medals is not 0, a lending notification sent by fraud has been received, or a counting notification has been sent by fraud. You can judge the possibilities.

<< Communication error flag update >>
The communication abnormality flag is updated based on each communication abnormality set in each of the communication abnormality 2-6 judgment processing.

<Normal reception range? ＞
It is determined whether or not the reception timing of the received lending notification is within the normal range. Specifically, within 170 ms from the count notification transmission timing, which is 100 ms after the gaming machine information notification transmission timing, is the normal reception range for the rental notification, so the value of the gaming machine information notification timer A when the rental notification is received If the value obtained by subtracting 30 (200-170) from the value of the game machine information notification timer A is smaller than 171 (170+1), it is judged to be normal, and if larger, it is abnormal. I judge. If it is judged to be abnormal, the lending notice receiving buffers (five storage areas of lending notice receiving buffers 1 to 5) are cleared.

<Checksum error? ＞
Based on the total value of various data stored in the lending notice receiving buffers 1 to 4 excluding the lending notice receiving buffer 5 in which the checksum is stored and the checksum value stored in the lending notice receiving buffer 5 to determine whether the checksum is abnormal. Specifically, the value obtained by adding the message length data, command data, lending serial number data, and lending point data stored in the lending notice receiving buffers 1 to 4 and the check stored in the lending notice receiving buffer 5 The sum values are compared, and if the values are the same, it is determined to be normal, and if the values are different, it is determined to be abnormal. If the checksum is determined to be abnormal, a value ("0x01") indicating an abnormality is saved in the loan point reception result, and a loan reception result response is set. In other words, if the checksum is abnormal, the lending notification is discarded (for example, the lending points are not added to the total score).

<Obtaining the lending serial number, lending serial number + 1, lending serial number = 0? ＞
The lending serial number stored in the game medium number control board P16 is acquired, and the lending serial number is updated (incremented by one). If it is determined that the updated (incremented by 1) lending serial number is 0, it is updated (incremented by 1) again, and if it is determined that the updated (incremented by 1) lending serial number is not 0, the lending serial number is normal. or not. In addition, since the lending serial number = 0 is only used when starting communication with the game machine, if the lending serial number is updated (incremented by 1) to 0, it must be updated again (incremented by 1) to 1. be.

<Rental serial number normal? , Serial number error flag clear>
It is determined whether or not the lending serial number stored in the lending notification reception buffer is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether the updated lending serial number stored in the game medium number control board P16 and the lending serial number stored in the lending notification receiving buffer 3 are the same. If it is determined that the lending serial number is normal (the lending serial number after updating the lending serial number stored in the technique medium number control board P16 and the lending serial number stored in the lending notification reception buffer 3 are the same), the serial number If the error flag is cleared and the lending serial number is not normal (the lending serial number after updating the lending serial number stored in the technique medium number control board P16 is not the same as the lending serial number stored in the lending notification reception buffer 3). If determined, the serial number abnormality flag is set, a value indicating abnormality ("0x01") is saved in the lending point receipt result, and a lending receipt result response is set. In other words, if the lending serial numbers are abnormal (if the lending serial numbers sent from the lending unit are not consecutive), the lending notification is discarded (for example, the lending points are not added to the total score). .

<Rental point = 0? ＞
It is determined whether or not the lending point stored in the lending notification reception buffer is 0. For example, if the lending point stored in the lending notice receiving buffer 4 is 0, the lending notice was sent while the lending button of the lending unit was not operated, so the lending point is added to the total score thereafter. without executing the processing to do so, the updated lending serial number is saved in the game media count control board P16, a value indicating normality (“0x00”) is saved in the lending point receipt result, and a lending receipt result response is sent. set.

<Response permission flag=0? ＞
It is determined whether or not the response permission flag is 0. If the response permission flag is 0, it means that the receipt of the loan notification is not permitted (the situation is not after the hall control/fraud monitoring information has been sent), so the value indicating the abnormality in the loan point reception result (“0x01”) and set the loan receipt result response. In other words, when the response permission flag is 0, the lending notification is discarded (for example, the lending points are not added to the total score). Note that the response permission flag stores 1 in the response permission flag after transmitting the hall control/fraud monitoring information, and after the gaming machine information notification timer A count value storage processing of the gaming machine information management processing (game machine information notification timer (before B+1 processing), the response permission flag is cleared.

As for the response permission flag, 1 is saved in the response permission flag after transmitting hall control/fraud monitoring information, but 1 is not saved in the response permission flag after transmitting gaming machine installation information and gaming machine performance information (response permission flag remains 0). This is because information related to the total score is not transmitted in the gaming machine installation information or the gaming machine performance information. As a judgment on the lending unit side, it becomes impossible to judge whether the total score has increased due to the addition of the lending points, or whether the total score has increased due to other factors (fraud, etc.). Therefore, by configuring the response permission flag to be set to 1 after transmitting hall controller/fraud monitoring information for transmitting total score information, the lending unit can grasp the factor of increase or decrease in total score. It can be made stronger against fraud.

Even if the lending serial number is normal, if the response permission flag is 0, it is regarded as abnormal. In this way, fraudulent acts are being carried out, but even if the lending serial number is sent with the correct serial number, if the lending notification is not received at the correct timing (the timing when the response permission flag is set to 1), it will be judged as abnormal. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is strong against fraud.

<Counting point ≠ 0? ＞
It is determined whether or not the count point of the count notification is 0. If counting and lending are performed at the same time, the counting is given priority, so if the counting point is notified as "1" or more, a value ("0x01") indicating an abnormality is saved in the lending point reception result. to set the loan acceptance result response. In other words, when the counting point of the counting notification is 0, the lending notification is discarded (for example, the lending points are not added to the total score).

<Rental point ≥ 51? ＞
It is determined whether or not the lending point of the lending notice exceeds the specified value of 50 (51 or more). If the lending points exceed the prescribed value of 50, a value indicating an abnormality ("0x01") is saved in the lending points receipt result, and a lending receipt result response is set. In other words, if the lending point of the lending notice exceeds 50, the lending notice is discarded (for example, the lending points are not added to the total score).

<Total score acquisition, total score ≥ 15000? ＞
The total score stored in the game media number control board P16 is obtained, and it is determined whether or not the total score exceeds 15,000. If the total score is 15000 or more, the total score threshold is reached and the value becomes close to the total score upper limit abnormal value. ) and set the loan receipt result response. In other words, if the total score is a value of 15000 or more, the lending notification is discarded (for example, the lending points are not added to the total score).

<Total score addition, total score storage>
If the total score is less than 15000, the lending points are added to the total score, and the total score after addition is stored in the total score storage area.

<Control state signal set for lending>
After adding the lending points to the total score and updating the total score, the control state signal regarding lending is set. The control state signal for lending is configured to be output for 200 ms.

A control state signal relating to lending is provided for outputting a lending sound from the gaming machine P when the lending button of the lending unit is operated. is configured to output a control state signal regarding rental to the main control board P15, and when the main control board P15 receives the control state signal regarding rental, output an effect command regarding a rental sound to the sub control board P12. It is The reason why the game media number control board P16 outputs the control state signal related to lending for 200 ms is that the main control board P15 sends the production command related to the lending sound to the sub control board P12 as part of the no-operation command. This is because you are sending Since the no-operation command is a command sent when there is no command to be sent from the main control board P15 to the sub-control board P12, if there is a command to be sent from the main control board P15 to the sub-control board P12 No operation command is sent. Therefore, the game machine in this embodiment is designed to have a transmission time of 100 ms when the number of commands transmitted from the main control board P15 to the sub control board P12 is the largest. After transmitting the control state signal for at least 100 ms, the main control means P15 can transmit a no-operation command to the sub-control board P12. In addition, since communication errors between boards occur, the game media count control board P16 is rented out for 200 ms, which is double the 100 ms, so that the main control board P15 can reliably transmit the no-operation command to the sub-control board P12. It is configured to output a control state signal related to. When the sub-control board P12 receives an effect command relating to the lending sound from the main control board P15, the game medium number control board P16 outputs a control state signal relating to lending in order to output a predetermined lending sound. It is possible to output the lending sound for a predetermined time even if it is finished.

In addition, as described above, since the lending sound is output after the lending score is added to the total score, it is not output when the lending score is 0. In other words, since the rental sound is output only when the rental point of the rental notification received every 300 ms is not 0, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the rental sound is output when the rental button is not operated.

Also, the rental sound output by the sub-control board P12 is set to a channel different from the effect sound during the game, so that it is output even during the game. By configuring in this way, regardless of the state during the game (during game standby, during reel rotation, during payout processing, during a predetermined error (excluding total score threshold reaching state, total score upper limit abnormality, VL abnormality), etc.) Since the lending sound is output without outputting the lending sound, it is possible to prevent the lending button from being pressed twice. In addition, if the lending sound is not heard during the game, the lending button may be pressed twice, so the volume of the lending sound is configured so that it cannot be changed by the player's settings. The sound volume is configured to be louder than the production sound. Also, if the rental sound output period is short, the rental sound may not be heard, so it is desirable that the rental sound is output for one second or more. In addition, if the rental sound is output for a long time, the player may not be able to hear the effect sound during the game for a long time. desirable.

Further, the rental sound output by the sub-control board P12 may be set to the same channel as the effect sound during the game, so that the sound during the game is output preferentially over the rental sound. By configuring in this way, since the sound during the game is not obstructed by the rental sound, the interest in the game can be enhanced. In addition, as a specification that prioritizes the sound during the game, if the lending sound and the effect sound during the game are set to different channels, the volume of the lending sound will be adjusted when the lending button is operated during the game. It may be configured to output as 0.

Also, the volume of the lending sound may be changed according to the player's volume setting. In this case, the volume of the rental sound is also changed according to the volume setting set by the player. It can be made easier to prevent escape. For example, since the lending button is likely to be operated just before the end of one game, the volume of the stop sound of the third reel (reel that stops last) and the sound of the game medium are set to be louder.

Further, when the sub-control board P12 receives an effect command related to the lending sound from the main control board P15, not only the lending sound but also a frame lamp, a liquid crystal, or the like may be used. In this case, if it is a frame lamp, it will light up in a dedicated lighting pattern, and if it is a liquid crystal, it will be displayed in a position that does not overlap with the UI display. etc.). A lending sound may be output when lending is notified by the frame lamp or the liquid crystal, or the lending may be notified only by any one of the lending sound, the frame lamp, and the liquid crystal.

<serial number save, loan point receipt result = normal save>
The updated lending serial number is saved in the game medium number control board P16, and a value indicating normality as the lending point reception result is saved in the game medium number control board P16. This processing is performed when a rental notification is normally received, and is also executed when the rental point is 0 and the rental notification is normally received as described above.

<Lending receipt result response set, lending control command set>
By setting various data in the lending receipt result response and executing lending control command set processing (telegram set processing), the lending unit receives the message length, lending receipt response, lending serial number, lending number receipt result, check send sum.

As described above, when the lending process is executed to add the lending points to the total score, the gaming machine P outputs a lending sound. The game machine P does not output the lending sound. However, even if the lending process is executed and the lending points are not added to the total score, the fact that the gaming machine P could not be rented out (the fact that the lending points could not be added to the total score) may occur under certain circumstances. ) may be configured to be notified. For example, when the lending button of the lending unit is operated and the gaming machine receives a lending notification including information of 50 as lending points, the total score is 15000 or more, so the lending points are not added to the total score. , the gaming machine P may output a voice such as "cannot be rented out". By notifying that the lending was not possible (that the lending points could not be added to the total score) in this way, there is a case where the total score does not increase when the player operates the lending button of the lending unit. Even if there is, appropriate notification can be given to the player. It should be noted that not only voice but also sound effect, lamp, image display, etc. may be used to notify that lending was not possible (that lending points could not be added to the total score). In addition, if the checksum is abnormal, if there is an abnormality in the lending serial number, or if the counting point is other than 0, the fact that the lending was not possible (the lending point could not be added to the total score) will be notified. you can go On the other hand, if the checksum is abnormal, the lending serial number is abnormal, or the counting point is other than 0, it is notified that the lending was not possible (the lending points could not be added to the total score). does not have to be done.

In this embodiment, the game machine and the rental unit communicate with each other via the game medium count control board P16 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board, but the present invention is not limited to this. The game machine and the rental unit may communicate via the device connection terminal board. In this case, the production cost is reduced by not mounting the game medium number control board P16. Further, all the processing controlled by the game medium number control board P16 is performed by the main control board P15. When the function of the main control board P15 and the function of the game medium number control board P16 are realized on the same board, the main control chip and the game medium number control chip are provided on the same board, and the main control chip and the game medium number control chip are provided on the same board. This can be realized by performing transmission/reception processing similar to that of the above embodiment between the number-of-media control chips. In addition, it is possible to realize even one chip and one board by configuring only the main control chip and storing the processing of the game medium number control chip described above in an area different from the main control area of the main control chip. ing.

<Power failure recovery process when VL abnormality and total score clear status are ON>
When the gaming machine P and the lending unit are not connected (when the gaming machine P is powered on but the lending unit is not powered on, when there is a communication error between the gaming machine P and the lending unit, etc.) The game machine P sets VL abnormality.

Here, when only the game machine P is activated (when the lending unit is not activated) and the total score clear switch is pressed, the total score is cleared in the power-on process when the game machine P is activated. After initializing the score, setting the total score clear timer 1, and turning on the total score clear status, the interrupt processing is activated and the VL abnormality flag is turned ON when the input port check in the interrupt processing detects a VL abnormality. (Store FFh in the VL abnormality flag storage area).

In this way, if the total score clear status is ON and the VL error flag is ON, and power failure occurs, when the game machine P is powered on again, the total score clear status and the VL error In order to prevent the flag from being initialized, it is possible to return to the situation where the total score clear status is ON and the VL abnormality flag is ON.

According to such a configuration, since the total score clear status and the VL abnormality flag are not initialized by power interruption and power recovery, the total score clear status or the VL abnormality flag is turned ON by fraudulent activity, and the power is interrupted by fraudulent activity. Since the total score clear status and the VL abnormality flag are not initialized even if the power is restored, it is possible to prevent fraudulent actions.

In addition, according to such a configuration, since the total score clear status and the VL abnormality flag are not initialized by power failure and power restoration, the total score clear status is ON and the VL abnormality flag is ON. When the gaming machine P is powered on again after a power outage occurs, if the lending unit is powered on, the VL abnormality flag is turned OFF, and the gaming machine P gives the total score to the lending unit. Information that the clear status is ON can be transmitted.

In addition, when the total score clear status is ON and the VL abnormality flag is ON, power failure occurs and the setting key switch is ON when the game machine P is powered on again. , the initialization processing accompanying the activation of the setting change mode is executed, but in order to prevent the total score clear status and VL abnormality flag from being initialized, the total score clear status is ON and the VL abnormality flag is ON. can return to In this case, the setting changing status is also ON, so that the total score clear status is ON, the VL abnormality flag is ON, and the setting changing status is ON.

According to such a configuration, since the total score clear status and the VL abnormality flag are not initialized by power off and power recovery, or activation of the setting change mode, the total score clear status or the VL abnormality flag is turned ON due to fraudulent acts. Therefore, even if the power is turned off and restored or the setting change mode is activated due to fraud, the total score clear status and the VL abnormality flag are not initialized, so fraud can be prevented.

Further, according to such a configuration, since the total score clear status and the VL abnormality flag are not initialized by power failure and power recovery, or activation of the setting change mode, the total score clear status is ON and the VL abnormality flag is not initialized. When power is turned off in a situation where the flag is ON and the game machine P is turned on again, the setting key switch is turned ON and the power of the rented unit is turned on, the VL abnormality flag is displayed. becomes OFF, and the game machine P can transmit information indicating that the total score clear status is ON and information indicating that the setting changing status is ON to the lending unit.

<Regarding the difference number counter that stores the difference number from when the power is turned on>
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the number of payout medals (number of payouts, number of payout game media, number of grants, number of grant medals, number of grant game media, number of wins, number of win medals, number of win game media) starts from the time of power-on. , payout points, awarded points, earned points, or number of OUTs.) to the number of inserted medals (number of inserted medals, number of bets, number of bets, number of bets, number of bets, number of bets, input points, bet points, or A difference number counter is provided in a predetermined RWM area to calculate a value (difference number) obtained by subtracting the IN number for each game and store the cumulative value (total difference number) of the difference number. there is When the value of the difference counter exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 19000), a process of stopping the progress of the game (hereinafter also referred to as "stopping process") is executed. The process of determining whether or not the value of the difference counter exceeds a predetermined value is referred to as difference counter determination process. In addition, processing related to updating the difference number counter before execution of stop processing and processing related to determination are called stop monitoring processing.

It should be noted that the fact that the value of the difference counter exceeds a predetermined value and the stopping process is executed may be referred to as "activation of the safety device" or "activation of the complete function".

The stop monitoring process is executed in the advantageous section as well as in the normal section. Also, the game is executed regardless of the prescribed number for starting the game. Also, it is executed regardless of the RT state. In other words, it is executed in all games. In the game in which the replay combination is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is stopped, the value of the difference number counter does not change, so the stop monitoring process may or may not be executed. .

For example, in a certain game in which the total number of paid-out medals is 50001 starting from when the power is turned on and the total number of inserted medals is 31000 starting from when the power is turned on, the value of the difference number counter exceeds 19000. It is possible to execute stop processing in a game that is played.

Stop processing includes not executing the addition of the number of bets or the number of credits due to insertion of medals, turning OFF the blocker so that the number of bets or the number of credits is not added even if the number of medals is inserted, MAX bet switch or 1 bet. Do not execute the bet process even if the operation of the switch is accepted, do not accept the operation of the MAX bet switch or the 1 bet switch, and do not carry out the reel rotation start process even if the operation of the start switch is accepted , to prevent the operation of the start switch from being accepted, not to execute the reel stop processing even if the operation of the stop switch is accepted, or to prevent the operation of the stop switch from being accepted. It may be processing, or it may be all processing. In other words, the game cannot be started when the stopping process is executed.

Even when the progress of the game is stopped, the operation reception of the settlement switch P6 and the operation reception of the counting switch P7 are valid, and the processing by the operation reception of each switch can be executed.

Further, stop processing may be called stop processing including automatic settlement processing in addition to the processing of stopping the progress of the game. The automatic settlement process means that the settlement process based on the operation of the settlement switch P6 is automatically executed after the termination process. Also, the stop processing may be called stop processing including automatic counting processing. The automatic counting process means that the counting process based on the operation of the counting switch P7 is automatically executed after the stopping process. Further, the stop processing may be referred to as stop processing including automatic settlement processing and automatic counting processing.

If the progress of the game is stopped by the stop processing, it cannot be canceled even by turning on the power, and the stop of the progress of the game (stop state) can be canceled by executing the RWM initialization processing by turning on the power along with the setting change. It has become. In other words, a game machine that is in a stopped state during the business hours of the game arcade cannot be operated during the business hours of the day.

In addition, as a condition for executing the RWM initialization process other than turning on the power with a setting change, the game progress is stopped by executing the RWM initialization process by turning on the power with the operation of the RAM clear switch ( stop state) may be made releasable. In addition, as a condition for executing the RWM initialization process other than turning on the power accompanied by setting change, the initialization process of the total score is executed by turning on the power accompanied by the operation of the total score clear switch. The stop (paused state) may be canceled, or the stop (paused state) of the progress of the game cannot be canceled even if the total score initialization processing is executed by turning on the power accompanied by the operation of the total score clear switch. good too.

In this way, when the value of the difference counter exceeds a predetermined value, there is a possibility that the player may be given an excessive sense of gambling. By stopping the progress, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming absorbed in the game.

The difference number counter includes a difference number counter, difference number storage means, difference number storage means, difference number storage area, difference number storage area, game medium number storage means, game medium number storage area, game medal number storage means, game Medal number storage area, power-on MY counter, power-on MY storage means, power-on MY storage area, difference number counter for stopping, difference number counter for stopping, MY counter for stopping, MY storage means for stopping, for stopping It may also be called the MY storage area.

The value stored in the difference number counter is configured to be initialized when power is turned on. In this embodiment, since the initial value of the difference counter is 0 and addition is performed from the initial value, initialization at power-on means setting the value of the difference counter to 0. If the initial value is set to 19000 and the counter is used for subtraction, the value of the difference number counter will be set to 19000 when the power is turned on. Note that power-on includes not only normal power-on but also power-on with setting change and power-on with RWM abnormality. In addition, the value stored in the difference number counter is determined by the termination condition of the advantageous section (for example, MY during the advantageous section exceeds 2400, the difference number exceeds 2400 during the advantageous section, has reached a predetermined number of times) is not initialized in the RWM initialization process executed when the condition is satisfied.

In addition, if the difference counter is initialized only by turning on the power, it is easy to be initialized by fraud. The difference counter may be cleared by turning on the power while pressing a predetermined switch such as a clear switch that cannot be operated by the player.

In addition, when the value of the difference number counter exceeds a predetermined value and the progress of the game is stopped, the power is cut off, and when the power is turned on with the setting key switch in the OFF position and the game is started normally (normal When the power is turned on), the value of the difference number counter is initialized, but the progress of the game remains stopped. This is because the stopping process is executed when the value of the difference counter exceeds a predetermined value. This is because the stopping process is started even when the power is turned on after a power failure occurs. It should be noted that when the stop processing is executed, the interrupt processing and the interrupt processing are executed as usual, but the stop processing is looped without returning to the normal main loop processing from the interrupt processing.

In addition, even if an event that shuts off the power (for example, turning off the power switch) occurs during the abort process, the interrupt process is executed as usual during the abort process. , the above-described power-off processing is configured to be normally executable.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the game from being allowed to progress due to illegal power-off and power-on after the progress of the game has been stopped by the stopping process.

The difference counter stores a value obtained by subtracting the number of inserted medals from the number of payout medals for each game, and a specific example of updating the value of the difference counter will be described below. The process of updating the value of the difference number counter is executed at a predetermined timing from after all the reels have stopped until game medals for the next game can be inserted (betting for the next game can be made). Since the process of updating the value of the difference number counter is executed at the timing when one game is finished, the predetermined timing may be referred to as "after one game is finished". Also, the difference number counter is explained as 2-byte data. "/" indicating 2-byte data indicates a delimiter of each byte, and the numbers in parentheses after the binary value indicate the binary value in decimal notation.

<Difference counter = 00000000/01100100b (100), Number of paid out medals = 00001010b (10), Number of inserted medals = 00000011b (3)>
When the difference counter value is 00000000/01100100b (100), the register calculates 00001010b (10 (number of medals paid out)) - 00000011b (3 (number of medals inserted)) = 00000111b (7). , the value of the difference number counter is acquired, and the result of adding the calculation result and the value of the difference number counter is stored (updated) in the difference number counter. In this case, the value stored in the difference number counter is 00000000/01101011b (107).

<Difference number counter = 00000000/01100100b (100), number of payout medals = 00000000b (0), number of inserted medals = 00000011b (3)>
When the difference counter value is 00000000/01100100b (100), 00000000b (0 (number of paid out medals)) - 00000011b (3 (number of inserted medals)) = -00000011b (-3) is calculated on the register. Then, the value of the difference number counter is acquired, and the result of adding the calculation result and the value of the difference number counter is stored (updated) in the difference number counter. In this case, the value stored in the difference number counter is 00000000/01100001b (97).

<Difference number counter = 00000000/00000000b (0), number of payout medals = 00001010b (10), number of inserted medals = 00000011b (3)>
When the difference counter value is 00000000/00000000b(0), 00001010b (10 (number of paid out medals)) - 00000011b (3 (number of inserted medals)) = 00000111b (7) is calculated on the register. , the value of the difference number counter is acquired, and the result of adding the calculation result and the value of the difference number counter is stored (updated) in the difference number counter. In this case, the value stored in the difference number counter is 00000000/00000111b(7).

<Difference number counter = 00000000/00000000b (0), number of payout medals = 00000000b (0), number of inserted medals = 00000011b (3)>
When the difference counter value is 00000000/00000000b(0), 00000000b (0 (number of paid out medals)) - 00000011b (3 (number of inserted medals)) = -00000011b (-3) is calculated on the register. Then, the value of the difference number counter is acquired, and the result of adding the calculation result and the value of the difference number counter is stored (updated) in the difference number counter. In this case, the value stored in the difference number counter is 10000000/00000011b (32771).

<When the difference counter = 00000000b (0), the number of payout medals = 00000000b (0), and the number of inserted medals = 00000011b (3)> The calculation result is -00000011b (-3), but it is stored in the difference counter. The reason why the value is 10000000/00000011b (32771) is that when the most significant bit is 0, it indicates a positive value, and when the most significant bit is 1, it indicates a negative value. It's for. In the case of a 2-byte counter, even if the most significant bit is not used, the value of the difference number counter can be normally stored up to 01111111/11111111 (32767). In other words, when the value of the difference number counter is 11111111/11111111b, it can be indicated that it is -32767.

It should be noted that there are parts that are omitted in each of the examples of the above calculations. If the most significant bit of the obtained difference counter value is 0, the number of inserted medals is subtracted from the number of paid out medals, and the subtracted value is added to the obtained difference counter value. , and updates the difference counter value with the added value. If the most significant bit of the obtained difference counter value is 1, the number of inserted medals is subtracted from the number of paid out medals, and the subtracted value is set to 10000000/00000000b (32768) as a fixed value from the obtained difference counter value. is subtracted, and the subtracted value is updated as the value of the difference number counter.

Also, if the result of calculating the value for updating the difference counter value is a negative value, the most significant bit of the absolute value of the result of calculating the value for updating the difference counter value is The value set to 1 is updated as the value of the difference number counter.

In each example of the above calculation, the result of subtracting the number of inserted medals from the number of paid out medals was added to the value of the obtained difference number counter. The number of paid out medals may be added to the value of the difference counter, and then the number of inserted medals may be subtracted from the addition result. The number of payout medals may be added from the result of the subtraction.

Further, when the number of payout medals is not 0, it means that a minor combination has been won and the symbol combination corresponding to the minor combination has stopped. Incidentally, the number of payout medals may be 3 or 0 when the replay combination is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination stops. When the number of payout medals is set to 3 when the replay role is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role stops, the number of inserted medals is set to 3, and the symbols corresponding to the replay role are won and the replay role is won. If the number of payout medals is set to 0 when the combination is stopped, the number of inserted medals is set to 0.

Further, when the replay combination is won, the difference counter update process may be executed, or the difference counter update process may not be executed. Further, when the replay combination is won, the difference counter determination process may be executed, or the difference counter determination process may not be executed.

Also, the difference number counter need not be 2 bytes, but may be 3 bytes or 4 bytes. When the difference counter is 3 bytes, the fixed value is 10000000/00000000/00000000b (8388608). Since the difference counter is initialized when the power is turned on, even if the number of payout medals is 0 in 10,000 games played during the business hours of the amusement arcade, it will be -30,000 (10,000 (games played in a day) Possible number of times)×3 (number of inserted medals)), so 2 bytes of the difference counter is sufficient storage capacity.

<Another aspect of updating the difference number counter>
A payout medal count storage area for storing the total payout medal count since the game machine was powered on, an inserted medal count storage area for storing the total payout medal count since the gaming machine was powered on, and a difference from when the gaming machine was powered on. A difference number counter for storing numbers is provided, and the payout medal number storage area, the inserted medal number storage area, and the difference number counter are configured to be initialized when power is turned on, and are executed after one game is completed. When updating the difference counter in the difference counter update process, the result of subtracting the value stored in the inserted medal number storage area from the value stored in the payout medal number storage area becomes a positive value. In this case, the result of subtracting the value stored in the number-of-paid-out medals storage area from the value stored in the number-of-paid-out medals storage area is stored in the difference number counter, and the value stored in the number-of-paid-out medals storage area is used to insert the result. The game machine may be configured to store 0 in the difference number counter when the result of subtracting the value stored in the medal number storage area is a negative value.

With such a configuration, it is desirable that the payout medal number storage area, the inserted medal number storage area, and the difference number counter are storage areas of 2 bytes. A storage area may be used, the number of inserted medals storage area may be a storage area of 2 bytes or more, and the difference number counter may be a storage area of 2 bytes or more.

The payout medal number storage area, the inserted medal number storage area, and the difference number counter are initialized when the power is turned on, and as the initialization process, 0 is stored in each storage area. It is the same as the above-described mode that setting change and RWM abnormality are included as power-on time.

The number-of-paid-out medals storage area is a storage area for accumulating and storing the number of paid-out medals for each game, and is updated regardless of the game state or the specified number (sometimes referred to as the number-of-paid-out medals storage area update process). For example, when 100 is stored in the number-of-paid-out medals storage area, if the N-th game is executed and 10 paid-out medals are paid out, 110 is stored in the number-of-paid-out medals storage area after the Nth game is completed. When the N+1th game is executed and 0 coins are paid out as payout medals (no payout), 110 is stored in the payout medal number storage area after the N+1th game is finished.

The number-of-inserted-medals storage area is a storage area for accumulating and storing the number of inserted medals for each game, and is updated regardless of the game state or the specified number (sometimes referred to as the number-of-inserted medals storage area update process). For example, when 50 is stored in the inserted medal number storage area, if the Nth game is executed and three inserted medals are inserted, 53 is stored in the inserted medal number storage area after the Nth game is completed. , when the N+1-th game is executed and two inserted medals are inserted, 55 is stored in the paid-out medal number storage area after the N+1-th game is completed.

The difference counter stores a value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the inserted medal number storage area updated for each game from the value stored in the payout medal number storage area updated for each game. Here, if the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the inserted medal number storage area updated for each game from the value stored in the payout medal number storage area updated for each game is a positive value, the game The difference counter value is updated by subtracting the value stored in the inserted medal number storage area updated for each game from the value stored in the payout medal number storage area updated for each game. If the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the inserted medal number storage area updated for each game from the value stored in the payout medal number storage area updated for each game is a negative value, the difference counter is set to 0. update as the value of Therefore, the value of the difference counter is not necessarily the value obtained by subtracting the number of inserted medals from the number of paid out medals for each game, but it is a counter for determining whether or not the difference counter exceeds 19,000. Therefore, there is no problem.

Further, if the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the inserted medal number storage area updated for each game from the value stored in the payout medal number storage area updated for each game is a negative value, the difference number Although the mode in which 0 is stored in the counter has been described, the value stored in the number-of-paid-out medals storage area updated for each game is stored in the number-of-inserted-medals storage area updated for each game. If the subtracted value is a negative value, the difference counter may not be updated, or a fixed value greater than 0 and less than 19000 may be stored in the difference counter. However, a fixed value of 19000 or more may be stored in the difference number counter, or the number of inserted medals updated for each game based on the value stored in the number of payout medals storage area updated for each game may be used. Alternatively, the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the area may be stored as it is.

If the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the inserted medal number storage area updated for each game from the value stored in the payout medal number storage area updated for each game is a negative value, a difference number counter. is not updated, or a fixed value exceeding 0 and less than 19000 is stored in the difference counter, the determination process of whether the value of the difference counter exceeds 19000 is executed every game. Since the value of the difference number counter never exceeds 19000, the progress of the game is not stopped, and the inserted medals updated for each game based on the value stored in the payout medal number storage area updated for each game. When the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number storage area becomes a positive value, the correct value is stored in the difference number counter, so there is no problem. Further, if the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the inserted medal number storage area updated for each game from the value stored in the payout medal number storage area updated for each game is a negative value, the difference number A mode may be adopted in which the determination processing of whether or not the value of the counter exceeds 19000 is not executed.

If the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the inserted medal number storage area updated for each game from the value stored in the payout medal number storage area updated for each game is a negative value, a difference number counter. A fixed value of 19000 or more is stored in , or the value stored in the inserted medal number storage area updated for each game is subtracted from the value stored in the payout medal number storage area updated for each game. In the case where the value is stored as it is, there is a possibility that it will be determined that the value of the difference counter exceeds 19000 if the processing for determining whether the value of the difference number exceeds 19000 is executed every game. If the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the inserted medal number storage area updated for each game from the value stored in the payout medal number storage area is a negative value, does the value of the difference number counter exceed 19000? There is no problem by not executing the determination process of whether or not.

The difference counter update process is the same as the above-described mode, and is executed at a predetermined timing after all the reels have stopped until game medals for the next game can be inserted (betting for the next game can be made). Note that the difference number counter update process may include the payout medal number storage area update process and the inserted medal number storage area update process.

<Difference number counter judgment processing when the accessory continuous operation device or the first type special accessory is operating>
Whether or not the accessory continuous operation device is operating before executing the determination processing as to whether or not the value of the difference counter exceeds 19000 as the difference counter determination processing, and whether the type 1 special accessory is operating It is determined whether or not the accessory continuous operation device or the first type special accessory is operating, and if it is determined that it is operating in either case, the difference number counter determination process is not executed. There may be.

This is because there is a high possibility that the player's willingness to play will be greatly diminished if the game stops while the accessory continuous actuating device or the type 1 special accessory is operating (during the so-called bonus). During the bonus, the game can be progressed even if the value of the difference counter exceeds 19000, and the progress of the game is stopped after the bonus is completed, so that the player's desire to play is not diminished. It is possible to give a feeling. In addition, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play the game to increase the number of balls paid out during the bonus.

Even in such a mode, the process of updating the difference counter is performed even when the accessory continuous operation device is operating or when the type 1 special accessory is operating. . Therefore, as the processing order of the program, "update processing of the difference number counter" → "whether or not the accessory continuous operation device is operating, whether or not the first class special accessory is operating, Alternatively, it is preferable that the processing is configured as follows: processing for judging whether or not the type 1 special accessory is operating”→“difference number counter judgment processing”.

Further, even if the value of the difference counter exceeds 19000 during the bonus and the value of the difference counter is less than 19000 when the bonus ends, the progress of the game is stopped after the bonus ends. may

In this mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the difference counter exceeds 19000 even during the bonus. area) stores a predetermined value (for example, an arbitrary value such as "1" or "255"), determines whether the value of the stop flag is the predetermined value at the end of the bonus, and if it is the predetermined value, , to stop the progress of the game. When the bonus is finished, it is determined whether or not the value of the stop flag is a predetermined value, and if it is determined that the value is not the predetermined value, the progress of the game is not stopped. Also, if it is determined that the value of the difference number counter exceeds 19000 when the bonus is not in progress, as long as a predetermined value is stored in the stop flag, every game can be played regardless of whether the bonus is in progress or not. A configuration is conceivable in which it is determined whether or not the stop flag is at a predetermined value after the end of the game, and the progress of the game is stopped according to the value of the stop flag. If it is configured not to store the predetermined value in the stop flag when it is determined that it exceeds, the value of the difference number counter is 19000 without judging whether the stop flag is at the predetermined value or not after the end of each game that is not in the bonus mode. A configuration is conceivable in which the progress of the game is stopped depending on whether or not it exceeds the limit.

Note that the stop flag is not initialized by the RWM initialization at power-on, but is cleared by the RWM initialization at power-on accompanied by a setting change. It should be noted that the initializing condition of the stop flag may include the RWM initialization processing by turning on the power accompanying the operation of the reset switch, the RAM clear switch, or the total score clear switch.

In the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which progress of the game is not stopped even if the value of the difference counter exceeds 19000 during the bonus. A mode in which progress of the game is not stopped may be adopted. However, as mentioned above, the AT can extend the end condition (change the number of ATs that can be executed by increasing the number of games, etc.). to

In addition, if there are multiple prescribed numbers for starting the game, there may be cases where one prescribed number cannot execute processing related to the instruction function, and if one prescribed number cannot execute processing related to the instruction function, the end condition will be changed. Therefore, even if the value of the difference counter exceeds 19000, the progress of the game is not stopped. Specifically, when it is possible to bet 3 or 2 as the specified number related to the start of the game, it is possible to update the AT end condition with 3 bets (the number of games at which AT ends and the update of the difference possible), but if the end condition of AT cannot be updated with double play (the number of games where AT ends and the number of differences cannot be updated), and the difference number counter reaches 19000 during AT, AT To prevent the progress of the game from being stopped until the end condition of is satisfied.

As a result, even if the AT looks like a bonus, the AT behaves like a bonus, so that the player's interest in the game can be prevented from deteriorating. In addition, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play the game to increase the number of balls paid out during the bonus.

If the progress of the game does not stop even if the value of the difference counter exceeds 19000 during the bonus or AT, during the bonus after the value of the difference counter exceeds 19000 or in the game during AT To prevent the execution of a lottery advantageous to a player such as a lottery or a CZ lottery.

As a result, it is possible to avoid excessive gambling while the progress of the game is confirmed to stop.

It should be noted that it is determined whether or not the value of the difference counter exceeds 19000 during the bonus. , ``1'', ``255'', etc.) is stored, and at the end of the bonus, it is determined whether or not the value of the stop flag is a predetermined value, and if it is the predetermined value, the progress of the game is stopped. Although the mode has been described, the stop flag may not be provided.

Specifically, when the value of the difference counter exceeds 19000 during the bonus, the value of the difference counter is not updated in the subsequent game during the bonus, and the difference counter after the bonus ends. It may be configured such that the stop processing is executed by the judgment processing. For example, when the value of the difference counter exceeds 19000 (for example, 19001) during the bonus, the difference counter is not updated in subsequent games, and the value of the difference counter at the end of the bonus is , 19,000.

<About the initialization of the difference number counter>
In the above-described embodiment, when the value of the difference number counter is initialized when the power is turned on, the initial value is 0 for the addition formula and 19000 for the subtraction formula. Any value may be used as the initial value.

For example, if the difference number counter is a 2-byte counter, it can count from 0 to 65,535. In the case where the progress of the game is to be stopped when the difference number from when the power is turned on exceeds 19000, the difference number counter needs to count up to 19000, so the initial value is 46535 which is 65535-19000. Also, in this case, if the value of the difference number counter exceeds 65535, the progress of the game is stopped. has exceeded 19000 sheets. 1 is stored in the carry flag even if it falls below 0, but as described above, the theoretical maximum number of inserted medals per day is around 30,000. is sufficient. In fact, since a small winning combination or a replay winning combination is won, the number of coins will not decrease by 30,000 in a day.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to simplify the processing related to the update of the difference number counter and to compress the program capacity.

Also, for example, as described above, if the difference number exceeds 19,000 during the bonus, the progress of the game may be stopped at the end of the bonus. Since the increment during the bonus cannot be counted, the initial value may be set to a value smaller than 46535 when the difference counter is a 2-byte counter. A value smaller than 46535 may be 40000, for example. In this case, there is room to acquire up to 6535 cards after the difference exceeds 19000, so even if the difference exceeds 19000 during the bonus, the difference will continue to be counted until the bonus ends. can. Also, even if the difference number exceeds 19000 sheets during AT, AT can only acquire up to 2414 sheets due to the relationship with the advantageous section, so even if the difference number exceeds 19000 sheets during AT The counting of difference numbers can continue until finished. When determining whether or not the difference number exceeds 19,000 when the initial value of the difference number counter is 40,000, it is possible to determine whether or not the value of the difference number counter exceeds 59,000. Also, when the value of the difference counter exceeds 59000, it is determined whether or not the game state is in the bonus state, and if the bonus state is in effect, the progress of the game is continued until the end of the bonus.

In this example, the initial value of the difference number counter is set to a value smaller than 46535, but the value of the initial value to be set is a value (32767 or more) that is larger than half of the maximum value (65535) that can be counted in 2 bytes. It is preferable to This is because when the set value of the game machine is the value that indicates the lowest ball payout rate (for example, a set value of 1), the ball payout rate is often designed to be less than 100%, so the difference does not increase but decreases. This is because the possibility is higher. Therefore, by setting the initial value of the difference number counter to a value larger than half of the maximum value that can be counted, the possibility that the value of the difference number counter becomes 0 can be reduced, and normal operation can be realized in the market. can be made possible and easier.

It should be noted that when the difference number counter exceeds 19000, the difference number may not be counted normally. It is possible to prevent the game from being stopped. In the case of such specifications, when the difference number counter exceeds 65535 (when it is determined that it has exceeded 65535, or when it is determined that 1 is stored in the carry flag), a predetermined value is stored in the stop flag, and each game is played. It is determined whether or not the progress of the game is to be stopped depending on whether or not the stop flag is at a predetermined value. In this way, when the difference number exceeds 19,000 during the bonus, the difference number counter exceeds 65,535 and counts from 0, but whether or not to stop the progress of the game is determined according to the stop flag. Therefore, although the value of the difference number counter is not normal, it is possible to realize normal operation as a whole.

Although the difference counter subtracts the number of inserted medals and adds the number of paid-out medals, the difference counter may add the number of inserted medals and subtract the number of paid-out medals. In this case, the initial value of the difference number counter may be 19,000, or a value between 19,000 and 32,766.

Although the difference counter has been described as a 2-byte counter, it may be a 3-byte or 4-byte counter. If the difference counter is a 3-byte counter, the initial value is set to 16758215. When the difference exceeds 19000 sheets, a carry flag is generated. 1 can be stored in . In addition, by using 3 bytes or more, there is a game hall where the power of the game machine is not turned off, and the set value is always below 100%, and 10,000 games have been played every day. Even so, since the difference counter does not fall below 0 for several years, the possibility of defects occurring in the market can be further reduced.

<Regarding signal output to the outside based on the value of the difference counter>
As a result of updating the value of the difference number counter in the stop monitoring process, when it reaches a specific value (18900 in this embodiment) before the predetermined value (19000 in this embodiment) at which the stop process is executed, the test Execute processing for outputting a test interruption request signal to the IF board for use.

As a result, the test can be interrupted before the gaming machine stops and the progress of the game stops during the gaming machine test, and when the test is interrupted, the tester turns off the gaming machine, and By turning on the power again, the value of the difference counter is initialized, and the gaming machine test can be continued until the value of the difference counter exceeds 19000 again. In other words, by turning off the power when the value of the difference counter reaches 18900 and then turning it on again, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from stopping until the value of the difference counter substantially exceeds 37900, thereby conducting a stable test. can be realized.

Although the specific value before the predetermined value (19000 in this embodiment) at which the stop processing is executed is 18900, the maximum payout is from 9500, which is half the predetermined value at which the stop processing is executed. Even if it is a number, any value up to 18985, which is a value at which the stopping process is not executed, may be used as the specific value.

Further, in the present embodiment, processing for outputting a test interruption request signal to interrupt the test is executed, but any signal may be output as long as it is communicated to the tester. As a result, the signal output to the test IF board when reaching a specific value prior to the predetermined value at which stop processing is executed may be referred to as a predetermined signal (predetermined test signal). Processing for outputting toward the IF board may be referred to as processing for outputting a predetermined signal (predetermined test signal).

<Regarding the processing of the sub-control means based on the value of the difference number counter>
The main control means is configured to be capable of transmitting information based on the value of the difference counter to the sub-control means. As a result, it is possible to notify the player before the progress of the game is stopped.

For example, when the number of remaining 100 sheets exceeds 19,000, it is conceivable to display the remaining difference number of "remaining 100 sheets" on the liquid crystal display, and to execute an ending effect or sound. Then, every time the difference number is updated and the remaining difference number decreases, the display of the remaining difference number such as "90 remaining sheets" or "85 remaining sheets" is updated. When the difference number exceeds 19000, the player can be given a sense of accomplishment by means of a congratulatory display such as "Complete" or "Congratulations" or the execution of a voice. A state in which the remaining difference number until the stop is displayed, an ending effect or voice is being executed, or a state in which the remaining difference number until the stop is not displayed but an ending effect or voice regarding the stop is being executed It is called an operation advance notification state (regarding stopping). It should be noted that the operation advance notification state is a state related to the sub-control means.

By doing so, it is possible to set the game goal to stop the game when the differential number exceeds 19000, so that the interest in the game is improved.

Also, for example, if the remaining difference number exceeds 19,000 after the remaining 100 sheets, and the remaining difference number display of "100 remaining sheets" is executed on the liquid crystal display, the remaining difference number increases and the remaining difference number becomes 100 sheets. is exceeded, it is conceivable to erase (hide) the remaining difference number display. At this time, when the remaining difference number becomes 100 again, the remaining difference number display of "remaining 100 sheets" is executed on the liquid crystal display.

By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play from being lowered due to the remaining difference number display not disappearing due to the difference number continuing to fall.

Also, for example, if the difference number exceeds 19000 during the bonus and the progress of the game is not stopped until the end of the bonus, the difference number exceeds 19000 during the bonus and after the blessing display is displayed, the difference number is 19000. Blessing display does not disappear even if it falls below . In addition, the blessing display continues until the end of the bonus.

By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player's sense of accomplishment from being hindered due to the disappearance of the blessing display, thereby preventing the loss of interest in the game.

The ending effect or sound may be a continuous effect with a story or may be a still image. Even in this case, the ending performance or voice can be prevented from being executed more than necessary by ending the ending performance or voice when the residual difference number is less than the threshold value that triggers execution of the ending performance or voice.

When the difference number reaches 19,000, a blessing effect is suddenly displayed and the game is stopped. At the time of insertion or in the middle of the game, a notice regarding the stop processing (for example, display or voice such as "Aim for 19000 coins!", "End with 19000 coins", etc.) may be performed, or a demo screen or menu screen may be displayed. A notification (for example, display or voice of "Aim for 19000 sheets!", "Finish with 19000 sheets", etc.) may be performed.

<Production mode in the operation advance notice state>
As a display mode on the display device in the operation advance notification state, a mode as shown in FIG. 54 is conceivable. In FIG. 54, the effect image in the normal state (including various game states such as CZ, AT, and non-AT as game states managed by the main control means) which is neither an operation advance notice state nor a stop state. , a lion and a girl character display, a heart effect display, a line display of "It was fun today", and a total acquisition number display of "TOTAL: 18000" are performed. In addition, in addition to the effect image displayed in the normal state as the effect image in the operation advance notice state (including various game states such as CZ, AT, and non-AT as game states managed by the main control means), "Coming soon The complete function is activated. The number of remaining difference is displayed as "100 sheets remaining until activation". In addition, the effect image that was displayed in the normal state and the activation notice notification state is not displayed as the effect image in the stop notification state (the state in which the progress of the game is stopped). The function has been activated." (notification regarding the termination process, termination notification) is performed. It should be noted that the display of the total acquisition number in the normal state does not always need to be displayed, and the total acquisition number is set to a predetermined threshold value (for example, 18000 shown in FIG. 54 or a value for transmitting a test interruption request signal to the test IF board). 18900, etc.) is displayed.

In the operation advance notification state, all of the total number display, part of the girl's character display, and all of the effect display are invisible due to the remaining difference number display. However, since the display area for displaying the remaining difference number is smaller than 50% of the display area of the entire screen, the player can generally grasp the effect image being executed. In FIG. 54, since the transparency of the remaining difference number display is set to 0%, the display of the layer behind the remaining difference number display is not visible, but the remaining difference number display is set to 10% transparency. to 90%. This makes it possible to grasp both the remaining difference number display and the effect image.

In addition, the remaining difference number display in the operation advance notification state is displayed above the display area of the display device, but the remaining difference number display may be displayed below or in the center of the display area of the display device. good. However, if it is displayed on the lower side or in the center, it may overlap with the display area of various information displays (game medal number display, award number display, or bet number display) and most of the effect image. By setting the transparency of the number display to an arbitrary value between 20% and 90%, it is possible for the player to visually recognize various information displays and effect images.

In addition, when any AT end condition (for example, the number of AT execution games, the number of differences during AT, or the number of AT navigation times, etc.) is satisfied in the operation advance notice state, the immersion prevention is given priority over the display of the remaining difference number. showing the display. As a result, the player can be made to visually recognize the addiction prevention display rather than the remaining difference number display, so that addiction to the game can be effectively prevented.

Also, contrary to the above-described embodiment, when any AT end condition (for example, the number of AT execution games, the number of differences during AT, or the number of AT navigation times, etc.) is satisfied in the operation advance notice state, the remaining difference The number display may be displayed with priority over the immersion prevention display. As a result, the player can quickly visually recognize the number of remaining differences until the stop state is reached.

In addition, when any AT end condition (for example, the number of AT execution games, the number of differences during AT, or the number of times of AT navigation, etc.) is satisfied in the operation advance notification state, the remaining difference number display and the immersion prevention display are displayed differently. area may be displayed. This allows the player to visually recognize both pieces of information. In this case, if the display area for the remaining difference number display and the immersion prevention display are configured to be displayed in a display area that originally overlaps, the display area for the immersion prevention display may be changed. The display area of the number display may be changed. Also, the display areas for the remaining difference number display and the immersion prevention display may be determined in advance so that they do not overlap even if they are displayed at the same time.

In addition, in the total score threshold reached state and the total score upper limit abnormality, a notification to prompt counting (counting switch prompt display) is performed. Both the remaining difference number display and the count switch promotion display are displayed. This allows the player to recognize both the display of the remaining difference number and the operation of the counting switch.

Further, when the total score threshold value reached state or the total score upper limit abnormality occurs in the operation advance notification state, the counting switch promotion display may be displayed with priority over the remaining difference number display. In this case, when the counting switch is operated while the counting switch promotion display is being displayed and the total score falls below the threshold value (15000 in this embodiment), the remaining difference number display is displayed. As a result, the state of reaching the total score threshold value can be canceled by quickly operating the counting switch, and the player can then recognize the display of the remaining difference.

Further, when the total score threshold value reached state or the total score upper limit abnormality occurs in the operation advance notification state, the remaining difference number display may be displayed with priority over the counting switch prompt display. As a result, the player can be given a sense of satisfaction when he/she wants to preferentially recognize the number of remaining differences.

<Production mode in stop notification state>
In the stop notification state, the character display of the lion and the girl, the effect display, the dialogue display, and the total acquisition number display are all invisible. In addition, instead of displaying the number of remaining differences, a stop display is performed. In FIG. 54, the stop display is displayed in the center of the display area of the display device, but the effect image is not displayed (transparency of the stop display is 0%). May be displayed anywhere including

Further, the stop display in the stop notification state may be 50% or more of the display area of the entire screen. However, when displaying other information (display that the menu screen can be displayed by operating the sub switch or display to call attention), the stop display in the stop notification state is 50% to 90% of the display area of the full screen. Any value between

Although the congratulatory display is not displayed in the stop notification state of FIG. 54, a congratulatory display using a character may be displayed instead of the black background image. However, even when the blessing display is displayed, the effect image during the game is not displayed.

In addition, it becomes a stop notification state during AT (when AT's arbitrary end condition (for example, AT execution game count, difference number during AT, AT navigation count, etc.) is not satisfied but the stop condition is met), stop When displaying the display, an immersion prevention display may be displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the immersion prevention display, which is originally displayed on the end screen of the AT, from not being displayed. The immersion prevention display at this time may be the same display mode and display time as when displayed on the AT end screen, or may be a different display mode and display time than when displayed on the AT end screen. good too. In addition, the display area of the immersion prevention display is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the display area of the stopping display, but the immersion prevention display is hidden (becomes invisible) after a predetermined time. In this case, the display area for the immersion prevention display and the display area for the stop display may overlap.

Also, contrary to the above-described embodiment, it becomes a stop notification state during AT (although an arbitrary end condition of AT (for example, the number of AT execution games, the number of differences during AT, or the number of AT navigation times, etc.) is not met) When the stop condition is satisfied), when the stop display is displayed, it is not necessary to display the immersion prevention display. As a result, the visibility of the stopping display is not lowered, so that the player can quickly recognize that the game is in the stopping state.

In addition, it becomes a stop notification state during AT (when AT's arbitrary end condition (for example, AT execution game count, difference number during AT, AT navigation count, etc.) is not satisfied but the stop condition is met), stop Even if the immersion prevention display is not displayed when displaying the display, when any AT termination condition is satisfied and the stopping condition is satisfied ) may display the immersion prevention display when the stop display is displayed. As a result, the player can recognize that the AT has ended even when the game is stopped, and can give a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, it becomes a stop notification state during AT (when AT's arbitrary end condition (for example, AT execution game count, difference number during AT, AT navigation count, etc.) is not satisfied but the stop condition is met), stop This is the case where the immersion prevention display is not displayed when the display is displayed, and even when the AT's arbitrary end condition is satisfied and the stop condition is satisfied (when the AT's arbitrary end condition and stop condition are satisfied at the same time) The immersion prevention display may not be displayed when the stop display is displayed. As a result, the visibility of the stopping display is not lowered, so that the player can quickly recognize that the game is in the stopping state.

In addition, in the total score threshold reached state and the total score upper limit abnormality, a notification (counting switch prompt display) is performed to prompt counting, so when the stopping condition is satisfied in the total score threshold reached state or the total score upper limit abnormality, the counting switch Both the promotion display and the stop display are displayed. As a result, the player can be made aware of both the stop state and the operation of the counting switch.

Further, when the stopping condition is satisfied in the total score threshold reached state or the total score upper limit abnormality, the counting switch promotion display may be displayed with priority over the stopping display. In this case, when the counting switch is operated while the counting switch promotion display is being displayed and the total score falls below the threshold value (15000 in this embodiment), the stopping display is displayed. As a result, the state of reaching the total score threshold value can be released by quickly operating the counting switch, and the player can be made aware of the stop state after that.

In addition, when the stopping condition is satisfied in the total score threshold reaching state or the total score upper limit abnormality, if the counting switch prompt display is displayed with priority over the stopping display, counting is performed while the counting switch prompt display is displayed. Even after the switch is operated and the total score falls below the threshold value (15000 in this embodiment), the counting switch prompting display may be continuously displayed. For example, the counting switch promotion display may be continuously displayed until the counting switch is operated and the total score becomes zero. Then, after the total score becomes 0, the stopping display is displayed. As a result, the player can be notified that the count switch is to be operated (to count all the total points), and can be made to recognize that the game is in a stop state after that. If the counting switch is operated, the total score falls below the threshold value, and the counting process is stopped by releasing the counting switch before the total score becomes 0, the display of the counting switch prompting display is terminated and the processing is terminated. The display may be displayed, or the counting switch prompting display may be continuously displayed.

Further, when the stop condition is satisfied in the total score threshold reached state or the total score upper limit abnormality, the stop display may be displayed with priority over the count switch prompt display. In the stop display, the count switch prompt display is displayed as a warning display (described later), so even if the count switch prompt display for the total score threshold reached state or the total score upper limit abnormality is not displayed, the count switch prompt display for the stop display is displayed. Since the information is displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the duplicate display of the same information.

<Regarding the processing of the main control means or sub-control means during the stopping process>
When the stop processing is executed by the main control means, the sub-control means notifies the player that the progress of the game has stopped (stop notification).

In addition to the above-mentioned blessing display, the stop notice may include a stop display such as "Complete function activated", "Stopped state", "Game finished", etc. shown in FIG. 54, or a voice. can be anything. The stop display may be displayed at the same time as the blessing display, or after the blessing display is performed, the blessing display may be ended and the stop display or voice may be performed. In addition to the stop display, a warning display (various switch prompt display) such as "Please press the settlement switch" or "Please press the count switch", or voice may be executed together.

As an end notice, it is possible to execute stop processing before executing the blessing display and display the blessing during the stop processing, or execute a predetermined period of freeze before executing the stop processing, and perform a predetermined period of time. The stop display may be executed when the congratulatory display is executed and the stop processing after a predetermined period of time is executed.

Further, when performing the stopping display after the blessing display, the attention calling display is not performed while the blessing display is being performed, and the attention calling display is performed when the stopping display is performed.

By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to operate the settlement switch or the counting switch, and since the feeling of accomplishment caused by executing the blessing display is not hindered, the amusement of the game is improved. .

In addition, during the stop notification, there will be BGM, etc. other than the sound such as the stop character voice "Stopped" etc. No sound is output and it is silent. In addition, during the stop notification, there will be BGM, etc. other than the sound such as the stop character voice "Stopped" etc. The sound may be output at a volume lower than the volume at which the error was reported.

By constructing in this way, the impression of the stop state is less likely to be bad for the player, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize it as an event to be aimed at, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, the function of the sub-switch managed by the sub-control means is valid during the stop notification. For this reason, even during stop processing (during stop notification), it is possible to open the menu screen or open the volume change screen by operating the sub-switch. Note that the volume that can be changed from the volume change screen does not include the volume related to the stop notification, so the volume during the stop notification cannot be changed.

In addition, by opening the menu screen during the stopping process and displaying the two-dimensional code including the game history, the game history can be read by the mobile terminal and saved on the server (so-called "gaming machine interlocking service"). can be provided to the player. In addition, since the stop display is displayed on the display device, when the two-dimensional code is displayed from the menu screen except during the stop notification, it is displayed in a predetermined area in the center of the screen of the display device. Since the area overlaps with the stop display, the display area of the two-dimensional code during the stop notification is displayed in a region that is different from the predetermined area and does not overlap with the stop display.

Further, as another aspect of displaying the stop display and the two-dimensional code, even if the display areas of the stop display and the two-dimensional code overlap, by alternately displaying the stop display and the two-dimensional code, It may be configured to enable reading of the two-dimensional code while executing the stop notification.

Further, the stop notification does not end due to the passage of time during the stop processing. In other words, the suspension notification continues until the suspension state is canceled (until the setting change process or the RWM abnormality process is executed).

During the termination process, even if any of the above-described recoverable errors occurs, the specified error may not be detected, or the specified error may be detected but the specified error may occur. A mode in which no processing is performed may be adopted. In any case, it is configured so as not to execute notification regarding a predetermined error.

This is because, as described above, the stop processing is looped during the stop processing, so even if a predetermined error is detected in the interrupt processing, the predetermined error processing in the main loop processing is not executed. . It should be noted that if the interrupt processing is prohibited during the stop processing, the predetermined error will not be detected.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the trouble of canceling the error even though the game cannot be progressed by executing the stopping process, and it is possible to reduce the work load of the game parlor clerk.

If the configuration is such that predetermined error processing is executed within interrupt processing, the predetermined error processing will be executed even during abort processing. Predetermined error processing can be prevented from being executed during the stop processing by determining whether or not and not executing the predetermined error processing during the stop processing. Alternatively, it may be realized by prohibiting interrupt processing during stop processing.

In view of the fact that fraud can be quickly detected by executing predetermined error processing even during cancellation processing, a configuration may be adopted in which predetermined error processing can be executed during cancellation processing.

In this mode, interrupt processing is permitted even during stop processing, and when a predetermined error is detected in interrupt processing, predetermined error processing in interrupt processing is executed to execute predetermined error notification processing. By executing predetermined error processing when a predetermined error is detected in stop processing, predetermined error processing during loop processing of stop processing after a predetermined error is detected in interrupt processing can be performed. to execute predetermined error notification processing.

By doing so, it is possible to execute fraud-related processing even during the termination processing, thereby preventing fraudulent activity.

It should be noted that communication with the lending unit is still being executed even while the stop processing is being executed, and by outputting the security signal of gaming machine fraud 1 of the hole control/fraud monitoring information and the complete signal, the stop is stopped on the lending unit side. Notifies that processing is being performed. The security signal is a signal output by setting change, setting confirmation, fraud detection, or termination processing.

Specifically, the security signal is Bit 5 of the game machine fraud 1 (main control) included in the hole controller/fraud monitoring information of the game machine information notification, and when the stopping process is executed, the game is a complete signal. Bit 6 of machine fraud 1 (main control) becomes 1, Bit 6 of gaming machine fraud 1 (main control) becomes 1, and Bit 5 of gaming machine fraud 1 (main control), which is a security signal, becomes 1.

By doing so, it is possible to notify the game arcade that the stopping process has been executed, so that the game arcade can take appropriate measures.

<Other configurations related to stop monitoring processing or stop processing>
The stop monitoring process and stop process may be configured to be executed outside the use area. Alternatively, the suspension monitoring process may be executed outside the usage area and the suspension process may be performed within the usage area, or the suspension monitoring process and the suspension process may be configured to be performed within the usage area. may be

Also, the stop monitoring process and stop process may be executed outside the use area of the main control board, or the stop monitoring process and stop process may be executed outside the use area of the game medal number control board. .

During the stopping process, the process for outputting the external signal is continued to be executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the outside that the stop processing is in progress, so that the game hall manager can quickly grasp the situation of the game machine.

The stop notification may be made not only by the liquid crystal display or the voice output from the speaker, but also by the lighting mode of each LED such as the frame lamp, the lower panel lamp, the win number indicator, or the credit indicator.

With this configuration, it is possible to notify that the game is in a stop state even in a game machine without liquid crystal.

<Processing for Ending the Advantageous Section with the Differential Number of Game Media>
In the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine that terminates the advantageous section when MY in the advantageous section exceeds 2400 has been mainly described.

Here, to describe the MY of the advantageous section in detail, the point with the lowest ball output after the start of the advantageous section is set as the reference (0), and when the number of differences from the reference exceeds "2400", the advantageous section was to end the

As a result, it was possible to give the player only a maximum difference of "2414" in one advantageous section. Therefore, when a player spends a lot of game media in a game in an advantageous section, the spent game medium cannot be recovered in the advantageous section, which makes the game less attractive to the player.

For example, even if a game in which the difference in game media in the advantageous section (the number of game media spent by the player) is -3000 and enters a predetermined game state (for example, AT state), the MY in the advantageous section exceeds 2400. Because the game ends when the game ends, the maximum number of game media that can be acquired in one advantageous section was only about 2400 (the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section ended with about -600). .

Therefore, instead of ending the advantageous section when the MY of the advantageous section exceeds 2400, the start time of the advantageous section is set as the starting point (0), and the difference in the number of game media obtained in one advantageous section (advantageous section The difference between the total number of game media awarded and the total number of game media betted in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 2400).

Specifically, the total IN number of game media in the advantageous section (also referred to as the total inserted number or total bet number) and the total OUT number of game media in the advantageous section (also referred to as the total payout number or total awarded number) are considered. That is, when the difference between the number of game media OUT in the advantageous section and the number of game media IN in the advantageous section (hereinafter referred to as the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section) exceeds 2400, the advantageous section is terminated. Configure. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with improved gaming performance compared to the conventional one, while suppressing the gambling nature within a certain range.

For example, when a game in which the difference number of game media in the advantageous section is -3000 enters a predetermined game state (for example, AT state), the difference number of the game media in the advantageous section is increased from the start time of the advantageous section. If it exceeds 2400, the advantageous section can end. Therefore, from a game in which the difference in the game media in the advantageous section is -3000, a maximum of about 5400 game media can be obtained (the difference in the game media in the advantageous section is +2400 at one time). Advantageous section ends).

Note that the difference in the number of game media obtained in one advantageous interval (difference between the total number of game media awarded in the advantageous interval and the total number of gaming media betted in the advantageous interval) exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 2400). If configured to end when exceeded, the advantageous interval may end at a value less than this predetermined number. In other words, when the start time of the advantageous interval is taken as the starting point (0), the maximum difference in the number of game media obtained in one advantageous interval is a predetermined number (precisely, the predetermined number + α (α is the maximum value in one game). is the difference number of game media)).

Further, even if the advantageous section is terminated when the number of difference in game media obtained in one advantageous section exceeds a predetermined number, the difference in game media obtained in one advantageous section may be set. It is also possible to terminate the advantageous section if any termination condition is satisfied before the number exceeds a predetermined number.

Specific processing for ending the advantageous section with the difference in the number of game media will be described below with reference to the drawings.

≪Processing to end the advantageous section with the difference in the number of game media (additional version)≫
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of processing for ending the advantageous section with the difference in the number of game media. This processing corresponds to a modification of the advantageous section clear counter management processing of FIG. 46, FIG. 47, or FIG.

FIG. 55 has an advantageous section difference number counter. The advantageous section difference number counter is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a storage area capable of storing a value corresponding to the difference number of game media in the advantageous section.

The value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter is not cleared when the power is turned on or off. Also, the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter is cleared by the RWM clear accompanying the end of the advantageous section. Also, the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter is cleared by the RWM clear associated with the setting change. Also, it is not cleared when the stopping state is reached by the stopping counter (difference number counter).

Although the advantageous section difference number counter is composed of 2 bytes, the advantageous section difference number counter may be composed of 3 bytes or 4 bytes.

First, in the "advantageous section clear counter -1", 1 is subtracted from the value stored in the advantageous section clear counter. If the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the advantageous section clear counter is less than 0 (if there is a carry-down), the carry flag becomes 1. Further, when the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the advantageous section clear counter does not fall below 0 (when there is no carry-down), the carry flag becomes 0. Further, when the value stored in the advantageous section clear counter is subtracted by 1 and the result is 0, the zero flag is set to 1.

The advantageous interval clear counter is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, as described above, and is a storage area capable of storing a value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous interval.

In "advantage zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?", if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the advantageous zone clear counter does not fall below 0, the result is NO. Specifically, if the carry flag is not 1, the result is NO. In other words, if it is determined as NO in the question "Before subtraction of the advantageous section clear counter = 0?", it means that a value of 1 or more is stored in the advantageous section clear counter in the current game. In other words, it means that the current game is in an advantageous section.

On the other hand, if it is determined as YES in the question "Before subtraction of advantageous section clear counter = 0?", it means that the current game is in the normal section.

In the case of "Is the next game an advantageous section?", determination is made according to the information of the RWM area stored in the main control board. For example, in the current game (game in the normal section), the transition to the advantageous section may be determined, and the determination may be made according to the information in the RWM area storing the information indicating the transition to the advantageous section. Also, for example, if it is a specification that determines the transition to the advantageous section in the current game (game in the normal section) and also determines the game state of the transition destination, the game state of the transition destination is stored. The determination may be made according to the information in the RWM area. In any case, it is possible to determine whether or not the next game is in the advantageous section according to the information that enables determination of whether the next game is in the advantageous section. If the next game is in the advantageous section, the result is YES, and if the next game is not in the advantageous section, the result is NO.

In the "advantage zone clear counter initial value storage", the initial value is stored in the RWM area in which the value of the advantageous zone clear counter can be stored. For example, if the initial value is 1500, 1500 is stored in the RWM area that can store the value of the advantageous section clear counter. Also, for example, if the initial value is 3000, 3000 is stored in the RWM area that can store the value of the advantageous section clear counter. This initial value corresponds to the maximum number of games that can be played in one advantageous section. Therefore, the initial value is not limited to 1500 or 3000, and may be any predetermined value. For example, the number of games (for example, 65535) that does not end in one day may be set. By configuring in this way, a gaming machine with a maximum number of games played in an advantageous section of 1500, a gaming machine with a maximum number of games played in an advantageous section of 3000, and a maximum number of games played in an advantageous section are not substantially defined ( Since 65535 is not the number of games that can be played in a day, it is practically unlimited).

In the "advantageous section difference counter initial value set", the initial value to be stored in the advantageous section difference counter is set in the register. Specifically, the initial value is set to 63135 (65535-2400) and stored in the HL register.

Here, the initial value of 63135 is the maximum value 65535 that can be stored in a 2-byte storage area (corresponding to the size of the storage area of the advantageous interval difference counter). This is the value obtained by subtracting the value "2400" corresponding to the difference number of game media in the section. In this example, the condition for ending the advantageous section is that the number of game media differences in the advantageous section exceeds 2400. However, the condition for ending the advantageous section is that the number of game media differences in the advantageous section is 2400. is not limited to exceeding For example, as a condition for ending the advantageous section, it is possible to set a predetermined value, such as the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section exceeding 4,800. If, as a condition for ending the advantageous section, the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section exceeds 4800, the initial value is set to 60735 (65535-4800).

Also, in this example, the advantageous section difference number counter is 2 bytes, but it can be 3 bytes. If the advantageous section difference number counter is set to 3 bytes and the condition for ending the advantageous section is that the difference number of game media in the advantageous section exceeds 2400, the initial value is set to 16774815 (16777215-2400).

The effect of setting the initial value to "value corresponding to the size of the storage area of the advantageous section difference counter" - "value corresponding to the number of game media differences in the advantageous section determined as the end condition of the advantageous section". will be described later.

In "advantage zone clear counter before subtraction=1?", it is determined whether or not the advantageous zone clear counter is 1 before "advantage zone clear counter -1" is performed. For example, if the value of the advantageous interval clear counter is 0 as a result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the advantageous interval clear counter in "advantageous interval clear counter -1" (specifically, if the zero flag is 1) is YES. On the other hand, if the advantageous interval clear counter value is not 0 as a result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the advantageous interval clear counter in "advantageous interval clear counter -1" (specifically, if the zero flag is 0) is NO.

It should be noted that the value stored in the advantageous interval difference number counter is transferred to a predetermined register (e.g., HL register).

In the case of "At the time of replay operation?", when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed (on the active line) as a result of the current game (when the next game is a game by replay), YES is determined. On the other hand, as a result of the current game, if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is not stopped and displayed (on the active line) (if the next game is not a replay game), NO is determined.

In "Number of IN<Number of OUT?", it is determined whether or not the number of OUT is greater than the number of IN.

For example, the result of the game this time,
a) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 0, it is judged as NO.
b) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 1, the decision is NO.
c) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 3, the decision is NO.
d) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 10, YES is determined.

More specifically, IN number-OUT number is performed, and the calculation result is stored in a predetermined register (for example, A register). As a result of the calculation of the number of INs and the number of OUTs, if there is a carry flag (when the carry flag becomes 1), YES is determined; case), it is judged as NO. In other words, when the number of difference in game media in the current game is larger in the number of IN than the number of OUT, the carry flag is 0 and YES is determined. In addition, when the number of difference in game media in the current game is smaller than the number of OUT, the carry flag is 1 and it is judged as NO.

To give a specific example, as a result of the game this time,
a) When the IN number=3 and the OUT number=0, the A register=3 and the carry flag=0.
b) When the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 1, the A register is 2 and the carry flag is 0.
c) When the number of INs=3 and the number of OUTs=3, the A register=0 and the carry flag=0.
d) When the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 10, the A register is 249 and the carry flag is 1.

Here, as for the IN number, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay as a result of the previous game is stopped and displayed (on the active line), and the number of bets in the current game is automatically betted (for example, "3" is set by automatic betting). ), and, as a result of the current game, if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is not stopped and displayed (on the active line), even if the number of bets set by automatic betting is handle.

On the other hand, as a result of the current game, the number of IN and the number of OUT are determined to be "IN number< Number of OUTs?” is not judged. In other words, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped (on the active line) as a result of the current game (when the next game is a replay game), the number of bets in the current game is not treated as the IN number. . Similarly, as a result of the game this time, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped (on the active line) and displayed (when the next game is a game by replay), the number of grants of the game this time (or the number of automatic bets) is not treated as the number of OUTs.

In addition, although the number of IN - the number of OUT is performed for "the number of IN < the number of OUT?", the determination may be made by the number of OUT - the number of IN. In other words, it suffices if the number of game media in the current game can be calculated using the number of INs and the number of OUTs.

In the "advantageous section difference counter subtraction", the calculation result (IN number - OUT number ) value. Note that the carry flag is set to 1 when a carry occurs due to the "advantageous section difference number counter subtraction".
For example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter (the value of the HL register) is 2,
a) When the number of INs=3 and the number of OUTs=0, the HL register=65535 and the carry flag=1. Although 2-3=-1, a negative value cannot be stored in the register. As a result, a carry occurs, resulting in 65535.
b) When the IN number=3 and the OUT number=1, the HL register=0 and the carry flag=0.
c) When the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 3, the HL register is 2 and the carry flag is 0.

In "advantageous section difference number counter < 0", it is determined whether or not a carry-down has occurred by "advantageous section difference number counter subtraction". It is judged as YES when a lower digit occurs, and as NO when a lower digit does not occur. In the above example, under the condition that the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter is 2, a) If the number of INs=3 and the number of OUTs=0, YES is determined. In the above example, under the condition that the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter is 2, a) If the number of INs=3 and the number of OUTs=1, it is determined as NO. Similarly, in the above example, under the condition that the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter is 2, c) If the number of INs=3 and the number of OUTs=3, it is judged as NO.

If the result of "advantageous section difference number counter < 0" is YES, the carry flag is set to 1, so a predetermined calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0. For example, as a predetermined operation, the exclusive OR of the value of the A register and the value of the A register is performed. As a result of this exclusive OR, the carry flag becomes 0. As the predetermined operation, the exclusive OR of the value of the A register and the value of the A register is taken as an example, but any operation for setting the carry flag to 0 may be used. .

In the "advantageous section difference number counter lower limit value set", when a carry occurs due to "advantageous section difference number counter subtraction", a predetermined lower limit is set in the register (HL register in this embodiment) that stores the calculation result. Store the value (0). In the above example, under the condition that the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter is 2, a) when the number of INs = 3 and the number of OUTs = 0, the HL Register=65535. In such a case, 0 is stored in the HL register by "advantage section difference number counter lower limit value set".

In other words, when the value stored in the HL register undergoes a carry-down and an abnormal value is stored, by storing the lower limit value of 0 in the HL register, the number of game media in the advantageous section can be calculated as accurately as possible. It should be noted that even when the "advantageous interval difference counter lower limit value set" is executed, the advantageous interval is continued, and it is possible to provide the player with a game in the advantageous interval. In other words, the processing in FIG. 55 is executed while the advantageous interval continues even in the game after the “advantage interval difference number counter lower limit value set” is executed.

In addition, in FIG. 55, the processing of "advantageous section difference number counter lower limit value set" is provided, but the processing of "advantageous section difference number counter lower limit value set" may not be provided. Specifically, when it is determined as YES based on "advantageous interval difference counter<0", the value stored in the advantageous interval difference counter of the previous game may be set. For example, if the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter is 2, and the number of INs and the number of OUTs in the game is a) IN number = 3 and OUT number = 0, then the value is stored in the advantageous section difference number counter. It may be configured such that the value of the counter is 2 (the value is the same as the value of the advantageous interval difference number counter in the previous game). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an abnormal value (a value with a lower value) from being stored in the "advantageous section difference number counter". In addition, since the process corresponding to "advantageous section difference number counter lower limit value set" is eliminated, the program capacity can be reduced.

In other words, when a digit is dropped by "advantageous section difference counter subtraction", the advantageous section difference counter value is As such, it prevents abnormal values from entering. In other words, even if the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section becomes a negative value, the advantage section can be ended using the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section as accurately as possible.

In the "advantageous section difference number counter addition", the complement of the value (value stored in the A register) of the operation result (IN number - OUT number) in "IN number < OUT number?" Remember. Then, the calculated complement (the value stored in the A register) is added to the HL register.

It should be noted that the complement in the "advantageous section difference number counter addition" refers to the smallest number among the numbers that carry over 1 byte (255). For example, it can be derived with the value of the 0-A register, or with one instruction (NEG instruction) for deriving the complement.

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter (the value of the HL register) is 2,
d) When the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 10, the A register is 249. First, 7, which is the complement of 249, is derived by the "advantageous section difference number counter addition". Then, by calculating 2+7, 9 is stored in the HL register. Since 2+7 does not exceed 65535 (because there is no carry), the carry flag is 0.

Also, for example, under a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter (the value of the HL register) is 65530,
d) When the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 10, the A register is 249. First, 7, which is the complement of 249, is derived by the "advantageous section difference number counter addition". Then, by calculating 65530+7, 2 is stored in the HL register. Although 65530+7 becomes 65537, 2 is stored in the HL register because it exceeds 65535 (due to a carryover). Also, since there is a carry, the carry flag is 1.

In the "advantageous section difference counter storage", the value stored in the HL register is stored in the advantageous section difference counter. In other words, this is the process of updating the advantageous section difference number counter.

For example, if 63135 is stored in the HL register by "advantage section difference counter initial value set", 63135 is stored in the advantageous section difference counter by "advantage section difference counter save".

For example, if the result is YES in the "replay operation", the value of the advantageous section difference counter of the previous game is stored in the HL register. The same value as the advantageous section difference number counter is stored in the advantageous section difference number counter.

For example, if the result of "advantageous section difference counter < 0?" is NO, the difference number of game media in the current game (IN number - OUT number) is subtracted from the value of the advantageous section difference counter in the previous game. Since the value is stored in the HL register, the value obtained by subtracting the difference of the game medium of the current game from the value of the advantageous interval difference counter of the previous game is stored as the advantageous interval difference by “advantage interval difference counter storage”. Store in a number counter.

For example, if "advantageous section difference counter < 0?" is YES, the lower limit (0) is stored in the HL register. 0) is stored in the advantageous section difference number counter.

For example, after the "advantageous section difference counter addition", the value obtained by adding the medium difference number (OUT number-IN number) of the current game to the value of the advantageous section difference counter of the previous game is stored in the HL register. Therefore, the value obtained by adding the difference number of the game medium of the current game to the value of the advantageous section difference number counter of the previous game is stored in the advantageous section difference number counter by "advantage section difference number counter storage".

In “advantageous interval difference >2400?”, it is determined whether or not the difference in game media in the advantageous interval exceeds 2400 or not. Specifically, it is determined whether the carry flag is 1 or not. If the carry flag is 1, the determination is YES, and if the carry flag is not 1 (when the carry flag is 0), the determination is NO. The case where the carry flag is 1 means that there is a carry due to the "advantageous section difference number counter addition". On the other hand, when there is a carry-down due to the "advantageous section difference number counter subtraction", the carry flag is temporarily set to 1. Number > 2400?" can be determined as NO.

In other words, in the case of “advantageous interval difference > 2400?”, it is possible to determine whether or not the difference in game media in the advantageous interval exceeds 2400 depending on whether the carry flag is 1 or not. Therefore, the program capacity can be reduced compared to the case of directly comparing the difference number of game media in the advantageous section with the constant (2400).

In this way, in the case of “advantageous section difference > 2400?”, it is determined whether or not the number of game media differences in the advantageous section exceeds 2400 based on whether the carry flag is 1. Therefore, the “advantageous section difference "Number counter initial value set" stores 63135 as the initial value.

As mentioned above, this 63135 is the maximum value "65535" that can be stored in the storage area of 2 bytes (corresponding to the size of the storage area of the advantageous interval difference number counter). This is the value obtained by subtracting the value "2400" corresponding to the difference number of game media. That is, when the difference number of game media in the advantageous section ending the advantageous section exceeds 2400, the carry flag is set to 1 because it exceeds 65535.

Also, by storing 63135 as the initial value, it is possible to store a value corresponding to -63135 as the number of differences in game media with the starting time of the advantageous section as the starting point (0). For example, when the initial value is 63135, the situation where the value of the advantageous section difference number counter is 13135 means that the difference number is -50000 from the start time of the advantageous section as the starting point (0).

As described above, the initial value is 63135, which is "the value corresponding to the size of the storage area of the advantageous section difference number counter" - "the value corresponding to the number of game media differences in the advantageous section determined as the condition for ending the advantageous section". , the program capacity for determining whether or not the number of game media differences in the advantageous section exceeds 2400 can be reduced. Also, by storing 63135 as the initial value, it is possible to store up to a value equivalent to -63135 as the number of game media differences in the advantageous section. Although 63135 is stored as the initial value in this example, even if the initial value is a value other than 63135, a value other than 63135 may be adopted as the initial value as long as it has the same effect. can be done.

In the "RWM initialization", all the parameters affecting the performance related to the indication function are updated to 0, and the advantageous section clear counter management processing ends. The parameters that affect performance related to the instruction function include the number of AT games, the game state related to AT, an advantageous section clear counter, an advantageous section difference number counter, and the like. Then, by updating the advantageous section type to 0, the next game becomes a game in the normal section, which is not the advantageous section. In the game of the advantageous section, the game next to the game in which the "RWM initialization" is not executed becomes the game of the advantageous section (the advantageous section does not end).

In other words, when an abnormal value is stored in the HL register due to a carry-down, by storing 0 as the lower limit in the HL register, it becomes possible to calculate the number of differences in the advantageous interval as accurately as possible. . It should be noted that even when the "advantageous interval difference counter lower limit value set" is executed, the advantageous interval is continued, and it is possible to provide the player with a game in the advantageous interval. In other words, the processing in FIG. 55 is executed while the advantageous interval continues even in the game after the “advantage interval difference number counter lower limit value set” is executed.

In addition, although the number of OUT is subtracted from the number of IN in "number of IN<number of OUT?", the number of IN may be subtracted from the number of OUT. In the case where the number of IN is subtracted from the number of OUT, when it is judged as NO in "the number of IN < the number of OUT?" ”, the complement is calculated by a predetermined operation and stored in the A register (difference number of game media in the current game), then the value stored in the HL register (the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter ), the value stored in the A register (difference number of game media in the current game) can be subtracted. In other words, if the result of "IN number < OUT number?" Just do it.

Similarly, in the case where the configuration is such that the IN number is subtracted from the OUT number when "IN number < OUT number?" ), in the "advantageous section difference counter addition", the value stored in the HL register (the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter) is stored in the A register without calculating the complement. The value (difference number of game media in the current game) should be added. In other words, if the result of "IN number < OUT number?" Just do it.

≪Processing to end the advantageous section with the difference in the number of game media (subtraction version)≫
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an example of processing for ending the advantageous section with the difference in the number of game media. This processing corresponds to a modification of the advantageous section clear counter management processing of FIG. 46, FIG. 47, or FIG.

FIG. 56 has an advantageous section difference number counter. The advantageous section difference number counter is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a storage area capable of storing a value corresponding to the difference number of game media in the advantageous section.

The value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter is not cleared when the power is turned on or off. Also, the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter is cleared by the RWM clear accompanying the end of the advantageous section. Also, the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter is cleared by the RWM clear associated with the setting change. Also, it is not cleared when the stopping state is reached by the stopping counter.

Although the advantageous section difference number counter is composed of 2 bytes, the advantageous section difference number counter may be composed of 3 bytes or 4 bytes.

First, in the "advantageous section clear counter -1", 1 is subtracted from the value stored in the advantageous section clear counter. If the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the advantageous section clear counter is less than 0 (if there is a carry-down), the carry flag becomes 1. Further, when the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the advantageous section clear counter does not fall below 0 (when there is no carry-down), the carry flag becomes 0. Further, when the value stored in the advantageous section clear counter is subtracted by 1 and the result is 0, the zero flag is set to 1.

The advantageous interval clear counter is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, as described above, and is a storage area capable of storing a value corresponding to the number of games played in the advantageous interval.

In "advantage zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?", if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the advantageous zone clear counter does not fall below 0, the result is NO. Specifically, if the carry flag is not 1, the result is NO. In other words, if it is determined as NO in the question "Before subtraction of the advantageous section clear counter = 0?", it means that a value of 1 or more is stored in the advantageous section clear counter in the current game. In other words, it means that the current game is in an advantageous section.

On the other hand, if it is determined as YES in the question "Before subtraction of advantageous section clear counter = 0?", it means that the current game is in the normal section.

In the case of "Is the next game an advantageous section?", determination is made according to the information of the RWM area stored in the main control board. For example, in the current game (game in the normal section), the transition to the advantageous section may be determined, and the determination may be made according to the information in the RWM area storing the information indicating the transition to the advantageous section. Also, for example, if it is a specification that determines the transition to the advantageous section in the current game (game in the normal section) and also determines the game state of the transition destination, the game state of the transition destination is stored. The determination may be made according to the information in the RWM area. In any case, it is possible to determine whether or not the next game is in the advantageous section according to the information that enables determination of whether the next game is in the advantageous section. If the next game is in the advantageous section, the result is YES, and if the next game is not in the advantageous section, the result is NO.

In the "advantage zone clear counter initial value storage", the initial value is stored in the RWM area in which the value of the advantageous zone clear counter can be stored. For example, if the initial value is 1500, 1500 is stored in the RWM area that can store the value of the advantageous section clear counter. Also, for example, if the initial value is 3000, 3000 is stored in the RWM area that can store the value of the advantageous section clear counter. This initial value corresponds to the maximum number of games that can be played in one advantageous section. Therefore, the initial value is not limited to 1500 or 3000, and may be any predetermined value. For example, the number of games (for example, 65535) that does not end in one day may be set. By configuring in this way, a gaming machine with a maximum number of games played in an advantageous section of 1500, a gaming machine with a maximum number of games played in an advantageous section of 3000, and a maximum number of games played in an advantageous section are not substantially defined ( Since 65535 is not the number of games that can be played in a day, it is practically unlimited).

In the "advantageous section difference counter initial value set", the initial value to be stored in the advantageous section difference counter is set in the register. Specifically, the initial value is set to 2400 and stored in the HL register.

Here, the initial value of 2400 is a value “2400” corresponding to the number of game media difference in the advantageous section ending the advantageous section. In this example, the condition for ending the advantageous section is that the number of game media differences in the advantageous section exceeds 2400. However, the condition for ending the advantageous section is that the number of game media differences in the advantageous section is 2400. is not limited to exceeding For example, as a condition for ending the advantageous section, it is possible to set a predetermined value, such as the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section exceeding 4,800. If, as a condition for ending the advantageous section, the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section exceeds 4,800, the initial value is set to 4,800.

Also, in this example, the advantageous section difference number counter is 2 bytes, but it can be 3 bytes. The advantageous section difference number counter is set to 3 bytes, and if the condition for ending the advantageous section is that the difference number of game media in the advantageous section exceeds 2400, the initial value is set to 2400.

The effect of setting the initial value to "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section determined as the end condition of the advantageous section" will be described later.

In "advantage zone clear counter before subtraction=1?", it is determined whether or not the advantageous zone clear counter is 1 before "advantage zone clear counter -1" is performed. For example, if the value of the advantageous interval clear counter is 0 as a result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the advantageous interval clear counter in "advantageous interval clear counter -1" (specifically, if the zero flag is 1) is YES. On the other hand, if the advantageous interval clear counter value is not 0 as a result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the advantageous interval clear counter in "advantageous interval clear counter -1" (specifically, if the zero flag is 0) is NO.

It should be noted that the value stored in the advantageous interval difference number counter is transferred to a predetermined register (e.g., HL register).

In the case of "At the time of replay operation?", when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed (on the active line) as a result of the current game (when the next game is a game by replay), YES is determined. On the other hand, as a result of the current game, if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is not stopped and displayed (on the active line) (if the next game is not a replay game), NO is determined.

In "Number of IN<Number of OUT?", it is determined whether or not the number of OUT is greater than the number of IN.

For example, the result of the game this time,
a) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 0, it is judged as NO.
b) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 1, the decision is NO.
c) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 3, the decision is NO.
d) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 10, YES is determined.

More specifically, IN number-OUT number is performed, and the calculation result is stored in a predetermined register (for example, A register). As a result of the calculation of the number of INs and the number of OUTs, if there is a carry flag (when the carry flag becomes 1), YES is determined; case), it is judged as NO. In other words, when the number of difference in game media in the current game is larger in the number of IN than the number of OUT, the carry flag is 0 and YES is determined. In addition, when the number of difference in game media in the current game is smaller than the number of OUT, the carry flag is 1 and it is judged as NO.

To give a specific example, as a result of the game this time,
a) When the IN number=3 and the OUT number=0, the A register=3 and the carry flag=0.
b) When the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 1, the A register is 2 and the carry flag is 0.
c) When the number of INs=3 and the number of OUTs=3, the A register=0 and the carry flag=0.
d) When the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 10, the A register is 249 and the carry flag is 1.

Here, as for the IN number, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay as a result of the previous game is stopped and displayed (on the active line), and the number of bets in the current game is automatically betted (for example, "3" is set by automatic betting). ), and, as a result of the current game, if the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is not stopped and displayed (on the active line), even if the number of bets set by automatic betting is handle.

On the other hand, as a result of the current game, the number of IN and the number of OUT are determined to be "IN number< Number of OUTs?” is not judged. In other words, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped (on the active line) as a result of the current game (when the next game is a replay game), the number of bets in the current game is not treated as the IN number. . Similarly, as a result of the game this time, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped (on the active line) and displayed (when the next game is a game by replay), the number of grants of the game this time (or the number of automatic bets) is not treated as the number of OUTs.

In addition, although the number of IN - the number of OUT is performed for "the number of IN < the number of OUT?", the determination may be made by the number of OUT - the number of IN. In other words, it suffices if the number of game media in the current game can be calculated using the number of INs and the number of OUTs.

In the "advantageous section difference number counter addition", the calculation result (IN number - OUT number ) is added. Note that the carry flag is set to 1 when a carry occurs due to the "advantageous section difference number counter addition".
For example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter (the value of the HL register) is 65534,
a) When the number of INs=3 and the number of OUTs=0, the HL register=1 and the carry flag=1. Although 65534+3=65537, a value exceeding 65535 cannot be stored in a 2-byte pair register (HL register). Therefore, a carry occurs and becomes 1.
b) When the number of IN is 3 and the number of OUT is 1, the HL register is 0 and the carry flag is 1. Although 65534+2=65536, a value exceeding 65535 cannot be stored in a 2-byte pair register (HL register). Therefore, a carry occurs and becomes 0.
c) When the number of INs=3 and the number of OUTs=3, the HL register=65534 and the carry flag=0.

If "advantageous section difference number counter > upper limit value", it is determined whether or not a carry has occurred by "advantageous section difference number counter addition". If a carry occurs, YES is determined, and if no carry occurs, NO is determined. In the above example, under the condition that the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter is 65534, a) If the number of INs=3 and the number of OUTs=0, YES is determined. In the above example, under the condition that the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter is 65534, a) If the number of INs=3 and the number of OUTs=1, it is determined as YES. Similarly, in the above example, under the condition that the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter is 65534, c) If the number of INs=3 and the number of OUTs=3, then NO is determined.

If the result of “advantageous section difference number counter>upper limit value?” is YES, the carry flag is 1, so a predetermined operation is performed to set the carry flag to 0. FIG. For example, as a predetermined operation, the exclusive OR of the value of the A register and the value of the A register is performed. As a result of this exclusive OR, the carry flag becomes 0. As the predetermined operation, the exclusive OR of the value of the A register and the value of the A register is taken as an example, but any operation for setting the carry flag to 0 may be used. .

In the "advantageous section difference number counter upper limit value set", when a carry occurs due to the "advantageous section difference number counter addition", a predetermined upper limit is set in the register (HL register in this embodiment) that stores the calculation result. Store the value (65535). In the above example, under the condition that the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter is 65534, a) If the number of INs = 3 and the number of OUTs = 0, the "advantageous section difference counter subtraction" Register=1. In such a case, 65535 is stored in the HL register by "advantageous interval difference number counter upper limit value set".

In other words, when a carry occurs in the value stored in the HL register and an abnormal value is stored, by storing the upper limit value of 65535 in the HL register, the difference number of game media in the advantageous section can be calculated as accurately as possible. It should be noted that even when the "advantageous interval difference counter upper limit value set" is executed, the advantageous interval is continued, and it is possible to provide the player with a game in the advantageous interval. In other words, the processing in FIG. 56 is executed while the advantageous interval continues even in the game after the “advantageous interval difference number counter upper limit value set” is executed.

In addition, in FIG. 56, the processing of "advantageous section difference number counter upper limit value set" is provided, but the processing of "advantageous section difference number counter upper limit value set" may not be provided. Specifically, if YES is determined based on "advantage interval difference counter>upper limit", the value stored in the advantageous interval difference counter of the previous game may be used. For example, if the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter is 65534 and the number of INs and the number of OUTs in the game is a) IN number = 3 and OUT number = 0, then the value is stored in the advantageous section difference number counter. 65534 (the same value as the value of the advantageous section difference number counter in the previous game). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an abnormal value (a value with a lower value) from being stored in the "advantageous section difference number counter". In addition, since processing corresponding to "advantageous section difference number counter upper limit value setting" is eliminated, the program capacity can be reduced.

In other words, when a carry occurs due to "advantageous section difference counter addition", the value of the advantageous section difference counter is not updated using the value at the time of the carry. As such, it prevents abnormal values from entering. In other words, even if the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section becomes a negative value, the advantage section can be ended using the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section as accurately as possible.

In the "advantageous section difference number counter subtraction", the complement of the value (value stored in the A register) of the operation result (IN number - OUT number) in "IN number < OUT number?" Remember. Then, the calculated complement (the value stored in the A register) is subtracted from the HL register.

Note that the complement in the "advantageous section difference number counter subtraction" refers to the smallest number among the numbers carried beyond 1 byte (255). For example, it can be derived with the value of the 0-A register, or with one instruction (NEG instruction) for deriving the complement.

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter (the value of the HL register) is 2,
d) When the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 10, the A register is 249. First, 7, which is the complement of 249, is derived by the "advantageous section difference number counter subtraction". Then, by calculating 2-7, 65531 is stored in the HL register. Since 2-7 is less than 0 (because there is a carry-down), the carry flag is 1.

Also, for example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter (the value of the HL register) is 10,
d) When the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 10, the A register is 249. First, 7, which is the complement of 249, is derived by the "advantageous section difference number counter addition". Then, by calculating 10-7, 3 is stored in the HL register. Since 10-7 does not fall below 0 (because there is no carry-down), the carry flag is 0.

In the "advantageous section difference counter storage", the value stored in the HL register is stored in the advantageous section difference counter. In other words, this is the process of updating the advantageous section difference number counter.

For example, if 2400 is stored in the HL register by "advantageous section difference counter initial value set", 2400 is stored in the advantageous section difference counter by "advantageous section difference counter save".

For example, if the result is YES in the "replay operation", the value of the advantageous section difference counter of the previous game is stored in the HL register. The same value as the advantageous section difference number counter is stored in the advantageous section difference number counter.

For example, if "advantageous section difference counter>upper limit?" is NO, the game media difference (IN number - OUT number) of the current game is added to the value of the advantageous section difference counter of the previous game. Since the value obtained is stored in the HL register, the value obtained by adding the difference number of the game medium of the current game to the value of the advantageous section difference counter value of the previous game is stored in the advantageous section by "advantage section difference counter storage" Store in the difference counter.

For example, if “advantageous section difference counter>upper limit?” is YES, the upper limit (65535) is stored in the HL register. (65535) is stored in the advantageous section difference number counter.

For example, after the “advantageous section difference counter subtraction”, the value obtained by subtracting the game medium difference number (OUT number−IN number) of the current game from the value of the advantageous section difference counter of the previous game is stored in the HL register. Therefore, the value obtained by subtracting the difference number of the game medium of the current game from the value of the advantageous section difference number counter of the previous game is stored in the advantageous section difference number counter by "advantage section difference number counter storage".

In “advantageous interval difference >2400?”, it is determined whether or not the difference in game media in the advantageous interval exceeds 2400 or not. Specifically, it is determined whether the carry flag is 1 or not. If the carry flag is 1, the determination is YES, and if the carry flag is not 1 (when the carry flag is 0), the determination is NO. Note that the case where the carry flag is 1 means that there is a carry-down due to the "advantageous section difference number counter subtraction". On the other hand, if there is a carry due to the "advantageous section difference number counter addition", the carry flag is temporarily set to 1. Number > 2400?" can be determined as NO.

In other words, in the case of “advantageous interval difference > 2400?”, it is possible to determine whether or not the difference in game media in the advantageous interval exceeds 2400 depending on whether the carry flag is 1 or not. Therefore, the program capacity can be reduced compared to the case of directly comparing the difference number of game media in the advantageous section with the constant (2400).

In this way, in the case of “advantageous section difference > 2400?”, it is determined whether or not the number of game media differences in the advantageous section exceeds 2400 based on whether the carry flag is 1. Therefore, the “advantageous section difference 2400 is stored as the initial value by "number counter initial value set".

As described above, this 2400 is the value “2400” corresponding to the number of game media difference in the advantageous section ending the advantageous section. That is, when the difference number of game media in the advantageous section ending the advantageous section exceeds 2400, it is less than 0, so the carry flag is set to 1.

Also, by storing 2400 as the initial value, it is possible to store a value corresponding to -63135 as the number of differences in game media with the starting time of the advantageous section as the starting point (0). For example, when the initial value is 2400, the situation where the value of the advantageous section difference number counter is 30000 means that the difference number is -27600 from the start of the advantageous section as the starting point (0).

As described above, by storing 2400 as the initial value, which is "the value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section determined as the end condition of the advantageous section", the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous section exceeds 2400. It is possible to reduce the program capacity for determining whether or not Also, by storing 2400 as the initial value, it is possible to store up to a value equivalent to -63135 as the number of game media differences in the advantageous section. Although 2400 is stored as the initial value in this example, even if the initial value is a value other than 2400, a value other than 2400 can be adopted as the initial value as long as it has the same effect. can be done.

In the "RWM initialization", all the parameters affecting the performance related to the indication function are updated to 0, and the advantageous section clear counter management processing ends. The parameters that affect performance related to the instruction function include the number of AT games, the game state related to AT, an advantageous section clear counter, an advantageous section difference number counter, and the like. Then, by updating the advantageous section type to 0, the next game becomes a game in the normal section, which is not the advantageous section. In the game of the advantageous section, the game next to the game in which the "RWM initialization" is not executed becomes the game of the advantageous section (the advantageous section does not end).

In addition, although the number of OUT is subtracted from the number of IN in "number of IN<number of OUT?", the number of IN may be subtracted from the number of OUT. In the case where the number of IN is subtracted from the number of OUT, when it is judged as NO in "the number of IN < the number of OUT?" ”, the complement is calculated by a predetermined operation and stored in the A register (difference number of game media in the current game), then the value stored in the HL register (the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter ) to the value stored in the A register (difference number of game media in the current game). In other words, if the question "IN number < OUT number?" Just do it.

Similarly, in the case where the configuration is such that the IN number is subtracted from the OUT number when "IN number < OUT number?" ), the value stored in the HL register (the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter) is stored in the A register without calculating the complement in the "advantageous section difference counter subtraction". The value (difference number of game media in the current game) can be subtracted. In other words, if the result of "IN number < OUT number?" Just do it.

As described above, specific processing for ending the advantageous section with the difference in the number of game media has been described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56, but the present invention is not limited to these. In other words, it suffices if the advantageous section can be ended with the difference in the number of game media.

In addition, in FIGS. 55 and 56, one of the conditions for ending the advantageous section is that the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number. may not be used as the termination condition for . In that case, the advantageous section clear counter in FIGS. 55 and 56 may not be provided.

If the advantageous section clear counter is not provided, processing corresponding to "advantageous section clear counter -1" in FIGS. 55 and 56, processing corresponding to "before subtraction of advantageous section clear counter = 0?" A process corresponding to "initial value storage" may not be provided.

As described above, the configuration of a slot machine (rotary type gaming machine) has been exemplified as a gaming machine, but the configuration described above can be applied to various gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and casino machines.

P: Gaming machine P1: Cabinet P2: Front door P3: Start switch P4: Stop switch P4C: Middle stop switch P4L: Left stop switch P4R: Right stop switch P5: Bed switch P5M: MAX bed switch P5O: 1 bed switch P6: Settlement switch P7: Count switch P8E: Effect determination switch P8W: Effect selection switch P9: Game media number display section P10: Display window P11M: Image display device P11S: Image display device P12: Sub control board P13: Game medium number display board P14DL : Lower left speaker P14DR : Lower right speaker P14UR : Upper right speaker P15 : Main control board P16 : Game media number control board P17 : Spinning drum device board P18C : Middle reel P18L : Left reel P18R : Right reel

The present invention
A complete function that stops the progress of the game when a predetermined condition is met is operable ,
A game machine information notification can be sent to the rental unit,
The game machine information notification contains the game machine information type,
The game machine information type includes hall control and fraud monitoring information,
Hall control/fraud monitoring information includes gaming machine fraud information related to fraud detection.
The fraudulent gaming machine information includes information indicating that the complete function has been activated.
A gaming machine capable of outputting information indicating that a complete function has been activated for a predetermined period after the complete function has been activated .

Claims (1)

When a predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to start a predetermined state that stops the progress of the game,
When the predetermined state is started, a predetermined signal can be output to the lending unit side,
A game machine capable of outputting a predetermined signal for a predetermined period after starting a predetermined state.

Images